Specifications/ Volume II - Fashion Institute of Technology
Museum Storage Project
Fashion Institute of Technology
FIT Project # C1195
Specifications/ Volume II
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work
FIT Project C1195
DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION
Section 21 05 02 - General Provisions for Sprinkler Work
Section 21 05 03 - Approved Manufacturers for Sprinkler Work
Section 21 05 11 - Sprinkler System Equipment, Specialties, Accessories
Section 21 05 23 - Valves for Sprinkler Work
Section 21 05 28 - Pipe, Tube and Fittings for Sprinkler Work
Section 21 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Sprinkler Work
Section 21 08 00 - Testing and Adjustments for Sprinkler Work
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
Section 22 05 02 - General Provisions for Plumbing Work
Section 22 05 03 - Approved Manufacturers for Plumbing Work
Section 22 07 00 - Insulation for Plumbing Work
Section 22 08 00 - Testing and Adjustments
Section 22 10 01 - Pipe, Tube and Fittings for Plumbing Work
Section 22 10 02 - Valves for Plumbing Work
Section 22 10 03 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Work
Section 22 30 01 - Plumbing Equipment, Specialties and Accessories
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL
Section 23 05 12 - General Provisions for HVAC Work
Section 23 05 23 - Valves for HVAC
Section 23 05 48 - Vibration Isolation
Section 23 05 80 - HVAC Specialties
Section 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing
Section 23 07 00 - Insulation for HVAC Work
Section 23 09 00 – Automatic Temperature Controls
Section 23 09 01 – Building Automation System
Section 23 20 00 - Piping for HVAC
Section 23 21 23 - Pumps for HVAC
Section 23 31 13 - Sheet Metal Ductwork
Section 23 40 00 - Air Filters
Section 23 65 00 - Cooling Towers
TOC-M-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
Section 23 73 01 – Air Handling Units
Section 23 82 16 – Coils
Section 23 84 13 - Humidifiers
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 12 – General Provisions for Electrical Work
Section 26 05 19 – Wire and Cable (600 Volts)
FIT Project C1195
Section 26 05 24 – Power, Control and Alarm Wiring Systems
Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding
Section 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Installation Components
Section 26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling
Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards
Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices and Installation Components
Section 26 28 13 – 600 Volt Fuses
Section 26 28 16 – Safety and Disconnect Switches
Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
Section 28 05 13 – Conductors and Cable for Electronic Safety and Security
Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System
Section 28 31 46 – Aspirating Smoke Detection System(s)
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-M-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 01 31 46
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE №
INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 3
SLEEVES, PIPE AND CONDUIT INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS .................................. 11
COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS .. 16
CUTTING AND PATCHING (IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION) ......................................... 17
INSTALLATION OF MOTORS AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT .......................................... 22
SEMI-FINAL AND FINAL SITE VISITS FOR OBSERVATION ........................................... 28
01 31 46 - i
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
01 31 46 - ii
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.
B.
Where items of the General Conditions are repeated in this Section of the Specifications, it is intended to qualify or to call particular attention to them; it is not intended that any other parts of the General Conditions shall be assumed to be omitted if not repeated herein.
C.
This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors and Subcontractors supplying labor and/or equipment and/or materials as required under the Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning, Plumbing, Sprinkler and Electrical Sections of the Specifications.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
"The Contractor" or "Each Contractor" means specifically, the Contractor or Subcontractor working under his respective Section (Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Plumbing,
Sprinkler or Electrical) of this Specification.
B.
"Provide" means to supply, erect, install, and connect up in complete readiness for regular operation, the particular work referred to.
C.
"Furnish" means to supply and deliver to the job.
D.
"Piping" includes, in addition to pipe, all fittings, valves, hangers, and other accessories related to such piping.
E.
"Concealed" means hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, or embedded in construction.
F.
"Exposed" means "not concealed" as defined above. Work in trenches, crawl spaces, and tunnels shall be considered "exposed" unless otherwise specifically noted. Work located in mechanical rooms, accessible attics, open storage rooms, janitor’s closets, on the roof or anywhere outdoors shall be considered “exposed”.
G.
"Approved equal" means any equipment or material which, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, design, performance, physical dimensions, and arrangement to the equipment or material specified, and will function adequately in accordance with the general design.
H.
"Governmental" means all municipal, state and federal governmental agencies.
I.
Where any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular number (such as "the pump"), such reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the Drawings.
J.
"HVAC" means Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
01 31 46 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
K.
"Plumbing Contractor" means the Contractor doing Plumbing and Fire Protection Work including Sprinkler Work.
1.03
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
NYC Building Code
B.
NYC Mechanical Code
C.
NYC Plumbing Code
D.
NYC Fuel Gas Code
E.
NYC Electrical Code
F.
NYC Fire Code
G.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
H.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
I.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
J.
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
K.
AWWA American Water Works Association
L.
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
M.
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
N.
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
O.
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
P.
UL Underwriters' Laboratories
Q.
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
R.
ADC Air Diffusion Council
S.
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
1.04
INTENT
A.
It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested, and ready for operation. All materials, equipment, and apparatus shall be new and of first-class quality.
B.
Any apparatus, appliance, material, or work not shown on Drawings, but mentioned in the
Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories, or minor details not shown but necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided without additional expense to the Owner.
01 31 46 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
1.05
DRAWINGS
FIT Project C1195
A.
The Drawings are generally diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment; ducts, conduits, piping, and fixtures.
B.
The locations of all items shown on the Drawings or called for in the Specifications that are not definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only. The exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results must be determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Architect before being installed. Do not scale Drawings.
C.
Follow Drawings in laying out work and check Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points.
Where headroom and space conditions appear inadequate, Architect shall be notified before proceeding with installation.
D.
If directed by the Architect, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work.
E.
Piping or ductwork connected to equipment may require different size connection than indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide transition pieces as required at the equipment.
1.06
INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Any questions or disagreements arising as to the true intent of this Specification or the
Drawings or the kind and quality of work required thereby shall be decided by the Architect, whose interpretations thereof shall be final, conclusive, and binding on all parties.
B.
In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either document itself, the better quality, greater quantity or more costly work shall be included in the Bid Price and the matter referred to the Architect's attention for decision and/or adjustment prior to the
Contractor’s submission of their Bid. If such ambiguity is identified by the Contractor during construction (after bid period), then the Architect shall be consulted merely to decide on the proper technical approach; the more costly work’s value shall be included.
C.
Maintain an awareness to avoid space conflict with other trades.
D.
Purchase the equipment and material required in accordance with field measurements taken at the proper time during the construction progress.
1.07
VISITING THE SITE
A.
Before submitting the final proposal, examine the site of the proposed work to determine the existing conditions that may affect the work, as this Section will be held responsible for any assumptions in regard.
1.08
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
The proposal and bid must cover all items on the Drawings and in the Specifications.
B.
All pipe, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America.
C.
To receive consideration, requests for substitutions must be accompanied by documentary proof of equality.
01 31 46 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
D.
Within twenty (20) working days after the acceptance of the proposal, and prior to the submission of any shop drawings for review, a complete list of manufacturers shall be submitted to the Architect of all equipment and materials proposed for the work. No reviews will be rendered on shop drawings submitted before the complete list of manufacturers is reviewed.
E.
If material or equipment is installed before the Contractor obtained "No Objections" comment from Architect, and/or in the opinion of the Architect the material or equipment does not meet the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, the removal and replacement shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner.
F.
The materials, workmanship, design, and arrangement of all work installed under the Contract shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.
G.
The words "or approved equal" are understood to follow:
1.
The name of any manufacturer, vendor, equipment or materials;
2.
Any trade name, plate number, or catalog number;
3.
Any detailed description used to define equipment or material; except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications.
4.
It is the intent of these Specifications that wherever a manufacturer of a product is specified, and the terms "other approved" or "or approved equal" are used, the substituted item must conform in all respects to the specified item. Consideration will not be given to claim that the substituted item meets the performance requirements with lesser construction (such as lesser heat exchange surface, etc.) Performance as delineated in schedules and in the Specifications shall be interpreted as minimum performance.
H.
All equipment and materials required for installation under these Specifications shall be new and without blemish or defect. All electrical equipment shall bear labels attesting to
Underwriters' Laboratories approval. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of the material or equipment is indicated, a first class standard article shall be furnished.
I.
Where it is proposed to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the
Drawings which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, or of any other part of the mechanical, electrical, or architectural layout, all such redesign, and all new drawings and detailing required therefore shall, with the review of the Architect and subsequent comments by the Architect "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted" on the shop drawings, be prepared at no additional cost to the Owner.
J.
Where such deviation from contract documents requires a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the
Drawings, furnish and install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring, and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner.
K.
All equipment of one type (such as fan, coils, etc.) shall be the product of the same manufacturer.
L.
Note that the comments "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted" marked on the shop drawings or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements herein before specified does not assure that the Engineer, Architect, or any other Owner's representative attests to the dimensional accuracy or dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved or the
01 31 46 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 mechanical performance of equipment. Comments on the shop drawings does not invalidate the
Plans and Specifications if the shop drawings are in conflict with the Plans and Specifications.
1.09
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Prior to delivery to job site, but sufficiently in advance of requirements necessary to allow
Architect ample time for review, submit copies (as stated in "General Conditions") of shop drawings of all equipment, materials, piping, sleeves, conduit, ductwork, and wiring diagrams, and further obtain written comments "No Exception" or "Exception as Noted" for same from the
Architect, before installing any of these items.
B.
All shop drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD. Manually drafted shop drawings are prohibited. If a Contractor is incapable of developing CAD drawings in-house, then they shall engage the services of an external drafting service in order to do so. The cost for such service shall be borne by the Contractor and included as part of their bid. Shop drawing submittals shall be on paper as described herein. While shop drawings are being developed and revised throughout the construction process, the Contractor shall continually update the CAD files. As construction approaches completion, these shop drawing CAD files will develop into “As-Built” drawings. As part of standard project close-out documents, in addition to providing conventional paper copies of As-Built Shop Drawings, the Contractor must also provide CD’s containing electronic AutoCAD versions of same.
C.
For piping, sheet metal, sleeve layout, and reflected ceiling plan shop drawings, submit a sepia transparency. After the transparency is notated and corrected by the Architect, it will be returned. Then the required number of corrected prints will be prepared.
D.
Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's certified scale drawings, cuts, or catalogs, including descriptive literature and complete certified characteristics of equipment, showing dimensions, capacity, code requirements, motor and drive testing, as indicated on the Drawings or Specifications.
E.
Certified performance curves for all pumping and fan equipment shall be submitted for review.
F.
Shop drawings submitted with insufficient information shall be rejected without review.
G.
Shop drawings shall be either mailed or hand delivered to the Architect. Any shop drawing information transmitted by fax shall be rejected without review.
H.
Shop drawings which are larger than 11" x 17" shall be submitted in the form of a reproducible sepia with two prints. Shop drawings which are larger than 11" x 17" and which are not provided in the form noted shall be rejected without review.
I.
Shop drawings submitted in insufficient number of copies shall be rejected without review.
J.
Samples of materials or equipment, when requested by the Architect, shall be submitted for review.
K.
Shop drawings, samples, specifications, etc. which are not labeled with all of the following information shall be rejected without review:
1.
Project name
2.
Project location
3.
Contractor's name and address, Subcontractor's name and address
01 31 46 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
4.
Applicable section and article number of specifications
5.
Contractor's approval stamp and signature
6.
Submission number
7.
Specific service for which material is to be used.
FIT Project C1195
L.
Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which review is being requested, shall be specific and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc., of item submitted shall be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted.
M.
Shop drawings indicating an unsuitable manufacturer shall be rejected without review.
N.
Ductwork shop drawings shall be drawn with double line ductwork and shall indicate the elevation above finished floor of all ducts, location and height of building structure (beams, etc.), lengths of fabrication pieces and fittings. Show new and existing work. Shop drawings submitted shall be ready for sheet metal fabrication.
O.
The comments "No Exception" or "Exceptions as Noted" rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, said review does not in any way relieve responsibility, or necessity, of furnishing material or performing work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
P.
"EXCEPTIONS, AS NOTED" means, unless otherwise noted on the drawings to approved for construction, fabrication and/or manufacture subject the provision that the work shall be carried out in compliance with all annotations and/or corrections indicated on the shop drawings and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If also marked "RESUBMIT",
"EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED" is invalid and a corrected submittal of the drawing is required.
Q.
If a shop drawing is resubmitted and does not comply with all of the comments indicated on the previous submission(s), and does not reflect specific reasons for such non-compliance, it shall be rejected without review.
R.
Label resubmitted shop drawings with a stamp indicating the submittal number, for example:
SECOND SUBMISSION; THIRD SUBMISSION, etc. and send separate transmittals for each item being submitted so that one transmittal does not cover more than one specific item or group of items from one manufacturer.
S.
Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle an extension of
Contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.
T.
Prior to submission of shop drawings, thoroughly check each shop drawing, reject those not conforming to the Specifications, and indicate (by signature) that the shop drawings submitted meet Contract requirements. Deviations and/or exceptions to the contract documents should be clearly noted as being deviations and/or exceptions. The Contractor will later be required to correct such deviation and/or exceptions at his own expense, if they have not been noted and approved on the shop drawing.
U.
All shop drawings showing routing of ductwork, piping and conduit, shall be not less than ⅜" =
1'-0" scale.
V.
Incorporate a numbering system to help keep track of shop drawing submittals as follows:
1.
H .................................................................................................... HVAC shop drawings
2.
P ................................................................................................. Plumbing shop drawings
3.
SP ................................................................................................ Sprinkler shop drawings
01 31 46 - 6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
4.
E ..................................................................................................Electrical shop drawings
W.
Concurrent numbers shall follow the prefix letter. Example: H-1, H-2, etc. In addition, shop drawings requiring resubmission should bear the number of the original submission and bear a suffix as follows: H-1A (second submission), H-1B (third submission), etc.
X.
Before request for acceptance and final payment for the work, write a letter to the Architect stating that all shop drawings are brought to a condition "No Exception" or "Exception as
Noted". Any outstanding shop drawings must be cleared with the Engineer.
Y.
The HVAC C ontractor shall prepare ductwork shop drawings at ⅜"=1'-0" scale and submit to the Architect for their approval to prepare the coordination drawings as called for in paragraph
1.14.
1.10
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
The Contractor shall furnish, coordinate, produce and distribute record drawings as stated within the General Conditions of the Contract.
B.
During construction keep an accurate record of all deviations between the work as shown on the
Drawings and that which is actually installed.
C.
Secure from the Architect, a complete set of Mylar transparencies of the Drawings and note thereon all changes. Make a complete record of all changes and revisions in the original design which exist in the complete work. The cost for the Mylar transparencies shall be paid for by each trade.
D.
Furnishing above transparencies and preparing these Record Drawings shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. When all revisions showing the work as finally installed are made, the corrected Mylar transparencies shall be submitted for review by the Architect.
E.
After review of the "Record Drawings" transparencies by the Architect, provide the Owner with one set of black-line prints and Mylar transparencies, at no additional cost to the Owner.
F.
Where record drawings are CAD type, provide CD’s containing AutoCAD files of these drawings to the Architect, the Engineer and the Owner.
1.11
LAWS, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES
A.
Give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all governmental taxes, fees, and other costs in connection with the work; file all necessary plans, prepare all documents, and obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required
Certificates of Inspection for the work and deliver to the Architect before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. File for and obtain all required equipment use permits, controlled inspections, submission of fire alarm as-built drawings, backflow prevention device
(BFP) sign-offs and all other required filings.
B.
Include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus, drawings, (in addition to Contract Drawings and Documents) in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on Drawings and/or specified.
01 31 46 - 7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association, with all requirements of local utility companies, with the recommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction, and with the requirements of all governmental departments having jurisdiction.
D.
Include in the bid, without extra cost to the Owner, retaining the service of a licensed professional engineer to obtain equipment use permits, filing of sprinkler drawings with hydraulic calculations, DEP BFP sign-off, preparation of fire alarm as-built drawings, testing of all fire and fire smoke dampers, and approvals and all other required filings.
1.12
INDEMNIFICATION
A.
Pay all royalties and defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and save the
Owner harmless from loss on account thereof.
B.
If process or article specified is an infringement of a patent, promptly notify the Architect in writing, and any necessary changes shall be as provided in the Contract for changes in the work.
If the Contractor performs any work specified knowing it to be an infringement of patent, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
C.
Take out all necessary insurance, free of extra charge, and agree to indemnify and save harmless the party contracting for services against loss or expense, by reason of the liability imposed by law upon such party for damages because of bodily injuries, including death at any time resulting therefrom, accidentally sustained by any person or persons or on account of damage to property arising out of or in consequence of the performance of this Contract, whether such injuries to persons or damage to property are due or claimed to be due to any negligence in the performance of the Contract, the party contracting for services, employees or agents, or any other person.
1.13
ORGANIZATION OF WORK
A.
The work throughout shall be executed in the best and most thorough manner under the direction of and to the satisfaction of the Engineers, Owners and Architects, who will jointly interpret the meaning of the Drawings and Specifications, and shall have the power to reject any work and materials which, in their judgment, are not in full accordance therewith.
B.
The work called for under this Contract shall be carried on simultaneously with the work of other trades in a manner such as not to delay the overall progress of the work. Furnish promptly to other trades involved at the project, all information and measurements relating to the work which they may require. Cooperate with them in order to secure the harmony necessary in the interest of the project as a whole.
C.
Furnish and install all work as fast as possible to meet all construction schedules.
D.
Keep a competent superintendent in charge of the work at all times. Such superintendent shall be replaced if unsatisfactory to the Owner.
E.
Upon award of contract, consult with the Architect and negotiate with subcontractors and manufacturers, and within thirty (30) days submit five (5) copies of a preliminary list of major equipment, for approval, complete with name of manufacturer, dates of purchase orders, and delivery dates to the site. Also submit within thirty (30) days, five (5) copies of a preliminary schedule of installation of the various systems. This list shall be revised monthly and five (5)
01 31 46 - 8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 copies shall be submitted. The second submittal shall contain the names of manufacturers of scheduled equipment (with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local representatives).
F.
Maintain a complete file of shop drawings at all times available to the Owner's representative.
G.
Every facility shall be provided to permit inspection of the work by the Owner's representative during the course of construction.
H.
Where items of equipment and/or materials are indicated in the Specifications as being furnished by other trades for installation, assume responsibility for the unloading of such equipment and/or materials from the delivery trucks, and for providing safe storage for same as required pending installation.
I.
Where the work is to be installed in close proximity to work of other trades, or where there is evidence that the work is to interfere with work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment.
J.
If so directed by the Architect, prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less than ⅜" = 1'-0" clearly showing how the work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. If the installation is made before coordinating with other trades, make all necessary changes in the work without extra charge to the Owner.
K.
Before submitting shop drawings for sleeves, piping and ductwork, the HVAC Contractor shall prepare a combined ⅜" = 1'-0" scale shop drawing for piping and ductwork indicating location of piping and ductwork with dimensions for each floor and area of work and Mechanical
Rooms. A transparent copy of these shop drawings shall be given to the Electrical Contractor.
The Electrical Contractor shall indicate the location of all lighting fixtures and conduit runs on these shop drawings. The Electrical Contractor shall give the transparent copy of these shop drawings, with lighting fixtures and conduit runs indicated to the Plumbing Contractor. The
Plumbing and Sprinkler Contractor shall indicate his piping on these shop drawings. Each
Contractor shall keep each transparent copy not more than three (3) working days.
L.
The HVAC Contractor shall arrange a Coordination Meeting for each floor and Mechanical
Equipment Room with Plumbing and Electrical Contractors under the supervision of the
General Contractor. After coordination, each Contractor shall sign the transparent copy. The
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor shall submit these drawings to the
Architect for review and he shall call any conflicts that could not be resolved in the coordination meetings, and/or deviation from original design, to the Architect's attention. After receiving written review from the Architect, each Contractor shall prepare the shop drawings as required under the paragraph "Shop Drawings" in the Specifications.
1.14
PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A.
Maintain and protect all equipment, materials and tools from loss or damage from all causes until final acceptance by the Owner.
B.
Assume responsibility for the protection of any finished work or other trades from damage or defacement by the operations and remedy any such injury or damages.
01 31 46 - 9
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
1.15
SHUTDOWNS
FIT Project C1195
A.
When installation of a new system requires the temporary shutdown of an existing operating system, the connection of the new system shall be performed at such regular time or at overtime when designated by the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner.
B.
The Owner shall be notified of the estimated duration of the shutdown period at least ten (10) days in advance of the date the work is to be performed.
C.
Work shall be arranged for continuous performance, including overtime, when approved by the
Owner, if required, to assure that existing operating services will be shut down only during the time actually required to make necessary connections.
1.16
ACCESS DOORS IN FINISHED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Install all work so that all parts required are readily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this, but changes of magnitude shall not be made without prior written review from the Architect.
B.
Wherever mechanisms requiring access for maintenance, reading of instruments, or for operation are concealed in the structure and wherever else indicated on the Drawings, supply access doors of sizes necessary to provide ready access to the concealed items. Group together valves, controls, dampers, traps, expansion joints, cleanouts, gauges, switches, and other equipment requiring access in walls and furred spaces to reduce the number of access doors.
C.
Access doors shall be as specified by the Architect. Minimum access door shall be 12" x 12".
For installation in plastered wall or ceiling, provide Style "K" or "L" as required. Provide fire rated access doors at fire rated shafts, stairwells, corridors and at all other walls with Fire
Rating.
D.
Provide 24" x 24" access door for each duct or pipe shaft. Provide at least one (1) per floor, or as indicated on the drawings.
E.
All plumbing, electric and heating and ventilating access doors etc., shall be provided with master keyed cylinder locks as specified by the Architect. These locks shall be supplied and installed by the respective Contractor. These cylinder locks shall be purchased through the
General Contractor's subcontractor for hardware after submission and review of the panel schedule as hereinafter specified.
F.
Prepare a schedule showing location of all panels, cabinets, etc. to receive the lock. This schedule shall designate, by building and room number, the panel or cabinet location and shall be submitted to the Architect. This schedule is required for use in preparation of keying information. Locks shall not be purchased prior to review of this schedule.
1.17
PIPE EXPANSION
A.
All pipe connections shall be installed to allow for freedom of movement of the pipe during the expansion and contraction without proper anchors and guides shall be provided where necessary and/or when shown on the Drawings. Anchors and guides shall be subject to the review of the
Architect. Refer to Section 23 20 00 and Provide pipe support and expansion calculations by an independent Professional Engineer, using the project’s piping shop drawings.
01 31 46 - 10
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
1.18
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING
FIT Project C1195
A.
Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of all equipment and materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications, and remove same from premises when no longer required.
B.
In the event that supplementary bracing of the basic building structure is required to assure a secure rigging procedure and a secure route for the equipment being handled, assume full responsibility for such supplementary bracing.
1.19
BASES AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide all bases and supports not part of the building structure of required size, type and strength, as approved by the Architect, for all equipment and materials furnished by him. All equipment, bases, and supports shall be adequately anchored to the building structure to prevent shifting of position under operating conditions.
B.
The Section furnishing the equipment shall provide not less than six-inch high concrete bases for all pumps, refrigeration machines, compressors, fans, humidifier units, air handlers, etc. and rotating machinery. Bases shall extend six inches beyond machinery base in all directions, with top edge chamfered. Provide ½" x 6" steel dowels into floors to anchor bases. Provide anchor bolts set in pipe sleeves, two sizes larger than anchor bolts for securing machinery. After anchor bolts are aligned with equipment bases, fill sleeves with concrete and allow to set.
C.
Concrete pads shall also be provided below any floor-mounted duct support, pipe support and electrical panel support (including switchboards, power panels, starters, VFDs, pull boxes, etc.).
Provide six inch high concrete pads below the mounting feet of any of the above duct, pipe or equipment support legs. Provide connection hardware (anchor bolts) as described above for rotating equipment.
D.
Concrete bases are specified under other Sections of the Specification. Each Contractor shall furnish dimensioned drawings to the General Contractor. Steel dowels, sleeves and anchor bolts shall be furnished and set by the Contractor.
E.
New concrete pads shall be doweled into the existing concrete with ½" rods at corners, drilled
6" deep and grouted. An epoxy bonding agent shall be applied between the old and new concrete. Concrete shall be 3000 psi reinforced with one middle layer 4 x 4 - w2.9 x w2.9.
1.20
SLEEVES, PIPE AND CONDUIT INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS
A.
Provide and assume responsibility for the location and maintenance in proper position of all sleeves, inserts, and anchor bolts required for the work. In the event that failure to do so requires cutting and patching of finished work, it shall be done without additional cost to the
Owner.
B.
All pipes and conduits passing through all walls or partitions shall be provided with sleeves having an internal diameter larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation enclosing the pipe or conduit. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe.
C.
Sleeves through foundation walls shall be James B. Clow & Sons № F-1430 or F-1435 cast iron wall sleeve with intermediate integral flange. Sleeves shall be set with ends flush with each face of wall. The space between sleeve and pipe shall be packed with a mechanical rubber seal,
01 31 46 - 11
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 such as "Link Seal" manufactured by Thunderline Corp., (VICO) and then with oakum to within
2" of each face of the wall. The remaining space shall be packed and made watertight with a waterproof compound.
D.
Sleeves through concrete floors or interior masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, set flush with finished wall surfaces, but extending 1" above finished floors. The open sleeve space shall be packed with non-combustible materials.
E.
Sleeves through non-masonry partitions shall be 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel, set flush with finished surfaces of partitions.
F.
Inserts shall be preset concrete inserts with steel reinforced rods through the insert and both ends hooked over the reinforced mesh. Inserts shall be of individual type of malleable iron construction with accommodation for removable nuts and threaded rods up to ¾" diameter, permitting lateral adjustment, except as otherwise noted. Individual inserts shall be Grinnell
Fig. 279 up to 5" pipe and conduit, Fig. 282, 6" and up to 8" pipe and conduit, Fig. 152 above 8" and up to 12" pipe and conduit. For figures 282 and 152, they shall come with an opening at the tip to allow reinforcing rods up to ½" diameter to be passed through the insert body. Rods shall extend a minimum of 4" on either side of the insert. Pipes larger than 12" shall be suspended from steel members only.
G.
In general, all piping and conduit shall be supported from structural steel building members only or approved malleable steel inserts imbedded in concrete pours. All loads shall be hung from steel building members.
H.
Piping conduit 3" and smaller may be supported at Intermediate Points by Phillips' ¾" expansion bolts with lead shields, provided main supports are welded to structural steel and are not more than twenty feet on centers.
I.
The Contractor shall have the option of providing 18 gauge sheet metal sleeves in lieu of
Schedule 40 steel pipe.
J.
Piping and conduit 3" and smaller shall be supported from existing slab by "Phillips" ¾ expansion bolts with lead shields. Piping 4" and larger shall be supported by means of 4" x 4" x
⅜" clip knee angle with ¾" expansion bolt in shear and supporting rod at 90
from another bolt or using two expansion bolts per hanging post - pipes 8' and larger shall be supported from steel building members.
K.
Provide sleeves for pipes passing through roofs. Sleeves passing through roofs shall be as detailed on drawings extending min. 12" above finished roof. All pipes passing through roof shall be minimum of 10" from walls or other construction to permit proper flashing. Provide counter flashing.
L.
Where sleeves pass through waterproofed floors (such as in mechanical rooms), they shall be
IPS brass pipe sleeves of the required diameter, brazed at the bottom to 18" x 18", 16-ounce copper flashing for bond with waterproofing. The tops of the sleeves shall extend 1" above finished floor.
M.
No ductwork, piping, conduit or equipment shall be supported from corrugated decking construction. For this area provide supplementary steel to support ductwork, piping, conduit or equipment. Supplemental steel members shall be welded to building structural steel.
01 31 46 - 12
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
N.
All hangers, rods and supports shall be installed prior to construction fireproofing.
O.
The required fire resistance rating of floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and walls shall be maintained where a penetration is made for electrical, mechanical, plumbing pipes, conduits, ducts and systems. Fire stopping shall be provided at openings around vents, pipes, ducts, conduits at floor levels and walls with non-combustible materials. For openings around pipes and conduits and/or sleeves, 3M product Caulk CP 25 and Putty 303 or approved equal shall be provided or as specified in the firestopping specification section.
1.21
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Provide escutcheons on pipes wherever they pass through ceilings, walls, or partitions.
B.
Escutcheons or pipes passing through outside walls shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Co., № 1, solid, cast brass, flat type secured to pipe with set screw.
C.
Escutcheons for pipes passing through floors shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Co., № 36A, split-hinged, cast brass type, designed to fit pipe on one end and cover sleeve projecting through floor on the other end.
D.
Escutcheons for pipes passing through interior walls, partitions, and ceilings shall be Ritter
Pattern and Casting Co., № 3A, split-hinged, cast brass chromium plated type.
1.22
MANUFACTURERS' IDENTIFICATION
A.
Manufacturer's nameplate, name or trademark, shall be permanently affixed to all equipment and material furnished under this Specification. Where such equipment is in a finished occupied space, the nameplate shall be in a concealed but accessible location. The nameplate of a Subcontractor or Distributor will not be acceptable.
1.23
EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
A.
Provide for each item of equipment, including panelboards, disconnects, breakers, starters, switches, and all control devices, pumps, fans, compressors, boilers, etc., a permanently attached nameplate made of black surface, white core laminated bakelite with incised letters.
Subcontractor furnishing equipment shall provide nameplate. Pneumatic, electric and mechanically actuated gauges shall have a brief, but complete description of their function.
Stating the air pressure or voltage range alone is not acceptable. Nameplates shall be a minimum of 3" long by 1½" wide and shall bear the equipment name and item number (tag number) in ½" high white letters as designated in the equipment schedule. Nameplates shall be attached to their respective equipment by screws or rivets.
1.24
TAGS AND CHARTS
A.
Furnish and attach to each valve as hereinafter specified, a 1½" diameter brass tag with ½" indented numerals filled with durable black compound. Tags shall be securely attached to stems of valves with wire and "S" hooks.
B.
Valve charts shall consist of schematic drawings of piping layouts, showing and identifying each valve and describing the function. Upon completion of the work, one (1) copy of each chart, sealed to rigid backboard with clear lacquer placed under glass and framed, shall be hung in a conspicuous location in the main equipment room, unless otherwise directed by the
01 31 46 - 13
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Architect. Two (2) additional unmounted copies in 8½" x 11" leather ring binders shall be delivered to the Architect. Also furnish three (3) copies of schematic flow chart with corresponding valve numbers noted on chart.
C.
Provide tags for the following valves:
1.
Zone control, bypass, shut-off, check and balancing valves.
2.
Building and area shut-off and balancing valves.
3.
Control, by-pass, shut-off, balancing and drain valves for major pieces of equipment such as boilers, domestic hot water heaters, heat exchangers, refrigeration machines, pumps, heating, ventilating and air conditioning units, cooling towers, etc.
4.
System drain valves, safety and relief valves. Vacuum breakers.
1.25
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identification shall be in accordance with "Scheme for Identification of Piping System ANSI
A13.1" and OSHA safety color regulation.
B.
Markers shall be snap-on type as manufactured by Seton Nameplate Corp., New Haven, Conn.
(Setmark System), Bunting Stamp Co. Inc., Pittsburgh, P.A. or approved equal. Markers shall completely encircle the pipe with a substantial overlap. No adhesive shall be used. They shall be manufactured of U.L. approved, self-extinguishing plastic. When the pipe, including insulation (if any), is larger than 4 inches diameter, markers shall be strap-on type. For piping located outdoors, all markers shall be strap-on type for all pipe diameters. Markers for medical gas piping shall be by means of metal tags, stenciling, stamping or with adhesive markers, in a manner which is not readily removable.
C.
Provide identification for piping, ductwork and conduit for electrical work.
D.
All piping and ductwork shall be labeled, whether concealed above ceilings or exposed. Labels shall be installed at intervals no greater than 15 feet (unless noted otherwise) and shall be installed after every turn or elbow. Where concealed above ceilings, a minimum of one (1) label shall occur above each room. Due to various above ceiling visual obstructions, the
Engineer reserves the right to request additional labels in order to ensure visibility, at no additional cost to the Owner.
E.
Pipe shall be lettered and valves tagged in accordance with the schedule below. Lettering shall be located near each valve and branch connection and at intervals of not over 40 feet (10 feet on fire lines*) on straight runs of pipe. Provide flow arrows for all piping at each marker.
Adjacent to the legend, stencil the size of the pipe, conduit or ductwork. Letter Colors are as follows: Yellow with black letters, green with white letters, blue with white letters and red with white letters.
*Required by NYC Code RS 16 P114.12
LABEL AND VALVE TAG SCHEDULE
Cold Water
Service
Hot Water (Plumbing)
Label
Designation
Cold Water
Hot Water-Deg. F
Color
Green
Yellow
Tag
Designation
C.W.
H.W.-Deg. F
01 31 46 - 14
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Service
LABEL AND VALVE TAG SCHEDULE
Label
Designation
Hot Water Circulating (Plumbing) Hot Water Cir.
Color
Yellow
Fire Standpipe
Sprinkler
Condenser Water Supply
Condenser Water Return
Chilled Water Supply
Fire Standpipe
Sprinkler
Condenser Water
Condenser Water Ret.
Chilled Water
Red
Red
Green
Green
Green
Chilled Water Ret.
Refrigerant Suction
Refrigerant Liquid
Refrigerant Hot Gas
Gas
Air Conditioning Drain
Safety Valve Discharge
Chilled Water Return
Refrigerant Suction
Refrigerant Liquid
Refrigerant Hot Gas
Gas
Air Conditioning Drain
Safety V. Disch.
Green
Green
Green
Green
Yellow
Green
Yellow
Relief Vent
Air Conditioned Supply Air
Return Air
Exhaust Air
Outside Air
Mixed Air
Relief V.
A.C. Supply Air
R.A.
E.A.
O.A.
M.A.
Yellow
Green
Green
Yellow
Green
Green
Reheat Hot Water Supply
Reheat Hot Water Return
Reheat HW Sup.
Reheat HW Ret.
Green
Green
----
----
----
----
----
----
CHWR
RS
RL
RHG
G
----
S.V.D.
Tag
Designation
H.W.C.
FSP
SP
C.W.S.
C.W.R.
CHWS
RH.H.W.S.
RH.H.W.R.
F.
Tanks, pumps, fans and other equipment shall be labeled to show the number, if any, and service.
G.
Except where other means of identification are specified, electric cabinets, switchboards, motor control centers, transformers, system control boards, disconnecting switches, remote control switches, individual motor starters and motor control pushbutton stations shall be stenciled to show the service and number, if any, of the equipment controlled, as appropriate. Panelboards and other electrical equipment located in finished areas, such as offices, shall have the identification placed on the inside of the cabinet doors.
01 31 46 - 15
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
H.
Cabinet housing emergency lighting panelboards shall have the word "EMERGENCY" stenciled in 2-inch high red letters on the outside of the cabinet, in addition to other lettering required above.
I.
The bolted covers of housings for disconnecting switches or links in bus ducts between network transformers and switchboards shall be lettered to identify the equipment within.
J.
Signs for Equipment Controlled through the BAS: For all fans, pumps and other motor driven equipment with start/stop control through the BAS provide a red surface, white core laminated bakelite sign with incised letters, permanently mounted on the equipment indicating, “Warning.
This Equipment Is Started and Stopped Automatically from the Building Automation System.”
1.26
COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS
A.
The space equal to the width and depth plus 6” on either side of the electrical equipment and extending to a height of 6 feet above the equipment or the structural ceiling, whichever is lower, shall be dedicated to the electrical installation and shall not contain piping ducts or other equipment foreign to the electrical installation. Electrical equipment shall include switchboards, panelboards and motor control centers.
B.
Examine the drawings, and in cooperation with the Electrical Work confirm the final location of all electrical equipment to be installed in the vicinity of piping and ductwork. Plan and arrange all overhead piping no closer than three feet, and ductwork no closer than one foot from a vertical line to electric switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers or similar equipment.
C.
Where the installation of piping or ductwork does not comply with the requirements of foregoing paragraphs, where feasible, the piping and ductwork shall be relocated. Installation of a barrier between piping and ductwork and electrical equipment below will be considered if located more than six feet above the electrical equipment. Refer to NEC Article 110. If piping ductwork and foreign equipment cannot be located outside of the space dedicated to electrical installation, a drip pan as described below can be considered to protect the electrical equipment from condensation, leaks or breaks, but shall be approved by the Engineer after the Contractor has demonstrated that piping, ductwork and/or equipment cannot be installed to avoid this space.
D.
Provide galvanized steel gutters as follows:
1.
Provide a gutter of 18 gauge galvanized steel under every pipe which is within 2'-0" (two feet) of being vertically over any motor, electrical controllers, switchboards, panelboards, or the like.
2.
Also provide drip pans below any drain piping located above the ceiling in food preparation or storage areas. In such areas, if piping also runs vertical through the floor slab above, then fully enclose the vertical portion with an extension of said drip pan and fully seal this enclosure to the underside of the floor slab above.
3.
Each gutter shall be made watertight, properly suspended; and carefully pitched to a convenient point for draining. Provide a ¾ inch drain, to nearest floor drain or slopsink.
4.
In lieu of such separate gutters, a continuous protecting sheet of similar construction, adequately supported and braced, properly rimmed, pitched and drained, may be provided over any such motor, and extending 3'-0" in all directions beyond the motor, over which such piping has to run.
01 31 46 - 16
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
1.27
TOOLS
FIT Project C1195
A.
All special tools for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be delivered to the Owner's representative and a receipt requested for same at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.28
QUIET OPERATION
A.
All equipment and material shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound or vibration which in the opinion of the Architect is objectionable. Where sound or vibration conditions arise which are considered objectionable by the Architect, eliminate same in a manner reviewed by the Architect.
1.29
CLEANING, PIPING, DUCTS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Clean all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation.
B.
If any part of a system should be stopped by foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected wherever necessary to locate and remove obstructions. Any work damaged in the course of removing obstructions shall be repaired when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner.
C.
During construction, properly cap all pipes and equipment nozzles so as to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc.
1.30
DELIVERY OF MATERIAL
A.
Deliver the material and store same in spaces indicated by the Architect and assume full responsibility for damage to structure caused by any overloading of the material.
1.31
CUTTING AND PATCHING (IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION)
A.
All cutting and patching shall be done under another Section. Furnish the sizes and locations of all chases and openings required for the installation for this work before the walls, floors and partitions are built.
B.
As a general rule, chases, shafts and wall openings as shown on the Drawings will be provided for most of the ducts and pipings, but promptly arrange with the Construction Supervisor for additional openings should any be required for the work.
C.
Provide the labor and materials for all work included under the Contract or Subcontract in ample time and sufficient quantities so that all of the work of the Contract or Subcontract may be installed in proper sequence to avoid unnecessary cutting of the floors and walls.
D.
Any cutting and patching required to complete the work shall be done at no extra cost to Owner.
Such cutting and patching shall be done under Division One, as approved by the Architect.
E.
Where existing piping or ductwork insulation are damaged by the requirements of the work, replace all damaged insulation to match existing.
F.
Refer to Paragraph: "Sleeves, Inserts and Anchor Bolts" for additional requirements.
01 31 46 - 17
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
1.32
ALTERATIONS
FIT Project C1195
A.
When new work and alterations render equipment, piping and ductwork useless, such equipment, piping and ductwork when exposed to view, shall be removed and connections thereof to lines or ducts remaining shall be properly capped or plugged and left in construction.
If construction, such as hung ceiling, furred beam, chase, etc., is opened up and removed during the course of the construction, the useless pipe and ducts therein shall be treated as though exposed to view. When required to accommodate new work, useless piping and ductwork concealed in construction shall be treated as though exposed to view.
B.
When existing piping and duct systems, at points of connection to new work or in rerouting are found defective, such defective portions shall be removed and replaced with new materials without cost to the Owner.
C.
Provide temporary supports where required.
D.
Where alterations reveal piping, ductwork, conduit circuits, wiring, and accessories that must necessarily remain in service, same shall be rerouted, replaced or altered as required to make same completely concealed in the new work at no additional cost to the Owner.
E.
Where existing piping or ductwork insulation is damaged by the requirements of the work, replace all damaged insulation to match existing.
F.
Cutting in existing building shall be done by each Contractor as reviewed by the Architect.
Rough patching shall be done by each Contractor. Finish patching, ceiling construction removal, new ceiling in existing building will be done under another Section.
1.33
PAINTING
A.
All finish painting is specified under other Sections of the Specifications.
B.
Painting Schedule
1.
No on-site painting is required on the following items unless specifically indicated otherwise: a.
Stainless steel or monel sheet metal. b.
Stainless steel or monel piping. c.
Piping or ductwork to be insulated. d.
Insulation on piping or ductwork in unfinished spaces or concealed. e.
Insulated piping covered with stainless steel, aluminum or all service jacketing, unless otherwise specified. f.
Insulated piping in walk-in and non-walk-in tunnels. g.
Mechanical equipment with a factory applied baked-on enamel finish, not specified to be insulated or provided with an enameled steel insulated jacket. h.
Insulated equipment or smoke stacks specified or noted on the Drawings to be covered with stainless steel or aluminum sheet metal jacketing. i.
Factory fabricated multi-wall metal smoke flue piping. j.
Concealed piping.
2.
Paint the following: a.
Uninsulated Black Steel Piping:
1) Exposed in Finished Rooms or Finished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel.
01 31 46 - 18
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2) Exposed in Unfinished Rooms, or Unfinished Spaces, or in Pipe Shafts: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of finish.
3) Exposed Exterior to a Building: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of exterior acrylic latex gloss enamel. b.
Uninsulated Galvanized, Cast Iron, Brass or Copper Piping:
1) Exposed in Finished Rooms or Finished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel.
2) Exposed Exterior to a Building: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of exterior acrylic latex gloss enamel.
3) Exposed in Unfinished Rooms or Unfinished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of finish. c.
Piping in floor trenches after fabrication: primer and finish. d.
Uninsulated Mechanical Equipment:
1) Furnished with a Factory Applied Prime Coat Finish: 2 coats of acrylic latex semi-gloss enamel. No primer required. e.
Vessels, Tanks, and Like Equipment Specified to be Insulated: l coat of corrosion resistant paint, prior to the application of insulation. f.
Uninsulated Exposed Iron and Steel Surfaces of Boilers, Including the Steel
Casing, Buck Stays, Boiler Fronts, Castings, Smoke Pipes, Breeching and the
Exposed Surfaces of all Other Iron or Steel Installed in Conjunction with Boiler
Work: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of heat resistant enamel. g.
Hangers, Supports and Accessories:
1) Exposed: Paint to match adjacent piping, pipe insulation or ductwork insulation.
2) All black steel or iron pipe hangers, rods, inserts, brackets and accessories for supporting piping systems and duct systems: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel. Paint black steel hanger rods, threaded on the job site, with a primer immediately after installation.
3) Metal Fabrications in Finished Spaces: Paint over shop coat with 2 coats of alkyd gloss enamel. h.
Sheet Metal Work:
1) Exposed Black Iron, Galvanized Iron, and Aluminum, including Hangers for
Insulated and Uninsulated Ductwork, in Finished Rooms, Finished Spaces or Exterior to a Building: 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel.
2) Jacketing on Exposed Insulated Ductwork in Finished Rooms and Finished
Spaces: 2 coats of latex semi-gloss enamel. No primer required. i.
Uninsulated Exposed Valves, Flanges, Unions and Irregular Surfaces in Piping
Systems Installed in Finished Rooms or Finished Spaces: 1 coat of primer and 1 coat of black heat resistant enamel.
C.
Color Coding:
1.
Apply finish paints of colors indicated opposite the various items listed below where such items are installed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Machine Rooms, Boiler Rooms,
Penthouse Mechanical Equipment Rooms:
2.
Piping Not Listed Above: Color code by classification as follows: a.
Fire Protection .................................................................................................. Red
3.
Ductwork: Grey.
4.
Equipment - Bare and Insulated (Except Factory Painted): Grey.
01 31 46 - 19
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
D.
The inside of all ductwork where visible through openings shall be painted with two prime coats of flat black paint.
E.
Nameplates on all equipment shall be cleaned and left free of paint. Where equipment is to be painted, the Contractor shall carefully mask of all equipment nameplates and data tags prior to application of paint. Such masking shall be removed after paint has dried.
1.34
LUBRICATION
A.
Assume responsibility that all rotating equipment is properly lubricated as soon as it is connected by the Electrical Subcontractor before operation of this equipment is started. Assume responsibility for any damage to any equipment that is turned on without previously having been oiled or greased when connected up.
1.35
TESTS
A.
All piping, wiring, and equipment shall be tested as specified under the various sections of the work. Labor, materials, instruments and power required for testing shall be furnished under the particular Section of the Specifications.
B.
Tests shall be performed satisfaction of the Architect. The Architect will be present at such test, when he deems necessary and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction.
C.
Pressure tests shall be applied to piping only before connection of equipment and installation of insulation. In no case shall piping, equipment, or accessories be subjected to pressure exceeding their rating.
D.
All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the review of the Architect.
E.
Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the approval of the Architect.
F.
The duration of tests shall be as determined by all authorities having jurisdiction, but in no case less than the time prescribed in each Section of the Specifications.
G.
Equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons of the year shall be tested during the appropriate season. Tests shall be performed on individual equipment, systems, and their controls. Whenever the equipment or system under test is interrelated with and depends upon the operation of other equipment, systems and controls for proper operation, functioning, and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment or system being tested.
H.
The electrical work shall include providing any assistance (such as removal of switchboard and panelboard trims and covers, pull and junction box covers, etc.) deemed necessary by the
Architect to check compliance with the Drawings and Specifications.
1.36
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Two months prior to the completion of all work and the final inspection of the installation by the Owner, five (5) copies of a complete Instruction Manual, bound in booklet form and suitably indexed, shall be submitted to the Architect for review. All written material contained in the manual shall be typewritten or printed.
01 31 46 - 20
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
The Manual shall contain the following items:
Table of Contents (Plumbing, HVAC and Electrical)
I. Introduction - Explanation of Manual and its use.
II. Description of Systems
1.
2.
3.
Complete schematic drawings of all systems.
Functional and sequential description of all systems.
Relationship of system where applicable to the supervisory data system.
III. Systems Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start-up procedures.
Shut-down procedures.
Reset and adjustment and balancing procedures.
Seasonal operation.
All posted instruction charts.
IV. Maintenance
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Cleaning and replacement - lines, components, filters, strainers, ducts, fans, etc.
Lubrication.
Charging and filling.
Purging and draining.
Systems trouble shooting charts.
Instruments checking and calibration.
Procedures for checking out functions with remote (Supervisory Data
Console) indication and control.
Recommended list of spare parts.
V. Listing of Manufacturers
VI. Manufacturer's Data (Where multiple model, type and size listings are included, clearly and conspicuously indicate those that are pertinent to this installation).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Description - Literature, drawings, illustrations, certified performance charts, technical data, etc.
Operation.
Maintenance - including complete trouble-shooting charts.
Parts List.
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local recommended repair and service companies.
Guarantee data.
Model No. and Serial No. of all equipment.
1.37
INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A.
After completion of all work and all tests and at such time as designated by the Architect, provide the necessary skilled personnel to operate the entire installation for a period of two (2) consecutive days eight (8) hours each.
B.
During the operating period, fully instruct the Owner's representative in the complete operation, adjustment and maintenance of the entire installation.
01 31 46 - 21
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Provide training on the operation and maintenance for equipment, as indicated within the equipment specification. If not indicated within the equipment specification section, provide the following training:
1.
Automatic Temperature Controls: Three (3) non-consecutive days within one (1) year of the Owner's acceptance.
2.
Packaged AHU Units: One (1) day. a.
Where more than one (1) day is required, the Contractor shall schedule the first day and the Owner shall schedule all other days. b.
All training shall be by factory authorized representatives, fully trained in the systems and the equipment operation and maintenance.
1.38
GUARANTEE
A.
The Contractor guarantees by his acceptance of the Contract that all work installed will be free from any and all defects and that all apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics specified, and that if during a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of work, one (1) entire heating and cooling system or eighteen (18) months from ship whichever is later, any such defects in workmanship, material or performance. He shall immediately replace, repair, or otherwise correct the defect or deficiency without cost to the Owner within a reasonable time. Notify the Architect in writing of the time required to do work. For heating systems the guarantee period must include one continuous heating season from November 1st to
April 1st. For cooling systems the guarantee period must include one continuous cooling season from May 1st to October 1st.
B.
Replace or repair to the satisfaction of the Owner any and all damage done to the building or its contents or to the work of other trades in consequence of work performed in fulfilling guarantee.
C.
This Article is general in nature and will not waive stipulations of other claims which specify guarantee periods in excess of one (1) year.
D.
In the event default on this Guarantee, the Owner may have such work done as required & charge the cost to the Contractor.
E.
The date of acceptance shall be the date of final payment by the Owner or notice of acceptance by the Owner, whichever is later.
1.39
OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION
A.
The Owner may require operation of parts or all of the installation for the beneficial occupancy prior to final completion and acceptance of the building.
B.
The operation shall not be construed to mean acceptance of the work by the Engineer for the
Owner. The Owner will furnish supervisory personnel to direct operation of the entire system and the Contractor shall continue to assume this responsibility until final acceptance.
1.40
INSTALLATION OF MOTORS AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A.
Motor Starters and VFD’s shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor and shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall set and fully install the motor starters and VFD’s on the concrete pad. Concrete pads shall be provided as required, by the General
Contractor.
01 31 46 - 22
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install power wiring for all electrical devices, individual motor starters and VFD’s, furnished to him at the job site by other trades.
C.
The HVAC Contractor shall provide all wiring for the Automatic Temperature Controls and condenser water treatment controls, except as otherwise specified herein. This shall include low voltage wiring and 120 VAC power wiring unless electrical drawings show 120 VAC feed for the ATC panels.
D.
The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall, except where otherwise noted, provide wiring for all
Plumbing and Sprinkler Control and Alarm Systems. The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall provide all devices in connection with same.
E.
The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall provide all low voltage wiring and 120 VAC power to all auto smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers, which shall be controlled from the Fire Alarm
Panel.
F.
For single phase motors which are not interlocked with other motors and which have temperature control or motor control devices in the power circuit, furnishing of control devices, installation and wiring shall be by the Electrical Sub-Contractor.
G.
For all HVAC 3-phase motors or HVAC equipment, temperature control wiring, motor control wiring and associated interlocks shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor, including the installation of all control devices. For all plumbing and sprinkler 3-phase motors, equipment control wiring, motor control wiring and associated interlocks shall be provided by the
Electrical Sub-Contractor, including the installation of all control devices.
H.
All wiring between fire/smoke dampers and fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Sub-
Contractor. All wiring between the fire alarm panel and air handling equipment for automatic fire alarm shutdown shall be by the Electrical Sub-Contractor.
I.
Whether or not shown on the drawings, the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install a local disconnect switch at each motor which is not in sight from the controller location.
J.
Electrically operated equipment supplied by other trades, which are to be installed and wired by the Electrical Sub-Contractor, shall be delivered with detailed instructions for their installation and wiring in sufficient time and proper sequence to meet the work schedule.
K.
Each contractor shall furnish all electrical motors, starters and other motor control devices for motor driven equipment required for the work. In his work, the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall provide the code required disconnect switches for all motors, except where otherwise noted.
The setting of all motors, required for mechanical equipment, including unmounted motors, shall be done as part of the mechanical work.
L.
If a motor is replaced (even with the same horsepower) a new starter shall be provided for that motor.
M.
Equipment which includes a group of electrical control devices mounted in a single enclosure or on a common base with equipment, shall be supplied completely wired as a unit with terminal boxes or leads ready for external wiring.
N.
All electrical items furnished and/or installed as part of the mechanical work shall conform to
NEMA Standards, to the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, and to the
01 31 46 - 23
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 requirements of any local authority having jurisdiction. Any field modifications required to insure such conformance shall be included as part of the mechanical work.
O.
The furnishing of floor mounted motor starting equipment shall include the purchase and delivery of channel sills for mounting.
P.
Whether or not shown on the drawings, the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install a local disconnect switch at each motor which is not in sight from the controller location.
Q.
The supplying of any and all "field instruction" diagrams deemed necessary by the Architect for the complete delineation of electrical wiring for mechanical equipment shall be included as part of the mechanical work.
R.
The drawings describing the electrical or the mechanical work may include explanatory wiring diagrams indicating the function intended for the motor control circuits of certain motors. The
"field instructions" wiring diagrams required as part of the mechanical work shall conform to these intended functions.
S.
Electric power required for control circuits shall be taken by the HVAC Contractor from the electric circuits in the junction boxes left by the Electrical Sub-Contractor for ATC use as indicated on the electrical drawings. Where junction boxes are not indicated on the electrical drawings, the HVAC Contractor shall run power wiring to the nearest electrical panel with spare circuits and provide required circuit breaker. The ATC Sub-Contractor shall provide and wire all required transformers for the ATC system.
T.
The HVAC Contractor shall coordinate the control systems with unit ventilator and VAV terminal box manufacturers. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all necessary control equipment which is not provided by the unit manufacturer to complete the sequence of operation as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all field wiring.
1.41
ELECTRIC MOTORS
A.
Each Contractor shall provide all electric motors required for driving all motor driven equipment required to be furnished under his Section of the Specification.
B.
All motors shall be designed for 3 phase, 60 cycle alternating current operation with volts across the motor terminals as indicated on the drawings, except that, unless otherwise specified herein, all motors ⅓ HP and smaller shall be designed for single phase, 60 cycle alternating current at
120 volts across the terminals. Before ordering motors, ascertain the actual voltages and other current characteristics that will be available and permissible for each motor. Report the same in writing to the Architect and obtain approval before ordering motors. The designation of current characteristics in these Specifications does not relieve the responsibility for ascertaining the actual conditions of electric service available for each motor or for the proper operation of all motors under the actual conditions.
C.
The speed, horsepower, type and other essential data for each motor, if not given under paragraphs describing the various motor driven apparatus, or in schedules on the drawings shall be obtained from the manufacturer of the respective apparatus and shall be submitted to the
Architect for his review. All two speed motors shall be single winding type.
01 31 46 - 24
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
D.
All motors shall be built in accordance with the latest rules of the National Electrical
Manufacturers Assn., and of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers and also as hereinafter specified.
E.
Motors ½ HP and larger shall have Class B insulation. All motors shall be rated for continuous duty and shall be designed for temperature rises not to exceed 55 C for fully enclosed type, 55 C for splashproof types and 40 C for all other motors excepting as otherwise specified herein.
Motors shall be capable of withstanding momentary overloads of fifty (50%) without injurious heating. They shall operate without excessive heating, flashing or sparking under any conditions within the specified capacity of load and speed. All motors shall operate quietly and shall be replaced if, in the Architect's opinion, they do not do so. All motors which are in the airstream of air conditioning units, shall be totally enclosed type.
F.
Motors ½ HP and larger shall have ball or roller bearings with pressure grease lubrication, except where otherwise noted.
G.
Direct connected motors shall be furnished without an adjustable base. All motors connected to driven equipment by belt shall be furnished with adjustable sliding bases, except fractional motors with slotted mounting holes.
H.
All motor leads shall be permanently identified and supplied with connectors.
I.
Motors shall have nameplates giving manufacturer's name, serial number, horsepower, speed, voltage, phase and current characteristics.
J.
The insulation resistance between stator conductors and frames of motors at the time of final inspection shall be not less than one-half megohm.
K.
All motors shall be of the proper type for the duty and shall have sufficient torque to start and run the equipment to which they are connected and starting currents and running currents shall not exceed the limits imposed by the laws or rules and regulations of the public authorities having jurisdiction or of the electrical utility company. All motors shall have sufficient horsepower capacity and rated duty to operate the apparatus to which they are connected so as to give the speeds and performances specified, but the horsepower shall be in no case less than that stated herein or shown on the drawings. A schedule giving the characteristics of the motors proposed for each type of service shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
L.
The maximum full load speed of each direct connected motor shall be suitable for the equipment it drives.
M.
Except where V-belt drive is specified, the fan wheels for ventilating fans shall be mounted on the motor shafts, which shall be designed for this duty.
N.
All motors except motors furnished as an integral part of equipment and factory installed on the equipment, shall be of same manufacture.
O.
Polyphase motors shall be squirrel cage induction high efficiency energy saver type, suitable for the starting torque and current requirements.
P.
Single phase motors shall be of the capacitor start induction run or split phase type as required for proper operation of the driven equipment.
01 31 46 - 25
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Q.
Where used with VFD equipment, motor shall be rated for inverter service without excessive noise, vibration, hum or damage.
R.
The efficiency of energy efficient motors shall be verified in accordance with NEMA standard
MG1-12.53a. Submittals and shop drawings for all equipment shall state the motor efficiency and shall meet or exceed that listed in the table below. Minimum acceptable efficiency shall be as follows:
Minimum Electric Motor Efficiencies
Open Drip-Proof (ODP) Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC)
Motor
Size
(hp)
30
40
50
60
75
7.5
10
15
20
25
1
1.5
2
3
5
100
125
150
200
1200
82.5%
86.5%
87.5%
88.5%
89.5%
90.2%
91.7%
91.7%
92.4%
93.0%
93.6%
94.1%
94.1%
94.5%
94.5%
95.0%
95.0%
95.4%
95.4%
Speed (rpm)
1800
85.5%
86.5%
86.5%
89.5%
89.5%
91.0%
91.7%
93.0%
93.0%
93.6%
94.1%
94.1%
94.5%
95.0%
95.0%
95.4%
95.4%
95.8%
95.8%
3600
77.0%
84.0%
85.5%
85.5%
86.5%
88.5%
89.5%
90.2%
91.0%
91.7%
91.7%
92.4%
93.0%
93.6%
93.6%
93.6%
94.1%
94.1%
95.0%
Motor
Size
(hp)
30
40
50
60
75
7.5
10
15
20
25
1
1.5
2
3
5
100
125
150
200
1200
82.5%
87.5%
88.5%
89.5%
89.5%
91.0%
91.0%
91.7%
91.7%
93.0%
93.0%
94.1%
94.1%
94.5%
94.5%
95.0%
95.0%
95.8%
95.8%
Speed (rpm)
1800
85.5%
86.5%
86.5%
89.5%
89.5%
91.7%
91.7%
92.4%
93.0%
93.6%
93.6%
94.1%
94.5%
95.0%
95.4%
95.4%
95.4%
95.8%
96.2%
3600
77.0%
84.0%
85.5%
86.5%
88.5%
89.5%
90.2%
91.0%
91.0%
91.7%
91.7%
92.4%
93.0%
93.6%
93.6%
94.1%
95.0%
95.0%
95.4%
1.42
INDIVIDUAL MOTOR STARTERS
A.
For singlephase motors ⅓ HP or smaller, starters shall be manual, 120 volts, single-pole or 240 volts, 2-pole with thermal overload protection and pilot light. Where interlocking or automatic control (other than for unit and cabinet heaters) is required, starters shall be combination circuit breaker and magnetic starter with pilot light.
B.
For 3-phase motors ½ HP and over, starters shall be full-voltage combination circuit breaker and magnetic across-the-line contactor, rated 208 or 480 volts, 3-pole. All magnetic starters shall have three thermal overloads.
C.
Unless otherwise specified, motors 50 HP and over, rated 200 volts and motors 100 HP and over, rated 460 volts shall be furnished with reduced voltage starters of the autotransformer closed transition type.
01 31 46 - 26
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
D.
For motors requiring electric interlocks, or automatic control features, starters shall be equipped with the necessary auxiliary relays and contacts to provide the control features desired. All starters shall be provided with "hand-off-auto" pushbuttons mounted in cover. For two-speed motors, provide "high-low-off-auto" four position selector switch. Furnish adjustable 20second time delay between high and low speeds for motors 10 HP and above.
E.
In addition to any auxiliary contacts required for interlocking purposes, each magnetic starter shall be equipped with one normally open auxiliary control circuit contact either for "sealing in" or as a spare for future use.
F.
Indicating lights shall be transformer or series resistor type. There shall be one red light for each single speed motor to indicate when motor is running. For multiple speed motors one indicating light for each speed shall be provided.
G.
The starter disconnecting means shall be circuit breakers. The external operating handle shall clearly indicate "ON" or "OFF" position of the switch and shall be interlocked with the door to require throwing the handle to the "OFF" position to open the door. The handle shall be arranged for locking both the door closed and the disconnect in the "OFF" position with up to 3 padlocks. Provide defeat device in cover to permit opening door in "ON" position.
H.
Circuit breakers in combination starter units shall be of the magnetic trip type with an adjustable trip setting for selecting instantaneous trip points of fault protection (motor circuit protector).
Field adjustment of the instantaneous trip shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor.
Select the trip setting at approximately 10 times the motor nameplate full-load current. If the circuit breaker trips on starting, incrementally increase the settings. In no case shall the trip setting exceed 13 times the motor full-load current.
I.
Overload heaters shall be furnished for all starters and shall be sized in range of 115 to 125 percent of full load current. The motor starters shall be shipped with the overload heaters inside the compartment but not installed. The Electrical Contractor shall verify the ratings of the heater coils based on the motor nameplate data before installing the overloads. The Contractor supplying the starter shall replace any improperly selected heaters.
J.
A transformer shall be supplied in each starter unit for 120 volt control voltage. Transformer capacity shall be adequate to supply the holding coil requirements plus the solenoids, e-p switches, relays and other devices required to be controlled from the starter. A fuse shall be supplied in one secondary terminal of the control transformer. The other terminal shall be grounded to the housing of the starter. Fuses shall be also provided in the transformer primary leads per the National Electrical Code.
K.
All enclosures shall be NEMA Type I sheet steel with hinged cover for general purpose indoor application, unless otherwise indicated. Enclosures shall be arranged for equipment or wall mounting. Weatherproof NEMA Type 4 enclosures shall be provided for all outdoor starters.
L.
Each starters shall be clearly identified by engraved nameplates after installation. The nameplates shall be bakelite black plates with ½" high white letters and shall be securely fastened to starter with mounting screws made of non-corrosive metals.
M.
Stainless steel flush mounted starter and enclosures shall be provided for all starters located outdoors.
01 31 46 - 27
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
N.
All starters, except those furnished as an integral part of equipment and factory installed on the equipment, shall be of the same manufacturer.
O.
Starters shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, General Electric, Square D, Eaton/Cutler-
Hammer, or Allen-Bradley.
P.
Shop drawings shall be provided with dimensions, ratings, wiring diagrams and schedule of nameplates for approval prior to fabrication.
Q.
If a motor is replaced (even with the same horsepower), a new starter shall be provided for that motor.
1.43
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A.
Motor controllers shall be defined as control devices such as pushbuttons, switches, etc. which are not mounted in starter cover, required for remote control of motors.
B.
Unless otherwise noted, motor controllers shall be housed in NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures. Outdoor controllers shall be provided with weather proof NEMA Type 4 enclosures. Provide nameplate to indicate the motor with which they are associated.
C.
Provide reduced voltage starters for all motors 10 HP and larger, and provide time delay for restart.
D.
The controllers to be installed in finished area shall be flush mounted.
E.
The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall install and provide wiring for motor controllers. The contractor providing the motor shall furnish the controllers.
F.
Unless otherwise noted, pushbuttons shall be of the normal duty, spring return momentary type.
G.
Selector switches and pushbuttons shall be equipped with nameplates indicating the function of each of their positions as noted in the list of electric motors and motor controls or shown on the drawings.
H.
Pilot light shall be transformer or series resistor type for operation at 120 V.
I.
Pilot lights shall be equipped with nameplates indicating the operating conditions they annunciate as noted in the list of electric motors and motor controls or shown on the drawings.
1.44
SEMI-FINAL AND FINAL SITE VISITS FOR OBSERVATION
A.
As the project approaches completion, the Engineer and Architect, at their discretion shall determine a period of time in which they shall perform a Semi-Final Site Visit to observe the
Mechanical and Electrical installation. At the conclusion of this Semi-Final Site Visit, a Semi-
Final Punchlist shall be issued to the appropriate Contractor for the deficiencies in the work of his trade. Complete all work and perform all corrective measures as required by the Semi-Final
Punchlist. After this corrective and completion work has been accomplished, in writing, advise the Architect and the Engineer that every item on the Semi-Final Punchlist has been completed.
After the Architect and Engineer make a Final Site Visit to observe the Mechanical and
Electrical installation and make a Punchlist, a similar letter of Compliance shall be forwarded through the appropriate channels.
01 31 46 - 28
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED)
FIT Project C1195
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of all equipment in accordance with the
Manufacturer’s Installation/Operation & Maintenance Manuals and instructions. If other requirements of this Specification contradict what is stated in the Manufacturer’s instructions, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and Engineer for clarification. Any and all of the Manufacturer’s requirements for utilities (electrical power and control wiring, piped water, drain, gas, fuel oil, steam, condensate, etc.), ducted supply or exhaust air, mounting and support shall be provided by the Contractor, regardless of how, or whether or not stated elsewhere in the Contract/Bid Documents.
END OF SECTION 01 31 46
01 31 46 - 29
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 21 05 02
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR SPRINKLER WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Requirements and
Supplementary General Requirements of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The work of this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary and required to complete all Sprinkler Work, as indicated on the drawings or described or referred to in the Specifications, including, but not limited to the following:
1.
Complete automatic wet sprinkler system including piping network, and all required accessories with connection to the existing sprinkler system.
2.
Sprinkler Contractor is responsible for complete sprinkler piping layout, hydraulic calculation and filing with Building Department. Sprinkler drawings shall be fully coordinated with all trades and shall be sealed and signed by the Contractor = s Professional
Engineer.
3.
Hangers and supports.
4.
Sleeves in slabs, walls and partitions.
5.
Rough patching, prime painting.
6.
Apply for, obtain and pay for all permits, certificates, inspections and approvals required in connection with the and sprinkler systems.
7.
Shop drawings, samples, instructional manuals, tests and adjustments.
8.
Color coding and stenciling of piping system.
9.
Tests for all systems provided under this Section of the Specifications.
1.03
RELATED WORK
A.
Power and alarm wiring - see electrical sections.
B.
Finish patching and painting.
C.
Fire extinguishers and extinguisher cabinets
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings prior to installation covering the following items:
1.
Sprinkler equipment including sprinkler heads, drain connections, alarm initiating devices.
2.
Valves, valve tags and valve charts.
3.
Pipe and fittings.
4.
Sleeves and escutcheons.
5.
Hangers and supports.
6.
Pressure gauges.
7.
Detailed sprinkler piping layout, coordinated with all other trades.
21 05 02-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
8.
Detailed coordinated sleeves and insert drawings for approval by Structural Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall indicate all piping sleeved through beams.
9.
Hydraulic calculations based on the design criteria stated in this specification and as indicated on drawings.
B.
The above listed items are to be considered major equipment and do not limit the Contractor's responsibility from submitting shop drawings for all equipment and accessories which are to be provided under this Section of the Contract.
1.05
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Before starting any Work, consult Architect's detailed drawings and structural drawings, for spaces and headroom allowed for the installation of all piping, equipment, etc. Should any piping or equipment require more space than allowed for, or encroach upon hung ceilings or available headroom as planned, the contractor shall call the Architect's attention to same and obtain his approval before installing the Work.
1.06
INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS
A.
The Specification is neither intended to describe, nor the Drawings to show, in detail the various items of equipment, or the connection thereto. Supply and install all equipment, accessories, supports, pipe connections, fittings, valves, controls, testing, etc., as herein specified or required to make the systems complete and ready for proper operation.
1.07
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding any special characteristics and limitations of the space available for the installation of all materials under Sprinkler Work.
B.
The Contractor shall ascertain that all his equipment, such as valves, as may be necessary to be reached from time to time for operation and maintenance, is made easily accessible for operation and maintenance.
C.
The location of equipment on the Sprinkler Drawings may conflict with the building construction and may disclose the fact that the location of this Work does not make its position easily and quickly accessible. The Contractor shall call the Architect's attention to this fact before installing this Work, and shall be guided by his instructions.
1.08
PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES
A.
The Contractor shall give necessary notices, file drawings and Specifications with the departments having jurisdiction, obtain permits or licenses necessary to carry out this work and pay all fees therefore.
1.09
DISCREPANCIES
A.
The Drawings and Specifications are intended to cooperate. Any materials, equipment, or systems related to this Section and exhibited on the Architectural and Fire Protection Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications are to be executed to the intent and meaning thereof, as if it were both mentioned in the Specifications and set forth on the Drawings.
21 05 02-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
In case of differences between the Drawings and Specifications, the Specifications shall govern first, and then the Drawings. Large scale details shall take precedence over smaller scale
Drawings as to shape and details of construction. Specifications shall govern as to materials.
C.
Drawings and Specifications are intended to be fully cooperative and to agree, but should any discrepancy or apparent difference occur between Drawings and Specifications or should occur in the Work of others affecting the work, the Contractor shall notify the Architect at once. If the
Contractor proceeds with the Work affected without instructions from the Architect, he shall make good any resultant damage or defect. All misunderstandings of Drawings and
Specifications shall be clarified by the Architect.
1.10
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All materials and equipment used in sprinkler systems shall be UL listed and manufactured in the
USA.
B.
Standards and Codes
1.
New York City Building Code/2008
2.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-13)
3.
New York City Fire Department Requirements
4.
Owner = s Insurance Carriers
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions
1.
In addition to the requirements of these Specifications, comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for all phases of the work.
D.
All work and material not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section, shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to approval of the Architect.
1.11
COOPERATION WITH OTHERS
A.
The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades whose work is to be correlated with his work, and with the work of each other, in order to avoid field interference, improper elevations, or inaccessibility to equipment. Any extra expense occasioned by lack of cooperation by this
Contractor shall be borne by him.
1.12
EXAMINATION AND COORDINATION
A.
The Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work indicated under this Section. Do not scale the Drawings. The Contractor shall consult the
Architectural Drawings and Details for exact locations of sprinkler heads, lighting fixtures, and
HVAC equipment; where same are not definitely located, he shall obtain this information from the Architect.
B.
The Contractor shall follow the Drawings in laying out work and check Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Architect shall be notified in writing. The installation shall not proceed before receiving the Architect's written instructions.
21 05 02-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
If directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades, maintain required headroom and space conditions, or for proper execution of the work.
D.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to closely schedule his work so that his work will be installed at the proper time and without delaying the completion of the entire Project.
E.
Study the Drawings and Specifications in order to insure completeness of the Work required under this Section. Supplementary items normal and necessary to complete the Work, though not definitely shown or specified shall be included.
F.
Verify all measurements and conditions in the field before starting work.
G.
Examine all surfaces to which Work under this Section is to be applied and notify the Architect in writing if any conditions exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of
Work. Starting of Work shall be construed as acceptance of surfaces.
1.13
CLEANING, PROTECTION AND ADJUSTING
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all sprinkler systems equipment against breakage or damage at all times until final acceptance of the job.
B.
All openings left in floor for passage of supply pipes shall be covered and protected. Due precautions shall be taken against freezing during cold weather. All pipes shall be protected with suitable coverings as soon as set. All open of pipes shall be closed by a plug fitting to prevent obstruction and damage.
C.
The Contractor shall frequently clean up and remove from the Site all rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by his Work, and upon completion of the Work and before final payment is made, he shall remove from the site all surplus material, temporary structures, tools and all debris resulting from his operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 21 05 02
21 05 02-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 21 05 03
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS FOR FIRE PROTECTION WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Requirements and
Supplementary General Requirements of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
The manufacturers' names and models hereinafter specified represent a standard of materials, appearance, finishes, performance, etc. Not all manufacturers are listed in this Section. For additional items, see specific sections describing those items.
B.
The following is a list of approved manufacturers:
1.
Sprinkler Heads a.
Reliable Inc. b.
Grinnell c.
Viking Corp.
2.
Gate and Check Valves a.
Stockham b.
Nibco. c.
Kennedy Valve Co.
3.
Butterfly/Butterball Valves a.
Victaulic b.
Milwaukee Valve Co. (sizes up to 2-1/2") c.
Grinnell
4.
Steel Pipe a.
Youngstown Sheet and Tube Co. b.
Republic Steel Co. c.
National Tube Co.
5.
Fittings a.
Victaulic b.
Gustin-Bacon c.
Stockham
6.
Hangers and Supports a.
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. b.
Grinnell c.
B-Line
END OF SECTION 21 05 03
21 05 03-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 21 05 11
SPRINKLER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT, SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Requirements and
Supplementary General Requirements of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The work of this section includes all labor, tools, appliances, equipment, materials and services required for the work indicated on the drawings and specified in this section, including but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
Sprinkler system equipment and specialties.
2.
Sprinkler hydraulic calculations.
1.03
RELATED WORK:
A.
General Provisions for Sprinkler Work Section 21 05 02
B.
Wiring Between Alarm Initiating Devices and Alarm Panel Division 26
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All work under this Section of the Specifications shall conform to the NYS Fire Prevention and
Building Code, local Fire Department rules and regulations and NFPA 13.
B.
The persons installing the specified work and their supervisors shall be personally experienced in the work; and shall have been regularly employed by a firm engaged in the installation of the similar work for a minimum of five (5) years.
C.
All materials and equipment shall be UL listed and, where indicated, FM approved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SPRINKLER HEADS
A.
Sprinkler heads shall be cast brass closed type with 2 " discharge orifice.
B.
Sprinkler heads shall have ordinary degree temperature rating, except that where indicated on the drawings temperature rating shall be 212
F.
C.
Sprinkler heads shall be as manufactured by Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., or approved equal from one of the acceptable manufacturers listed, and shall be of the following types: See Schedule on Drawings.
21 05 11-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
D.
All sprinkler heads shall be UL listed.
E.
Provide sprinkler guards where necessary.
2.02
SPRINKLER CABINET
FIT Project C1195
A.
Provide an enameled steel sprinkler cabinet with number and quantity of sprinkler heads as required by NFPA-13, (of all types and rating installed) with two sprinkler wrenches and installed where directed by the Owner.
2.03
TAMPER SWITCHES
A.
Tamper switches shall be installed on all valves controlling water supply to the sprinkler system and shall be 120 volts closed circuit supervisory switches having one set of S.P.D.T. contacts.
B.
Switches shall be mounted so not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and shall be adjusted to operate when the stem of the valve has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position.
C.
The switch mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die cast aluminum housing which shall provide a 3/4" tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valve. Switch housing shall be finished in red baked enamel.
D.
The entire installed assembly shall be tamperproof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting.
E.
Tamper switches for OS&Y valves shall be installed in accordance with requirements of switch manufacturer, local authorities, and underwriters, and shall be similar to Potter Electric Model
OSYSU-1 or approved equal product from one the acceptable manufacturers.
F.
Butterfly valves shall have approved built-in tamper switches.
2.04
WATER FLOW DETECTORS
A.
Water flow detectors shall be installed at each floor control valve assembly and on the sprinkler system piping where indicated on the drawings.
B.
Detectors shall be designed for mounting on either vertical or horizontal piping, but shall not be mounted in a fitting or within 12" of any fitting that changes the direction of water flow.
C.
Flow switch shall have a sensitivity setting to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds the discharge from one sprinkler head and shall be closed circuit water flow indicators with retarding device to prevent false alarms from line surges. Switch shall match type and size of pipe and shall have rigid conduit type electrical connections; no plug-in connections shall be permitted.
D.
Provide required contacts and relays to actuate central fire alarm panel.
E.
Switches shall be similar to Potter Electric Model VSR-F or equal product from one of the acceptable manufacturers with two sets of form A C @ S.P.D.T. contacts. Install switches in strict accordance with manufacturer = s instructions.
21 05 11-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.05
PRESSURE GAUGES
FIT Project C1195
A.
Pressure gauges shall be of a type approved by all authorities having jurisdiction and shall have
3-1/2" dials, cast brass cases and shall be graduated to twice the working pressure.
B.
Each gauge shall have a shut-off cock or valve together with a plugged outlet for the connection of an inspector's test gauge.
C.
Gauges shall be double spring gauges.
D.
Pressure gauges shall be installed at all floor control assemblies.
2.06
DRAIN CONNECTIONS
A.
Arrange the installation of piping so that all or any part of the work may be completely drained.
Piping shall be pitched so as to drain to the main drain or to auxiliary drains.
B.
The main drain shall be arranged so a test through drain pipe can be made without flooding the receptacle.
C.
Provide drain valves or plugs with threaded connection at low points of sprinkler systems for drainage as required by code.
2.07
SIGNS, TAGS AND CHARTS
A.
Signs: Provide identification signs of standard design, fastened securely at the base of each riser and door of rooms having sprinkler control valve assemblies and as required by NFPA 13.
B.
Tags: Provide brass tags 2" in diameter, stamped with designating numbers and secured with 12 gauge copper wire to spindle of all control valves.
C.
Chart: Provide required number of copies of approved sprinkler system diagram and valve chart, giving designation number, function, location of each valve, mount in painted, glazed frames and hang where directed by the C.M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SPRINKLER DESIGN CRITERIA:
A.
The entire structure shall be provided with automatic sprinklers.
B.
The hazard of occupancies for this project is classified Light and Ordinary Group 1 as follows:
1.
Ordinary Hazard Group I: Storage rooms, Mechanical Equipment rooms and similar spaces.
2.
Light Hazard: Corridors, lobbies, public spaces, offices and similar spaces.
C.
The sprinkler systems shall be hydraulically designed in accordance with the following minimum criteria:
1.
Light Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm per square foot over most hydraulically remote 1,500 square feet. Maximum coverage per sprinkler head is 225 square feet.
21 05 11-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.
Ordinary Hazard Group 1: 0.16 gpm per square foot over most hydraulically remote 1,500 square feet. Maximum coverage per sprinkler head is 130 square feet.
3.
Maximum velocity permitted in the piping shall be 20 FPS.
4.
Sprinkler discharge from single sprinklers in closets and toilet rooms may be omitted in hydraulic calculations.
D.
Sprinkler Layout and Calculations shall meet the following requirements:
1.
Discharge from each sprinkler head shall not be less than required for area covered by this head.
2.
Area coverage per head shall be det4ermined in accordance with NFPA Standard m 13.
3.
Minimum pressure at sprinkler head shall be 7 psi or greater, as required for minimum discharge.
3.02
INSTALLATION:
A.
Sprinkler heads, in general, shall have ordinary degree temperature rating, but any and all heads subject to abnormal heating conditions, as those in the vicinity of heating units, boilers, or close to hot piping, shall be of sufficiently high temperature rating to prevent their accidental discharge when no fire is present. The head rating at these locations shall be in accordance with NFPA-13.
B.
The sprinkler heads are to be installed on a true axis line of ceiling tiles in both directions with a tolerance of
2 ", except where noted or shown otherwise. At the completion of the installation, if any heads are found to exceed the above, any adjoining work that may be disturbed in reinstating said heads shall be repaired or reinstated at no additional cost to the Owner.
C.
The Contractor shall make notifications in respect to location of sprinkler heads, as may be required by field conditions or as may be found necessary by the Engineer at the time of installation. Valves, fittings, hangers, means of draining system, alarm and connections thereto and all necessary appurtenances shall be installed as required. Any changes that may be necessary because of physical conditions or compliance with the standards and requirements of any agency having jurisdiction shall be made by this Contractor without additional cost to the
Owner.
D.
The floor control valves shall be installed inside of the building at locations as directed.
Approved devices shall be installed for the automatic annunciation of the flow or water.
E.
The system shall be so installed that no part thereof will interfere with doors, windows, heating, plumbing or electrical equipment, and sprinkler heads shall not be located closer than one foot from lighting fixtures or other obstructions. In connecting therewith, this Contractor shall coordinate his Work with the other trades as to avoid any interference with the potential effectiveness of the automatic sprinkler system and shall prepare and incorporate in composite working drawings the location of sprinkler heads in relation to other ceiling equipment, piping, ductwork, electrical and other appurtenances which may impact the sprinkler operation.
F.
Provide inspector's test connection at the remote end of the system where shown on the drawings.
G.
Drains shall be installed at low points of piping to provide for complete draining of the system, as outlined in NFPA-13.
H.
Direct connection from any drain to any component of the sanitary drainage system is prohibited.
21 05 11-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
I.
Installation of sprinkler heads in fittings before piping is erected is prohibited.
J.
Contractor shall provide flushing connections for flushing scale and foreign material from sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA-13.
K.
The complete sprinkler installation shall be made by a licensed sprinkler Contractor specializing in sprinkler work and having not less than ten (10) years experience in installing systems of comparable size.
END OF SECTION 21 05 11
21 05 11-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 21 05 23
VALVES FOR SPRINKLER WORK
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Requirements and
Supplementary General Requirements of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The work of this section includes all labor, tools, appliances, equipment, materials and services required for the work indicated on the drawings and specified in this section, including but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
Valves for sprinkler work
1.03
RELATED WORK:
1.
General Provisions for Sprinkler Work Section 21 05 02
2.
Pipe and Fitting for Sprinkler Work Section 21 05 28
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Valves used on the sprinkler systems shall be UL listed.
B.
Valves shall have the trademark of the manufacturer and the guaranteed working pressure cast or stamped on the body of the valve.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CONTROL VALVES:
A.
Except as noted, all valves controlling water flow in sprinkler piping shall be of the outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) type:
1.
2" and smaller: threaded bronze, 175 psi wwp, Stockham B-133.
2.
2 2 " and larger: flanged, IBBM, 175 psi wwp, except as noted, Stockham G-634.
B.
Valves installed on Sprinkler systems as zone control valve may be indicating type butterfly valves, 175 psi wwp, as manufactured by Victaulic or from one of the acceptable manufacturers.
1.
For sizes 2", 2 2 ", 3" - Series 727
2.
For sizes 4" and larger - Series 708
C.
All valves controlling flow in sprinkler systems shall be equipped with supervisory tamper switches.
2.02
CHECK VALVES
A.
2” and smaller: swing type, threaded bronze, 175 psi wwp, Stockham B-319.
21 05 23-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
2½” and larger: swing type, flanged, IBBM, 175 psi wwp, Stockham G-940.
2.03
DRAIN VALVES:
A.
Valves for drain and test lines: bronze, globe or angle type, threaded, with appropriate pressure rating, Walworth No. 58 or 59.
2.04
SPRINKLER COMBINATION TEST/DRAIN VALVES
A.
Combination fitting including ½” flow orifice, sight glass, test valve, drain valve and 1¼” test/drain connection (2” for sprinkler connections 4” and larger), AFG Model Test-N-Drain, or approved equal.
1.
Provide downstream of each water flow switch and where indicated.
2.05
VALVE TAGS:
A.
Identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve shall be provided. The identification sign should be minimum 25 gauge corrosion resistant metal. If made of corrodible metal such as steel, the sign should be of the same minimum gauge and completely enameled. Valve control information should be steel-stamped or otherwise permanently marked (e.g., enameled lettering in contrasting color, in characters at least 0.2" high.
Embossed plastic tape, pencil, ink, crayon, etc. are not considered permanent markings.) This sign should be secured with durable wire chain.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Provide ladder or chain operators for all valves located 7'-0" and higher above floor.
B.
Installation of Check Valves
1.
Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin located on the upside of the pipe and perpendicular to the pipe's centerline, or in vertical position with the flow directed upward.
END OF SECTION 21 05 23
21 05 23-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 21 05 28
PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR SPRINKLER WORK
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Requirements and
Supplementary General Requirements of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work of this section includes all labor, tools, appliances, equipment, materials and services required for the work indicated on the drawings and specified in this Section, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
Pipe and fittings.
1.03
RELATED WORK
A.
General Provisions for Sprinkler Work Section 21 05 02
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Pipe and fittings shall conform to the latest USASI, ASTM, ANSI and/or F.S. Standards.
B.
Pipes, fittings, and other products used in the sprinkler protection systems shall have cast, stamped, or indelibly marked on it the maker's name or mark, weight, and quality of the product when such marking is required by the approved standard.
C.
All materials used on sprinkler protection systems shall be UL-listed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE
A.
Sprinkler system pipe shall be suitable for 175 psi working pressure in accordance with ANSI
B36.10-1979 and any subsequent revisions thereof, and shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe.
B.
Fittings for sprinkler piping shall be UL listed and be of a type specifically approved for use in sprinkler systems suitable for 175 psi working pressure and made of carbon steel, cast iron or malleable iron, screwed fittings.
C.
Pipe for testing and drainage shall be galvanized.
2.02
FITTINGS
A.
Fittings shall be of a type specifically approved for use in sprinkler protection systems, suitable for 175 psi working pressure and made of cast iron or malleable iron, screwed or flanged.
21 05 28-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Flexible stainless steel hose assemblies that connect sprinkler heads to the branch lines shall be similar to Flexhead Industries with minimum 175 psi pressure rating.
C.
Grooved end malleable iron fittings and couplings with appropriate pressure rating may be used for pipe 2 2 " and larger. The following fittings similar to Victaulic are acceptable:
Victaulic
Item
Zero-Flex
Coupling
Flexible
Fig. #
07
75
To be used on:
All vertical risers
All horizontal piping
Coupling
Rigid Coupling 005
741 Vic-Flange
Adapter
10,11,12,13 Elbows
Reducers 50,52
20 Tees
Reducing tees 25,29
35 Cross
Mechanical tee 920 only
Horizontal piping for rigid joints
For connection of flanged components into a grooved system.
Throughout
"
"
"
"
"
" Tee outlet 72
D.
Reducers shall be of tapered type. Bushings, including fittings similar to Victaulic Fig. 750 shall not be used.
E.
Fittings and couplings for plain end pipe similar to Victaulic FIT type fittings and Roust-A-Bout and Plainlock coupling shall not be used.
F.
Fittings for galvanized pipe shall be galvanized.
2.03
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Provide escutcheons on all exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling or partitions.
B.
Provide set screw escutcheons to properly fasten same in place.
21 05 28-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Escutcheons shall be of sufficient diameter to cover the sleeve. They shall be chrome plated at floors and factory applied matte white enamel at the ceiling.
2.04
NIPPLES
A.
No close nipples will be permitted. Short or shoulder nipples with the unthreaded section of the pipe no less than 2" long shall be of extra heavy pipe.
2.05
EXPANSION JOINT
A.
Provide sufficient number of elbow swings to allow for proper expansion and contraction of piping.
B.
Any breaks or damage to the piping system or to the work of other Sections within the period of the guarantee due to improper provisions for expansions and contraction must be replaced at this
Contractor's expense.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The entire piping installation shall be in compliance with NYS Building code and NFPA-13.
B.
The Contractor shall examine carefully the architectural drawings and familiarize himself with all conditions relative to the installation of piping, particularly where same is concealed behind furring or in hung ceilings.
C.
In no case shall the Contractor permit his pipes to be exposed beyond finished wall and ceiling lines unless specifically shown on Drawings. He shall consult with the General Contractor and install his piping in such a way as to least interfere with the installation of other trades.
D.
Piping shall be installed, whether indicated or not, so as to rise and/or drop to clear any and all conduits, lighting fixtures, ductwork and heating mains, to maintain the desired clear heights.
Provide additional offsets, fittings and drains where required by construction and work of other trades.
E.
Run piping straight and as direct as possible. In general, form right angles with or parallel to walls or other piping. Risers shall be erected plumb and true.
F.
After cutting, all pipes shall be reamed out to full bore and before erection the inside of all pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned.
G.
No piping or work shall be concealed until all required tests have been satisfactorily completed and work has been approved by the Architect and all other authorities having jurisdiction.
H.
All piping installed in finished areas shall be completely concealed within hung ceilings, furrings, soffits, pipe spaces, etc.
21 05 28-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
I.
Where complete concealment is impossible because of obstructions such as beams, ducts, lights, piping, etc., the Contractor shall not install any work before first consulting with the Architect, whose instructions shall be followed.
J.
Provide main and auxiliary drain connections throughout as required by NFPA-13 for complete drainage of piping.
END OF SECTION 21 05 28
21 05 28-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 21 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR SPRINKLER WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Requirements and
Supplementary General Requirements of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The work of this section includes all labor, tools, appliances, equipment, materials and services required for the work indicated on the drawings and specified in this section, including but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
Hangers and supports
1.03
RELATED WORK
A.
General Provisions for Sprinkler Work Section 21 05 02
B.
Pipe and Fittings for Sprinkler Work Section 21 05 28
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials of hangers and supports shall be UL listed and shall comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58,
MSS SP-69, MSS SP-89.
B.
Assume the responsibility for the proper transfer of the loads of the piping system to the structure.
No additional cost to the Owner will be accepted for any corrective work during construction.
C.
Supports and hangers shall be provided for all horizontal and vertical piping. The hanger design shall conform to NFPA-13.
D.
Bracket clamps and rod sizes indicated in these Specifications are minimum size only. The
Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity of all supports. Structural hanging material shall be able to support five times the weight of water filled pipe plus 250 lb. at each point of piping support and shall be in accordance with current edition of NFPA-13.
E.
Pipe supports shall be of type and arrangement as hereinafter specified. They shall be so arranged as to prevent excessive deflection and avoid excessive bending stresses between supports.
F.
Sprinkler protection piping shall be independently supported.
21 05 29-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
FIT Project C1195
2.01
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Pipe supports shall be of the following type and figure number as manufactured by Grinnell, or approved equal product of any other acceptable manufacturer.
B.
Pipe Hanger Schedule:
Item
Beam Clamp w/locknuts
Beam Clamp w/Retaining Clip
Adjustable Galvanized Clevis Hanger
Adjustable Galvanized Swivel Ring
Riser Clamp
Brackets
Concrete Insert
Grinnell
Fig. #
94 or 133
95 & 96
260
69
261
195, 199
281
Piping Sizes
All
All
All
2" and smaller
All
All
All
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A.
Entire installation shall be in accordance with requirements of NYC Code and NFPA13, including seismic requirements.
B.
Provide necessary structural members, hangers and supports of approved design to keep piping in proper alignment and prevent transmission of injurious thrusts and vibrations. In all cases where hangers are supported from concrete construction, care shall be taken not to weaken concrete or penetrate waterproofing. All hangers and supports shall be capable of screw adjustment after piping is erected. Hangers supporting piping expanding into loops, bends and offsets shall be secured to the building structure in such a manner that horizontal adjustment perpendicular to the run of piping supported may be made to accommodate displacement due to expansion. All such hangers shall be finally adjusted, both in the vertical and horizontal direction.
C.
Except where otherwise noted, piping shall be supported from structural steel only. Provide supplementary steel where required.
D.
Piping shall not be hung from other piping, ducts, conduits or from equipment of other Prime
Contractors.
E.
Where additional steel is required for the support of hangers, it shall be provided, subject to the approval of the Architect. Piping shall not be supported from the metal deck slab construction.
21 05 29-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
F.
Piping running on walls shall be supported by means of hangers suspended from heavy angle iron wall brackets. No wall hooks will be permitted.
G.
Lateral bracing of horizontal pipe shall be provided where required to prevent side sway or vibration and to satisfy seismic requirements.
H.
Horizontal steel pipe shall be supported at least every 12' with no branches 2' or longer without support. Provide at least one hanger between each two branch lines on the cross mains.
Branches with sprinklers spaced 6' and more apart: provide at least one hanger per pipe length.
No pipe shall be unsupported wherever a turn of main flow occurs.
I.
For pipe using groove joint mechanical couplings: provide minimum two supports for pipe lengths over seven (7) feet with diameters 2" and less or for pipe lengths over ten (10) feet with diameters 3" and more. Provide at least one support per pipe length in all other cases.
J.
Maximum weights on hanger rods shall be such that stress in tension shall not exceed 9,000 psi, using root area of threaded portion. In no case shall hanger rod sizes be less than 3/8" for pipe up to 4", 1/2" for pipe 5", 6" and 8". The use of rods over three (3) feet long (depending on their diameters) to support or cross mains should be avoided, as excessive pipe oscillation can result under system operating conditions. Where rods exceed these lengths, the feed or cross mains should be adequately restrained.
K.
Supports for vertical piping shall be double bolt riser clamps, with each end having equal bearing on the building structure located at every floor level but there shall be no more than 25 feet between supports.
L.
Hangers, rods, inserts, clamps, stanchions, brackets, etc., shall be dipped in zinc chromate primer before installation and provided with one (1) coat of approved type paint after installation.
Swivel ring and clevis hangers shall be galvanized.
M.
Chains, straps, perforated iron or wire hangers are not permitted.
N.
The Architect must approve method of supporting pipes from building structure before work is started. The Contractor shall bear all responsibility for materials and workmanship as described in this Section, and shall make sure that all hangers and supports are properly and permanently connected to building structure.
END OF SECTION 21 05 29
21 05 29-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 21 08 00
TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR SPRINKLER WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Requirements and
Supplementary General Requirements of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
WORK INCLUDED:
A.
The work of this section includes all labor, tools, appliances, equipment, materials and services required for the work indicated on the drawings and specified in this section, including but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
Testing of sprinkler systems
1.03
RELATED WORK:
A.
General Provisions for Sprinkler Work Section 21 05 02
1.04
REQUIREMENTS
A.
All tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect and representatives of the local authorities having jurisdiction over the work to be tested, as may be directed. At least 72 hours notice shall be given in advance of all tests to all parties required to be present.
B.
Contractor shall include the supplying of all testing instruments, gauges, pumps, and other equipment required or necessary for tests.
C.
Provide all tests required by code and all authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
All appurtenances shall be operated after installation to determine whether or not they meet the requirements of the Specifications.
E.
All defects disclosed in the work by tests and otherwise shall be made good or the Work replaced without additional cost to the Owner.
F.
Tests shall be repeated after any defects disclosed thereby have been made good or the work replaced if it is deemed necessary.
G.
All tests shall be made at the expense of the Contractor.
H.
Tests are not permitted to be made with air.
I.
Contractor shall provide and plug required test fittings during erection of pipe system.
21 08 00-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
J.
If the pipe installation fails to meet testing requirements, the Contractor shall at his own expense locate the leakage(s) and shall repair or replace all defective materials or workmanship. The system shall be retested after completion of the repair/replacement work.
K.
Piping which is to hidden in partitions, furrings or above hung ceilings shall be tested and made tight when directed by the Architect and in adequate time to permit the installation of partitions and ceilings. When necessary, the Contractor shall drain the piping and/or take over such precautions as required to prevent damage by freezing.
L.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for the Work of other Contractors that may be damaged or disturbed by the tests, or the repair or replacement of his Work, and he shall, without extra charges, restore to its original condition any Work so damaged or disturbed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PRESSURE TEST
A.
Before any paint is applied, all sprinkler systems shall be tested hydrostatically at not less than
200 psi for two hours. In accordance with all requirements of NFPA 13, the piping shall show no leakage.
END OF SECTION 21 08 00
21 08 00-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 22 05 02
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and Special
Conditions of the Work wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK INCLUDED
A.
Work Included
1.
The work of this Contract consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely do all Plumbing as indicated on the
Drawings or described or referred to in the Specifications, including, but not limited to the following: a.
New gravity sanitary, soil, and vent piping systems, including all required connections to all plumbing fixtures and equipment. b.
New interior domestic cold water system including connection to all fixtures and equipment requiring cold water with connection to the existing piping. c.
Shock absorbers, vacuum breakers, backflow preventers and all other plumbing specialties as indicated on the drawings or described in the specifications. d.
Sleeves, hangers and supports. e.
Furnishing of access doors for installation by general contractor f.
Insulation for piping and equipment. g.
Apply for, obtain and pay for all permits, certificates, inspections and approvals required in connection with all Plumbing Work. h.
Shop drawings, samples and instructional manuals, tests and adjustments. i.
Provide roughing (water supplies, soil, waste, and vent piping) for all fixtures and equipment by this Division and/or installed under other Divisions or Sections of these Specifications. j.
Color coding and stenciling of all piping systems. k.
Cutting and rough patching. l.
Prime painting. m.
Tests for all systems provided under this Section of the Specifications. n.
All work described in these Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or vice versa, shall be installed in a manner similar to the work shown or described.
1.03
WORK INCLUDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Finish patching and finish painting.
B.
Installation of access doors.
C.
Electrical power, and alarm wiring, for pumps, and plumbing equipment, shall be provided under
Division 26.
22 05 02-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
D.
Drainage piping from HVAC equipment to and spilling over floor drain, mop sink, sump or roof, except as noted.
E.
Toilet room accessories.
F.
Temporary water supply & toilet facilities.
1.04
LIST OF SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit shop drawings prior to installation covering the following items:
1.
Valve, valve tags, and valve charts.
2.
Backflow preventers.
3.
Vacuum breakers and shock absorbers.
4.
Insulation for piping and equipment.
5.
Drains, including floor, funnel, drains.
6.
Sleeves, escutcheons.
7.
Hangers & support & inserts.
8.
Pressure gauges.
9.
Pipes and fittings, with description of intended uses.
10.
Detailed piping layout for all plumbing systems, including all services as specified, coordinated with all other trades.
11.
Detailed coordinated sleeves and insert drawings for approval by Structural Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall indicate all piping sleeved through beams.
B.
The above listed items are to be considered major equipment and do not limit the Contractor's responsibility from submitting shop drawings for all equipment and accessories which are to be provided under this Section of the Contract.
1.05
VISITING THE PREMISES
A.
Before submitting his bid on the work the Contractor, shall visit the site and familiarize himself with all visible existing conditions. As a result of having visited the premises, the Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the work as it relates to such visible existing conditions.
B.
The submission of a bid will be considered an acknowledgment on the part of the bidder of his visitation to the site.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Instructions: In addition to the requirements of these Specifications, comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for all phases of the work.
B.
Standards and Codes
1.
Building Code of NYS/2008
2.
Plumbing Code, Mechanical Code and Fuel Gas Code of NYS/2008
3.
NYS Energy Conservation Code
4.
NYS Health Codes
5.
ASTM American Society for Testing Material
6.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
7.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
8.
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
22 05 02-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
9.
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
C.
All work and material not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section, shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to approval of the Architect.
D.
All water supply connections to plumbing fixtures and other equipment to be installed under this
Division shall be in accordance with the rules relative to submerged inlets and protective methods to be applied to prevent contamination of water as required by Local and State Regulations.
1.07
COOPERATION WITH OTHERS
A.
The Plumbing Contractor shall cooperate with other trades whose work is to be correlated with his work in order to avoid field interference, improper elevations, or inaccessibility to equipment.
Any extra expense occasioned by lack of cooperation by this Contractor shall be borne by him.
END OF SECTION 22 05 02
22 05 02-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 22 05 03
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS FOR PLUMBING WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and Special
Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Plumbing Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 22 05 02 - General Provisions for Plumbing Work shall apply.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
The manufacturers' names hereinafter specified represent a standard of materials, appearance, finishes, and performance.
B.
The Plumbing Contractor has the option of submitting other manufacturers for approval in lieu of the manufacturers hereafter specified, provided their respective products conform in all respects to the manufacturers hereafter specified. This conformity must be shown by the Contractor on the submittals item by item.
C.
The following is a list of approved manufacturers:
1.
Hangers and Supports a.
Grinnell b.
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. c.
B-Line Systems
2.
Insulation a.
Owens-Corning Fiberglass Co. b.
Manville Corp. c.
Zeston d.
Certainteed
3.
Drains, Carriers and Plumbing Systems Specialties a.
J.R. Smith b.
Josam c.
Zurn d.
Wade
4.
Gate and Check Valves a.
Stockham b.
Walworth Co. c.
Jenkins Bros. d.
Crane Co. e.
Nibco
5.
Butterfly and Ball Valves a.
Victaulic Co.
22 05 03-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT b.
Stockham c.
Milwaukee d.
Contromatics
6.
Piping and Fittings (Cast Iron) a.
American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b.
Alabama Pipe Co. c.
Central Foundry Co. d.
United States Pipe and Foundry e.
Tyler Soil Pipe
7.
Pipe (Steel) a.
Youngstown Sheet and Tube Co. b.
Republic Steel Co. c.
Allied Pipe Co.
8.
Pipe and Fittings (Copper) a.
Bridgeport Brass b.
Mueller Brass Co. c.
Anaconda American Brass Co. d.
Chase Brass and Copper Co.
END OF SECTION 22 05 03
FIT Project C1195
22 05 03-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 22 07 00
INSULATION FOR PLUMBING WORK
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and Special
Conditions of the work, wherever applicable to Plumbing Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 22 05 02 - General Provisions for Plumbing Work shall apply.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The Work of this Contract includes providing all labor, materials, accessories, services and tests necessary to install insulation complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all work as shown on Drawings and as specified hereinafter.
B.
The piping systems and equipment to be insulated shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
Domestic, cold and hot water piping.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
Thermal insulation materials shall meet the property requirements of the following specifications:
1.
American Society for Testing of Materials Specifications: a.
ASTM C 547, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation" b.
ASTM C 533, "Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Pipe and Block
Insulation"
2.
Federal Specification: a.
HH-I-558B, "Mineral Fiber Boards, Blankets, Pipe Covering"
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
Insulation, jacket, adhesives and accessories shall have a composite fire and smoke hazard rating as tested by Procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 73, not exceeding flame spread of 25, fuel contributed of 50, and smoke developed of 50.
B.
Insulation shall be one-piece molded sectional fiberglass, 4-pound density with a maximum K factor 0.23 at 75
F. mean temperature.
C.
Performance requirements: Provide the products to meet fully in all respects (such as density, moisture absorption, alkalinity, thermal-conductivity, jacket, etc.) the materials as designated below.
22 07 00-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.
Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: Molded fiberglass insulation similar to Owens Corning
ASJ/SSL-II, Class 12 for hot and cold plumbing piping.
2.
Fiberglass pipe fitting insulation: Class 16 for use with Class 12 pipe insulation.
3.
Flexible Unicellular Pipe Insulation: FS HH-I-573, Class T. (At Location Hangers and
Saddles). a.
Calcium Silicate Pipe Insulation: FS HH-I-523, Type II, except Type I where needed, factory applied jacket Class B.
D.
Accessory Materials:
1.
Vapor Barrier Materials: ASTM 1136, Type I, paper-backed aluminum foil, strength and permeability rating equivalent to adjoining pipe insulation jacketing.
2.
Bends shall be 0.016 inch thick, 2 " aluminum spaced 18" on center, finish cement shall be J-M No. 375 or smooth coat by Insulation Industries, Inc.
3.
Wires shall be 20 gage galvanized annealed steel, sealer shall be layer of J-M Duramesh
207 or equal.
4.
Adhesives and Protection Finish shall be Benjamin Foster 30-36.
5.
Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre-sized glass cloth or canvas material, not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard.
6.
Fitting and Valves: Zeston 25/50 rated -20 mil PVC covers over fiberglass insulation.
2.02
RELATED MATERIALS AND REQUIREMENTS
A.
At pipe supports Insul-Shield pipe saddles and matching hanger shall be used. Joints of insulation abutting Insul-Shielding pipe saddles shall be butted with IC-405, and the joints firmly pressed together.
B.
All concealed and exposed piping shall be provided with factory ASJ (Owens/Corning
Fiberglass) secured in place with vapor barrier adhesive IC-225. Provide 2 " aluminum bands spaced 18" on centers.
2.03
INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
Cold Water Piping:
Hot Water Piping: all sizes 2 " thick
Hot Water Supply 2 " to 2"
2 2 " and larger
1" thick
1
Hot Water Circulating (All Sizes)
2 " thick
1” thick
C.
Storm drainage piping and drain body: ½” thick
D.
Water meter and backflow preventers: 4 lb. density 1” thick vapor barrier glass insulation blanket, fitted and contoured to shape and secured in place with bends or wire. Apply two coats of mineral wool, cement and trowel to a smooth finish and finish with two applications of Benjamin
Foster 30-36 vapor barrier finish. All meter and backflow preventer test and drain connections shall be left exposed.
22 07 00-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FIT Project C1195
3.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. Staples shall not be used on vapor barrier.
B.
Cover valves, flanges, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where a specific form or type is indicated.
C.
Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
D.
Install protective metal shields and insulated inserts at each hanger and support to prevent compression of insulation.
E.
Apply insulation using the staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction, where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately.
F.
Horizontal storm drainage piping under roofs, exposed and above hung ceiling, and roof drain bodies shall be insulated (sweat-proofing) as specified for water piping, but nested larger diameter covering over hubs and drain bodies.
G.
Direct contact between pipe and hanger shall be avoided. Hanger shall pass outside of metal saddle which cover a section of high density insulation (such as calcium silicate) of sufficient length to support pipe without crushing insulation. Hangers or saddles shall not pierce insulation and vapor barriers.
3.02
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that the insulation serves its intended purpose.
B.
Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests.
C.
Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run. Do not use cut pieces of scraps abutting each other.
D.
Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
E.
The Contractor shall take every precaution necessary to ensure that the covering material is in satisfactory condition to receive painting.
F.
Do not insulate hand holes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, or the manufacturer's nameplate. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.
22 07 00-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
G.
Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.
H.
The installer of the piping insulation shall advise this Contractor of required protection for the insulation work during the remainder of the construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.
END OF SECTION 22 07 00
22 07 00-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 22 08 00
TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR PLUMBING WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and Special
Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 22 05 02 - General Provisions for Plumbing Work shall apply.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The Work of this Contract includes providing all labor, materials, accessories, services to provide all necessary tests and adjustments of all plumbing systems and make ready for operation by the
Owner, all work as shown on the Drawings and as specified hereinafter.
1.03
REQUIREMENTS
A.
The persons providing the specified work and their supervisors shall be personally experienced in the work; and shall have been regularly employed by a firm engaged in the installation of similar work for this project in scope for a minimum of five (5) years.
B.
All tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect or his representatives, and the local authorities having jurisdiction of the work to be tested, as may be directed; and at least 72 hours notice shall be given in advance of all tests.
C.
The Work of this Contractor shall include the furnishing of all testing instruments, gauges, pumps, smoke machines, and other equipment required or necessary for tests, required by laws, rules and regulations and as specified.
D.
Provide all other tests required by local inspectors and all other authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
All appurtenances shall be operated after installation to determine whether or not they meet the requirements of the Specifications.
F.
All defects disclosed in the work by tests and otherwise shall be made good or the Work replaced without additional cost to the Owner. No caulking on screwed joints, cracks or holes will be acceptable.
G.
Tests shall be repeated after any defects disclosed thereby have been made good or the work replaced if it is deemed necessary.
H.
All tests shall be made at the expense of the Contractor.
I.
Tests are not permitted to be made with air except as noted.
J.
Contractor to provide required test plug tee fittings during erection of pipe system.
22 08 00-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
K.
If the pipe installation fails to meet testing requirements, the Contractor shall determine at his own expense the source or sources of leakage, and he shall repair or replace all defective materials or workmanship. The completed pipe installation shall meet the requirements of the tests after the leaks have been corrected.
L.
All piping which is to be enclosed in partitions or hung ceilings shall be tested and made tight when directed by the Construction Supervisor and in adequate time to permit the installation of partitions and ceilings. When necessary, the Contractor shall drain the piping and/or take over such precautions as required to prevent damage by freezing.
M.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for the Work of other trades that may be damaged or disturbed by the tests, or the repair or replacement of his Work, and he shall, without extra charges, restore to its original condition any Work so damaged or disturbed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INTERIOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A.
All plumbing systems shall be tested in accordance with NYC code as described below.
B.
Water Supply: Water supply systems shall be proved watertight by applying a water pressure test, using potable water in piping of the potable water system. Test pressure shall be equal to at least the maximum pressure at which the piping is to serve. Such tests shall be applied to water service pipes and rough piping installations prior to covering or concealment.
C.
Rough Piping Installations:
1.
Building drains, drainage and vent piping, except exposed short fixture connecting drain pipes, shall be tested and proven watertight upon completion of the rough piping installation prior to covering or concealment.
2.
Where the developed length of continuous drainage and vent pipe installation is less than
10 feet, a water flow test shall be applied to the drainage piping. Water flow through the drainage piping shall be provided at rates similar to the service conditions under which the piping is to function. This test method may be applied in testing existing buried building drains when permission is granted by the enforcement officer.
3.
Where the developed length of continuous drainage and vent pipe installation is 10' or more, a water pressure test shall be applied to the drainage and vent piping. Test pressure shall be equal to at least a 10' column of water at all points, except that the uppermost 10' of the system, measured downward from the highest roof vent terminal, need be subjected only to the pressure produced when water overflows from that terminal. The piping may be tested in sections when approved test fittings are provided at appropriate locations.
Test pressure at any point in the system shall not be allowed to exceed the equivalent of a
100' column of water. This test shall be applied to all building drains except those for which a water flow test is specially permitted.
4.
An air pressure test, at five pounds per square inch gauge pressure, may be applied instead of the water pressure test when special permission is granted by the enforcement officer.
D.
Completed Sanitary Drainage, Vent and Storm Systems:
22 08 00-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.
Sanitary drainage and vent systems, upon completion, shall be tested and proven gastight.
2.
After all plumbing fixtures have been installed and all traps have been filled with water, every part of new sanitary drainage and vent systems within building walls shall be subjected to a final test as prescribed herein. For the duration of testing, flow of water in the system shall be halted and the building drain shall be sealed adjacent to its point of entry inside the building. The enforcement officer may require the removal of any cleanout plugs to ascertain that the testing is effective in all parts of the system. Whenever there is reason to believe that the sanitary drainage or vent system of an existing building has become defective, a final test as prescribed herein shall be applied when deemed necessary by the enforcement officer.
3.
A smoke pressure test shall be applied to the system by introducing into its lowest part a pungent, thick smoke produced by one or more approved smoke machines. As smoke belches from all roof vent terminals, they shall be sealed. Then the system shall be subjected to smoke pressure, equivalent to a 1" column of water, for the duration of testing.
4.
A peppermint vapor test may be applied instead of a smoke pressure test when special permission is granted by the enforcement officer. The peppermint vapor shall be applied to the system by introducing, into the roof vent terminal of every line or stack under test, at least two ounces of oil of peppermint, followed immediately the introduction of 10 quarts of boiling water. Then, the roof vent terminals shall be promptly sealed for the duration of testing. The presence of oil of peppermint or persons in contact with such vapor shall be excluded from the test area inside the building.
END OF SECTION 22 08 00
22 08 00-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 22 10 01
PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS FOR PLUMBING WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and Special
Conditions of the Work wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 22 05 02 - General Provisions for Plumbing Work shall apply.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The work of this Contract includes the providing of all labor, materials, accessories, services and tests necessary to install, complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, plumbing piping, all work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.03
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
A.
Pipe and fittings shall conform to the latest USASI, ASTM, ANSI and/or F.S. Standards, and/or
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards No. 301 and 310.
B.
All pipes, fittings, traps, materials and/or other devices used in the plumbing system shall have cast, stamped, or indelibly marked on it the maker's name or mark, weight, and quality of the product when such marking is required by the approved standard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
INTERIOR PIPING MATERIAL
A.
Interior above ground soil waste and vent piping and branches from roof drains to storm water leaders shall be no-hub cast iron soil and fittings with stainless steel couplings similar to
Clamp-All. No-hub piping shall be installed with all supports and sway bracing as specified in
Section 22 10 03 – Hangers and Supports.
B.
Domestic water piping 5” and smaller shall be seamless drawn or extruded hard temper Type “L” copper tubing, ASTM B-88 with solder joint fittings. Fittings shall be copper. Joints shall be made with a lead-free solder alloy (95/5) consisting of tin-antimony and shall conform to ASTM
Specification B-32.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION NOTES FOR INTERIOR PIPING SYSTEMS
A.
It is the intent that each part of the plumbing systems shall be complete in all details and all lines provided with all control valves as indicated on Drawings, or as may be required for the proper
22 10 01-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 control of the pipe lines under this Section so that any fixture, line or piece of apparatus may be cut out for repair without interference or interruption of the service to the rest of the building.
B.
The size of soil, waste, water, and vent piping shall be as determined by the local rules and regulations for plumbing and drainage, except where specifically noted to be larger by the
Specifications or plans; and all fixed rules of installation as set forth in the Rules and Regulations shall be followed as part of the Specifications.
C.
The Contractor shall examine carefully the architectural plans and details and familiarize himself with all conditions relative to the installation of piping, particularly where same is concealed behind furring or in hung ceilings.
D.
In no case shall the Contractor permit his pipes to be exposed beyond finished plaster lines unless specifically shown on Drawings. He shall consult with the other trades in the building and install his piping in such a way as to least interfere with the installation of other trades.
E.
Water piping shall be installed to drain, and branches shall not be trapped, but shall have continuous pitch. Where necessary to raise or lower mains, the same shall be provided with a drip and shall be properly valved and capped.
F.
Piping shall be installed, whether indicated or not, so as to rise and/or drop to clear any and all conduits, lighting fixtures, ductwork and heating mains, in order to maintain the desired clear heights. The Contractor shall consult with the other trades and facilitate the erection of the equipment and piping.
G.
Run piping straight and as direct as possible. In general, form right angles with or parallel to walls or other piping. Risers shall be erected plumb and true.
H.
After cutting, all pipes shall be reamed out to full bore and before erection the inside of all pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned.
I.
No piping or work shall be concealed or insulated until all required tests have been satisfactorily completed and work has been approved by the Architect and all other authorities having jurisdiction.
J.
Branch connections of the drainage systems shall be made with "Wye" and long "Tee-Wye" fittings. Short 3 " bends, common offsets and double hubs will not be permitted. Short
"Tee-Wye"" fittings are to be used in a vertical position only.
K.
Cleanouts shall be provided at the base of all stacks, all changes of directions, at the ends of branch runs where shown, every 50'-0" for pipes 4" and smaller, and as required by Code, and shall be furnished as described under cleanouts.
L.
The house drains must be run at a minimum grade of c " per foot downward in the direction of flow. Drainage pipes 2 2@ and smaller shall have slope 3@ per foot. Attention is again called to the necessity of maintaining the ceiling heights established.
M.
Furnish and install complete systems of ventilating pipes from the various plumbing fixtures and other equipment to which drainage connections are made. Ventilating pipes shall be connected within 2'-0" of the discharge of each trap and shall be individually piped to point above the ultimate overflow level of the fixture before connecting with any other vent pipe (in general, this
22 10 01-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 will be approximately 3'-6" above the finished floor). Branches shall be arranged to pitch back to fixtures.
N.
The individual vent pipes shall be collected together in branch vent lines and connected to vent stacks. Wherever possible, vent stack offsets shall be made with 45 degree fittings. The heels of vent stacks shall be connected to adjacent soil stacks for purpose of draining condensation where possible. The waste of one fixture shall be connected to the base of each vent stack for the purpose of washing out any scales or dirt which may accumulate, or the soil stack shall be used to wash out the heel of the vent.
O.
The tops of all soil and waste stacks shall be extended as additional ventilating pipes. The tops of all ventilating stacks shall run independently through the roof. Pipes smaller than 4" size shall be increased to 4" by means of approved increasers before passing through the roof slab.
P.
Expansion loops and anchors shall be provided on all hot water and hot water circulation mains.
Expansion loops shall be made with four elbows and three lengths of pipe, except as otherwise noted on the Drawings. All loops shall be prestressed.
Q.
All piping installed in finished areas shall be completely concealed within hung ceilings, furrings, soffits, pipe spaces, etc.
R.
Where complete concealment is impossible because of obstructions such as beams, ducts, lights, piping, etc., the Contractor shall not install any work before first consulting with the Architect and his instructions (written or revised Drawings) shall be followed.
S.
Provide tapered reducing fittings for changes in pipe sizes. Bushing shall not be used.
3.02
NO-HUB PIPING - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Pipe hanger shall be provided at each coupling for horizontal piping.
B.
Stacks shall be supported at their bases and at each floor, by floor clamps.
C.
Horizontal piping 5" and larger shall be braced at each branch and at every change in direction
(including 3" and 4" branch piping at each change of direction).
D.
Sway bracing shall be provided on horizontal piping that is suspended in excess of 18" below slab, at 30' intervals.
3.03
DISINFECTION
A.
For disinfection of the potable water supply system, or part thereof, one of the following methods shall be used before the system, or part thereof, is placed in operation or returned to service:
1.
The system, or part thereof, shall be filled with a water solution containing 50 parts per million of available chlorine and allowed to stand for 24 hours before flushing and returning to service.
2.
The system, or part thereof, shall be filled with a water solution containing 200 parts per million of available chlorine and allowed to stand for one hour before flushing and returning to service.
22 10 01-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Sterilization and tests for purity of water in the entire piping system shall be performed by the
Contractor through an approved independent testing laboratory and a certificate shall be furnished to the Owner certifying the quality of purity.
END OF SECTION 22 10 01
22 10 01-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 22 10 02
VALVES FOR PLUMBING WORK
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and Special
Conditions of the Work wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 22 05 02 - General Provisions for Plumbing Work shall apply.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The Work of this Contract includes providing all labor, materials, accessories, services and tests necessary to install all required valves and make ready for operation by the Owner, all work as shown on Drawings and as specified hereinafter.
1.03
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Furnish all valves as indicated on the plans, or as may be required for the proper control of the pipe lines installed under these Specifications, so that any fixture, line or piece of equipment may be cut out for repair without interference or interruption of the service to the rest of the building.
All domestic water valves shall have a minimum working pressure of 125 psi, and shall be water rated unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified herein. All valves shall be of one manufacturer and shall be manufactured in the USA.
B.
Gate valves within the building shall be wedge gate valves with painted iron wheel handles.
They shall have gland followers in stuffing boxes, and shall be constructed so that they may be repacked while open and under pressure. All valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and working pressure cast or stamped on them.
C.
Gate valves 3" and smaller shall be all bronze with brazed or screwed joint ends as required by the piping system in which they are installed.
D.
Gate valves 4" and larger shall have iron bodies with bronze mounting except where otherwise required by the authorities having jurisdiction and shall be provided with screwed or flanged ends as required by the piping system in which they are installed. All gate valves controlling equipment shall be of the OS&Y rising stem type except where space conditions do not permit the installation of this type of valve. In such cases non-rising stem valves may be provided.
E.
Globe valves shall be of all bronze with composition disc, threaded or brazed joint ends as required by piping system in which they are installed.
F.
Check valves up to and including 3" shall be all bronze swing check type with threaded or brazed joint ends. Check valves 4" and larger shall have bronze mounted iron bodies and shall be provided with screwed or flanged joint ends as required by piping system in which they are installed.
22 10 02-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
G.
Drain valves shall be : " heavy cast brass with composition washers with male thread for hose connections.
H.
At the high point of the hot water piping system provide a 2 " automatic IBBM air relief valve,
125 PSI, WOG Class. Pipe drain to spill over adjacent floor drain or service sink.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
INTERIOR PIPING SYSTEM VALVES
A.
Domestic water valves listed below have been selected from the catalog of the Milwaukee Valve
Co. Subject to project requirements, valves manufactured by listed manufacturers may be provided.
Gate Valves 3" & smaller threaded rising stem 105 solder ends rising stem threaded non-rising stem
115
105
4" & larger flanged rising stem
OS&Y, 175 WWP
F2885M
4" & larger flanged non-rising stem
OS&Y, 175 WWP
F2882M
Globe Valves 3" & larger
3" & smaller
3" & smaller Angle Valves
Swing
Check Valves 3" & smaller threaded soldered ends threaded
590T
1590T
595T
Ball Valves
Ball Valves
4" & larger
2" & smaller
2" & smaller threaded soldered ends flanged threaded, 600 WOG (Full Port) soldered ends, 600 WOG (Full Port)
509
1509
F297M
BA125
BA155
B.
Ball valves, as listed herein, may be used for domestic water piping as an alternate for gate valves for sizes 2" and smaller. If used, provide extended stems.
C.
Drain valves shall be similar to Crane #117 or equal.
D.
Valve Tags and Charts
22 10 02-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.
Provide tags on all control valves except those controlling a single fixture and located adjacent to the fixture. Tags shall be 2 inch square, 18 BS gauge aluminum with stamped numbers and letters filled in with black paint.
2.
Fasten tags to valves with brass hooks or chain.
3.
Provide valve tag chart indicating valve number, system, type, size, location and function for all valves.
2.02
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Provide on cold water line and where shown on drawings, reduced pressure zone assembly backflow preventers similar to Watts 009 or approved equal.
B.
Provide test kits for testing backflow preventers, similar to Watts No. TK-9A. See Specification
Section No. 22 08 00 for testing requirements.
2.03
LOCAL EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURE PRESSURE REGULATORS
A.
Furnish and install a Watts type 223 & 223S Series or approved equal water pressure reducing valve on all cold and hot water branch lines for fixtures, or equipment requiring same as provided under other Divisions or Sections of these Specifications. Pressure reducing valves shall be of the differential type, self-contained, single seated, direct acting, spring locked type with no diaphragm. Valve body and spring housing shall be bronze and all other parts shall have a corrosion resistance equal to bronze.
B.
All valves shall be sealed against leakage including a top cap over the adjusting screw.
C.
Internal parts subject to wear shall be replaceable without removing valve from the pipe line, and valve shall be provided with means to adjust outlet pressure setting.
D.
Valves shall have sufficient water capacities to provide required rates of flow and shall be set at discharge pressure as required by the points of use.
2.04
GAS ELECTRO-MECHANICAL VALVES
A.
Furnis and install a Maxon type CMM11 series, manual reset type on piping supplying gas to boilers.
2.05
GAS SAFETY SHUT-OFF VALVES
A.
Gas safety shut-off valves shall be UL listed, electric motor operated, normally closed, manual reset type. Valves shall be rising stem design with a straight through flow path with metal-to-metal seat and disc arrangement. The valve seat shall be stainless steel and the disc ductile iron. Valves shall be provided with a NEMA 4 enclosure modified for Class 1, Division
II hazardous locations, be provided with an electrical terminal block and shall operate on 120
Volt, A.C., 60 Cycles, single phase. Valves shall meet ANSI Class VI leakage standard and shall be provided with a visual indicator to note the position of the valve whether "OPEN" or "SHUT".
B.
Gas safety shut-off valves 2" and smaller shall be threaded, 2 1/2" and larger shall be flanged.
Flanged valves shall be provided with companion flange set by valve manufacturer.
22 10 02-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Gas safety shut-off valves shall be Maxon Corporation Series 808 for sizes 2" and smaller and
Series 808-CP for valves 2-1/2" and larger. All valves shall be provided with trim package 1-1.
2.06
GAS SAFETY SHUT-OFF VALVES; OPERATING SIGN
A.
Provide a sign made of two colors laminated engravers stock phenolic, 1/16" minimum thickness, machine engraved to expose inner core color (white). Signs to be provided with uniform margins and character size minimum 1/4" high.
B.
Sign to read:
"IMPORTANT"
GAS SAFETY SHUT-OFF VALVES LOCATED IN THE NEAR-GAS-METER PIPING MUST BE
MANUALLY RESET UPON ACTION OF THE GAS LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM OR LOSS OF
NORMAL ELECTRICAL POWER.
2.07
GAS LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES
A.
Lubricated plug valves for use on gas service and gas meter piping shall be as approved by the
Gas Company.
B.
Lubricated plug valves for use on gas distribution piping; mains, branches and base of risers shall be cast iron body, rated for 200 pounds cold working pressure and shall be wrench operated, except valves 10" and larger which shall be worm gear operated.
C.
Lubricated plug valves 2" and smaller shall be short pattern threaded; 2-1/2" and larger shall be regular pattern flanged.
D.
Lubricated plug valves shall be Nordstrom Valves Inc. Fig. 142 for sizes 2" and smaller, Fig. 115 for sizes 2-1/2" through 4" inclusive, Fig. 165 for sizes 6" and 8", and Fig. 169 for sizes 10" and larger; or Walworth Fig. 1796 for sizes 2" and smaller, Fig. 1700F for sizes 2-1/2" through 8", and
Fig. 1707F for sizes 10" and larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
The entire plumbing systems shall be supplied with valves so located, arranged and operated as to give a complete regulating control to all fixtures and apparatus.
B.
Shut-off valves shall be provided on all risers, branch lines and at each piece of equipment.
C.
Install check and globe valves on upstream side of the shut-off valve on hot water circulating riser and branch lines, where throttling is indicated.
D.
Valves, where exposed and used in connection with finished piping, shall have the same finish as the pipe.
E.
Provide drain valves at the heel of each plumbing water riser and at low points of the horizontal mains.
22 10 02-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
F.
Provide shut-off valves and check valves on each pump discharge line.
G.
Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible.
H.
Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward.
I.
Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation.
J.
Install valves with bodies of metal other than cast iron where thermal or mechanical shock is indicated or can be expected to occur.
K.
Do not install bronze or brass valves and valve components in direct contact with steel, unless bronze and steel are separated by dielectic insulator.
L.
Select and install valves with outside screw and yoke stems, except provide inside screw non-rising stem valves where headroom prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.
M.
Select and install valves with replaceable seats, except where otherwise indicated.
N.
Installation of Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin located on the upside of the pipe and perpendicular to the pipe's centerline.
3.02
GAS VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Gas service and gas distribution piping, number and distribution of appliances, shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and shall be in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Gas
Company.
1.
Contractor shall arrange for inspection and adjustment of all gas appliances of the contract, so that they will properly and safely operate with natural gas.
B.
Main distributing pipes shall be suspended from the ceilings. Connections of branches with main shall be made with malleable iron right and left couplings and nipples. Whenever gas lines are unavoidably trapped an accessible drip shall be provided with access door to same.
1.
Joint sealing materials (pipe dope) used with screwed fitting shall be applied sparingly and only to the male threads of pipe joints. The burrs made in cutting the pipe shall be removed.
Plugged tees in place of elbows shall be used wherever directed. Where pipes of different sizes come together, reducing fittings shall be used. No bushing will be permitted.
2.
Inter-connections between piping at different pressure levels is not permitted.
C.
Provide gas lubricated plug valves where specified, shown on Drawings or otherwise required for control of gas in the distribution piping; mains, branches and at the base of each riser. Install sleeves in floors for risers to pass through. An accessible manual gas cock or lubricated plug valve of the same size as the pipe shall be installed at each piece of gas burning equipment, to allow for isolation of the equipment and where indicated on Drawings. All valves and cocks for gas throughout the building shall be tagged with numbered metal tags. Install drip, consisting of nipple and cap, at the base of all risers and changes in elevation.
22 10 02-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
D.
In no case shall a gas pipe run through a heat duct or stairwell. The Contractor shall do all cutting and boring of holes necessary for extending pipes and branches, making all necessary openings in walls, and shall make all repairs to same.
E.
Final connections to burner pilot lights and boiler gas trains shall be made by the Plumbing
Contractor.
END OF SECTION 22 10 02
22 10 02-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 22 10 03
HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and Special
Conditions of the Work wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 22 05 02 - General Provisions for Plumbing Work shall apply.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The work of this Contract includes providing all labor, materials, accessories, services and tests necessary to install complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all Hangers and
Supports for Plumbing Systems as specified hereinafter.
1.03
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide products which are USA made.
B.
Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with
ANSI/MSS SP-58.
C.
Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69.
D.
Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-89.
E.
Assume the responsibility for the proper transfer of the loads of the piping system to the structure.
No additional cost to the Owner should be expected for any corrective work during construction.
F.
Supports and hangers shall be provided for all horizontal and vertical piping. The hanger design shall conform to the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. Hangers shall be kept outside of pipe insulation.
G.
Bracket clamps and rod sizes indicated in these Specifications are minimum size only. The
Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity of all supports. All structural hanging material shall have a safety factor of five (5) built in.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Pipe supports shall be of the following type and figure number, manufactured by Grinnell.
Supports by other manufacturers may be provided.
B.
Pipe Hanger Schedule:
22 10 03-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
Grinnell Piping
FIT Project C1195
Item
Beam Clamp w/locknut
Beam Clamp w/Retaining Clip
Adjustable Clevis Hanger
Adjustable Swivel Ring
Pipe Saddle
U-Bolt
Fig. #
94 or 133
95 & 96
260
300
69
264
192
137
Sizes
All
All
All
For insulated
2" & smaller
4" and larger
2", 2 2 ", 3"
All (At Engineer's approval)
Riser Clamp
Brackets
Steel Washer Plates
Concrete Insert
261
195, 199
60
281 or CB 282
All
All
All
All
C.
Insulation Protection
1.
For all insulated pipe furnish clevis hangers with welded shields similar to Fig. No. 167.
D.
Pipe Supports in Pipe Chases
1.
Provide pipe supports and channels to securely hold piping, similar to Grade KJA Cycolac
DH self-extinguishing ABS as manufactured by the Sumner Corporation.
E.
Inserts for pipes 3" and smaller shall be expansion shield type and shall be used with suitable existing concrete structure in coarsely aggregated concrete only, Hilti Model HDI.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide necessary structural members, hangers and supports of approved design to keep piping in proper alignment and prevent transmission of injurious thrusts and vibrations. In all cases where hangers are supported from concrete construction, care shall be taken not to weaken concrete or penetrate waterproofing. All hangers and supports shall be capable of screw adjustment after piping is erected. Hangers supporting piping expanding into loops, bends and offsets shall be secured to the building structure in such a manner that horizontal adjustment perpendicular to the run of piping supported may be made to accommodate displacement due to expansion. All such
22 10 03-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 hangers shall be finally adjusted, both in the vertical and horizontal direction. Hangers in contact with copper or brass pipe shall be copper plated steel.
B.
Except where otherwise noted, piping shall be supported from structural steel only. Provide supplementary steel where required.
C.
Where additional steel is required for the support of hangers, it shall be provided subject to the approval of the Architect. Piping shall not be supported from the metal deck slab construction.
D.
Piping shall not be hung from other piping, ducts, conduits or from equipment of other trades.
E.
Piping located on walls shall be supported by means of hanger suspended from heavy angle iron wall brackets. No wall hooks will be permitted.
F.
Lateral bracing of horizontal pipe shall be provided where required to prevent side sway or vibration. The lateral bracing shall be of a type approved by the Resident Engineer and shall be installed where directed by the Resident Engineer.
G.
Concrete inserts shall be coordinated with other trades and shall be set in place before slabs are poured. Expansion anchors similar to Hilti HD1 are permitted only on small branches (2" and less).
H.
Intervals of supports shall be as follows:
1.
Cast iron pipe, horizontal: five (5) feet
2.
Cast iron pipe, vertical: every floor level; and so as to take the load off the base of the stack, maximum spacing: 15'.
3.
Steel screwed pipe, horizontal: twelve (12) feet
4.
Steel screwed pipe, vertical: every floor level; and so as to take the load off the base of the stack, maximum spacing: 15'.
5.
Copper tube, horizontal: ten (10) feet for piping two (2) inches and larger; six (6) feet for smaller piping
6.
Copper tube, vertical: every floor level; and so as to take the load off the base of the stack
I.
There shall be no metal-to-metal contact at supports for non-ferrous pipes. Provide c " thick lead strips or Summer Inc. pipe clamps under uninsulated piping at supports. Hangers and supports shall be installed outside of insulation or insulated piping.
J.
Trapeze type supports may be used for parallel lines of piping and hangers. They shall be made up of angles bolted back-to-back or channels for supporting parallel lines of piping. Trapeze type hangers shall be supported with suspension rods having double nuts, and securely attached to construction with inserts, beam clamps, steel fishplates, cantilever brackets, lag screws or other approved means. Use approved type brackets for supporting piping attached along walls.
Non-insulated piping supported by trapeze hangers shall be provided with hold down clamps at the trapeze hangers. If only non-ferrous piping is supported on the trapeze hangers, the trapeze and hold down clamps shall be copper clad.
K.
Maximum weights on hanger rods shall be such that stress in tension shall not exceed 9,000 psi, using root area of threaded portion. In no case shall hanger sizes be less than 3/8" for pipe up to
2", 2 " for pipe 12 " to 32 ", 5/8" for pipe 4" to 5", : " for pipe 6", 7/8" for pipe 8" to 12".
22 10 03-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
L.
Supports for vertical piping shall be double bolt riser clamps, with each end having equal bearing on the building structure located at alternate floors. Cast iron soil pipe shall be supported at every floor and at its base.
M.
All hangers, rods, inserts, clamps, stanchions, brackets, etc., shall be dipped in zinc chromate primer before installation and provided with one (1) coat of approved type paint after installation.
N.
Chains, straps, perforated iron or wire hangers are not permitted.
O.
The Architect must approve method of supporting pipes from building structure before work is started. The Contractor shall bear all responsibility for materials and workmanship as described in this Section, and shall make sure that all hangers and supports are properly and permanently connected to building structure.
P.
Pipe support shall be installed to avoid interference with other piping, hangers, electrical conduits and supports, building structures and equipment.
END OF SECTION 22 10 03
22 10 03-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 22 30 01
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, SPECIALTIES & ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and Special
Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 22 05 02 - General Provisions for Plumbing Work shall apply.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The Work of this Contract includes providing all labor, material, equipment, accessories, services, and tests necessary to complete plumbing specialties and make ready for operation by the Owner, all work as shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Provide escutcheons on all exposed pipe wherever they pass through floors, ceilings, walls or partitions.
B.
Escutcheons in finished areas and on chromium plated piping shall be solid, cast brass chrome plated type, secured to pipe with set screws.
C.
Escutcheons shall be similar to Ritter Pattern and Casting Co., m 1.
D.
Escutcheons for pipes in unfinished areas shall be cast iron secured with set screws.
2.02
TRAPS
A.
Each fixture, floor drain and piece of equipment requiring connection to the drainage system shall be separately trapped.
B.
Provide fixture traps as noted under "Plumbing Fixtures" section. In all other locations provide
P-traps. Traps for floor, area and funnel drains shall be deep seal type. All exposed P-traps shall be chrome plated.
C.
Mechanical room floor drains shall have deep seal P-traps.
2.03
DISSIMILAR METALS
A.
Dielectric unions or insulated couplings shall be installed between copper or brass piping and steel piping for pipe sizes 2" and smaller. Use dielectric gaskets on flanges and sleeves for pipes
2 2 " and larger.
22 30 01-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.04
PIPE SLEEVES
FIT Project C1195
A.
Any pipe penetrating walls and floors shall be provided with a pipe sleeve.
B.
Provide Schedule 40 galvanized steel sleeves for all piping passing through concrete walls or floor slabs. Sleeves shall be securely set in floors 2" above unfinished floor and 1" above the finished floor. Sleeves in finished areas shall be chrome plated.
C.
Provide No. 22 USSG galvanized iron sleeves extended through construction in ceilings, walls and partitions. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve. Minimum 2 " space shall be provided between the pipe or insulation and the sleeve. All sleeves shall be sealed in accordance with the building code requirements.
D.
The required fire resistance rating of floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and walls shall be maintained where a penetration is made for electrical, mechanical, plumbing pipes, conduits, ducts and systems. Fire stopping shall be provided at openings around vents, pipes, ducts, conduits at floor levels and walls with non-combustible materials, such as mineral wool or equal.
E.
Fire stopping material shall be UL-listed and shall be similar to 3M product Caulk CP 25 and
Putty 303 is approved equal.
F.
Sleeves for gas piping shall extend 4 inches beyond exterior face of wall and 1 inch beyond inner face.
2.05
UNIONS
A.
Provide unions on inlet and outlet of all equipment having connections 2" and smaller. Where valves are adjacent to equipment, unions shall be on equipment side of valves.
B.
Unions shall have bodies of the same material as the pipes to which they are connected, but all unions shall have brass or bronze ground seats. Unions shall be as manufactured by Stockham or approved equal.
2.06
WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A.
Air chambers: 12" high, same diameter as branch, for each individual fixture.
B.
Shock Absorbers:
1.
Engineered water hammer arrestors, similar to Smith Series 5000.
2.
Provide at quick closing valves and (water closet and urinal flushometers) where shown on drawings.
3.
Size and locations shall be in accordance with PDI Standard WH201.
4.
Provide accessibility to all shock absorbers.
2.07
HOSE BIBBS
A.
Hose bibbs shall be Chicago Faucets #952 or approved equal, with vacuum breaker and loose key.
22 30 01-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.08
THERMOMETERS
FIT Project C1195
A.
Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type with red reading mercury, 7" black baked enamel case, black on white scale, a range from 30
F. to 240
F., and a separable brass socket.
Thermometers shall be so installed and adjusted that they are easily readable from a normal standing position on the floor. Thermometers shall be similar or approved equal to U.S. Gauge
"Multi-Angle".
2.09
VACUUM BREAKERS
A.
Provide vacuum breakers on water supply piping to the kitchen equipment where indicated in the equipment schedule. Set vacuum breakers in readily accessible locations and at least 6'-6" above finished floor. Vacuum breakers shall be chrome plated brass, T&S Brass No. B-929-A or approved equal.
2.10
DRAINS
A.
Floor drains shall have coated cast iron body, with an integral double drainage flange and weep holes, with outlet connections as required and of sizes indicated on Drawings. Provide strainers with nickel bronze finish, except as noted. All strainers or grates shall be secured with vandal-proof spanner type screws, unless otherwise specified.
B.
Floor drains in waterproof membrane floors shall be equipped with flashing clamp with 4 lb. sheet lead 1'-0" around the drain.
C.
Set all floor drains in such a way that the floor finish and top of the drain will be plumb and flush with finish floor without requirements for future additional extension, modifications, etc.
D.
When seamless and/or vinyl waterproof floor is indicated on the Architectural Drawings, all drains must be provide with required flanges.
E.
Floor drains, except as noted, shall be similar to J. R. Smith and shall be as follows:
1.
Type A: (Boiler Room, Mechanical Spaces, Meter Rooms) shall be cast iron, triple drainage, bottom outlet caulk connection, medium duty round grate and slotted sediment bucket with 3/8” or ¼” bottom drainage openings, so designed that grate cannot be set unless bucket is in position. Drains shall be Smith 2230, Zurn Z-540-Z-VP, Wade
W-1210-TD, Josam 32220-17-X, MIFAB F1340-TFB-4 or Watts Drainage Products FD
340-Y-SET.
2.11
CLEANOUTS
A.
Cleanouts for cast iron pipe shall consist of tapped extra heavy cast iron ferrule caulked into cast iron fittings, and extra heavy brass screw plug with solid hexagonal nut.
B.
Cleanouts turning out through walls and up through floors shall be made by long sweep ells of
"Y" and c bends with plugs and face or deck plates to conform to architectural finish in room.
Where no definite finish is indicated on the Architectural and/or Mechanical Drawings, wall plates shall be chrome plated cast brass and floor plates shall be nickel bronze. Screws in cleanouts in finished areas shall be vandal-proof.
22 30 01-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Cleanouts shall be full size at the pipe up to and including 6 inch pipe. On larger size piping, 6 inch size plugs shall be used.
D.
The following schedule indicates the various types of cleanouts desired at various locations indicated on the Drawings. These cleanouts have been selected from the catalog of J.R. Smith and make representative of quality design and finish desired. Cleanouts of other approved manufacturers may be submitted for review.
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Location
Floor-Concrete
Floor-Resilient Tile
Floor-Ceramic Tile
Floor-General Finished
Area
Outside Grade
Piping
Exposed Cast Iron
Exposed Steel
Concealed Cast Iron
Concealed Steel
Steel or Cast Iron
Cast Iron
Cast Iron
Cast Iron
Cast Iron
Figure Number
Smith 4420
Wade W-8550-D
Smith 4470
Wade W-8590-D
Smith 4532-U
Wade W-8460-R
Smith 4472-U
Wade W-8590-E
Smith 4248-U
Wade W-6010-Z
Smith 4168-U
Wade W-6010-TS
Smith 4188-U
Wade W-7040-U
Smith 4028-U
Wade W-6010-TS
Smith 4258
Wade W-8300-MF
2.12
AUTOMATIC TRAP PRIMER
A.
Provide where shown on the drawings automatic trap primer valve similar to J.R. Smith Model
2699.
B.
The trap primer shall be cast bronze (with chrome plated finish if installed exposed) with 2 " connection.
C.
The trap primer shall have anti-siphon air ports to prevent siphonage of trap water into the water supply line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 22 30 01
22 30 01-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 05 12
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK INCLUDED
A.
Work Included: a.
All motor starters and controllers for equipment furnished by this Contractor.
Packaged type units shall be furnished completely prewired with panels mounted on the units as specified. All other motor starters and controllers will be turned over to the Electrical Contractor for installation and wiring. b.
Packaged air handling units used for single duct systems, hot water preheat coils, cooling coils and hot water reheat coils where indicated. c.
Heat recovery reclaim coils, pumps and controls. d.
Filters. e.
Humidifiers. f.
Fans. g.
Condensate pumps. h.
Hot water specialties such as expansion tanks, air vents, air separators, reducing and safety valves, etc. i.
Accessories such as V-belt drives, flow measuring devices, draft gauges, machinery guards, thermostats, pressure gauges. j.
Water treatment for chilled and hot water systems. k.
Inertia blocks and vibration isolation equipment. l.
Piping, fittings, and valves. m.
Sheet metal ductwork and accessories such as dampers, access doors, etc. n.
Registers, grilles and diffusers. o.
Fire dampers and smoke dampers. p.
Installation of smoke detectors in ductwork. q.
Acoustical duct lining. r.
Pipe, duct and equipment insulation. s.
Constant and variable volume air terminals. t.
Temperature Control: A complete system of temperature control shall be installed in connection with the HVAC systems, including all thermostats, control valves, damper motors and dampers for the outdoor air intakes and fan discharges. All control wiring for automatic temperature controls, including interlocking wiring for fans, pumps, etc. by this Contractor. u.
Painting and pipe, duct and equipment identification for all work by this Contractor is previously specified under "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical
Work". v.
Test and balancing.
23 05 12-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 w.
Sleeves, pipe inserts and anchor bolts, escutcheons, prefabricated roof curbs, etc., as hereinafter specified. x.
Identification, name plates, tags and charts. y.
Cutting and rough patching. z.
Furnishing and setting of electric motors. aa.
Furnishing of starters, and motor control devices as specified under "Special
Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work". bb.
Templates and anchor bolts for equipment bases. cc.
Cap flashing or pipe and duct passing through roof. dd.
Energy Management Building Automation System. ee.
Concrete pads for all HVAC work.
1.03
WORK INCLUDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS
A.
The following work is included under other Sections of the Specifications:
1.
Framed openings as shown on the Drawings.
2.
Valved water supply outlets within 5'-0" of the various pieces of the HVAC equipment will be left by the Plumbing Sub-Contractor. Final connections to HVAC equipment shall be made by this Section.
3.
Floor and funnel drains adjacent to equipment requiring same will be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Sub-Contractor.
4.
Outside air inlets, exhaust outlets, louvers and screens through walls, and elsewhere as noted on the Drawings. Motorized dampers furnished and installed under this Contract.
5.
Base flashing of curbs and sleeves at roofs.
6.
Power wiring for all motors except where otherwise noted.
7.
Temporary heat.
8.
Setting of access doors furnished by this Section.
9.
Undercutting of doors or louvers in doors.
10.
All motor disconnect switches, except where in combination starters and where otherwise noted.
11.
Dunnage beams for cooling towers.
12.
Finish painting.
13.
Access doors in ceiling and walls.
14.
Finish patching.
15.
Fan shutdown system during fire alarm.
16.
Mounting of all starters, motor control centers, starter panelboards, and motor control devices: Division 16.
17.
Cooling tower electric pipe tracing: Division 16.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with quality established in Section 01 31 46 "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work", and hereinafter specified. All work performed shall comply with local codes.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings covering the following items:
1.
Coordination drawings.
2.
Internal cleaning and treating of piping.
3.
Sleeve and ductwork penetration drawings.
23 05 12-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
4.
Identification schedule and samples.
5.
Air handling units.
6.
Air filters and draft gauges.
FIT Project C1195
7.
Coils.
8.
Humidifiers.
9.
Heat exchangers.
10.
Expansion joints, anchors and guides, including details of installation.
11.
Air diffusers, registers and grilles.
12.
Schedule of ductwork, joints, gauges, supports, flexible connections, fire dampers, access doors, etc.
13.
Sheet metal fabrication drawings.
14.
Schedule of piping and fitting materials.
15.
Piping shop drawings.
16.
Schedule of valves, strainers, vacuum breakers.
17.
Flow metering device and systems.
18.
Thermometers and pressure gauges.
19.
Automatic stop-check valves.
20.
Blow-off tank, expansion tanks and flash tanks.
21.
Schedule of pipe and ductwork supports, including inserts, escutcheons, etc.
22.
Water pumps including pump curves.
23.
All motor starters, motor control devices and motor control centers.
24.
Cooling towers including sound criteria.
25.
Schedule of insulation types and samples of each type.
26.
Vibration isolation schedule including inertia block details.
27.
Templates for equipment bases.
28.
Acoustic material.
29.
Energy Management and Building Automation System.
30.
Air vents, air separators, water strainers, reducing and safety valves for water systems.
31.
Automatic Temperature Control System.
32.
Concrete pad locations and sizes.
B.
All shop drawings being submitted that include electrical work shall be submitted with all internal and external wiring diagrams.
C.
The previously listed items are major equipment and do not limit this Division's responsibility to submit shop drawings for all equipment and accessories which are to be provided under this
Division of the Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SPARE PARTS
A.
Chilled water, condenser water, condensate return pumps and hot water pumps - For each pump listed, unless otherwise specified:
1.
One set of wearing rings.
2.
One set of bearings.
3.
One set of packing glands complete with rings, nuts and bolts.
4.
Three gaskets for casing joint.
5.
Sufficient stuffing box packing for four packings.
23 05 12-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Where pump specifications do not require packing glands of stuffing boxes, items #3 & 5 shall be omitted. Inline pumps w/stuffing box design, item #1 & 2 shall be omitted.
Inline pumps w/standard mechanical seal spaces listed above except item #4 shall be omitted.
B.
Filters:
1.
The Contractor shall furnish a minimum of two complete spare filter sets for the filters for all air handling and package AC units.
C.
Spare Lamps:
1.
Furnish ten (10) spare lamps for each size and type of lamp on instrument panels.
D.
Miscellaneous Spare Parts:
1.
Water column glasses shall be provided for each tank utilizing one.
2.
One complete set of gaskets shall be provided for each of the following pieces of equipment: a.
All manhole and handhole openings for the expansion tank and blow-down tank. b.
Converters (oil and hot water).
3.
Furnish one complete set of V-belts for each belt driven unit installed.
4.
Electrical equipment - two spare starter fuses identified for each type and size for all starters including pumps, supply, return and exhaust fan.
5.
One set of bearings properly identified for each type and size supply, return and exhaust fan.
6.
For each type and size pump furnished under this section of the contract, furnish as applicable for each type and size of pump, one set of wearing rings, one set of mechanical seals, one set of bearings, one set of shaft sleeves, one set of stuffing box bushings, one set of packing glands with rings, nuts and bolts and sufficient stuffing box packing for four packings.
E.
Furnish tools required for equipment as follows:
1.
One set of high grade tools as recommended and approved by the respective manufacturer for pumps, fans, refrigeration equipment and other equipment. Tools shall be furnished in a suitable hardwood or other approved container with lock and two (2) keys. Pasted on the inside cover shall be a list of all tools provided in container.
2.
One pressure grease gun of approved design and size, complete with necessary adaptors to fit all lubricating fittings on installed equipment.
3.
One pitot tube, complete with required manometers, to read static pressure and velocity pressure simultaneously. Provide 6'-0" of rubber tubing.
2.02
LIST OF MANUFACTURERS
A.
The manufacturer's name appearing first on this list is the manufacturer the project design was based upon. However, the additional manufacturers listed herein are also acceptable with the provision that they meet the requirements of these Specifications, ratings, and/or space allocations listed in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings.
1.
Water Pumps a.
Bell & Gossett b.
Weinman c.
Goulds d.
Paco e.
Grundfos
23 05 12-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT f.
Patterson g.
Armstrong h.
Taco i.
or approved equal
2.
Air Conditioning Units a.
York b.
Trane c.
Carrier d.
Envirotech e.
Governaire
3.
Water Coils a.
American Air Filter b.
Trane c.
York d.
Carrier e.
or approved equal
4.
Diffuser Section for Air Handling Units a.
American Air Filter b.
Cambridge c.
York d.
or approved equal
5.
Air Filters a.
American Air Filter b.
Camfill Farr c.
Cambridge d.
or approved equal
6.
Draft Gauges a.
Dwyer b.
or approved equal
7.
Coolers a.
Russell b.
or approved equal
8.
Louvers & Dampers a.
Arlan Damper Corp. (631-589-7431) b.
Ruskin c.
Titus d.
or approved equal
9.
Expansion Tanks & Flash Tanks a.
Bell & Gossett b.
Adamson c.
Buffalo d.
Amtrol e.
or approved equal
10.
Water Specialties a.
Bell & Gossett b.
Taco c.
Armstrong d.
or approved equal
11.
Expansion Joints a.
Zallea b.
Flexonics
23 05 12-5
FIT Project C1195
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT c.
Flex Hose d.
or approved equal
12.
Flow Measuring Devices a.
Barco Division; Aeroquip Corp. b.
Pres O Ind. c.
or approved equal
13.
Thermometers & Pressure Gauges a.
Ashcroft b.
Weiss Instruments c.
or as specified in Section 23 05 80
14.
Motors a.
General Electric b.
Westinghouse c.
Allis Chalmers d.
or approved equal
15.
Starters, Motor Control Centers, Switches a.
General Electric b.
Westinghouse c.
Cutler-Hammer d.
or approved equal
16.
Diffusers, Registers & Grilles a.
Titus b.
Price c.
Anemostat d.
Acutherm e.
Nailor
17.
Valves a.
Jenkins b.
Crane c.
Walworth d.
or as specified under paragraph on "Valves".
18.
Insulation and Acoustic Lining a.
Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. b.
CSG Snap-on c.
Johns Manville d.
or approved equal
19.
Vibration Isolation a.
VMC East b.
Mason Industries c.
Korfund Corp d.
or approved equal
20.
Automatic Temperature Controls a.
Johnson Controls b.
Honeywell c.
Siemens d.
Andover e.
Alerton f.
Automated Logic
21.
Internal Cleaning & Treating of Piping a.
Heating Economy Services Co., Inc. b.
Tower Water Management
23 05 12-6
FIT Project C1195
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT c.
The Metro Group, Inc. d.
Drew Chemical Co.
22.
Electric Heating Elements a.
Qmark b.
Indeeco
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 23 05 12
FIT Project C1195
23 05 12-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 05 23
VALVES FOR HVAC
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all Valves as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
"Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Provide valves produced by the manufacturers, which are listed in Section 23 05 12,
"Approved Manufacturer's List".
C.
Provide valves whose performance under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.
D.
To assure uniformity and compatibility, all grooved end valves and adjoining couplings shall be supplied by a single manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.
1.05
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
VALVES
A.
Valves- General: All valves shall be of a design which the manufacturer lists for the service and shall be of materials allowed by the latest edition of the ASME Code for pressure piping for the pressure and temperature contemplated, unless a higher grade or quality is herein specified. All valves of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer, except for special applications.
23 05 23-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
The system shall be supplied with valves in all branch mains and risers, at all pumps, tanks, reducing and control valves, heating and cooling surfaces and at all apparatus; so located, arranged and operated as to give complete shut-off. Except where flanged valves are used, each connection to equipment shall be made with screwed unions, flanged unions, or grooved couplings on the equipment or discharge side of the valve.
C.
All valves shall be installed and arranged so that they are easily accessible.
D.
Each valve shall have the maker's name or brand, the figure or list number and the guaranteed working pressure cast on the body or stamped on the bonnet, or shall be provided with other means of easy identification.
E.
Check valves installed in the horizontal position shall be swing checks; valves installed in the vertical position shall be silent checks for 2½" and above, and lift check for 2" and smaller, except that all check valves in pump discharges shall be silent checks.
F.
Provide capped blow-off valves at all strainers, and where shown on the Drawings.
G.
Provide valve operating chain on all gate, globe, butterfly and plug valves in Mechanical
Equipment Rooms - 4" and larger, which are more than 7'-0" above the operating floor. Unit shall be complete with adjustable sprocket, chain and guide (Crane "Babbit" type). Provide hook to keep chain out of the way.
H.
Generally, all valves are to be of the gate type, except that globe valves shall be used for balancing service, throttling services and on traps, and pressure reducing and control valve bypasses. Globe valves used on bypasses shall have monel metal mountings. Pumps shall have globe type balancing flow measuring & shut off valves on discharge piping.
I.
All valves 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be all bronze with bronze bodies. Valves 2½ inches in diameter and larger shall have iron bodies with bronze mountings (except where otherwise noted).
J.
All flanged-end valves shall have renewable metal seat rings and discs. On gate valves these parts shall be of bronze, on all globe valves they shall be of bronze and suitable for throttling service.
K.
Check valves shall be ASTM A395 and A536 ductile iron body, with stainless steel spring and shaft. Victaulic Series 716H and 716.
1.
2" - 3": Ductile iron body with stainless steel disc, mounted elastomer seal, and nickelplated seat.
2.
4"-12": Black enamel coated ductile iron body, elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc, with welded-in nickel seat.
3.
14”-24”: ASTM A395 ductile iron body, stainless steel disc, spring, and shaft, EPDM seat bonded to the valve body, AGS grooved ends. Victaulic Series W715.
L.
All screwed-end globe valves shall be of the union bonnet type with renewable teflon discs.
M.
All valves shall have their bonnets back-seated to provide for packing under pressure. All gate valves shall be of the solid tapered wedge type.
23 05 23-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
N.
Drain valves shall be provided on tanks, receivers, risers and where they may be required or necessary, for draining the lines and equipment. Drain valves or plug cocks shall be provided at the low points for proper drainage. Cocks and valves shall be provided with threaded ends for those connections.
O.
All valves up to 2 inches in diameter shall have screw ends, 2½ inches in diameter and over shall have flanged ends. Valves 2½" and larger which are non-rising stem, shall have position indicators.
P.
All bronze and iron valves shall be furnished with Teflon impregnated packing.
Q.
All handwheels shall be of malleable iron.
R.
No Asbestos shall be used in construction of valves including the gaskets.
S.
All valves shall be of type and number as specified below: For all services, except as otherwise noted.
TYPE SIZE
Gate
Valve
Globe
Valve
2” &
Smaller
2 ½” &
Larger
2” &
Smaller
2 ½” &
Larger
NIBCO
NO.
T-134
F-617-O
CRANE
NO.
428UB
465 ½
T-275Y
(Teflon)
T275-B
(Steam)
T276-AP
(SS Full-Plug)
F-718B
14 ½ P
351
VICTAULIC
NO.
JENKINS
NO.
810J
WALWORTH
NO.
2
454J 726F
786
787
78K
788
789
546P
613C
237P
906F
ABZ
No.
REMARKS
150 lb. WSP,
Bronze
Rising Stem
125 lb. WSP,
Bronze Trimmed,
Iron Body, OS&Y
300 lb WSP,
Bronze
125 lb, WSP,
Bronze Trimmed,
Iron Body OS&Y
TYPE
Angel
Valve
SIZE
2” &
Smaller
Butterfly
Valve
(High
Performan ce)
Swing
Check
Silent
Check
2 ½” &
Larger
2 ½” &
Larger
NIBCO
NO.
T375-Y
(Teflon)
T375-B
(Steam)
T376-AP
(SS Full-Plug)
F-818-B
CRANE
NO.
16 ½
353
LCS-6822
LCS-7822
2” &
Smaller
2 ½” &
Larger
T-433-Y
F-918-B
137
373
All Sizes F-910 / w-910
(CI)
G-920-W (DI)
-----
VICTAULIC
NO.
JENKINS
NO.
558P
WALWORTH
NO.
238P
ABZ
No.
Vic-300
MasterSeal
Vic-300 AGS
789
712
716
716H
W715
907F
409Z
624
-----
406
M928F
-----
400 Series
900
900
900
REMARKS
300 lb. WSP, Bronze
125 lb. WSP,
Bronze Trimmed, Iron
Body, OS&Y
300 psi Grooved DI,
EPDM
285 psi Lug, DI, SS
Disc, EPDM
150 lb WSP, Bronze
125 lb WSP, Bronze
Trimmed,
Iron Body
Williams-Hager
Fig. 636, 125 WSP
Semi-steel.
23 05 23-3
Drain
Valves
Blow-Off
Valves
Strainers
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2” &
Smaller
T-113-HC 451
2” &
Smaller
T-585-70-HC
(Ball)
T-174-A
(Gate)
T-221/222-A
----
372N
(2/4” size only)
124
2” &
Smaller
2 ½” &
Larger
T-751-A
F-721-A
730
W730
732
W732
24
----
FIT Project C1195
200 lb. OWG, Non- rising stem, Hose end,
Bronze with Bronze
Cap & Chain
300 lb. WSP, Bronze Y-
Type
125 lb, WSP, Bronze
250 lb, WSP, Iron
Body,
125 lb, WSP, Iron Body
2.02
VALVES IN COPPER TUBING
A.
Except where otherwise noted, all valves for use with copper tubing shall be as follows
TYPE
Gate
Valve
Glove
Valve
Angle
Valve
Swing Check
Balancing
Valves
SIZE
NIBCO
NO
S-111 2” &
Smaller
3” &
Smaller
2 ½” &
Larger
2” &
Smaller
3” &
Smaller
2 ½” &
Larger
2” &
Smaller
S-134
F-617-O
S-211-Y
S-235-Y
F-718-B
S-311-Y
3” &
Smaller
2 ½” &
Larger
2” &
Smaller
3” &
Smaller
S-335-Y
F-818-B
S-413-B
S-433-B
2 ½” &
Larger
½” to 2”
F-918-B
2 ½” to
12”
CRANE
NO
1320
----
428
1310
----
14 ½ P
1311
----
16 ½ P
1303
----
34
Tour and
Anderson
VICTAULIC
NO
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
786
787
78K
----
----
----
----
----
JENKINS
NO
1240
1200
237P
1200
1222
WALWORTH
NO
4-SJ
55
95-SJ
----
406SJ
406
REMARKS
125 lb. WSP, Bronze
300 lb. Non-Shock
125 lb, WSP, Bronze trimmed, rion body, OS&Y
125 lb WSP, bronze
300 lb. Non-shock CW Bronze with solder joint adapter
125 lb. WSP, bronze trimmed, iron body OS&Y
125 lb WSP, Bronze
300 lb. Non-shock CW Bronze with solder joint adapter
125 lb WSP, bronze trimmed, iron body OS&Y
125 lb WSP, Bronze
300 lb Non-shock CW Bronze with solder jont adapter
125 lb WSP, bronze trimmed, iron body OS&Y
125 lb, WSP, bronze body, globe style, integral test, point, thrd or swt.
125 lb. WSP, iron body, nonrising stem, flg or grv
2.03
REFRIGERANT VALVES
A.
All refrigerant valves shall be silver brazed joint as follows:
1.
Globe Valves -
1⅛" O.D. and smaller: packless, Henry type 626; 1⅜" O.D. and larger: packed, wing cap, Henry type 203.
2.
Angle Valves -
1⅛" O.D. and smaller: packless, Henry type 647 and 642; 1⅜" O.D. and larger: packed, wing cap, Henry type 216.
3.
Check Valves -
⅞" O.D. and smaller: brass, Henry type 116A; 1⅛" O.D. and larger: bronze, Henry type 205.
23 05 23-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
4.
Charging and Purging Valves - Line valve, Henry type 623; angle valve, Henry type
643.
5.
Relief Valves - Angle type, brass, Henry type 52.
6.
Gate Valves - All sizes: Globe Valves.
2.04
LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES
A.
Full port opening tapered plug suitable for lubrication under service pressure with plug in any position.
B.
Lubricating Guns:
1.
One for every 10 valves.
2.
Extra heavy, lever type, hydraulic hand gun.
3.
15,000 psi gauge and 12" long connection hose.
4.
Similar to Walworth #1699 or approved equal.
C.
Lubricant:
1.
Manufacturer's recommendations.
2.
One year supply, each valve.
D.
Operators:
1.
4" with wrench, except as noted.
2.
Wrench set for each size valve.
3.
Wrench for every 10 valves, each size
4.
6" and larger: gear operated.
5.
Permanently installed handwheel.
2.05
VALVE CONSTRUCTION
A.
Piping less than 100 psi: 200# WOG Class, cast iron body.
B.
Piping 100 psi to 250 psi: ANSI Class 150, carbon steel.
1.
4" and larger: flanged, ANSI Class 150 rated.
C.
Piping over 250 psi: ANSI Class 300, carbon steel body.
1.
Up to 2": screwed
2.
2½" and larger: flanged, ANSI Class 300 rated.
2.06
BALANCING VALVES
A.
All balancing valves shall be combination balancing, flow measuring and shut off valves.
Valves shall be globe style design and shall have a position indicator and memory stop or locking device so that the valve can be closed without disturbing the setting and returned to the balanced position without further adjustment.
B.
Valves shall be as manufactured by Tour and Andersson, Inc. or approved equal.
C.
Nominal working pressure for the valves shall be 250 psig or greater at 250̊F.
D.
Provide portable flow measuring instruments which shall be turned over to the Owner at the completion of work.
23 05 23-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
E.
Butterfly valves can be used for only shutoff valves and shall not be used for balancing.
F.
Coil Hook-Up Assembly: Install with Tour & Andersson balancing valves 2” and smaller,
Victaulic Series 799 or 79V Koil-Kit™ to complete terminal hookup at coil outlet and to reduce space requirements. Assembly shall consist of Victaulic Series 78U union port fitting,
Series 78Y strainer/ball valve or Series 78T union/ball valve combination and flexible hoses.
2.07
BALL VALVES
A.
Ball Valves up to 2½" may be used for all water services as an alternate to gate valves.
B.
Ball valves shall be bronze body, bronze ball and stem, Teflon seats and seals threaded ends,
400 psig cold W.O.G. Worchester No. 411T-SE or equal. "APOLLO" 70 - 100 Series.
2.08
HIGH PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
Butterfly valves may be used for as an alternative to gate valves for sizes 2½" and above for chilled water, and condenser water only.
B.
Valves shall be similar to ABZ Valves & Controls Fig. 402-100 (ANSI Class 150) or Fig.
422-100 (ANSI Class 300) lug type body; or similar to NIBCO Fig. # LCS6822 (ANSI Class
150) or NIBCO Fig. # LCS7822 (ANSI Class 300). Butterfly valves shall not be directly connected to equipment without a spool piece. All valves shall be capable of bi-directional dead end service.
C.
Valves in insulated piping shall have necks extending 2" above the flange to accommodate full thickness of insulation.
D.
Operators:
1.
Valves to 4" shall have lever operators with 10 locking positions and adjustable memory stop.
2.
Valves larger than 4" shall be equipped with manual hand wheel gear operators.
3.
In Mechanical Equipment Rooms, provide chain wheel operators on all valves located at or above 7'-0" AFF.
E.
Bodies: Shall be A216-WCB carbon steel lug style.
F.
Stems: Shall be 17-4PH stainless steel for maximum strength and corrosion resistance and must be blow out.
G.
Discs: Shall be 316 stainless steel and double offset for tight shutoff, ease of operation and maximum seat life.
H.
Seats: Shall be of reinforced PTFE and held in place by bolted on seat retainers to assure bidirectional dead end service. Seats retained by spring clips are not acceptable.
I.
Shaft Bushings: Shall be PTFE impregnated 316 stainless steel on either side of the disc.
J.
Packing: Shall be underneath drawn design to allow direct mounting of actuators eliminating brackets and couplings. Packing shall be a stack of multiple PTFE rings.
23 05 23-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
K.
Design Working Pressure: Fig 401-100 is 285 psi; Fig. 422-100 is 740 psi.
L.
Factory Test Pressure: 120% of above working pressures.
M.
Dead End Test: 100% of above working pressures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where valves are to be installed and determine space conditions and notify architect in writing of conditions determined to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install valves where shown or specified, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that valves comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Install a manually operated bypass globe valve around all control valves (motorized or selfcontained regulators).
1
C.
Contractor is responsible for final valve orientation. Valves shall be installed in such a manner to avoid leakage through their stem seals, while still orienting valve handles to provide suitable accessibility and operability. Valve orientation shall be in compliance with the valve manufacturer’s installation instructions. Valve handle orientation shall be indicated on the piping shop drawings. Valves orientation and handles not shown on the piping shop drawings will be subject to possible removal and reorientation in the field based on the Engineer’s observations following the completion of construction.
D.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to prevent interference of valves with other components of systems.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of valves, test valves to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning valves, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
END OF SECTION 23 05 23
23 05 23-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 05 48
VIBRATION ISOLATION
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary
General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The Work includes providing all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all vibration isolations as shown on the
Drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of this equipment with characteristics and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than ten (10) years.
B.
Provide products produced by the manufacturers which are listed in Section 23 05 12, "Approved
Manufacturer's List".
C.
Provide equipment whose performance under specified conditions is certified by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
1.06
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
1.07
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
All mechanical equipment shall be mounted in accordance with the specifications below and for the specific requirements shown in the equipment schedule.
B.
The isolation manufacturer shall supply all unit isolators, complete rails, fan and motor bases and structural steel forms for concrete inertia blocks, where called for and shall be responsible for the
23 05 48-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 selection of all vibration eliminators and shall guarantee to meet the requirements of these
Specifications.
C.
Wherever rotational speed is mentioned as the disturbing frequency, the lowest such speed in the system shall be used. All isolation devices shall be selected for uniform static deflections according to distribution of weight. Lateral motion of all isolators shall be 3 " maximum during start-up and shut-down.
D.
"Outdoor" isolators, steel parts other than galvanized springs and cadmium plated springs shall be suitably coated to resist corrosion. Isolators shall be equipped with limit stops to resist wind velocity.
E.
All fan units and air handling units (except fans with wheels under 27") shall be isolated as follows:
1.
Up to 450 RPM: 75% efficiency (3 2 " maximum deflection)
2.
450 RPM to 850 RPM: 90%
3.
850 RPM and over: 95%
F.
Submittals shall show disturbing frequency, required efficiency, designed deflection and outside diameter of springs, when pertinent.
G.
All horizontal pipe runs within the mechanical equipment room area, but not less than 50 feet from connected equipment shall be isolated from building structure by means of units designed for insertion in rods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
VIBRATION ISOLATION
A.
Mountings:
1.
Type A: a.
Double deflection neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of
0.35. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom, so they need not be bolted to the floor. b.
Bolt holes shall be provided for those areas where bolting is required. On equipment such as small vent sets and close coupled pumps, steel rails shall be used above the mounts to compensate for the overhang. c.
Manufacturer/Type:
Mason Industries, Inc.: ND or Rails RND
Vibration Eliminator Co.: T44 or D-Rails
2.
Type B: a.
Spring isolators shall be free-standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with 3 " neoprene acoustical friction pads between the base plate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. b.
Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. c.
Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflections, compressed spring height and solid spring height.
23 05 48-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT d.
Manufacturer/Type:
Mason Industries, Inc.:
Vibration Eliminator Co.
FIT Project C1195
SLFH, on rails type ICS
OSK
3.
Type C: a.
Equipment with operating weight different from the installed weight such as chillers, boilers, etc., and equipment exposed to the wind such as cooling towers, shall be mounted on spring mountings as described under Type "B" of this paragraph, but a housing shall be used that includes vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housings shall serve as blocking during erection and cooling tower mounts shall be located between the supporting steel and roof or the grillage and dunnage. The installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance of 2 " shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation.
Mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. b.
Manufacturer/Type:
Mason Industries, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co.
SLR
KW
4.
Type D: a.
Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and a double deflection neoprene element in series. Neoprene elements shall have a minimum deflection 0.35".
The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection and be seated in a neoprene cup with an integral molded bushing that passes through the lower hanger box. b.
Manufacturer/Type:
Mason Industries, Inc. DNHS
Vibration Eliminator Co. SNRC
5.
Type E: a.
Vibration hangers shall be as described under Type "D" of this paragraph, but they shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after installation is complete and the hanger subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale.
Submittals shall include an isolation layout hanger drawing showing the proper location of each isolator, tagging its actual loading. b.
Manufacturer/Type:
Mason Industries, Inc. PCDNHS
Vibration Eliminator Co. PR
6.
Type F: a.
Vibration hangers shall contain a double deflection neoprene element manufactured as an integral part of the element design to prevent short circuiting of the rod as it penetrates the housing body. Minimum static deflection shall be .35". b.
Manufacturer/Type:
Mason Industries, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co.
HD
SNC
7.
Type DE: a.
Elastomer hanger rod isolators shall incorporate the following:
1) Molded unit type neoprene elements with projecting bushing, lining rod clearance hole.
2) Neoprene element to be minimum 1 : " thick.
23 05 48-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
3) Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting.
4) Clearance between mounting hanger rod and neoprene bushing shall be minimum of c ".
5) Minimum static deflection of 0.35". b.
Mason Type HD or approved equal.
B.
Bases:
1.
Type G: a.
Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases for both driver and driven machines. b.
Bases shall be rectangular in shape for all equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases which may be "tee" or "L" shaped. Pump bases for split case pumps shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells.
All perimeter members shall be WF beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10th of the longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14" provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of one inch. c.
Bases shall be WF bases as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. or approved equal.
2.
Type H: a.
Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide steel members welded to height-saving brackets to cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. b.
Members shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent strains in the equipment. c.
Inverted saddles shall be ICS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. or approved equal.
3.
Type J: a.
Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish structural channel concrete forms for floating foundations. b.
Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide support for suction and discharge base ells. The base depth shall be a minimum of 1/10th of the longest span, but not less than 6" or greater than 14". Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcement consisting of 2 on 6" centers running both ways and a layer
1 2 " above the bottom and a top layer of reinforcing steel as above for all bases exceeding 120" in one direction. Isolators shall be set into pocket housings which are an integral part of the base construction and set at the proper height to maintain a
1" clearance below the base. Bases shall be furnished with templates and anchor bolt sleeves as part of this system. c.
Manufacturer/Type:
Mason Industries, Inc. KIPWF
Vibration Eliminator Co. SN Frames
4.
Type R: a.
Rooftop fans, condensing units, exterior ducted air handling units, etc. shall be installed on continuous equipment support piers which shall combine a regular equipment support and an isolation system into one assembly. The system shall be designed with 1", 2" or 3" static deflection steel springs which are both adjustable, removable and interchangeable after equipment has been installed. The system shall maintain the same operating and installed height both with and without the equipment load and shall be fully restrained during wind load conditions allowing no more than 3 " motion in any direction. The isolation pier shall be designed to
23 05 48-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 accept 2" rigid insulation and to be an integral part of the membrane waterproofing.
The entire assembly shall be dry galvanized or plastic coated. The isolation rail pier system shall be model R-7000 as manufactured by Mason Berger East, Inc. b.
Manufacturer/Type:
Mason Industries, Inc. R-7000
Vibration Eliminator Co.
C.
ISOLATION SCHEDULE:
Type of Equipment
Refrigeration Reciprocating Compressors,
Condensing Units or Chillers
Cooling Towers
Factory Assembled, Air Handling Equipment:
Vibration Eliminator Specification
Type for Equipment Location:
With No Occupied or Unoccupied Spaces
Below
Type A
(0.4" deflection)
Type A
(1.0" deflection)
Above Occupied or Unoccupied
Spaces
Type B
(1.0" deflection)
Type C
(3.0" deflection)
Floor Mounted Units
Type B
(1.0" deflection)
Type B
(2.0" deflection above 600 rpm)
Type B-H
(2.5" deflection below 600 rpm)
2.02
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A.
Where shown on the drawings, provide a flexible pipe connector at pumps and other vibrating equipment.
B.
Flexible connector shall be:
1.
Manufacturer of nylon tire cord and EPDM, both molded and cured with hydraulic presses.
2.
Straight connectors to have two spheres reinforced with a mold-in external ductile iron ring between spheres.
3.
Elbow shall be long radius reducing type.
4.
Rated 250 psi at 170
F. Dropping in straight line to 170 psi at 250
F for sizes 1 2 " to 12".
Elbows shall be rated no less than 90% of straight connections.
5.
Sizes 10" and 12" to employ control cables with neoprene end fittings isolated from anchor plates by means of 2 " bridge bearing neoprene bushings.
6.
Minimum safety factor, 4 to 1 at maximum pressure ratings.
7.
Submittals to include test reports.
8.
Mason Type MFTNC Superflex, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION AND COORDINATION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where this equipment is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work.
23 05 48-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. Inform other trades following work, such as plastering or electrical, to avoid any contact which would reduce the vibration isolation.
D.
Bring to the Architect's attention, prior to installation, any conflicts with other trades which may result in unavoidable rigid contact with equipment or piping as described herein, due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense.
E.
Bring to the Architect's attention, any discrepancies between the Specifications and field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation.
Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the Contractor's expense.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount floor-mounted equipment on 4" concrete housekeeping pads over complete floor area of equipment. Mount vibration isolating devices and related inertia blocks on concrete pad.
B.
Each fan and motor assembly shall be supported on a single structural steel frame. Flexible duct connections shall be provided at inlet and discharge ducts.
C.
The machine to be isolated shall be supported by a structural steel frame or concrete inertial base.
D.
Brackets shall be provided to accommodate the isolator. The vertical position and size of the bracket shall be specified by the isolator manufacturer.
E.
The minimum operating clearance between the equipment frame or rigid steel base frame and the housekeeping pad or floor shall be 1". Minimum operating clearance between concrete inertia base and housekeeping pad or floor shall be 2".
F.
The equipment structural steel or concrete inertia base shall be placed in position and supported temporarily by blocks or shims, as appropriate, prior to the installation of the machine or isolators.
G.
The isolators shall be installed without raising the machine and frame assembly.
H.
After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, the isolators shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from the blocks to the isolators. When all isolators are properly adjusted, the blocks or shims shall be barely free and shall be removed.
I.
Isolation mounting deflection shall be (minimum) as specified or scheduled.
J.
Install equipment with flexibility in wiring connection.
K.
Verify that all installed isolator and mounting systems permit equipment motion in all directions.
Adjust or provide additional resilient restraints to flexibly limit start-up equipment lateral motion to 3 ".
23 05 48-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
L.
Prior to start-up, clean out all foreign matter between bases and equipment. Verify that there are no isolation short circuits in the base isolators or seismic restraints.
M.
All piping and ductwork to be isolated shall freely pass through walls and floors without rigid connections. Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow passage of piping or ductwork and maintain : " to 1 3 " clearance around the outside surfaces. This clearance space shall be tightly packed with firestopping or fiberglass and caulked airtight after installation of piping or duct ductwork.
N.
No rigid connections between equipment and building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration isolation system herein specified.
O.
The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping or conduit which makes rigid contact with the "building" unless permitted in this Specification. Building includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls.
P.
Obtain inspection and approval of any installation to be covered or enclosed, prior to such closure.
Q.
Diagonal thrust restraint shall be as described for Type D hanger with the same deflection as specified for the spring mountings. The spring element shall be designed so it can be pre-set for thrust and adjusted to allow for maximum of 3 " movement at start and stop. Diagonal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust. Restraint shall be Mason Type WB or approved equal.
3.03
PIPING ISOLATOR INSTALLATION
A.
The isolators shall be installed with the isolator hanger box attached to, or hung as close as possible to, the structure.
B.
The isolators shall be suspended from substantial structural members, not from slab diaphragm unless specifically permitted.
C.
Hanger rods shall be aligned to clear the hanger box.
D.
Horizontal suspended pipe 2" and smaller and all steam piping shall be suspended by Type DE isolator with a minimum d " deflection. water pipe larger than 2" shall be supported by Type E isolator with minimum 1" or same static deflection as isolated equipment to which pipe connects, whichever is greater.
E.
Horizontal pipe floor supported at slab shall be supported via Type B, with a minimum static deflection of 1" or same deflection as isolated equipment to which pipe connects, whichever is greater.
F.
Vertical riser pipe supports shall utilize neoprene elements.
G.
Vertical riser guides, if required, shall avoid direct contact of piping with building.
H.
Pipe sway braces, where required shall utilize two (2) neoprene elements.
23 05 48-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
FIT Project C1195
A.
Obtain inspection and approval of any installation to be covered or enclosed, prior to such closure.
B.
Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation devices herein specified, the local representative of the isolation materials manufacturer shall inspect the completed system and report, in writing, any installation error, improperly selected isolation devices, or other faults in the system that could affect the performance of the system. Contractor shall submit a report to the Architect, including the manufacturer's representatives final report, indicating all isolation reported as improperly installed or requiring correction, and include a report by the Contractor on steps taken to properly complete the isolation work.
END OF SECTION 23 05 48
23 05 48-8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 05 80
HVAC SPECIALTIES
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary
General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all HVAC Specialties as shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of this equipment with characteristics and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than ten (10) years.
B.
Provide products produced by the manufacturers, which are listed in Section 23 05 12, entitled
"Approved Manufacturers List".
C.
Provide equipment whose performance under specified conditions is certified by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
1.06
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
THERMOMETERS
A.
Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings and where specified herein, separable well-type dial or 9" mercury adjustable angle type in glass stem, thermometers, Model 50 EI60E as manufactured by Ashcroft or approved equal.
23 05 80-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
All thermometers shall be installed in such a manner as to cause a minimum of restriction to flow in the pipes and so that they can easily be read from the floor.
C.
Dial thermometers shall be 5 inch hermetically sealed, bimetal with stainless steel cases, antiparallax dials with raised jet black figures, stainless steel stems, and separable sockets (wells) unless otherwise specified.
D.
Thermometers for duct mounting shall have union connections in lieu of separable wells.
E.
Separable wells shall be stainless steel for use in steel pipe and brass for use in copper pipe.
Separable wells shall be standard type for uninsulated pipe and lagging extension type of proper length for insulated pipe. Stem shall extend a minimum of 3 2 " into the fluid, or 75% of inside clear diameter for smaller size pipes.
F.
The accuracy of all thermometers shall be within 1% of the full scale range.
G.
All instrument wells for controls and indicators furnished by the temperature control manufacturer shall be installed under this Section.
H.
Where conditions are such that thermometers would not be readable from the floor, remote bulb dial thermometers shall be mounted on panelboards. The thermometers shall be 5 inch dials and shall be vapor actuated. The thermometers shall have separable wells. Panel mounted thermometers shall be provided with an engraved nameplate mounted below each thermometer to identify its service. The nameplates shall be chrome plated with black filled letters.
I.
A thermometer shall be installed in the hot water inlet and outlet of each heat exchanger. A thermometer shall be installed in the chilled water and condenser water inlet and outlet of each refrigeration machine. Additional thermometers shall be installed where indicated on the
Drawings.
J.
The scale range for the thermometers shall be as follows:
Hot Water
Service
Temperature
Range
30
to 300
F
Chilled Water
Condenser Water
0
to 120
F
0
to 120
F
Dual Temperature Water 30 to 300 F
Remarks
2.02
PRESSURE GAUGES
A.
Furnish and install where indicated on the Drawings and where specified herein, Model 1279 liquid-filled pressure gauges with phenolic casings as manufactured by Ashcroft. Acceptable equals include Weiss Model LF4UGY1 or Noshok Model 660.
B.
All gauges shall be installed so as to be easily readable from the floor. Where conditions are such that gauges on piping would not be readable from the floor, the gauges shall be installed on panelboards.
C.
All gauges shall have black phenolic casings. The gauges shall have white faces with black filled engraved numerals and adjustable pointer. The diameter of the dial shall be 4 2 inches.
Gauges shall have brass bronzed brushed rotary type movement.
23 05 80-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
D.
Panel mounted gauges shall be designed for flush mounting with back connections and shall be provided with an engraved nameplate mounted below each gauge to identify its service. The nameplates shall be chrome plated with black filled letters.
E.
Differential pressure switches, pressure sensing pipe taps, furnished by temperature control manufacturers shall be installed under this Section.
F.
The accuracy of all gauges shall be within 2 % of the scale range.
G.
All gauges on water lines shall be fitted with filter type pressure snubbers consisting of d " dia. x c " thick, micro metallic stainless steel filter, as manufactured by Operating and Maintenance
Specialties or approved equal. All gauges on steam lines shall be fitted with siphon tubes.
H.
A block-and-bleed type needle valve shall be installed on the water side of each gauge. A stainless steel bar stock block-and-bleed type needle valve with a siphon tube shall be installed on the system side of each steam gauge.
I.
A pressure gauge shall be installed in the suction and discharge of each hot water, chilled water and condenser water pump. A pressure gauge shall be installed in the chilled water and condenser water inlet and outlet of each refrigeration machine. A pressure gauge shall be installed in the inlet and outlet of each heat exchanger and each air handler coil. A pressure gauge shall be installed at the inlet and outlet of each strainer. Additional pressure gauges shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings.
J.
The scale range of pressure gauges shall be as follows:
Chilled Water
Condenser Water
Hot Water
Service
Pressure
Range
0 to 100 psig
0 to 100 psig
0 to 100 psig
K.
All other pressure gauges shall have a range at least twice the working pressure, but in no case less than 0 to 30 lbs.
2.03
MACHINERY GUARDS
A.
Moving parts of machinery exposed to contact by personnel shall be guarded by barrier type which complies with OSHA.
B.
Exposed moving parts such as belts and couplings shall have not less than : " No. 16 gauge metal guards with all edges rounded and gauge, material and construction shall be in accordance with
OSHA standards - paragraphs 7173.3, 7173.5 and 7174.1. Guards shall have 1 3 " x 1 3 " x c " angle iron frame properly supported.
C.
All machinery guards covering the ends of motor or equipment shafts shall have openings for the insertion of a tachometer. Machinery guards shall be painted with two coats of machinery gray enamel.
23 05 80-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.04
EXPANSION TANKS
FIT Project C1195
A.
Furnish and install as shown on the Drawings, EX-TROL Pressurized Diagram Type Expansion
Tanks as manufactured by AMTROL INC. It shall be air precharged to the initial fill pressure of the system. It shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure of 125 psi and shall be furnished with ASME stamp and certification papers. It shall have a sealed-in elastomer diaphragm suitable for an operating temperature of 240
F. (EX-TROL to be furnished with saddles for horizontal installation).
2.05
EXPANSION JOINTS, BALL JOINTS, LOOPS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES
A.
Provisions for expansion in piping mains, branches, and risers shall be made by the installation of offsets, expansion loops, or compensators as indicated on the Drawings and as required. Every
100'-0" horizontal steam and hot water piping shall have expansion loop and anchors. Minimum loop shall be 8'-0" by 6'-0" if not indicated on the Drawings.
B.
All piping with loops or compensators shall be anchored so as to throw all expansion toward the loops or compensators.
C.
Guides shall be installed on both sides of each expansion loop and compensator. Guides shall be
Flexonics pipe alignment guides or approved equal. Anchors and guides shall be secured to beams, columns or concrete slabs.
D.
Pipe hangers and rollers are not considered guides.
E.
Provide 12" long guides for each expansion joint. Guides shall be located 3'-0" on each side of the expansion joints.
F.
Furnish and install as shown on plans, or where necessary to absorb max. 1 : " expansion and max. 3 " contraction between two anchor points in copper lines, up to and including 2 2 ",
Flexonics Model HB Expansion Compensators having two-ply phosphor bronze bellows and brass shrouds and end fittings, as manufactured by Flexonics Division of Calumet and Heela,
Inc., Bartlett, Illinois. All internal parts shall be of non-ferrous metals. Service pressure shall be external to the bellows. Compensators shall have internal guides extending the full length of the bellows travel. Compensators shall have internal positive anti-torque devices to prevent twist or torque on installation and shall have properly located positioning clip to insure installation of correct end-to-end dimension to allow full rated traverse. Compensator shall be for max. 125 psig. working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed 175 psig.
G.
Furnish and install as shown on plans, or where necessary to absorb max. 1 : " expansion and max. 3 " contraction between two anchor points in iron and steel pipe lines up to and including
2 2 ", Flexonics Model II Expansion Compensators having two-ply stainless steel bellows and carbon steel shrouds and end fittings, as manufactured by Flexonics Division of Calumet &
Heela, Inc., Bartlett, Illinois. Service pressure shall be external to the bellows. Compensators shall have properly located positioning clip to insure installation at correct end-to-end dimension to allow full rated traverse. Compensator shall be for Max. 150 psig. working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed 200 psig.
H.
Expansion joints in 3" and above piping shall be hydraulically formed bellows type with internal sleeves and external covers for insulation. Expansion joints, except where otherwise noted, shall be of the self-equalizing type having fully-contoured, cast iron equalizing rings.
23 05 80-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
I.
Provide non-equalizing type expansion joints with internal sleeves on low pressure service (up to
15 psig including test pressure) such as diesel engine exhaust, or flexible cooling tower connections.
J.
Manufacturer shall note on all submittal forms the resultant anchor loads due to pressure thrust and compressive forces at design conditions. Expansion joints shall be as manufactured by
Flex-Hose, ADSCO, Zallea, Flexonic, or approved equal.
K.
Ball Joints
1.
Flexible ball joints shall be Barco Type "N" rated for continuous service at 525
F and shall have provision for seal adjustment. Ball joints shall be carbon steel, providing 15
angular flexing movement and 360 rotation, with two pressure molded non-asbestos composition gaskets.
2.
All ball joints shall be with welded ends.
3.
All joints shall be designed for welding to piping specified for the various services.
4.
All joints shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2.06
AIR VENTS
A.
In installing water piping systems and all equipment, carefully plan the actual installation in such a manner that high pints and air pockets are kept to a minimum and are properly vented where they are unavoidable. All air elimination devices called for on the Drawings and in these
Specifications shall be provided and properly installed. In addition, furnish and install all other air elimination devices which may be required due to job conditions. Assume responsibility for a proper, continuous and automatic air elimination to assure even and balanced distribution of water to all equipment.
B.
Furnish and install an Armstrong No. 1 AV or Sarco 13W automatic air vent with test petcock at each high point in the water piping mains and where indicated on the Drawings. Furnish and install a 125 psig rated valve on the system side of each automatic air vent. Vents on hot water, dual temperature water and chilled water lines shall have Hoke Fig. No. PY-271 valves or approved equal. Vents on all other water lines shall have Hoke Fig. No. RB-271 valves or approved equal.
2.07
V-BELT DRIVES
A.
All V-belt drives furnished under this Section shall be Gates Rubber Co., Woods, or approved equal. Drives shall be designed with an overload factor of twice the fan brake horsepower but in no case less than 125% of motor horsepower rating. Machined cast iron pulleys shall be used.
Manufacturer's shop drawings shall state actual transmission capacity of each drive. Provide companion sheaves for adjustable sheave drives. Companion sheaves shall be selected such that the individual belts shall not exceed a two degree misalignment of the groove center lines between the driving and driven sheaves. Sheaves shall be complete with flanges and locking devices. All sheaves shall be selected with a 1.5 minimum service factor.
B.
Provide matching belts.
C.
All motors up to 2 2 HP shall have variable speed drives.
D.
All motors 10 HP to 25 HP for speeds below 1000 RPM shall have variable speed drives.
23 05 80-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
E.
Provide fixed drives above 1000 RPM for 10 to 25 HP and for all units above 25 HP.
2.08
STRAINERS FOR WATER SYSTEM
A.
Furnish and install a full size Y-pattern strainer on the inlet of each control valve and each water pump, and where indicated on the Drawings.
B.
The strainers shall be as manufactured by Spence, Sarco, Barnes and Jones, Elliott, Crane or
Mueller.
C.
All strainers, except where otherwise noted, shall have bronze body up to 2 2 ", semi-steel above
2 2 ", rated at 125 psig for all systems with 50 psig max. pressure and 250 psig for all others.
Strainers 2 inch diameter and smaller shall have screwed ends. Strainers 2 2 inch diameter and larger shall have flanged ends.
D.
All strainers shall have removable cylindrical or conical screens of brass construction. They shall be designed to allow blowing out of accumulated sediment and to facilitate removal and replacement of the screen without disconnecting the main piping.
E.
Screens for water 1/16" for 3" inclusive, c " for 4" and above.
F.
An approved blow-out connection with gate valve shall be made to each strainer. The valves shall be located not higher than 8 feet above the floor. All drain connections shall be piped to floor drains.
2.09
REDUCING AND SAFETY VALVES FOR WATER SYSTEM
A.
Furnish and install pressure reducing and safety valves for makeup water systems and where indicated on the drawings.
B.
The reducing valve shall be Model 7 pressure reducing valve with field adjustable setting as manufactured by Bell & Gossett or equal as approved by the Architect.
C.
The safety valves shall be of size and capacity as indicated on the Drawings. The valves shall be made by Bell and Gossett or approved equal and shall have 150 pound raised face flange on the inlet and discharge for all sizes 2 2 " and above 2" and below shall be screwed.
D.
The safety valves shall be steel valves with stainless steel trim. The bonnet shall be enclosed and equipped with a packed lifting lever. The spring shall be carbon steel rated for 450
F.
E.
The vertical discharge line from the safety valves shall be installed as close to the safety valves as possible and piped to drain.
2.10
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST STATIONS
A.
Furnish and install in each supply and return runout to each reheat coil and where indicated on the
Drawings, a 3 " MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe c " OD. Fitting shall be stainless steel with valve core of Nordel (Max. 275
F), fitted with a color coded and marked cap with gasket, and shall be rated at 1000 psig.
23 05 80-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
In addition, the installing Contractor shall supply the Owner with six pressure gauge adapters with c " OD probe and 6 five inch stem pocket testing thermometers; 25-125
F for chilled water and six 0-220 F for hot water.
C.
Provide one pressure and temperature test kit consisting of one 0-60 PSI, water pressure gauge and one 0-30 psi water pressure gauge each with No. 500 gauge adapter attached, a 25-125 F pocket testing thermometer, a 0.220 F pocket test thermometer, a No. 500 gauge adapter, and a protective carrying case. Provide one additional 0-60 psi pressure gauge and one additional 0 to
30 psi pressure gauge.
D.
Test kit shall be used by the Balancing Contractor to balance the systems and then it shall be turned over to the Owner.
E.
Test stations and test kit shall be manufactured by Paterson Engineering Company, Inc. or approved equal.
2.11
REFRIGERATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Refrigerant Filter-Dryer: Provide, refrigerant filter-dryers. Refrigerant filter-dryers shall be replaceable core "Catch All" type, as manufactured by Sporlan Valve Company.
B.
Moisture and Liquid Indicator: Provide combination liquid and moisture indicators type "See
All", as manufactured by Sporlan Valve Company.
C.
Refrigerant Strainers: Provide Refrigerant Strainers. Strainers shall be as manufactured by
Henry Valve Company, Type 895.
D.
Thermal Expansion Valves: Provide Thermal Expansion Valves. Thermal expansion valves shall be Type "MVE-G", as manufactured by Sporlan Valve Company, or approved equal, with external equalizer and remote bulb with refrigerant 22 charge.
1.
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer rating tables and/or selection charts for approval.
E.
Liquid Line Solenoid Valves: Provide Liquid Line Solenoid Valves. Valves to have stainless steel diaphragm-welded and lead-proof construction, replaceable thermostatic element and tight seating. Valve shall be as manufactured by Sporlan Valve Company or approved equal.
F.
Flexible Pipe Connections: Provide flexible pipe connections. Flexible pipe connectors to be all bronze construction, metal braided type suitable for Refrigerant 22.
2.12
EVACUATION OF REFRIGERATION PIPING
A.
When testing of refrigerant piping is completed as specified hereinafter, blow off the pressure in the system to atmosphere and provide final evacuation. Provide a vacuum pump capable of pulling vacuum of at least 1 mm Hg. absolute. Use a Zimmerli gauge to read vacuum. Remove all moisture from the system. Operate the vacuum pump until a vacuum of 2.5 mm Hg. is achieved.
B.
When the system is evacuated, break the vacuum with oil pumped, dry nitrogen, open the compressor suction and discharge service valves and re-evacuate the system to 2.5 mm Hg. absolute. Stop vacuum pump and allow system to stand under a vacuum a minimum of 12 hours.
If no noticeable rise in pressure has taken place after 12 hours, the system shall be charged.
23 05 80-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FIT Project C1195
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where these specialties are to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install HVAC Specialties where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that HVAC Specialties comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of HVAC Specialties with other components of systems.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of HVAC Specialties, test HVAC Specialties to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
END OF SECTION 23 05 80
23 05 80-8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING AND BALANCING
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
All piping and equipment shall be tested. Labor including standby electrician, materials, instruments and power required for testing shall be furnished unless otherwise indicated under the particular Section of the Specification.
B.
Tests shall be performed in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Architect and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction.
C.
In no case shall piping, equipment, or accessories be subjected to pressure exceeding their ratings.
D.
All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the approval of the Architects.
E.
Any damage resulting from tests to any and all trades shall be repaired and damaged materials replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Architect.
F.
The duration of tests shall be as determined by all authorities having jurisdiction, but in no case less than the time prescribed below.
G.
Equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons of the year shall be tested during the appropriate season. Tests shall be performed on individual equipment, systems, and their controls. Whenever the equipment or system under test is interrelated and depends upon the operation of other equipment, systems and controls for proper operation, functioning and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment or system being tested.
H.
All fans and duct systems shall be completely balanced by the adjustment of sheaves, dampers, registers and other volume and diverting control devices, to obtain the air quantities indicated on the design drawings. Replace sheaves if required to meet design conditions.
I.
All pumps and piping systems shall be completely balanced by the adjustment of plug cocks, globe valves or other control devices, to obtain flow quantities indicated on the design drawings.
J.
Tests shall be performed in presence and to satisfaction of Architect, and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction. Submit completed reports for approval. If air and water balancing
23 05 93-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 cannot be verified in two, four hour tests (total of eight hours) the Contractor shall pay the
Architect or his representative for any additional time spent to balance the system.
K.
(Required by NYC Code; use for NYC Projects). Upon completion of the work, a test shall be conducted in the presence and under the direction of a NYS Licensed Professional Engineer, retained by the Contractor, and qualified to conduct such tests. The tests shall show compliance with the code requirements for ventilation and the proper functioning of operating devices, before the system is approved. Tests shall also be conducted under the direction of the same
Licensed Professional Engineer to demonstrate that all installed fire and fire smoke dampers operate properly. The Contractor shall submit a letter signed and sealed by the Licensed
Professional Engineer indicating that such testing has been successfully conducted and shall make all associated controlled inspection and other submissions to the NYC Building
Department.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Prior to installation of the mechanical systems, engage the services of an independent air and water balancing firm that shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The firm shall have no affiliation with a mechanical contracting or sheetmetal company. Balancing and testing company shall be a member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), National
Environmental Balance Bureau (NEBB) or Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB).
The balancing firm shall have at least one member of its full time staff who is a licensed professional engineer who shall supervise the balancing work. Prior to balancing, a list of instruments to be used shall be submitted to the Architect. All instruments shall be calibrated within six months before tests.
B.
Prior to installation of the mechanical systems, the licensed Professional Engineer for the
Balancing and Testing Company shall review the contract documents to confirm that all balancing devices are provided to allow for complete balancing of the air and water systems for the project. The Balancing and Testing Company shall submit a letter confirming that they have performed this review and identifying any issues.
After the mechanical systems are installed and before the systems are enclosed behind walls and ceilings, the PE for the Balancing and Testing Company shall perform a review of the installation to verify that the required balancing devices have been installed and that the systems are ready for balancing. The Balancing and Testing Company shall submit a letter confirming that the inspection has been performed and that the system is ready for balancing.
Both letters shall be signed and sealed by the Balancing and Testing Company’s Professional
Engineer.
C.
When all specified testing and balancing procedures have been completed, a written report shall be submitted to the Architect for review. The report shall be tabulated in standard
AABC/TABB format. As part of the Architect's review process, the accuracy of the balancing report shall be field spot checked on a random basis, with the assistance of the balancing firm's project supervisor. The HVAC Contractor shall reimburse the Architect for all time spent in excess of eight working hours, to demonstrate the accuracy of the balancing report.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work". Submit all test and balancing reports as described hereinafter.
23 05 93-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
FIT Project C1195
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FIELD TEST OF PIPING
A.
During construction properly cap or plug all lines to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc. The system of piping shall be blown through wherever necessary after completion (for the purpose of removing grit, dirt, sand, etc., from all equipment and piping), for as long a time as is required to thoroughly clean the apparatus.
B.
Use anti-freeze solution for piping to be tested in winter.
C.
All piping shall be tested as hereinafter specified. Tests shall be made after erection and before covering is applied or piping painted or concealed, and as sections of mains and groups of risers are completed. The extent of the work completed before pressure tests are made shall be determined by the Architect.
D.
All piping, unless otherwise specified, shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure at least 1-1/2 times the maximum designed working pressure (but not less than 50 lbs. per square inch) for a sufficiently long time to detect all leaks and defects; and after testing shall be made tight in the most approved manner. Tests shall be repeated once after leaks and defects have been repaired.
When automatic control valves, equipment and similar devices which are incapable of withstanding test pressures applied to piping, such devices shall be removed, or otherwise protected during tests. After approval of such tests, devices shall be installed and tested with operating medium to operating pressures. The following shall be tested for four consecutive hours and proved tight. Leaks shall be remedied by replacing defective work.
Hydrostatic
Item
Chilled water, dual temperature water
Condenser water
Field Test
100 psi
100 psi
E.
Leaks appearing during the various pressure tests shall be corrected by replacing all defective materials or welds and subsequent tests shall be made until the piping is found perfect.
Caulking of screwed joints or pending of welds is prohibited. Wherever it is necessary to cut out a weld and the ends of the pipe cannot be conveniently brought together, then a short piece of pipe shall be fitted in and welded as approved by the Architect.
F.
Provide all other tests required by the Building Department, Fire Department and all other authorities having jurisdiction.
3.02
RUNNING TEST OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A.
When directed, any section of the work, after it has been completed and otherwise satisfactorily tested, shall be put in actual operation and operated for a period of two (2) days of 24 hours each, during which time any defects which may appear shall be remedied and any adjustment which may be necessary shall be made.
23 05 93-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
During the time of the tests, repack all valves, make all adjustments and otherwise put the apparatus in perfect condition for operation, and instruct the Owner's representative in the use and management of the apparatus.
3.03
TEST OF REFRIGERATION PIPING
A.
Refrigeration piping shall be tested in accordance with the recommendations of the refrigeration equipment manufacturer and in the following sequence for a period of 24 hours.
High Side
Low Side
- Nitrogen at 300 psi
- Nitrogen at 150 psi
Entire System - Refrigerant at 5 psi
B.
No visible leaks, losses in pressure or increase in vacuum occur during test period.
3.04
EQUIPMENT TEST
A.
Demonstrate that all equipment and apparatus fulfill the requirements of the Specifications and that all equipment shall be operated and tested for rated capacities and specified characteristics.
Voltage and amperage readings shall be taken on all electric motors.
B.
Operate air handlers and fans for 40 hours and demonstrate fans operating at maximum capacity, with all variable volume dampers to be at the full open position.
3.05
FIRE DAMPER AND FIRE SMOKE DAMPER TEST (REQUIRED FOR NYC PROJECTS)
A.
Under this section test each and every fire damper by removing the fusible link to demonstrate that the damper properly closed.
B.
Under this section test each and every fire smoke damper by removing the fusible link or alternately applying heat to the heat detector for dampers utilizing het detectors) to demonstrate full closure. Also demonstrate that the damper opens and closes properly under automatic control through the operator.
C.
After the successful completion of such tests reinstall fusible links and reset heat detectors.
D.
All such tests shall be conducted under direction of a NYS Professional Engineer retain by the
Contractor.
3.06
TEST PREPARATION AND PROCEDURE
A.
On initial startup, prior to any tests, check the rotation and running amperage of all fan and pump motors to prevent damage to equipment by overload.
B.
Final balancing must be done with all systems completely installed and operating, and after the automatic temperature controls have had their final adjustment.
C.
New, clean filters must be installed in all supply systems prior to balancing.
D.
All water systems shall be completely filled and vented, and all strainers cleaned prior to balancing. Inspect expansion tanks for proper water level and operating of makeup water valves.
23 05 93-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
E.
All main supply air ducts shall be traversed, using a pitot tube and manometer. The manometer shall be calibrated to read two significant figures in all velocity pressure ranges. Duct traverses shall be conducted using the log-Tchebycheff method. The equal area method is not acceptable.
F.
A main duct is defined as either of the following:
1.
A duct serving five or more outlets.
2.
A duct serving two or more branch ducts.
3.
A duct serving a reheat coil.
4.
A zone duct from a multi-zone unit.
5.
A duct emanating from a fan discharge or plenum and terminating at one or more outlets.
G.
The intent of this operation is to measure by traverse the total air quantity supplied by the fan and to verify the distribution of air to zones.
H.
Submit data in support of all supply fan deliveries by the following four methods:
1.
By summation of the air quantity readings at all outlets.
2.
By duct traverse of main supply ducts and directly at the air handler or fan discharge.
3.
By a rotating vane traverse across a filter or coil bank.
4.
By plotting RPM and static pressure readings on the fan curve. Air density corrections must be indicated.
I.
For return air and exhaust fans, the rotating vane traverse is not required.
J.
Inspect all fan scrolls and remove objects or debris. Inspect all coils and remove debris or obstructions. Verify that all fire dampers are open.
K.
The supply air systems shall be completely balanced prior to the final balancing of the water systems.
L.
Upon completion of all air and water balancing, all duct dampers, plug valves and other throttling devices shall be permanently marked in the final adjusted position.
3.07
AIR BALANCE
A.
Record the following design requirements for all fans and fan motors from the approved shop drawings.
1.
Air quantities - CFM
2.
Approximate fan speed - RPM
3.
Fan static pressure (total or external) - inches of water.
4.
Maximum tip speed - FPM
5.
Outlet velocity - FPM
6.
Fan brake horsepower
7.
Motor horsepower
8.
Volts, phases, cycles and amps at design conditions.
B.
Record the following data from all fans and fan motors installed at the project:
1.
Manufacturer, model and size
2.
Motor horsepower, service factor and RPM
3.
Volts, phases, cycles and full load amps
4.
Motor starter and heaters size
5.
Equipment location
23 05 93-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
All fans and duct systems shall be completely balanced by the adjustment of sheaves, dampers, registers and other volume and diverting control devices, to obtain the air quantities indicated on the Drawings. Outside air and return air modulating dampers shall be adjusted to admit the specified quantities of air under all cycles of operation. All final adjusted air quantities shall be within 10% of the design requirements. Replace sheaves if required to meet design conditions.
D.
Record the following test data for all fans and motors installed at the Project at final balanced conditions:
1.
Fan speed RPM.
2.
Fan static pressure (external and total) inches of water.
3.
Static pressure drop across all filters, dampers, coils and other items in the supply fan casings.
4.
Motor operating amps. (Measure, record and report all motor amps at minimum outside air volume and at maximum outside air volume.) This requirement applies to both constant volume and variable air volume systems where economizers are present.
5.
Actual voltage
6.
Fan CFM
7.
Calculated brake horsepower.
E.
Submit single line diagrams of all duct systems indicating all terminal outlets identified by number. Data sheets shall list all such outlets denoted by the same numbers, including the outlet's size, "K" factor, location, CFM and jet velocity.
F.
Submit this data for all supply, return and exhaust air systems.
G.
Adjust the outside air, relief air and return air dampers to admit the required amounts of outside air. Record and submit outside air flow measurement and the outside, return and mixed air temperatures for both cycles after final adjustments.
H.
Air balancing shall be performed with filters partially blocked to simulate a pressure drop across the filters equal to that midway between the clean and the dirty condition.
3.08
WATER BALANCE
A.
Record the following design requirements for all pumps and pump motors from the approved shop drawings:
1.
Water quantity - GPM
2.
Total head - feet of water
3.
Pump speed - RPM
4.
Impeller size
5.
NPSH (if required)
6.
Motor horsepower
7.
Volts, phases, cycles and amps at design conditions
B.
Record the following data from all pumps motors installed at the project:
1.
Manufacturer, model and size.
2.
Impeller size
3.
Motor horsepower, service factor and RPM
4.
Volts, phases, cycles and full load amps
5.
Motor starter and heaters size
6.
Equipment location
23 05 93-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
All pumps and piping systems shall be completely balanced by the adjustment of plug cocks, globe valves or other control devices, to obtain the flow quantities indicated on the Drawings.
Balancing shall be done with all controls set for full flow through coils. All automatic throttling valves shall be in the full-open position. All automatic three-way valves shall have the bypass port closed.
D.
Record the following test data for all pumps and pump motors installed at the Project:
1.
Pump speed - RPM
2.
Total head at shut-off and dead-end discharge - feet of water. (Plot this value on pump curve as a verification of impeller size.)
3.
Suction, discharge and total head at final adjusted flow - feet of water.
E.
Balance the water flow through all condensers, coils, heat exchangers, etc., in accordance with design requirements.
F.
Flow shall be balanced through all equipment and coils by means of balancing and flow measuring valves provided. In addition pressure drop shall be measured and curves obtained from the various manufacturers indicating the relationship between flow and pressure drop through the coils and equipment. Readings shall be taken on calibrated test gauges. Submit curves with the final report. Final report shall document all flow and pressure drop measurements.
G.
Upon completion of the water balance, reconcile the total heat transfer through all coils by recording the entering and leaving water temperatures and the entering and leaving air dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures.
H.
Upon completion of balancing, adjust all differential bypasses and three-way valve bypasses for the same pressure drop or full bypass as on full flow.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
23 05 93-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 07 00
INSULATION FOR HVAC WORK
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes furnishing and installing all labor, materials, equipment, accessories and services necessary to provide Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Insulation installation, which is complete in every respect and of the composition and quality as shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
PIPE INSULATION
A.
The following pipes shall not be insulated. Insulate all other piping:
1.
Unions.
2.
Automatic air vent drain pipes.
3.
Drain pipes embedded in concrete.
4.
Condenser water chemical treatment piping.
5.
Refrigerant liquid and outdoor portions of refrigerant hot gas piping except where otherwise noted.
1.04
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
Insulate all ductwork except the following portions of ductwork:
1.
Ducts and casings internally insulated or provided with sound absorptive lining (except where humidifier is installed and except where located outdoors) may have external insulation thickness decreased 1” so that overall insulation thickness internal plus external complies with thickness specified herein.
2.
Return air ductwork for heating and ventilating systems, where return air ducts pass through heated areas.
3.
Exposed supply and return air ducts in air conditioned spaces if same supply air duct serves that area only.
4.
Exposed supply air duct in ventilated spaces, if same duct serves that area only.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
"Installer": A firm with at least ten 10 years successful installation experience on projects with piping and ductwork insulation similar to that required for this project.
B.
All insulation shall have composite (including insulation jacket or facing and adhesive) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding:
1.
Flame Spread 25
23 07 00-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.
Smoke Developed
3.
Fuel Contributed
50
50
FIT Project C1195
C.
Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes and cloths for fittings shall have component ratings as listed above. All products shall bear UL labels indicating the above are not exceeded.
D.
Provide certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these Specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength.
E.
Provide products produced by the manufacturers which are listed in Section 15600, "Approved
Manufacturers List"
F.
Insulation Materials: Insulating materials manufacturing facilities must be certified and registered with an approved registrar for conformance with ISO9000 quality standard.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work", and submit shop drawings and samples.
1.07
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work".
1.08
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site.
B.
Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the site in factory-fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp, or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products.
C.
Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
COLD AND DUAL TEMPERATURE PIPING INSULATION
A.
The following piping shall be covered with fiberglass insulation with vapor barrier of following thickness:
Service
Hot-Chilled (Dual Temperature)
Thickness
Refrigerant Suction
Up to 1 2 "
2" and above
Unit Drains
All sizes
Condenser Supply and Return
1"
1 2
1"
"
23 07 00-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
Outside Building
Condenser Water Supply Return
Inside Building
Cooling Tower Drain Piping
Up to Shut-Off Valve
Condensate Drain Piping from
Cooling Coil Drain Pans Except
When Exposed in MER
2"
1 2
1"
"
FIT Project C1195
2 "
B.
Insulation shall be glass fiber complying with ASTM C547, Type I with a maximum K factor of
0.23 BTU in/hr ft
2
F at 75 degrees F. mean temperature with factory-applied all service vapor barrier jacket with self seal lap meeting the requirement of ASTM C-1136 Type I.
C.
Insulation shall be heavy density fiberglass sectional pipe insulation as made by Owens-Corning
Fiberglass Corp. or Johns-Manville Micro-Lok fiberglass insulation.
D.
Ends of pipe insulation shall be sealed off at all flanges, fittings, valves and at intervals of 21 feet on continuous runs of pipe, with Foster fire-resistant vapor barrier coating Foster 30-65 or
Childers CP-34 or equal.
E.
All fittings, valves and flanges for pipe sizes smaller than 4" shall be insulated with molded fiberglass fittings of same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation, secured with No. 20 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire and coated with 3 " thick finishing cement, BNZ No. 375.
Zeston 2000 25/50 PVC as made by Johns Manville, is approved when applied per manufacturer = s recommendation.
F.
All fittings, valves and flanges for pipe sizes 4" and larger shall be insulated with fabricated mitered segments of pipe insulation of same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation, secured with No. 20 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire and coated with 3 " thick finishing cement.
"Smooth Coat" by Insulation Industries or Zeston 2000 25/50 PVC fitting covers as made by
Johns Manville is approved when installed per manufacturers recommendation.
G.
All below ambient, coated molded fittings and mitered segments shall be vapor sealed with a layer of open weave glass fabric embedded between two 1/16" thick coats of Foster 30-65 or
Childers CP-34 vapor barrier coating and lap seal at least 1" for molded type and 2" for mitered type on itself and adjoining insulation.
H.
All fittings, valves and flanges exposed to view shall be additionally finished with not covered by Zeston PVC fitting cover fitting glass cloth or equal, smoothly adhered and coated with
Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50AMV1 lagging adhesive and lap as described above.
I.
Direct contact between pipe and hanger shall be avoided. Hanger shall pass outside of a metal saddle which shall support a section of high density insulation equal thickness to adjacent insulation (such as calcium silicate) and of sufficient length to support pipe without crushing insulation. (See table below.) Hangers shall not pierce insulation and all vapor barriers shall be unbroken and continuous.
Pipe Size Saddle & Insert Length
1 2 "- 2" 10" Long
3"-6" 12" Long
J.
At pipe supports insulation shield protection saddles and matching hanger shall be used.
23 07 00-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
K.
All strainers for chilled water and insulated condenser water piping shall be insulated and boxed in with galvanized sheet metal cover, and insulation shall be made removable.
2.02
HOT PIPE INSULATION
A.
The following piping shall be covered with fiberglass insulation:
Service Thickness
Hot Gas Refrigeration Piping
Exposed in Occupied Areas 1 2 "
B.
Insulation shall be glass fiber complying with ASTM C547, Type I with a maximum K factor of
0.23 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature. Insulation shall be suitable for 650 degree F. (2" minimum thickness above 450 degrees F.).
C.
Insulation shall be sectional pipe insulation as made by Owens- Corning Fiberglass Corp., or
Johns Manville Micro-Lok fiberglass pipe insulation, with all purpose white kraft reinforced jacket with self-seal lap to comply with ASTM C1136 Type I.
D.
Longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips shall be smoothly secured per manufacturers recommendations.
E.
All fittings, valves and flanges for pipe sizes smaller than 4" shall be insulated with molded fiberglass fittings of same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation, secured with No. 20 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire and coated with 3 " thick finishing cement, BNZ No. 375, or equal. Zeston 2000 25/50 PVC fittings was as made by Johns Manville are approved.
F.
All fittings, valves and flanges exposed to view not covered by Zeston 2000 PVC fittings shall be additionally finished with glass insulating fitting cloth or equal smoothly adhered and coated with Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50AMV1 lagging adhesive. Lap to be at least 1" on pipe insulation below 4" and 2" on sizes 4" and above.
2.03
PIPING EXPOSED TO FREEZING
A.
Insulation on any piping, fitting, flange and valve located in areas exposed to freezing (in unheated areas, at cooling towers and where noted on the Drawings as to provide "Frost
Insulation") shall, in addition to above covering, be increased by one inch with the same finish as specified for the particular service when not subject to freezing. Insulation shall always be a minimum of 2 2 " inches in thickness.
B.
Weatherproofing of Piping:
1.
Weatherproof all insulated outdoor piping.
2.
Where weatherproofing is required, in addition to insulation and finishes specified for frostproofing, cover with Tedlar Film Jackets as made by ALPHA Assoc, Inc.
(Woodbridge N.J.).
3.
Fittings insulation shall be heavily coat with Childers CP-10/11 or Foster 46-50 weather barrier mastic for hot piping; Childers CP-34 or Foster 30-65 vapor barrier coating for cold piping. Embed into the wet coat a layer of open weave glass cloth and finish with a second coat of same mastic over entire surface.
4.
In addition to insulation and finishes specified for frostproof, cover with crimped aluminum sheet .016 inch thick with lock seams at longitudinal seams, and preformed
23 07 00-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 straps at transverse joints. Joints and jacket shall provide complete weatherproof protection either by mechanical contact or by use of Foster 95-44 or Childers CP-76 metal jacketing sealant (gallon cans only; no tubes).
2.04
FIRE STOPPING
A.
Packing of openings, where ducts and pipes penetrate fire barriers, shall be done with Rockwool insulation as made by United States Gypsum, Co.
B.
Insulation shall comply with Fed. Spec. HH-1-558, Form A, Class 4, K=0.24, melting point
2000 degrees F.
C.
An acceptable alternative to rockwool insulation shall be 3M Product Caulk CP25 or approved equal.
2.05
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
Insulation for Exposed Rectangular Duct
1.
Except where otherwise noted, all exposed rectangular ductwork and plenums shall be covered with rigid duct insulation complying with ASTM C612 Types IA and IB and of the thickness and densities indicated below.
Service Thickness With
Cold and Hot Air Supply Ducts in Mechanical Equipment Rooms
1½” Vapor Barrier
Return Air Ducts in Mechanical
Equipment Room 1½” Vapor Barrier
Cold and Hot Air Supply Ducts
Except where otherwise noted 1½” Vapor Barrier
Cold and Hot Air Return Air
Ducts Except where otherwise noted 1½” _______
Sound Traps 1½” Vapor Barrier
Within 5'-0" downstream and upstream of Humidifier in Ducts 1½” Vapor Barrier
2.
Rigid duct insulation with vapor barrier shall be 6 lbs. per cu. ft. density glass fiber with maximum K factor of 0.22 at 75 deg. F mean temperature with fire retardant vapor barrier facing all service jacket complying with ASTM C1136 Type I (white finish).
3.
Rigid duct insulation with vapor barrier shall be Fiberglass Type 705 by Owens-Corning or Johns Manville, No. 817 spin-glass w/ASJ or approved equal.
4.
Rigid duct insulation without vapor barrier shall be 6 lbs. per. cu. ft. density glass fiber with maximum K factor of 0.22 at 75 deg. F mean temperature with fire retardant facing foil reinforced draft. (all service jacket).
23 07 00-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
5.
Rigid duct insulation without vapor barrier shall be Fiberglass type 705 by
Owens-Corning, Johns Manville, No. 817 spin glass w/ASJ or approved equal.
6.
Insulation shall be fastened to duct with 12 gauge welded pins and washers, or equivalent as approved. Fasteners shall be spaced 12 to 18 inches on center, a minimum of two rows per side of duct. Secure insulation in place with washers firmly embedded in insulation, or push a self-locking cap over pin after coating with fitting mastic type C by
Owens-Corning or approved equal.
7.
Seal all joints, breaks and impressions with Foster fire resistant vapor barrier coating
Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34, or equal, and apply 5" wide joint sealing tape to all joints. All surface must be clean and dry before applying tape.
2.06
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A.
Chilled and dual water temperature water pump and standby chilled and dual water temperature, water pump casings shall be encased in aluminum casings, gasketed and bolted together with brass bolts, washers and nuts, removable in two sections and packed with 3" thick dry granulated cork, or 2" thick 1 lb. density fiberglass blanket insulation. Innermost surface shall be aluminum in order to protect the insulation from damage.
B.
Sound traps shall be insulated same as the connecting ductwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where this insulation is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that insulation complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of insulation with other components of systems.
C.
All insulating materials shall be applied only by experienced workmen, in accordance with the best covering practice. All piping, duct or equipment shall be blown out, cleaned, tested and painted prior to the application of any covering. Adhesives, sealers and mastics shall not be applied, when the ambient temperature is below 40
F., or surfaces are wet.
D.
Insulation for factory-fabricated air handling units, furnished as part of units.
E.
At all openings in insulation and acoustical duct lining, insulate edges neatly and protect with sheet metal nosing. Use sealant as well.
23 07 00-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
F.
All items described in general indicate the type of covering required, however, all piping, ductwork or equipment that transmits heat or will form condensation shall be insulated.
G.
Finish for Concealed Pipe Insulation:
1.
Hot Pipe - Factory ASJ (All service jacket) secured in place with Bostich staples 4" o.c. or ASJ with self sealing lap as made by Johns Manville, Owens-Corning or approved equal.
H.
Finish for Exposed Pipe Insulation:
1.
All exposed outdoor pipe insulation shall have 0.016 inch thick aluminum jacket banded with 2 " s.s. bands spaced 12 inch o.c. Piping exposed in building, within seven feet of the floor, shall have 0.016" thick aluminum jacket banded with 2 " aluminum bands spaced 18" o.c. or two bands per section.
2.
All calcium silicate pipe insulation, all insulated condenser water piping exposed to weather and all other insulated pipe exposed to weather shall have 0.016 inch thick aluminum jacket banded with 2 " s.s. bands spaced 12" o.c.
I.
All piping and ductwork insulation shall be continuous through non-fire rated ceiling openings and sleeves passing through non-fire rated walls or floors. Sleeves shall be packed with mineral wool or thermofiber. Discontinue insulation as it passes through fire-rated wall or floor and use mineral wool or thermofiber packing instead. Specific mastics, adhesives and coating shall be applied in strict accordance with Manufacturer's instruction, including recommended coverages.
J.
Where packaged type units are called for in the Specifications, or as scheduled on the Drawings, the insulation shall be as herein specified for the specific system.
K.
All valved and capped outlets left for future work shall be insulated as herein specified for the specific systems with a removable section of insulation over caps.
L.
Where insulation on existing piping, equipment, etc., has been cut, removed or damaged, this
Contractor shall reinsulate as herein specified.
M.
All insulation of access doors shall be set in sheet metal double-pan construction.
N.
All ductwork shall be insulated in the field, following complete installation of the ductwork.
Installation of insulation on the ductwork in the shop (prior to delivery and installation of the ductwork) is prohibited.
3.03
PROTECTION
A.
The installer of the insulation shall advise the Contractor of required protection for the insulation work during the remainder of the construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.
END OF SECTION 23 07 00
23 07 00-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 09 00
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and General
Requirements of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
SUMMARY OF WORK IN THIS SECTION INCLUDED IN CONTRACT
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and place into satisfactory operation a complete system of automatic temperature controls as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.
B.
The control system shall be of the direct digital control type with electric actuators. Control equipment shall be as manufactured by Distech, Johnson Controls, Siemens, Honeywell or
Automated Logic. All controls and the Building Automation System (BAS) shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall fully integrate with the existing Johnson Controls facility automation system. The temperature control manufacturer shall be responsible for the quality and satisfactory operation of material supplied but not actually manufactured by him. The system shall be a BACNET system at the primary level.
C.
The existing Johnson Controls facility automation system shall be extended to encompass all the controls for the renovation and all new mechanical and electrical equipment. Addition and extension of existing facility communications trunk cables, communication panels, transponders, modems, boosters, etc. shall be provided by this contractor for a complete operating system. Provide any additional hardware, memory, software, programming, etc. as required for same. Provide new graphics for all new equipment and building systems. Graphics for new systems shall be similar to graphics for the existing systems. As an alternative to matching existing graphics, provide all new graphics for the existing system.
D.
The control system shall include all necessary sensors, thermostats, damper motors, transmitters, transducers, relays, switches, etc., and all necessary equipment for a complete control system, regardless of whether or not specifically mentioned, including electric relays and contactors required for control interlocking.
E.
The control system shall include motor control wiring including all control and interlock wiring from switches, freezestats, firestats and relays, to motor controllers, contactors, etc. and all other motor control wiring. Motor control wiring for pumps, air handling unit fans and exhaust fans shall be provided under this section.
F.
Provide nameplates on all devices, whether or not mounted on the face of local control panels.
In occupied areas, nameplates shall be concealed beneath covers of room type instruments, to describe functions.
23 09 00-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
G.
Terms ATC Contractor, BAS Contractor and temperature control Contractor refer to the
Contractor providing work under this section of the specification. The BAS subcontractor or automation system Contractor referred to in this and other sections shall be one and the same
Contractor as the ATC subcontractor.
H.
All sensors, transmitters, thermostats, automatic control valves, wells, automatic dampers, and smoke dampers, to be mounted in pipes or ducts shall be mounted in such pipe or ducts by the
Contractor providing the piping or ducts. This subcontractor, the ATC subcontractor, shall supply these devices to the HVAC Sub-Contractor performing the mounting in a timely manner so as not to inhibit or delay his work. The final installation of these devices, i.e. connection, shall be the responsibility of this section.
I.
Wiring between the fire alarm system and the automatic temperature control system shall be provided by the electrical Sub-Contractor. The ATC subcontractor shall provide terminal points for the fire alarm system Sub-Contractor to wire in local control panels. The ATC subcontractor shall provide the fire alarm Sub-Contractor with a wiring diagram and the location of all the interface terminal points.
J.
Power for all controls, including duct-mounted automatic dampers shall be extended under this section to control panels from junction boxes left by the Electrical Sub-Contractor. See the electrical drawings for locations. Where junction boxes are not shown on the electrical drawings, provide wiring from the nearest emergency electrical power panel.
K.
All temperature sensors, humidity sensors, actuators and DDC controllers and all associated wiring including power wiring, damper (excluding fire and smoke) wiring and wiring to control duct terminal units, i.e. automatic dampers, shall be provided under this section. This shall include extending power wiring from junction boxes left under the electrical work and making power wiring connections. See electrical drawings for location of junction boxes. Where junction boxes are not shown on the electrical drawings, provide 120 volt power wiring from the nearest power panel under this section.
L.
Provide control wiring required to other equipment provided under this contract.
M.
As-built sequence of operation shall be provided in BAS software. When viewing a control schematic on the BAS, the operator shall have the option of having the system display the sequence of operation.
N.
Provide a display controller or panel-mounted computer with display screen with touch control or keypad, as specified herein, at each AHU. The touch/display screen shall allow maintenance staff to monitor systems temperatures, pressures and status and to modify setpoints.
O.
Coordinate starter and VFD requirements with Mechanical Contractor.
P.
Automatic dampers and smoke dampers shall be provided under this section. Provision shall be made under the electrical contract for the opening and closing of the fire/smoke dampers and smoke dampers, as required for fire emergency. Provision shall be made under this section for opening and closing dampers including fire/smoke dampers for normal air handler operation including isolation smoke dampers located in the supply and return ducts at the AHU.
Combination fire/smoke dampers and smoke dampers shall be wired under the electrical contract and controlled via the fire alarm system. Fire/smoke dampers which require opening and closing per the sequence of operation shall also be controlled by the DDC system as well.
23 09 00-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Fire alarm control shall take priority over DDC system control. Under this section the
Contractor shall coordinate with the fire alarm sub-contractor. Provide shop drawings, locating dampers on floor plans and on riser diagrams and indicating type of control for each damper, i.e. open/close under fire alarm, open/close with shutdown of specific AHU’s under fire alarm, open/close under fire and normal operation and used for smoke purge control. These shop drawings will be for use by the Electrical Contractor as part of the coordination.
1.03
OTHER WORK RELATED TO WORK OF THIS SECTION
A.
Air Handling Units
B.
Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System
C.
Test and Air Balancing Section
D.
Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers
E.
Cooling Towers
F.
Variable Frequency Drives
G.
Humidifiers
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Only firms regularly engaged in manufacture and installation of this equipment with characteristics and capacities required and whose products have been installed by them and are in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years will be acceptable.
B.
All control equipment used in this project shall have been successfully proven in actual field installations for a period of two (2) years prior to the date of submittal of said equipment to the
Architect for approval.
C.
The control system shall be installed complete in all respects by competent mechanics, regularly employed by the manufacturer of the control system and/or the ATC subcontractor, as authorized by the manufacturer of the control system.
D.
Sequence of operation, controls and control wiring diagrams for the air handling unit shall be coordinated and approved by the unit manufacturer prior to being submitted to the Architect.
Provide a letter of approval from each manufacturer.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.
B.
Complete shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before any field installation is started. Such drawings shall give a complete description of all control elements and shall show completed schematic air and water flow, piping and wiring diagrams, including functional description. Valve and damper schedules shall be included. Drawings shall indicate
23 09 00-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 work to be provided by other contractors and subcontractors and shall highlight coordination requirements.
C.
Submit floor plans indicating the location of all room and space temperature and humidity sensors for Architect = s review, whether or not shown on bid documents.
D.
Submit samples of room temperature and humidity sensors for Architect = s review.
E.
Contractor shall allow a minimum of 6 weeks for review of submittals.
1.06
RELATED WORK UNDER ELECTRICAL WORK
A.
All power wiring for pumps, fans, unit heaters, clocks. All wiring to the fire alarm control panel. See Supplementary General Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work. Any power wiring not shown on the electrical plans and required for the automatic control systems shall be provided by the ATC subcontractor.
1.07
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
1.08
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
B.
The control system herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. If, within one year from date of acceptance by the Architect, any equipment herein described is proved to be defective in workmanship or material, it shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced, free of charge, during the guarantee period.
1.09
COMPLIANCE LISTING
A.
The BAS shall be UL-916 Listed, Enclosed Energy Management Equipment.
B.
Provide Central System Hardware, Remote Control Units, Communications, etc., as described herein in this section and as required for a complete system fully integrated with the existing
BAS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
The BAS design must be capable of integration of the following A open systems @ protocols:
BACnet, LonTalk J , and digital data communication to third party microprocessors such as AC unit controllers and fire panels or utilize a standard gateway interface for integration depending on the system being integrated. The system shall be a BACNET system.
The system shall also provide the ability to program custom ASCII communication drivers, that will reside in the module for communication to third party systems and devices. These drivers will provide real time monitoring and control of the third party systems.
23 09 00-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Provide Central System Hardware, Remote Control Units, Communications, etc., as described herein to provide a complete system.
2.02
DDC CONTROLLER
A.
DDC Controllers shall be 16 bit, stand alone, multi-tasking, multi-user, real time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list.
B.
Each controller shall support floor level networks for associated terminal equipment.
C.
Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory, a minimum of 4 megabyte, to support its own operating system and databases, including control processes, energy management applications, alarm management applications, historical/trend data for points specified, maintenance support applications, custom processes, operator I/O, dial-up communications.
D.
Each DDC Controller shall include hand, off and auto positions for all switches.
E.
Each DDC Controller shall support:
1.
Monitoring of the all industry standard types of analog and digital inputs, without the addition of equipment outside the DDC Controller cabinet:
2.
Monitoring of the all industry standard types of analog and digital outputs, without the addition of equipment outside the DDC Controller cabinet:
F.
Each DDC Controller shall have a minimum of 15 per cent spare points for future point connection. The type of spares shall be in the same proportion as the implemented I/O functions of the panel, but in no case shall there be less than two spares of each implemented
I/O type. Provide all processors, power supplies, point modules and communication controllers so that the implementation of adding a point to the spare point location only requires the addition of the appropriate sensor/actuator and field wiring/tubing.
G.
DDC Controllers shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC Controllers shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers or terminals. For systems that do not have two RS-232 ports available at each controller, provide a separate standalone RS-232 port within ten feet of the controller, or provide a spare controller at each location.
H.
The operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC Controller (other than VAV/CAV boxes and fan coil units) via local, point discrete, on-board hand/off/auto operator override switches. If on board switches are not available provide separate control panels with HOA switches. Mount panel adjacent to DDC controller. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel processor is operational or not. Override switch position shall be monitored from the PC workstation. Provide relays and wiring as required for HOA switch monitoring.
I.
DDC Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.
23 09 00-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
J.
Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC Controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication for any system.
K.
In the event of the loss of power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all DDC Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
L.
Isolation shall be provided at all Building Level Network (BLN) terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standards
587-1980.
M.
The system shall provide for portable operator's terminals to be connected and communicating simultaneously with the entire BLN from any DDC Controller in the building. Portable operators terminals shall be able to simultaneously monitor, adjust, trend, edit, modify, add, delete, backup the entire BLN system (including terminal equipment controllers, DDC controllers, etc.) point database and all programs.
N.
Each DDC Controller shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace hardware.
2.03
DDC CONTROLLER RESIDENT SOFTWARE FEATURES
A.
General:
1.
Provide all necessary software for a complete operating system as required.
2.
The software programs shall be provided as an integral part of each controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer or another controller for execution.
3.
All points, panels and programs shall be identified by a 30 character name. All points shall also be identified by a 16 character point descriptor. The same names shall be displayed at both DDC panel (via POT, printer or modem) and the PC workstation.
4.
All digital points shall have a user defined two-state status indication with 8 characters minimum (e.g. Summer, Enabled, Disabled, Abnormal).
B.
Control Software Description:
1.
The DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform two-position control, proportional control, proportional plus integral control, proportional, integral, plus derivative control algorithms, all with automatic control loop tuning.
2.
Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
3.
The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
4.
Upon the resumption of power, each DDC Controller shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operations.
C.
DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform energy management routines including time of day scheduling, calendar-based scheduling, holiday scheduling, temporary schedule overrides, start stop time optimization, automatic daylight savings time switch over, night setback control, enthalpy switch over, peak demand limiting, temperature-compensated duty
23 09 00-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 cycling, heating / cooling interlock, supply temperature reset, priority load shedding, power failure restart and year 2000 compliant (when year 2000 occurs, no system errors shall occur).
D.
DDC Controllers shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines.
1.
It shall be possible to use any system measured point data or status, any system calculated data, a result from any process or any user-defined constant in any controller in the system.
2.
Any process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other controllers in the system.
3.
Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to other operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager.
4.
The custom control programming feature shall be documented via English language descriptors.
5.
Each controller shall be provided with an interactive HELP function to assist operators using POTs and remote modem connected operators.
6.
Each controller shall support text comment lines in the operating program to allow for quick troubleshooting, documentation and historical summaries of program development.
E.
Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator devices. Each DDC Controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC Controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or communications with other panels on the network.
1.
All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description and the time and date of occurrence.
2.
The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels shall be provided for each point. Point priority levels shall be combined with user definable destination categories (PC, printer, DDC
Controller, etc.) to provide full flexibility in defining the handling of system alarms. Each
DDC Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point.
3.
Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user-defined list of operator devices or
PC = s.
4.
In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. a.
Each DDC Controller shall be capable of storing a library of at least 50 alarm messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the
Controller.
F.
A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or automatically sample, store and display system data for all points.
1.
DDC Controllers shall store point history data for selected analog and digital inputs and outputs: a.
Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point, regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored in each
23 09 00-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
DDC Controllers point group. Two methods of collection shall be allowed: either by a pre-defined time interval or upon a pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals of l minute to 7 days shall be provided. Each DDC Controller shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 10,000 data samples.
2.
Trend data shall be stored at the DDC Controllers and automatically uploaded to the workstation. Uploads shall occur based upon either user-defined interval, manual command or automatically when the trend buffers are 80% full. All trend data shall be available for use in any 3rd party personal computer applications located on the MLN.
3.
DDC Controllers shall also provide high resolution sampling capability for verification of control loop performance. Operator-initiated automatic and manual loop tuning algorithms shall be provided for a minimum of 36 operator-selected PID control loops.
Provide capability to view or print trend and tuning reports. a.
The controller shall perform a step response test with a minimum one-second resolution, evaluate the trend data, calculate the new PID gains and input these values into the selected LOOP statement. b.
Loop tuning shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the DDC
Controller, from a network workstation or remotely using dial-in modems. For all loop tuning functions, access shall be limited to authorized personnel through password protection.
G.
DDC Controllers shall automatically accumulate and store run-time hours for all digital input and output points.
H.
DDC Controllers shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly or monthly basis for all analog and digital pulse input type points.
I.
DDC Controllers shall count events such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a daily, weekly and monthly basis for all points. The event totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum of 9,999.9 events before reset.
J.
DDC Controllers shall be able to assign password access and control priorities to each HVAC system individually. The logon password (at any PC workstation or portable operator terminal) shall enable the operator to monitor, adjust and control only the HVAC systems that the operator is authorized for. All other HVAC systems shall not be displayed at the PC workstation or portable terminal. Passwords and priority levels for every HVAC system shall be fully programmable and adjustable.
K.
Display Controllers
Display controllers are standalone, touch screen-based operator interfaces. The controller shall be designed for flush mounting in a finished space, with minimum display size of 9 x 9 inches.
Software shall be user programmable allowing for custom graphical images that simulate floor plans, menus, equipment schematics along with associated real time point values coming from any NCU on the network.
The touch screen display shall contain a minimum of 64 possible touch cells that permit user interaction for changing screens, modifying setpoints or operating equipment.
23 09 00-8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Systems that do not offer a display controller as specified must provide a panel mounted computer with touch screen capability as an alternative.
2.04
APPLICATION-SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC = S)
A.
Each ASC controller shall be a dedicated, stand-alone, microprocessor based, application unitary controller designed to control the HVAC equipment shown in the mechanical and electrical drawings, control sequences and point configurations detailed in this specification.
B.
The ASC controller shall utilize user programmable function modules as required to meet the functional intent of all control sequences on a stand-alone basis.
2.05
DDC ZONE TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER (TEC)
A.
Universal inputs shall include the following minimum requirements:
1.
Three (3) dedicated and one (1) universal inputs per controller
2.
Configurable for 0-5 VDC, 4-20ma, RTD or dry contact type input signals
3.
Maximum 500 millisec update time per input
4.
8-bit analog to digital resolution
5.
15-bit analog to digital resolution for the zone temperature and flow
6.
Digital outputs shall include the following minimum requirements: a.
Three (3) triac outputs per controller in addition to the actuator control b.
Integral Hand-Off-Auto override switches
7.
Analog outputs shall include the following minimum requirements: a.
One (1) analog output per controller b.
0-10 VDC output signal c.
Maximum 500 millisec update time per output d.
12-bit digital to analog resolution e.
Integral Hand-Off-Auto and manual positioning switches.
8.
Communication Networks: a.
The TEC shall utilize 2-wire twisted shielded EIA-485 line signaling for portable operator terminal, color graphic operator station, or BAS. b.
TEC = s shall communicate at speeds up to and including 19.2K baud and shall utilize a token passing scheme to accommodate concurrent communication with multiple network devices. c.
Failure of one TEC shall not affect the performance of other TEC = s on the network.
9.
Nonvolatile Memory: All TEC's operating parameters, setpoints and schedules shall be stored in battery backed RAM, EEPROM or other nonvolatile memory.
10.
Terminations: TEC terminations shall be pluggable screw terminal blocks for connection of input and output signal wiring-. Spade type connectors or insulation displacement connectors shall not be accepted.
11.
Input Power: Input power requirements for the TEC shall be 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 20 VA maximum. The controller power supply shall be separate from any other used for motor control contactor coils. A 120/24 VAC fused control transformer shall be provided in each zone controller and TEC.
12.
Mounting: The TEC shall be readily mounted by using pre-drilled holes or integral mounting lugs. The VAV controller will also mount directly to the VAV box shaft.
13.
Operating Environment: The microprocessor board shall be suitably protected against electrical transients and be capable of operating within environmental conditions of 32
-
122
F and 0 - 95% Rh, non-condensing.
23 09 00-9
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.06
COLOR GRAPHIC SYSTEM (CGS)
FIT Project C1195
A.
The Color Graphic System (CGS) shall provide an intuitive, user-friendly, mouse driven operator system permitting the system operators with the authorized privilege access to a logical sequence of dynamic color graphic screens. The logical sequence of screens shall start with a building overview floor plan layout, room or area selection, etc. and provide a "walk around tour" of the building envelope, zones and HVAC mechanical plant as described in the following sections. Modification of control parameters described shall be possible via the mouse without recourse to special function keys or other keystrokes. The CGS shall have a HELP icon in all screens providing English language text in a clear and concise form.
B.
Provide graphics for all systems and equipment monitored and controlled through the BAS.
C.
Alarm-Screen Association
1.
Fire and critical mechanical alarms detailed in the following sections shall automatically draw the appropriate screen immediately and display the nature and location of the alarm condition. An ALARM icon shall simultaneously flash continuously until the operator selects the icon to review the alarm log. Alarm logs shall comprise the minimum classes:
GENERAL, FIRE, MECHANICAL and be abbreviated as GEN, FIR and MEC. An alarm transaction number, originating field panel number, message and test shall be printed on printer. Selection of the ALARM icon shall enable the operator with the proper access level to review, search, archive and acknowledge alarms. In addition, there shall be a HELP icon for the inexperienced user which shall throw HELP screens comprising clear and concise English language text.
2.07
AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES AND DAMPERS
A.
All automatic control valves shall be supplied by the temperature control manufacturer and shall be installed by the Contractor for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work under the control manufacturer's supervision.
B.
Automatic damper with actuators shall be supplied by the control manufacturer and shall be set in place by the Contractor for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Work, under the supervision of the control manufacturer. HVAC Contractor shall supply damper dimensions to the control manufacturer and shall be responsible for the damper sizing.
2.08
ELECTRIC WIRING
A.
All electric wiring, materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the National Electric Code, the NYC Electrical Code and other applicable Local Code, and shall carry the UL label where applicable. All exposed wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit, : " minimum, and shall be a minimum of #14 AWG. Concealed wiring shall be installed in EMT,
: " minimum. All specials, such as junction boxes and connectors, shall be of type designed for use with conduit. Concealed wiring for low voltage systems can be run without conduit in accessible ceilings, provided that wire is plenum rated and that it is neatly run and supported.
Low voltage wire in gypsum board and other inaccessible ceilings shall be run in conduit. Fire smoke damper wiring can utilize 600 volt rated BX cable.
23 09 00-10
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.09
AUTOMATIC DAMPERS, FIRE/SMOKE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A.
Dampers shall have 13 gauge galvanized frames of not less than 3" in width and blades of 16 gauge, or double 22 gauge, galvanized steel, and shall be adequately braced to form a rigid assembly, where required in galvanized ductwork. Dampers shall have blades not more than 8" wide. Linkage and hardware shall be zinc plated steel. Damper blades and rods shall be installed in horizontal position. Any dampers over 72" wide shall have jack shafts.
B.
In aluminum and stainless steel ductwork, damper material shall match the ductwork, with blades of 16 gauge aluminum, or 16 gauge stainless steel.
C.
All dampers shall be of the proportioning or opposed blade type and shall be motor operated.
Dampers shall have continuous elastomer or stainless steel stops to avoid leakage. Bearings shall be oilite nonferrous sleeve type. All dampers shall be provided with continuous 3/16" x
2 " closed cell neoprene gasketing around perimeter of the frame and at interlocking blade edges, to form an airtight seal.
D.
All dampers shall be constructed to provide a maximum leakage of 3 2 %, with an approach velocity of 1500 fpm flow, when closed against a pressure difference of 4 inches of water.
Submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all dampers.
E.
All outside air dampers shall automatically return to closed position in the event of loss of compressed air.
F.
Smoke and fire/smoke dampers shall be classified and labeled in accordance with UL 555S,
"Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control System." Smoke dampers shall be of UL 555S leakage Class II, 40 cfm/ft
2
at 1" w.g. Provide for supply and return ducts and where shown on plans.
G.
Provide damper end switches that are rod actuated as specified herein to signal the BAS and fire alarm system when dampers are in the open and closed position and to prevent fan operation if automatic, smoke or combination fire and smoke dampers are not open.
2.10
AUTOMATIC DAMPER AND SMOKE DAMPER OPERATORS
A.
Damper operators shall be of the electric type for dampers, as specified herein, and with bracket arrangement for location outside the airstream wherever possible. All damper operators shall be of sufficient size and number to operate their respective dampers smoothly against friction and air flow. Damper operators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the stroke in either direction, if required for proper operation. See positioning relays for additional requirements.
Smoke damper shall have 60 second delay in closing.
B.
Electric actuators for smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be Belimo actuators as described under this section.
2.11
VALVES
A.
All valves shall be fully proportioning globe type, with throttling plugs, renewable composition discs, bronze trim, and of the spring return type, except as otherwise noted. For control valves
2" and smaller, Belimo equal percentage valves or approved equal valve manufactured by
Siemens are an acceptable alternate. Valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer and
23 09 00-11
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 guaranteed to be of sufficient size to meet the heating and cooling requirements. Two position valves shall be line size. Valves shall be supplied with actuators as specified herein. Valves shall have equal percentage or linear flow characteristics. All valves bodies shall have pressure rating and connection type construction to conform with the pipe fitting schedule in these
Specifications.
B.
All throttling 2-way water valves shall be sized for pressure drop equal to respective coil pressure drop at flow rates indicated on the drawings with a minimum pressure drop of 10 feet.
All 3-way water valves shall be sized for a minimum pressure drop of 5 feet. All water valves shall be single seated, except where water pressure and flow require double seated valves.
2.12
MASTER OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER
A.
One or more master outside air transmitters shall be provided, for indicating outside air temperature and humidity at each local panel through the BAS. The transmitters shall be as specified below. Remote outdoor location shall be submitted for approval, and shall be located on highest floor of building.
B.
The sensing element shall be located in an aspirator box on north face of building or so located to insure air circulation over the elements and produce an accurate signal corresponding to the outdoor air temperature and humidity.
C.
Existing transmitters which satisfy these requirements can be used provided information is transmitted over the BAS to the new panels in this building.
2.13
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CONTROLS
A.
All differential pressure controls shall be through the BAS via direct digital control and shall be fully proportioning, with adjustable sensitivity. Supply and install 2-1/2" pressure gauges, in sensing lines, on local panel. Provide separate supply and return pressure transmitters to the local BAS panel and provide program to maintain differential pressure setpoint.
2.14
POSITIVE POSITIONING RELAYS
A.
Supply and install positioning relays on all damper motors which modulate. Provide positive positioning relays on valves 2 2 " and larger.
B.
In lieu of positioning relays, Belimo actuators with feedback can be provided.
2.15
THERMOMETERS - REMOTE READING
A.
Supply and install dial thermometers, on each local panel face, with appropriate temperature ranges, as listed below. Thermometers shall have a 2-1/2" dial, remote bulb, of compensated capillary liquid filled or electronic transmission type, uniform scale with equal graduations in
F. and same type sensing bulbs as required for thermostats. Range shall be 50
, 100
or 200
, as approved with an accuracy of 1% of scale range when range exceeds 100
. Temperature indication scale shall cover a minimum of 270
of the dial with a maximum scale division of
2
F. Provide local panel thermometers for:
1.
Return air to each air handling unit with return air.
2.
Each controlled temperature.
3.
Fan discharge at each supply air unit.
23 09 00-12
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
4.
Water return from each coil bank at each air handling unit.
5.
Air inlet and outlet of heating and cooling coils at each supply air unit.
6.
Condenser water supply and return at each AHU.
Alternately, at the Contractor's option, in lieu of dial thermometers at each local panel, provide a local display and keypad (display controller) upon which the above temperatures can be monitored. See display controllers as specified herein.
2.16
LOCAL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
A.
Provide adjacent to each air supply unit, as herein specified, enclosed local control panels of 14 gauge steel or Formica set in an extruded aluminum frame, with welded angle iron brackets, wall or floor type, and with hinged locked door, in which shall be mounted the associated temperature, humidity and pressure controls, relays, etc., and on which shall be flush mounted the associated switches, thermometers, etc., as previously and hereinafter described. The basic background color of the panel shall be as approved by the Architect.
B.
Details of each panel shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. Locations of each local panel provided are to be convenient for adjustment and service and within five (5) feet of system motor. All such locations are to be approved prior to installation. Provide engraved nameplates beneath each panel face mounted control device and air gauge, clearly describing the function of said device and the range of operation. Provide a removable laminated or engraved color coded graphic system illustration 20" x 12" minimum size on each panel face.
Provide a common key for all local panels. Provide and wire a 15 watt fluorescent light canopy, with switch, for each panel, to terminal strip in control panel.
C.
Instrumentation within the panel shall be identified. All electrical components within the panel shall be pre-wired to a numbered terminal strip. All wiring within the panel shall be in accordance with NEMA and UL standards and shall meet local codes.
D.
All controllers installed outside of the building shall be provided with NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosures.
2.17
VALVE OPERATORS
A.
Valve operators shall be of the electric type, as specified herein. All valve operators shall be of a sufficient size to operate their respective valve smoothly against the operating pressure differential to which they will be subjected. Provide weather enclosure for control valves installed outdoors or within moisture air stream of the air handling units.
2.18
ELECTRIC VALVE & DAMPER OPERATORS
A.
All electric operators shall be of totally enclosed type in rustproof housings of pressed steel or approved cast metal. An open type gear train will not be acceptable. All operators shall be of the spring return type, to provide failsafe operation and overtravel protection. Each automatic damper shall be provided with a separate damper operator. Operators to be located outdoors shall be provided with a NEMA 4X weatherproof enclosure. All electric operators shall be as manufactured by Belimo or approved equal.
1.
Electronic/electric actuation shall be provided using Belimo or equal by Johnson Controls actuators or approved equal.
2.
The actuator shall be Belimo type direct coupled (over the shaft), enabling it to be mounted directly to the damper or valve shaft without the need for connecting linkage.
23 09 00-13
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
The fastening clamp shall use a ?
V" bolt and ?
V" shaped, toothed cradle to attach to the damper shaft for maximum holding strength. Single bolt or set screw type fasteners are not acceptable.
3.
The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator at the end of rotation or magnetic clutch are not acceptable.
4.
For power failure/safety applications, a mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be used. Non-mechanical forms of fail-safe are not acceptable except for a central, emergency, backup power source.
5.
All spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counterclockwise spring return operation by changing the mounting orientation. Spring return actuators should be capable of mounting directly onto a jackshaft up to 1.05" in diameter.
6.
Proportional actuators shall accept a 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA and provide a 2 to 10
VDC position feedback signal.
7.
24 VAC/DC actuators shall not require more than 10 VA for AC or 8 watts for DC applications.
8.
All actuators shall have an external manual gear release or manual crank to aid in installation and allow manual positioning when the actuator is not powered.
9.
All actuators shall have an external direction of rotation switch to aid in installation and provide proper control response.
10.
Actuators shall be provided with a factory mounted 3-foot electrical cable and conduit fitting to provide easy hook up to an electrical junction box.
11.
The actuators shall be listed under Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 and Canadian
Standards Association Class 813.02. They must be manufactured under ISO 9001 quality certification.
12.
Actuators shall have a 2-year manufacturer’s warranty, starting from the date of installation.
2.19
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
A.
All temperature or humidity transmitters shall be capable of measuring space or duct temperature or humidity and transmitting an electric signal (4 to 20 MA) directly proportional to the temperature. Temperature transmitter shall be of the thermistor type. The range of the temperature transmitters shall be 50
F. for room air sensing, and 100
F. or 200
F. for all other sensing, as approved. All humidity transmitters shall have a range of 80% RH. Each transmission system shall have an accuracy of 1% of scale range. All transmitters shall be located at point of measurement, with instrument case located outside of unit or ductwork with capillaries and sensing bulbs as described above for thermostats. Finish and final location of room transmitters shall be approved by the Architect. Room transmitters shall be stainless steel plate type with no display and no adjustment.
B.
Transmitter shall provide one point field calibration for both RH and temperature.
C.
Humidity sensors shall use thin film capacitance technology or an approved equal high accuracy technology. Sensors shall remain calibrated within 0.5% RH/year in normal air conditioning environments.
D.
Humidity sensing accuracy shall be
2% RH in the 0 to 90% and the 10C
to 40
C temperature ranges.
E.
Temperature accuracy shall be 0.5
C in the -5 C to 50 C temperature range.
23 09 00-14
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
F.
Wall mount housing shall be ABS plastic (color to be selected by the Architect) with temperature display and temperature setpoint adjustment ±2° F from BAS setpoint, overrideable at BAS. Duct mounted housing shall be cast aluminum. Duct mounted sensor protection shall be stainless steel.
G.
Provide two humidity calibrators and two equivalent temperature calibrators to allow facility staff to check & calibrate transmitters.
H.
Where temperature and humidity transmitters are in same room, provide both under one wall mounted housing or cover.
2.20
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
A.
Transmitters shall be of 2-wire, 4-20 mA output type with a solid state or thermistor type element having an accuracy of
1% of span. Transmitter shall include protection against reverse polarity and supply voltage transients. A span and zero adjustment shall be provided with each transmitter to allow for recalibration as necessary.
1.
Room sensors a.
Sensor covers shall be provided with tamper resistant screws, and shall be provided with temperature display and setpoint adjustment on the face of the sensor. Setpoint adjustment shall be ±2° F from the BAS sepoint. Occupant setpoint shall be overrideable via BAS.
2.
Duct sensors a.
Single point duct mounted sensors shall have a minimum 9" rigid probe and be used when the duct size is less than 24". Duct mounted housing shall be cast aluminum. b.
Averaging duct mounted sensors shall have a minimum 12.5' long averaging element and be used when the duct size is greater than 24".
3.
Well sensors a.
Liquid immersion sensors shall have a stainless steel probe and a stainless steel well. Length of the sensor well shall be selected based on the diameter of the pipe to provide accurate, reliable sensing of the liquid temperature. Provide well with lag extension equal to depth of pipe insulation.
4.
Outside sensors a.
Sensing elements shall be mounted in aspirator box as per master outside air transmitter section above.
2.21
HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
A.
Transmitters shall be of 2-wire, 4-20 mA output type with a resistance or capacitance element having an accuracy of 2% between 20-95% Rh. Transmitter shall include protection against reverse polarity and supply voltage transients. An accuracy adjustment shall be provided with each transmitter to allow for recalibration as necessary.
1.
Duct mounted a.
Sensor shall have a minimum 6" rigid probe with a pressure cast aluminum weatherproof box with gasketed cover.
2.
Wall mounted a.
The room sensor shall be provided with tamper resistant screws, and heavy duty plastic guard.
3.
Outside mounted
23 09 00-15
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 a.
The sensing element shall be mounted inside aspirator box as per master outside air transmitter section above.
2.22
WATER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
A.
A set of water pressure transmitters shall be provided to transmit to the DDC system the pressure in the supply and return lines for each of the various hot water, and chilled water systems which require differential pressure control by modulating differential control valves and or pump variable frequency drives. The DDC system shall be programmed to read and accept the two transmitter signals and use them to determine differential pressure and provide differential setpoint control. Pressure transmitters shall be RE Technologies Model PTN.
1.
Range 0-150 psig or as required
2.
Output
3.
Accuracy
4-20 mA
1% full scale
4.
Maximum pressure 200%
5.
Supply voltage
6.
Case material
7.
Diaphragm
10 to 30 VDC at 25 mA
304 stainless steel
17-4 pH stainless steel
2.23
AIR PROVING SWITCHES
A.
The air proving switches shall have an operating range of 0.15-0.5" wc and have a setpoint adjustment.
B.
Wiring connections shall be 3 screw type, common, normally open and normally closed.
C.
Approved manufacturer: Dwyer 1900 series or equivalent.
2.24
DAMPER POSITION SWITCHES
A.
Shall be crank mounted and provide two snap-action SPDT contacts. Each switch shall be adjustable with a minimum differential of 9
.
B.
Approved manufacturer: Barber-Colman AM-321 or equivalent.
2.25
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosures shall be NEMA-1 rated steel, finished to control oxidation in a highly humid atmosphere.
B.
Each enclosure shall have a hinged door with handle and keyed lock.
2.26
AIR FILTER DIFFERENTIAL ALARM
A.
An air differential pressure transmitter shall be provided to transmit to the BAS the differential pressure drop across each air filter, pre-filter, after filter, bag filter, etc. The BAS shall be programmed to alarm when the filter requires changing at the final or dirty filter setpoints as listed or shown on the filter schedule or as specified by the manufacturer. Differential pressure transmitter shall be Modus Model No. T30.
1.
Ranges 0-1" wc, 0-2" wc, 0-3" wc
2.
Output 4-20 mA
23 09 00-16
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.
Accuracy
1% of range
4.
Maximum pressure 8x pressure range
5.
Operating voltage 10 to 35 VDC
2.27
CURRENT SWITCHES
FIT Project C1195
A.
Current switches shall be provided for all HVAC equipment to indicate run status to the BAS.
HVAC equipment shall include, but not be limited to, all supply, return, exhaust, relief and exhaust fans, etc. Current switches shall be split case type, single pole double throw, sized for motor amps. Current switches shall be Veris Hawkeye Model H608, Neilsen Kuljian Model
D150 or RE Technologies Model SCSI.5A.
B.
Provide 2-pole model or relay for status to BAS and fire alarm panel.
2.28
CONTROL TRANSFORMERS
A.
A 120/24 VAC control transformer shall be provided in each DDC control panel, application specific controller panel, zone controller panel (VAV) terminal equipment control panel to power the DDC equipment and controllers located therein. Common transformers serving more than one dedicated panel shall not be allowed. Transformers shall be UL listed, properly fused to protect DDC equipment and sized by the controls Contractor. For equipment requiring 24
VDC power, provide similar transformer converter as required to power the DDC equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Examine location where controls and equipment are to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that equipment comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of equipment with other components of systems.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of the automatic temperature control system and after motors have been energized with normal power source, test all control systems to demonstrate compliance with requirement. Demonstrations shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner representatives. When possible, field correct malfunctioning controls then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace controls which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. Refer to Section -
Testing and Balancing.
23 09 00-17
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.04
SERVICE
FIT Project C1195
A.
After completion of the control system installation, the control manufacturer shall regulate and adjust all thermostats, control valves, damper motors, etc., and place the system in complete operating condition, subject to the approval of the Architect. Complete instructions shall be given to the operating personnel. There shall be three day's instruction given for Winter cycle and three day's instruction for Summer cycle operation.
3.05
CONTROL SEQUENCE
A.
Control sequence shall be as specified herein and/or as indicated on the Drawings. All required components whether illustrated or not shall be provided. Pressures and temperatures indicated are approximate and shall be adjusted on the job for maximum performance. After final adjustment, and before acceptance, the control diagrams required shall be revised, or supplemented, to show coordinated settings for all controls, including sensitivity (voltage and/or amperage change per unit change in controlled variable), throttling range, tabulated settings for instruments in sequence, amps at which instruments are set, controlled variable coincide, and automatic reset becomes inactive. Capacity controls for refrigeration equipment and heating equipment shall be coordinated with components supplied with the machines and the necessary controllers, relays, etc.
B.
A separate tabulation shall be provided of control settings of all automatic controls including components supplied with the machines. Tabulation shall also include upper and lower limits for all safety and operating controls on the machines. All of the above adjustments will be required at the completion of the job.
3.06
AC-5E THIRD FLOOR
A.
Damper Control – normal operation
1.
When AC-5E is in normal operation, Control Damper MD-2 shall be open and Control
Dampers MD-3 on supply and MD-4 on return shall be closed.
B.
Start-up and Shutdown
1.
When the supply fan is started, and MD-2 is proven open and MD-3 and MD-4 are proven closed as indicated by damper end switches, one of the two (2) supply fans shall start at minimum speed. Supply fan for 2A or 2B shall operate with the other fan being off. BMS shall control fans in a lead / lag manner, alternating the lead fan every 24 hours. Should the lead fan fail as indicated by the current switch or by the fan speed, the lead fan shall shut down and the lag fan shall start.
2.
When the supply fan is shut down, the automatic control dampers shall remain in the normal operation position.
C.
Temperature Control using the DX coil for cooling and glycol coil for reheat
1.
When cooling is required as indicated by the average space temperature and Outdoor Air
Temperature is above 55 deg F, the control valve CV-1 (economizer mode) shall be closed, the control valve CV-3 (condenser) and CV-4 (cooling tower) shall be open and the control valves CV-2 (glycol reheat) shall be closed . The DX refrigeration system shall be controlled to maintain the average space temperature at setpoint 68°F ±1°F
(adjustable) providing RH is within range 50% ±3% RH.
2.
When the average space RH is above 53% ±0% (adjustable), the DX refrigeration system shall be controlled to maintain the average space RH at setpoint 53% RH (adjustable) and
23 09 00-18
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 the glycol/reheat coil valve shall modulate open to maintain the average space temperature above the low limit setpoint, 67° F (adjustable). As the glycol reheat control valve CV-2 is modulated open, the cooling tower control valve CV-4 shall be modulated closed in sequence with CV-2.
3.
When the average space RH is 50% RH or less, the DX refrigeration system shall return to average space temperature control.
4.
If while supplying minimum air flow and full cooling the average space temperature rises above setpoint, increase the supply air flow above minimum to maintain the average space temperature setpoint.
5.
If, while under dehumidification control and supplying minimum air flow and full cooling, the average space relative humidity cannot be maintained at setpoint (50% RH, adjustable), increase the supply air flow above minimum to maintain the average space relative humidity setpoint.
D.
Humidity Control (Humidifier)
1.
When the average space RH is below 47% ±0% (adjustable), and the average space temperature is within the control range (67°F and 69°F, adjustable), the humidifier shall modulate open.
2.
When the average space RH is above 50% ±0%, and the average space temperature is within the control range (67°F and 69°F) the humidifier shall modulate closed.
3.
If, while humidifying, the humidifier discharge relative humidity exceeds the high limit setpoints, 85% RH (adjustable), the humidifier control shall be overridden to maintain the discharge relative humidity at or below its high limit setpoint.
4.
The humidifier shall not function unless air flow is proven by the air flow switch in the humidifier discharge air stream.
E.
Air Flow Control
1.
When the difference between the maximum space temperature and the minimum space temperature is higher than 3°F ±0°F (adjustable), the air supply flow shall increase.
2.
When the difference between the maximum space temperature and the minimum space temperature is less than 2°F ±0°F (adjustable), the supply air flow shall decrease to minimum air flow.
3.
When the difference between the maximum space RH and the minimum space RH is higher than 8% ±0% (adjustable), the supply air flow shall increase.
4.
When the difference between the maximum space RH and the minimum space RH is less than 3% (adjustable), the supply air flow shall decrease to minimum air flow.
5.
Set minimum air flow to 50% (adjustable).
F.
Economizer Control
1.
When the OA temperature is below 55°F (adjustable), the system shall enable the economizer mode. In economizer mode, control valve CV-1 (economizer) is open and
CV-2 (glycol reheat) and CV-3 (condenser) are closed. The AC compressors are shut off.
The control valves CV-1 (economizer mode) and CV-4 (cooling tower) shall be in control to maintain the glycol coil discharge air temperature as needed to maintain the average space temperature setpoint.
2.
When the average space temperature is above 69°F ±0°F (adjustable), the control valves
CV-4 shall control open to decrease the glycol coil air discharge temperature.
3.
When the average space temperature is below 67°F ±0°F (adjustable), the control valve
CV-4 shall control close to increase the glycol coil air discharge temperature.
23 09 00-19
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
4.
When the control valve CV-4 is 80% fully open, increase the supply air flow as needed.
If the average space temperature cannot be maintained with maximum supply air, the system shall enable the DX cooling mode and Economizer Control shall be disabled.
5.
When the control valve CV-4 is 80% fully closed and the average space temperature drops below 67°F (adjustable), the glycol water circulating pumps shall shut off and shall cycle on and off as required to maintain the average space temperature low limit 67°F
(adjustable).
G.
Condenser Glycol Control
1.
One new and one existing fluid cooler type cooling tower will be used to provide condenser glycol to the new AC-5E and existing AC-4E air handling units.
2.
The fluid coolers shall have spray pumps and cooling tower fans.
3.
The fluid coolers shall be controlled in sequence to maintain the condenser glycol water supply temperature of 70°F (adjustable).
4.
On a rise in condenser water supply temperature, the “lead” tower spray pump shall start and the “lag” tower spray pump shall start in sequence. On a further rise in temperature, the lead tower fan shall start and then the lag tower fan shall start in sequence. Provide minimum of 1°F differential between the (4) cooling stages to prevent short cycling.
5.
Provide alternation of lead tower based on run time or bi-weekly.
6.
Condenser water pumps for AC-5E and AC-4E shall run when the outside air temperature is above 60°F (adjustable) or if space temperature rises above 68°F
(adjustable). Two (2) condenser water pumps are provided for each AHU. Only one (1) pump shall operate at a time. Pumps shall be controlled in a lead / lag manner alternating between pumps so as to equalize run time. Should the lead pump fail to operate, the lag pump shall operate and an alarm condition indicate on the BMS.
7.
When AC-5E is in Economizer Mode, the fluid coolers shall be controlled in sequence to maintain the glycol supply temperature of 45°F (adjustable).
H.
Fire Alarm Shut Down: Under a fire or smoke alarm condition the FACP shall shut down the supply fans through the dry contacts provided by the electrical contractor. Upon closure of these contacts control relay shall be activated, shutting down the supply fan, closing smoke dampers, and shutting down the general exhaust fans. Current sensor switches provided for each fan shall be double pole with one set of contact for status indication at the FACP and a second set for status indication at the BAS system.
3.07
AC-4E SECOND FLOOR
A.
Existing controls shall remain and be modified as follows.
B.
Damper Control – normal operation
1.
When AC-4E is in normal operation, Control Damper MD-1 shall be open and Control
Dampers MD-3 on supply and MD-4 on return shall be closed.
C.
Start-up and Shutdown
1.
When the supply fan is started, and MD-1 is proven open and MD-3 and MD-4 are proven closed as indicated by damper end switches, and when the supply smoke damper and return smoke damper are fully open, as indicated by the damper end switches, the supply fan shall start. When the supply fan is shut down, the automatic control dampers shall remain in the normal operation position.
D.
Condenser Glycol Control
23 09 00-20
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.
When the condenser inlet glycol temperature (T1) is below 70°F, the by-pass control valve CV-5 shall control open to maintain condenser inlet glycol temperature at 70°F.
(adjustable).
E.
Temperature control using the DX coil for cooling
1.
When cooling is required, as indicated by the average space temperature (from the newly installed space temperature sensors as indicated on the drawings), the DX refrigeration system shall be controlled to maintain the average space temperature at setpoint 68°F
±1°F (adjustable).
2.
When the average space RH is above 53% ±0% (adjustable), the DX refrigeration system shall be controlled to maintain the average space RH at setpoint 53% RH (adjustable) and the electric reheat coil shall be controlled to maintain the average space temperature above the low limit setpoint, 67°F (adjustable).
3.
When the average space RH is 50% RH or less, the DX refrigeration system shall return to average space temperature control.
F.
Humidity Control (Humidifier)
1.
When the average space RH is below 47% ±0% (adjustable), and the average space temperature is within the control range (67°F and 69°F, adjustable), the humidifier shall modulate open.
2.
When the average space RH is above 50% ±0%, and the average space temperature is within the control range (67°F and 69°F) the humidifier shall modulate closed.
3.
If, while humidifying, the humidifier discharge relative humidity exceeds the high limit setpoints, 85% RH (adjustable), the humidifier control shall be overridden to maintain the discharge relative humidity at or below its high limit setpoint.
4.
The humidifier shall not function unless air flow is proven by the air flow switch in the humidifier discharge air stream.
3.08
AC-4E OR AC-5E EMERGENCY OPERATION MODE
A.
AC-4E failure mode
1.
When AC-4E fails, an alarm shall be sent to the BAS. The operator will acknowledge the alarm and will initiate AC-4E emergency mode. In AC-4E emergency mode the Control
Damper MD-1 shall close and Control Damper MD-3 and MD-4 shall open. The Control
Damper MD-2 remains open. AC-5E will supply air to the spaces on 2 nd
and 3 rd
floor.
B.
AC-5E failure mode
1.
When AC-5E fails, an alarm shall be sent to the BAS. The operator will acknowledge the alarm and will initiate AC-5E emergency mode. In AC-5E emergency mode the Control
Damper MD-2 shall close and Control Damper MD-3 and MD-4 shall open. The Control
Damper MD-1 remains open. AC-4E will supply air to the spaces on 2 nd
and 3 rd
floor.
3.09
AUTOMATIC DAMPER CONTROL
A.
All dampers shall be provided with two factory end switches, one set to close when the damper blades are at their open position, and the other set to close when the damper blades are at their closed position. Switches shall be physically linked to the damper blade. For control provide open/closed indication on an addressable basis.
3.10
DAMPERS IN DUCTS SHALL OPEN AND CLOSE VIA THE BAS. DAMPERS SHALL
CLOSE VIA THE BAS EACH TIME. PROVIDE TIME DELAY FOR FAN STARTING TO
23 09 00-21
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
ALLOW DAMPERS TO OPEN. PROVIDE STATUS OF EACH DAMPER AT BAS.AIR
FILTER MONITORING
A.
Primary and secondary air filters in AC-5E and AC-4E shall have pressure drop measured via the BAS and shall alarm when the pressure drop across each filter exceeds setpoint, indicating the filter is dirty.
3.11
FIRE ALARM INTERFACE
A.
The electrical contractor shall provide a set of dry contacts which shall close when an alarm is indicated. The ATC sub-contractor shall wire from the DDC system to the FACP so that an alarm shall indicate at the DDC/BAS system.
B.
Restarting of fans following a fire alarm system shutdown shall occur via a key switch at the fire alarm panel.
3.12
BAS POINT LIST INPUT/OUTPUT SUMMARY
A.
The BAS points list (matrix) input/output summary tables shall be included as part of the scope of this section and shall be fully provided by the DDC/BAS system Contractor. These points are in addition to points required by the sequences of operation above and the mechanical specifications. See drawing for point schedules. Points required to comply with the sequence of operation and as shown on the drawings shall be provided whether or not indicated on the points list (matrix).
3.13
PUMP CONTROL
A.
The starters for each of the pumps shall be provided with a hand-off-auto (HOA) switch so that when the HOA switch is in auto position the pumps shall be controlled through the BAS system. With the HOA switch in hand position, the pump shall run independent of the BAS system control requirements. With the HOA in the off position, the pump shall not operate.
B.
The BAS system shall provide a schedule for operation of each pump. When the schedule indicates the pump is on it shall be enabled and shall be controlled as described herein.
C.
Where multiple pumps are provided, the DDC/BAS system shall provide lead lag control of the pumps. Each pump shall be alternated as the lead pump so as to equalize operating time of the pump.
3.14
ADJUSTING AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
The BAS system/ATC sub-contractor shall train the Owners operating personnel for a minimum of the number of days indicated in Section 01 31 46 with personal on-the-job instruction provided by a competent Engineer or technician representing the contractor. This instruction shall be at a time to be selected by the Owner and is the minimum requirement. Where additional training time is specified elsewhere in this specification, that time shall be in addition to the above requirements.
B.
The operators shall be trained in the operation and preventative maintenance of the entire system. The operators shall be trained to recognize malfunctions of the control system by headend observations printed copy, visual and audible signals and by noting building conditions
23 09 00-22
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
(head-end or field panel reading, actual equipment performance). The operators shall be thoroughly familiarized with all software and specific programs regarding this project.
C.
Four sets of each of the following are to be provided.
1.
Written operating and preventive and system maintenance instructions.
2.
Specific data sheets and maintenance schedules.
3.
Software listing for each point of connection, showing location, function, identification, etc. (two sets only).
4.
As-built drawings for all controls and control wiring that include all items required under
“Submittals”, with one set to laminated and mounted at a location(s) to be chosen by the
Owner. Back-up system loading diskettes for use in programming the head-end and the standalone field panels (one set each).
D.
Install Graphics of each control sub-system with all points shown on at least one graphic.
E.
Provide testing and system performance trends in accordance with descriptions in submittals.
F.
The ATC sub-contractor shall warrant the continuous future availability of service for the system, with servicing to be provided by a factory trained service representative. As part of the warranty agreement (and any subsequent service contract agreements) the Contractor shall, at the discretion of the Owner, provide technical instructions on trouble shooting, maintenance, and servicing this system to the Owner s employees. This instruction shall take place on-site, during routine corrective maintenance visits by the Contractor.
G.
REPRODUCIBLE DRAWINGS: The ATC sub-contractor, upon completion of the installation, shall furnish to the Owner (at no additional charge) a complete set of reproducible “as-built” drawings. Reproducible drawings will consist of one set of black line (full-size) and one set installed on disk, AUTOCAD.DWG. Provide a separate set of drawings for each AHU and system.
3.15
CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTING, CALIBRATION
A.
Work and/or systems installed under this Division shall be fully functioning prior to
Demonstration, Acceptance Periods and Contract Close Out. Contractor shall start, test, adjust, and calibrate all work and/or systems under this contract, as described below.
B.
Verify proper electrical voltages and amperages, and verify that all circuits are free from grounds or faults.
C.
Verify integrity/safety of all electrical connections.
D.
Verify proper interface with fire alarm system.
E.
Test, calibrate, and set all digital and analog sensing, and actuating devices. Calibrate each instrumentation device by making a comparison between the Operator Interface display and the reading at the device, using an instrument traceable to the National Bureau of Standards, which shall be at least twice as accurate as the device to be calibrated (e.g., if field device is +1- 0.5% accurate, test equipment shall be +1- 0.25% accurate over same range). Record the measured value and displayed value for each device in the Control System Commissioning Report.
23 09 00-23
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
F.
Check and set zero and span adjustments for all actuating devices. Manually activate damper and valve operators to verify free travel and fail condition. Check split range positioners to verify proper operation. Record the results for each device in the Control System
Commissioning Report.
G.
Check each digital control point by making a comparison between the control command at the
DPU and the status of the controlled device. Check each digital input point by making a comparison of the state of the sensing device and the Operator Interface display. Record the results for each device in the Control System Commissioning Report.
H.
Verify proper sequences by using the approved checklists to record results and submit with
Control System Commissioning report. Verify proper sequence and operation of all specified functions.
I.
Tune all control loops to obtain the fastest stable response without hunting, offset or overshoot.
Record tuning parameters and response test results for each control loop in the control System commissioning report. Except from a startup, maximum allowable variance from set point for controlled variables shall be as follows:
1.
Air temperature: plus or minus 0.5°F
2.
Water temperature: plus or minus 2°F
3.
Relative humidity plus or minus 2%
3.16
CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION
A.
Demonstrate the operation of the Control Systems hardware, software, and all related components and systems to the satisfaction of the Commissioning Agent and the Engineer.
Schedule the demonstration with Owner s representative 2 weeks in advance. Demonstration shall not be scheduled until all hardware and software submittals, and the Commissioning Test
Report is approved. If the Work fails to be demonstrated to conform to the Contract specifications, so as to require scheduling of additional site visits by the Commissioning Agent and the Engineer for re-demonstration, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for all direct and indirect costs of subsequent Commissioning Agent site visits.
B.
The Contractor shall supply all personnel and equipment for the demonstration, including but not limited to, personal computers, laptop computers, printers, instruments, ladders, etc.
Contractor supplied personnel must be competent with and knowledgeable of all projectspecific hardware, software, and the HVAC systems. All training documentation and submittals shall be at the job site.
C.
The system shall be demonstrated following the same procedures used in the Commissioning
Tests by using approved Commissioning Checklists. Demonstration shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
D.
Demonstrate that all required software is installed on workstations. Demonstrate that all graphic screens, alarms, trends and reports are installed as submitted and approved.
E.
Demonstrate that all points specified and shown can be interrogated and/or commanded (as applicable) from all work stations, as specified.
F.
Demonstrate that remote communication abilities are in accordance with these Specifications.
23 09 00-24
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
G.
Demonstrate correct calibration of input/output devices using the same methods specified for the commissioning tests. A maximum of 10 percent of 110 points shall be selected at random by the Commissioning Agent for demonstration. Upon failure of any device to meet the specified end-to-end accuracy, an additional 10 percent of 110 points shall be selected at random by the
Commissioning agent for demonstration. This process shall be repeated until 100 percent of randomly selected 110 points have been demonstrated to meet specified end-to-end accuracy.
H.
Demonstrate that all BAS and other software programs exist at respective field panels. The
Direct Digital Control (DDC) programming and point database shall be as submitted and approved.
I.
Demonstrate that all BAS and other software programs accomplish the specified sequences of operation.
J.
Demonstrate that the panels automatically recover from power failures, as specified.
K.
Demonstrate that all alarms are received at the appropriate workstations and printers.
L.
Demonstrate that the stand-alone operation of panels meets the requirements of these
Specifications.
M.
Identify access to equipment selected by Commissioning Agent. Demonstrate that access is sufficient to perform required maintenance.
N.
Control System Demonstration shall be completed and approved prior to Substantial
Completion.
3.17
ON SITE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATOR TRAINING
A.
Provide services of controls contractor s qualified technical personnel for six (6) days, to instruct Owner s personnel in general operation and maintenance of the control systems.
Training sessions shall be witnessed by the Commissioning Agent. Instruction shall be classroom setting at the project site. Requests for training shall be for contiguous or noncontiguous 8-hour days, unless otherwise mutually agreed upon by contractor, Commissioning
Agent, and Owner. The Owner s representative shall notify contractor 1 week in advance of each day of requested training.
B.
Provide four sets of approved Operations and Maintenance Manuals to be used for training.
C.
The contractor s designated training personnel shall meet and/or correspond with the
Commissioning Agent and Owner s representative for the purpose of discussing and fine-tuning the training agenda prior to the first training session. Training agenda shall generally be as follows:
1.
Day 1: a.
Brief walk-through of the building, including identification of all controlled equipment and systems and condensed demonstration of Digital System Controller
(DSC) and BAS capabilities. b.
Brief overview of the various parts of the 0 & M manual, including hardware and software programming and operating publications, catalog data, controls installation drawings, and DDC/BAS programming documentation.
23 09 00-25
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 c.
Demonstration of workstation menu penetration and broad overview of the various work station features. d.
Demonstration of workstation boot-up, login/logout procedures, printer operation, password setup, and exception reporting. e.
Demonstration of workstation graphic screens f.
Demonstration of workstation reports g.
Demonstration of alarm feature h.
Demonstration of trend feature i.
Demonstration of DDC/BAS system diagnostics features, program upload / download capabilities and software backup concepts.
2.
Day 2: a.
DDC/BAS programming b.
Review sequences of operation and how they are accomplished by DDC/BAS programming. c.
Fail modes and procedures to take in the event of a power failure. d.
Standalone modes and procedures to take in the event of various communication failures. e.
Demonstration of set-point optimization and fine-tuning concepts. f.
Demonstration of BAS features, diagnostics, program upload / download. g.
Demonstration of I/O hardware testing, calibration, and replacement. h.
Demonstration of all remaining miscellaneous BAS system features. i.
Graphic screens. j.
Review of Owner selected topics. k.
Question and answer period.
3.18
ATC/BAS SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE PERIOD
A.
After approval of the ATC/BAS system Demonstration and prior to Contract Close Out, the
BAS system shall enter an Acceptance Period of four weeks. The Acceptance Period shall not be scheduled until all HVAC systems are in operation and have been accepted, all required cleaning and lubrication has been completed (i.e., filters changed, piping flushed, strainers cleaned, etc.), and the TAB report has been submitted and approved. Schedule the beginning of the Acceptance Period with the Owner = s Representative 2 weeks in advance. During the
Acceptance Period, the system shall operate properly without malfunction, without alarm caused by control action or device failure, and with smooth and stable control of systems and equipment in conformance with these specifications. At the end of the four-week period, the
Commissioning Authority shall provide written notification of the pass/fail status of the
Acceptance Period including documentation of problems requiring contractor attention. Should problems occur during the initial Acceptance Period, the contractor shall correct problems and provide notification to the Owner = s representative that all problems have been corrected. The
Acceptance Period shall be restarted at a mutually scheduled time for an additional one-week period. This process shall be repeated until Commissioning Authority issues notice that the
ATC/DDC system has passed the Acceptance Period without exception.
B.
During the Acceptance Period, the ATC sub-contractor shall maintain a hard copy log of all alarms generated by the BAS system. For each alarm received, contractor shall diagnose the cause of the alarm, and shall list on the log for each alarm, the diagnosed cause of the alarm, and the corrective action taken. If in the contractor = s opinion, the cause of the alarm is not the responsibility of the contractor, contractor shall immediately notify the Owner = s representative.
23 09 00-26
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
During the Acceptance Period, the contractor shall maintain all controller network, hardware and software and any temporary computer and printer required in a state that will allow remote access by Commissioning Authority to Trend Logs as specified below.
3.19
TREND LOGS
A.
Prepare controller and workstation software to display graphical format trend logs during the
Acceptance Period. Trend logs shall demonstrate compliance with contract documents. Trend logs shall be set up to meet the following requirements.
B.
Trend logs shall include all analog and digital input values, analog and digital output values, and set points that are on a reset schedule.
C.
Lines shall be labeled and shall be distinguishable from each other by using either different line types, or different line colors.
D.
Provide graphs indicating engineering units of the y-axis values; e.g., degrees F., inches w.g.,
Btu/lb, percent wide open, etc.
E.
The y-axis scale shall be chosen so that all trended values are in a readable range. Do not mix trended values on one graph if their unit ranges are incompatible.
F.
Trend outside air temperature and humidity during each period in which any other points are trended.
G.
All points trended for one HVAC subsystem (e.g. air handling unit, chilled water system, fan coil units, etc.) shall be trended during the same trend period.
H.
Each graph shall be clearly labeled with HVAC subsystem title, date, and times.
I.
A complete set of trend logs shall consist of all required points, trended for the time period listed for each point category. Point values shall be recorded based on the change-of-value
(COV) differentials listed. If the ATC/BAS system does not have the capability to trend based on COV, then point values shall be trended based on the time intervals listed:
Point Category
Temperature
COV
0.2 degrees F
Time Interval
10 minutes
Time Period
24 hours
Humidity 1 percent RH 10 minutes
Valve and Damper Outputs 1 percent 10 minutes
24 hours
24 hours
3.20
SOFTWARE OPTIMIZATION ASSISTANCE
A.
The contractor shall provide the services of a controls technician for a maximum of 8 manhours at the project site to be at the disposal of the Commissioning Authority. The purpose of this requirement is to make changes, enhancements and additions to controller and/or workstation software that have been identified by the Commissioning Authority during the construction and commissioning phases of the project and that are beyond the specified
Contract requirements. This service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
Requests for assistance shall be for contiguous or non-contiguous 8-hour days, unless otherwise mutually agreed upon by contractor, Commissioning Authority, and Owner. The Owner = s representative shall notify contractor 2 days in advance of each day of requested assistance.
23 09 00-27
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
The controls technician provided shall be thoroughly trained in the programming and operation of the controller and workstation software. If the controls technician provided cannot perform every software task requested by the Commissioning Authority in a timely fashion, contractor shall provide additional qualified personnel at the project site as requested by the
Commissioning Authority, to meet the specified time requirement.
C.
If any part of this requirement is scheduled during the Acceptance Period, such changes made because of this requirement shall not prevent approval of the Acceptance Period. However, during the Opposite Season Acceptance Period such changes shall be demonstrated to perform as documented by the Commissioning Authority.
3.21
ATC/BAS SYSTEM OPPOSITE SEASON ACCEPTANCE PERIOD
A.
During the warranty period, but not later than 6 months from completion of the Acceptance
Period, BAS system shall enter an Opposite Season Acceptance Period of two weeks. Opposite
Season Acceptance Period shall not be scheduled until seasonal conditions have changed to the opposite of those that occurred during the Acceptance Period. Schedule the beginning of the
Acceptance Period with the Owner’s representative 2 weeks in advance. All requirements specified for the Acceptance Period shall also apply to the Opposite Season Acceptance Period.
END OF SECTION 23 09 00
23 09 00-28
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 09 01
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary
General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, a building automatic system as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.
B.
The Building Automatic System shall be provided by the same manufacturer as the automatic temperature controls.
C.
The Automatic System Subcontractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, wiring and instrument piping required for a complete and functioning system.
D.
All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.
E.
The automation system shall be of a fully modular architecture permitting expansion by adding computer memory, application software, operator peripherals and field hardware.
F.
If expansion of the automation system necessitates greater computer processing power, it shall be possible to transfer all existing software and data base, both vendor supplied and user-defined, to a new more powerful computer. This shall be accomplished by using removable, compatible disk cartridges.
G.
Systems which require the existing user-defined data base to be re-entered through the operator's terminal shall not be acceptable.
H.
Although fire alarm and security points will not be installed or monitored, initially the system shall be installed completely ready to receive or accept these points at a later date without additional central hardware or software.
I.
The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and functions as listed in the Building Automation Schedule.
J.
The system as installed shall have sufficient computer memory and application software for
100% point expansion above those points as listed in the Building Automation Schedule.
23 09 01-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
K.
The entire system of Automatic Temperature Controls and the Building Automation System shall be powered from the building = s emergency power system. Components and devices to be powered include, but are not limited to, all ATC panels, BAS computers and remote stations, valve actuators, damper actuators, central and unitary equipment controls and terminal unit controls including VAV boxes. The source of emergency power for all such devices shall be derived from either junction boxes left by the Electrical Contractor as indicated on the electrical drawings, or, if not indicated on the electrical drawings, the HVAC Contractor under his contract shall provide power wiring taken directly from the building = s Emergency Power Distribution
Panel(s).
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Only firms regularly engaged in manufacture and installation of this equipment with characteristics and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years shall be acceptable.
B.
The entire building automation system shall be installed by skilled electricians and mechanics, all of whom are properly trained and qualified for this work. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the Project Electrical Specifications.
C.
Supervision and checkout of the system shall be by factory-trained engineers and technicians directly employed by the automation Contractor.
D.
Provide system produced and installed by the manufacturers, which are listed in Section
"Approved Manufacturer's List".
E.
Provide equipment which performance, under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical work and submit shop drawings.
1.05
COORDINATE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
1.06
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
B.
The system including all hardware and software components shall be guaranteed for a period of one year following the date of final acceptance. Any manufacturing defects arising during this warranty period shall be corrected without cost to the Owner.
C.
All applicable software as detailed in this Specification shall be updated by the Automation
Subcontractor free of charge during the warranty period. This will ensure that all system software will be the most up-to-date software available from the Automation Subcontractor.
23 09 01-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
FIT Project C1195
2.01
TRANSMISSION NETWORK
A.
Distributed Communication Processor
1.
The system shall use an intelligent Distributed Communication Processor (DCP). This processor shall be microprocessor based and shall interface with Central Processing Unit and Remote Processing Units.
B.
Multi-Drop Trunk(s)
1.
The automation system shall include a multi-drop digital transmission network that provides the communication link between the Distributed Communication Processor and all Remote Processing Units.
2.
The transmission shall be asynchronous and utilize a polled-response method. The system shall utilize a cyclic redundancy check or dual transmission with parity check to ensure signal reliability.
3.
The transmission network shall utilize a twisted shielded pair. The transmission speed shall be a minimum of 1200 baud and operate in a half-duplex mode.
4.
The system shall support multiple multidrop trunks. Each multi-drop trunk shall support a minimum of 20 Remote Processing Units.
5.
Each multi-drop trunk shall have an allowable line length of at least 20,000 feet without signal degradation. All multidrop trunks shall be interfaced to the system via standard
EIA interfaces. With the addition of modems, the multidrop trunk shall interface to unconditioned voiceband 3002 telephone lines for remote building tie-in to the automation system.
6.
Transmission technique shall allow trunk cable to be installed in conduit with other system signals as well as switched 120 VAC or 240 VAC.
2.02
FIELD HARDWARE
A.
Remote Processing Units
1.
The system shall utilize intelligent distributed Remote Processing Units (RPU's to interface sensors being monitored and equipment being controlled by the automation system. Each
RPU shall be microprocessor based and perform the following functions: a.
Acquire, process and transfer information to the CPU. b.
Accept, process and execute commands from the CPU or other input devices. c.
Record evaluate and report changes of state and/or value that occur among points associated with the RPU.
2.
Each RPU shall use multi-point function cards to carry out the control and monitoring functions as specified in the point list. For each RPU location, electronics shall be provided for at least 12 spare points.
3.
Each RPU shall perform continuous diagnostics, and any malfunction shall be annunciated at the operator's console as well as visually indicated at the RPU.
4.
Failure of any RPU on the system shall not affect the proper operation of the CPU and other RPU's.
5.
The system shall be capable of phased startup. That is any RPU shall be capable of properly communicating with the CPU while remaining RPU's are being installed.
6.
Surge transient protection shall be provided in each RPU for the purpose of suppressing induced voltage transients.
23 09 01-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
7.
Each RPU shall contain a function card cage and backplane which can accommodate up to
128 points. Each RPU shall contain a power supply sized to drive the function cards, interface relays and sensors for the maximum allowable points.
8.
Any RPU which used volatile memory shall have a minimum of four hour uninterruptible battery backup unless the automation system has an automatic down loading capability.
9.
If the CPU or transmission network fails but power to the RPU does not, the RPU shall continue to monitor all changes of state and/or value and shall retain the most recent values. The RPU shall also maintain all analog set points and command positions.
10.
RPU's shall have all metal cabinets. Each RPU including cabinet, power supply, function cards and termination modules shall be approved by U.L. Each RPU shall have a pin-hinged door and master keyed lock. RPU's shall be capable of proper operation in an ambient environment of 32
to 120
F and 10% to 90% RH.
B.
Function Cards/Termination Modules
1.
Each RPU shall be capable of accepting at least 8 multi-point function cards. It shall be possible to insert any function card into any of the available card slots. There shall be four types of function cards corresponding to industry nomenclature. They are: a.
Digital In for monitoring status, alarms and accumulating pulses. b.
Digital Out for commanding two and three state devices. c.
Analog Out for positioning set points.
2.
Each function card shall be microprocessor based with sufficient memory to retain characterization data for its associated points.
3.
Characterization of point data shall be accomplished on-line at the operators console. The operator shall be able to individually characterize points on each function card through a procedure whereby the operator down-line loads the specific point parameters from the
CPU through the operator's keypad to the RPU. This downline loading shall also occur automatically after a power outage to a RPU.
4.
Function cards that require foil path cuts, jumpers, or similar physical modifications to customize them for particular applications will not be acceptable.
5.
To reduce downtime, each function card shall have a built-in self-test diagnostic and be able to visually indicate its operational status at the RPU as well as failure annunciation at the operator's console.
6.
The failure of any one function card shall not deter the reporting or command capability of other function cards in the same of other RPU's.
7.
Each function card shall have an associated termination module where the field wiring or tubing shall be connected. All termination modules shall have plug connectors interfacing them to their respective function cards through the card cage backplane.
8.
Any termination modules requiring on-site hardwire interconnection to their function cards shall not be acceptable.
9.
Digital input signals shall be terminated through plug-in isolation relays. These shall be form "C" type relays, located in the RPU.
10.
Analog input signals shall be terminated on screw type terminals. Each analog input shall have the capability to accept 2 or 4 wire inputs.
11.
Digital output signals shall be accomplished through plug-in form "C" relays, located in the
RPU.
12.
Analog output signals shall be accomplished through 3 " pneumatic tubing fittings.
C.
Sensors
1.
All analog sensors shall utilize industry standard 4-20 milliamp signals to facilitate owner expansion. Sensors based on proprietary equipment shall not be acceptable.
23 09 01-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.
All analog signals shall be converted for digital transmission to the CPU at the function card.
3.
All sensoring wiring whether it be analog or digital, input or output, shall be capable of sharing single conduit runs without affecting signal performance. All signal wiring shall also be capable of sharing single conduit runs with switched AC of 120 VAC or 240 VAC.
2.03
SOFTWARE
A.
The Automation System Subcontractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the automation system functions required by this Specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system.
B.
The software shall include a computer-vendor supplied and supported, unmodified real-time disk operating system. Systems which use an operating system which has been modified or is proprietary to the Automation System Subcontractor shall not be acceptable. The Automation
System Subcontractor shall supply all the building automation system software. The building automation system software shall be written in high level language such as FORTRAN IV or
Pascal.
2.04
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A.
The building automation system software shall be provided in four categories which are defined as:
1.
Operator access to system data base.
2.
User control over system configuration.
3.
Facility monitoring functions.
4.
Energy management control functions.
B.
Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules written in FORTRAN IV.
Each module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in the real-time operating system.
C.
Systems with software written in other than Fortran IV shall be provided with a cross-compiler to
FORTRAN IV.
D.
Operator Access to System Data Base:
1.
Operator/System Communication: The building automation system shall use English language for each point identification. This shall be full English words with the option to abbreviate at the users discretion. To facilitate different building operators, the system shall accept multiple English language identifiers as well as foreign language identifiers for each point on the system. These shall be known as "User Names". For example:
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING AHU 1
SUPPLY FAN 1
AIR HANDLING UNIT 1 shall all identify the same desired point. In addition system formatting shall be provided which shall allow for software grouping of related points.
2.
Input Format: a.
Allowable operators as defined under operator access shall be able to control system functions by their inputs at appropriate operator terminals. b.
The system shall recognize all inputs as functions or commands to be performed.
The system's handling of operator inputs such as requests to start a motor, output a
23 09 01-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 log, change a time program, acknowledge an alarm, or do any of the other commands described in this specification, shall be in a similar format. c.
All operator interaction with the automation system shall be performed as follows:
The operator entry shall begin with the commands he desires the system to perform, followed by the user name and any data, such as limit values, program times, etc.
Manual commands such as start, stop, log, etc. have no data values associated.
Example: COMMAND ON AHU 1. d.
Upon entry of a command to the point or points desired as described above, the system shall, before performing any command, respond with an echo of the request on the device (Cathode Ray Tube or keyboard printer) being used. This echo feedback shall include the command requested, the user name and any entered data. e.
Should an operator make an error in entry, the system shall output an advisory message detailing the nature of the error. Advisory messages shall be in full
English with a unique advisory for each type of operator input error. Typical operator error advisories might be:
1) System input format is incorrect.
2) Invalid command entered.
3) Analog limit is outside specified range.
4) Point does not respond to the command entered, such as a "start" command to a temperature sensor.
5) Operator's entry did not contain sufficient information.
6) Invalid operator password.
3.
Output Format: a.
The system shall operate on a System Format basis, regardless of the manner of hardware configuration in which data is required. A system of points shall consist of a logical grouping of data points related to a piece of mechanical equipment, an energy distribution system, or an architectural area. For example, in some cases it may be desired to display a space temperature with its associated air handling unit, and in other cases to display all space temperatures on a floor or in a building as a single system. The Automation System shall allow such determinations to the made without regard to a point or group of points physical hardware locations(s).
Likewise, the system shall accommodate future changes of system groupings and operations without field hardware changes whatsoever. b.
All output displays and logs shall contain a header line indicating the following information:
- time - console identifier
- date - initials of on-duty operator
- day - owner definable information
Example:
12:45 06/23/83 FRI MASTER CONSOLE SMD 76
F 42% RH c.
All output displays or logs of a system point or group of points shall contain as a minimum the following information:
- user name of point - associated engineering units
- point descriptor
- current value/status
- alarm descriptor
Example:
EAST MECHANICAL ROOM AHU SUPPLY TEMP 85
F d.
User names, point descriptors, and engineering units shall be operator definable on a per point basis. Systems which use fixed vendor-supplied look up tables shall not be acceptable.
4.
Operator Access Restriction:
23 09 01-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 a.
Operator access to the automation system shall be via user-defined passwords providing at least five access levels. b.
Each operator shall gain access to the system by entering a unique name and password combination. c.
Properly signing-on by an operator shall produce a hard copy report indicating the name of the operator, time, and date that operator has signed on. d.
Invalid operator attempts to enter the system shall also produce a hard copy report as defined above and additionally indicate the nature of the unsuccessful sign-on. e.
To return the system to a secured mode, the operator shall sign off the system. f.
Signing off the system shall also produce a hard copy report of the operator's name, time and date. g.
The automation system shall automatically sign off an operator should that operator not sign off after a specified period of time. h.
In addition to producing hard copy reports of valid or invalid sign-on and sign-off attempts, the automation system shall store in nonvolatile memory a historical record for a minimum of 30 system entries, valid and invalid. This information shall only be available to the operator with the highest access level. i.
All information pertaining to operator access shall be user-defined while the system is on-line and fully operational. j.
Typical operator access levels are:
1) LEVEL 0 - Normal operator functions such as log and display request, alarm acknowledgement.
2) LEVEL 1 - All Level O functions plus analog limit changes, point lockouts and comment functions.
3) LEVEL 2 - All lower level functions plus modification to calculations and system messages.
4) LEVEL 3 - All lower level functions plus changes to point descriptors, user names.
5) LEVEL 4 - All lower level functions plus access to add, modify or delete any and all user-defined parameters and access levels. k.
It shall be possible for the user to define the distinctions between various access levels. l.
Systems that utilize fixed vendor defined operator access levels shall not be acceptable.
E.
User Control Over System Configuration:
1.
Data Base Creation and Modification: a.
The intent of this specification is to allow the owner to independently do his own modifications to the system. b.
All changes shall be done utilizing standard procedures and must be capable of being done while the system is on-line and operational. c.
To aid an operator, instructive prompting software shall be provided. An operator shall be required to simply answer to "yes" and "no" type questions as well as provide information such as English user names, desired engineering units, point descriptors, etc. d.
The owner must have the minimum capability to:
1) Add and delete points.
2) Modify any point parameter.
3) Change, add or delete English language descriptors.
4) Change add or delete engineering units.
5) Change add or delete points in start/stop programs, trend logs, etc.
23 09 01-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
6) Select analog alarm limits.
7) Characterize each function card to accept different analog inputs, pulsed or steady state digital signals.
8) Adjust analog differentials.
9) Create custom relationships between points. A general purpose user language shall be provided, such that the user can implement software interlocks, master/slave relationships, and calculations. e.
The operator shall be able to modify all points within the data base. This modification shall include adding, deleting and modifying required additional or ranges, engineering units, mode of operation, etc. The addition of a new field point may be totally accomplished from the keyboard once the proper field hardware devices are installed, or the change function may modify existing field hardware to serve a new purpose. f.
As points are added to the field, they may be grouped into new system and building displays or they may be substituted for existing points within existing systems or added to existing systems.
F.
Facility Monitoring Functions:
1.
Report and Logs: a.
An operator shall be able to manually request reports and logs from the console keyboard. The operator shall have the capability to direct any log or report to either a report printer or CRT display. b.
It shall be possible for the automation system to automatically initiate logs and reports. These logs and reports shall be initiated on time, date, or day basis, or any combination of time, date or day. c.
Each report shall be in English language with information logically grouped in a format that facilitates easy interpretation. Reports and logs shall be attainable on a per point basis or user-defined group of points. Groups of points shall be logically combined without regard to the hardware physical locations. Example:
1) Current value of a discharge temperature in a particular air handler.
2) Current value of all discharge temperatures in a specific building.
3) Current value of all discharge temperatures in a multi-building complex. d.
As a minimum, the following report categories shall be provided:
- Summaries
- Historical Trends
- Profile Reports
- Access Reports
- Data Base Management Reports
- System Diagnostic Report
- Totalization Logs - Energy Management
2.
Summaries:
1) All Point b.
A summary shall be provided detailing the current values of any and all points associated with the automation system.
1) Building or System or Custom Group c.
A summary shall be provided detailing the current values of any and all points within a building or system as detailed by the Owner.
1) Motor Status d.
A summary shall be provided detailing the current status of any and all motors connected to the system. This summary shall also have the capability of detailing the current values of points associated with any of the system motors.
1) Alarm e.
A summary shall be provided to detail the status of any and all the points currently in alarm.
23 09 01-8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1) Alarm Limit f.
A summary shall be provided to detail the operator assigned high and/or low alarm limit for any and all alarmable points on the system.
1) CPA Set Point g.
A summary shall be provided detailing the set point for any and all CPA points supported by the system.
1) Point Lockout h.
A summary shall be provided of the most recent status of any and all locked out
(disabled for alarm reporting) points by the system or operator.
1) Message i.
A summary shall be provided detailing the contents of any and all messages within the system.
1) Graphics j.
A summary shall be provided detailing the instruction listings for any and all dynamic color graphics.
3.
Historical Trend Log: A log shall be provided for each defined trend group which shall include as a minimum; user name(s) assigned to that group, time increment in real-time, and associated values per time increment. a.
The automation system shall include a software program that will provide an Air
Handling Unit (AHU) profile report (AHUPR). b.
The chiller profile report shall be automatically printed at an operator defined time.
4.
Totalization Logs a.
A log shall be provided including any and all points as defined in the point list. Log shall include user name(s)and associated totalized values.
5.
Access Reports a.
Access Level Assignments
1) A report shall be provided detailing operator access level assignments. This report shall include as a minimum operator's name, password, access level assignment and on-duty initials. b.
System Entry
1) A report shall be provided detailing which operator signed on or off the building automation system. The report shall include; operator's name, password, time and date, console number and elapsed time of operator access.
6.
Data Base Management Report a.
A report shall be provided including a report of the current system data base.
7.
System Diagnostic Report a.
A report shall be provided detailing any system hardware software errors. This report shall include as a minimum those errors occurring within the central processing unit including disk subsystem.
8.
Analog Limits a.
Each analog point shall have associated high and low limits. If the measured or calculated value drops below the low limit or exceeds the high limit that point shall be considered in alarm and report as previously defined in alarm reporting. b.
Each high and low limit shall have an associated user defined limit differential to prevent nuisance alarms caused from floating about the alarm limit. c.
Any analog point shall be disable from alarm reporting if it is associated with a previously defined master point which is turned off.
9.
Binary Alarms a.
Each binary point detected as being in alarm shall report as previously defined in alarm reporting.
23 09 01-9
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 b.
Any binary point shall be disabled from alarm reporting if it is associated with a previously defined master point which is turned off. The operator shall be able to define an adjustable time delay which disables alarm checking during starting and stopping of equipment.
10.
Analog/Binary Totalization a.
The automation system software shall support both analog and binary totalization. b.
The operator shall be able to:
1) enable to disable individual points from totalizing.
2) assign upper limits for each point enabled for totalization.
3) reset a totalized value.
11.
Display the current value of an individual point, group of points of all system points.
12.
Reporting: Any point's current value exceeding its assigned upper limit shall report as a totalized alarm point.
13.
Analog Points: It shall be possible to totalize analog values with appropriate engineering units such as kilowatt hours, gallons, pounds, liters, etc.
14.
Binary Points: It shall be possible to totalize the accumulated: a.
Run time in hours or minutes b.
Contact status in hours or minutes
(Example: magnetic contact switch indicates a door open for 45 minutes).
G.
History Trending:
1.
The system software shall provide the ability to historically trend operator selectable points.
2.
The operator shall be able to assign any system point, analog or binary, real or calculated to a trend group. Trend groups shall consist of a single point or multiple point groups with a capacity of at least 50 points.
3.
Operator assignments shall be through the operator's terminal in simple English language.
Points assigned to a trend group shall be the point's English user name.
4.
Trended values shall be historically retained on the system disk for future inquiry.
5.
Operator shall be able to request trended values to be retrieved from disk and printed out at operator defined time intervals.
6.
Operator shall be able to define time intervals to one minute resolution.
H.
Preventive Maintenance Work Orders:
1.
The system shall provide preventive maintenance instructive work orders which can be displayed manually or automatically.
2.
The operator shall have the capability to create, modify and delete work orders while the system is on-line and fully operational.
3.
Operator entries shall be through the operator's keyboard and all entries shall be in English language.
4.
A report shall be provided to display or log the contents of any and all work orders in the system. a.
Capacity:
1) The system shall have the capacity to store on-line a minimum of 750 operator defined work orders.
2) Each work order shall have a capacity of not less than 256 characters.
3) A mechanism shall be provided which allows for lengthy work orders by linking more than one together. b.
Display:
1) Work orders shall manually or automatically be displayed on a specified CRT or printed on a specified printer.
23 09 01-10
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2) Manual - The operator shall be able to display or print any and all maintenance work orders by requesting the same.
3) Automatically - The system shall have the capability of displaying or printing maintenance work orders on the following occurrences: a) A designated point exceeding a specified run time limit. b) A specific time, day or date. c) Any combination of time, day and date. d) A designated point having gone into "ALARM".
I.
Powerfail/Automatic System Restart:
1.
Power failures affecting the Central Processing Unit (CPU) shall cause the CPU to go into an orderly shut down with no less of memory under any circumstances.
2.
Upon resumption of power to the CPU, the system shall automatically restart the print-out the time and date of the power failure.
3.
The restart program shall automatically restart affected field equipment. Restart shall be of a static nature (restart of operator pre-assigned equipment) or an appropriate state restart
(places the building equipment in the proper operational state as of the time of return to commercial power.) The nature of the restart program shall be user-definable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Examine location where this equipment is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that equipment comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of equipment with other components.
3.03
SYSTEM TURN-OVER AND SERVICE
A.
System Start-up and Acceptance
1.
Upon completion of the installation, the Automation System Sub-Contractor shall startup the system and perform all necessary testing an debugging operations. An acceptance test in the presence of the Owner's representative, the Architect, and the Engineer shall be performed. When the system performance is deemed satisfactory in whole or in part by these observers, the system parts will be accepted for beneficial use and placed under warranty.
B.
Owner's Instruction
1.
The Automatic System Subcontractor shall provide two copies of an operator's manual describing all operating and routine maintenance service procedures to be used with the
23 09 01-11
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 system. The Automatic Subcontractor shall instruct the Owner's designated representatives in these procedures during the start-up and test period. The duration of the instruction period shall be no less than eighty hours. These instructions are to be conducted during normal working hours. The instructions shall consist of both hands-on and classroom training at the job site.
END OF SECTION 23 09 01
23 09 01-12
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 20 00
PIPING FOR HVAC
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary
General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The Work includes providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all piping as shown on the
Drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
"Manufacturers"-Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipe whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than ten (10) years.
B.
Provide pipe whose performance, under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.
C.
Piping systems and installation of piping shall comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9.
Refrigerant piping systems shall comply with ANSI/ASME (B31.5, Refrigeration Piping).
D.
All piping and fittings shall be made in the USA and shall be labeled as such. Piping shall also be labeled with ASTM number for easy identification/verification at the site.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work", and submit shop drawings.
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work".
B.
Furnish fabrication detail drawings for all pipe hangers and supports for piping 2 2 inches nominal size and larger.
C.
Furnish hanger and support location drawings for piping 2 2 inches nominal size and larger.
D.
Perform calculations necessary for the design and selection of hangers, supports, anchors, guides, restraints, snubbers, and supplementary supporting steel for piping 2 2 inches nominal size and larger.
E.
Perform weight distribution, expansion and movement calculations for all piping.
23 20 00-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
F.
Shop Drawings and Data: Contractor shall prepare the following drawings:
1.
Fabrication Detail Shop Drawings: These drawings shall show each pipe hanger or support for piping 2 2 inches nominal size and larger and shall include location of hanger with reference to nearest building columns or beams, arrangements and detail of hanger, detail of concrete anchor or detail of welded or bolted attachment to structural steel, bill of materials for all components with ASTM specification numbers and direction and magnitude of movement and thrusts and weight at hanger point. Provide the load at each concrete anchor.
2.
Piping Erection Detail and Layout Drawings: Provide scaled detailed piping arrangement drawings showing all piping systems and connected components. Indicate piping in double line detail for all piping 2" and larger. Show piping with insulation thicknesses.
Indicate all valves and valve handles, automatic actuators, strainers and access space, reducers, instruments, anchors/guides and supports, seismic components (if applicable) and all equipment to which piping is connected.
3.
Hanger and Support Location Shop Drawings: Contractor shall mark all pipe hanger and support locations for piping 2 2 inches nominal size and larger on Piping Erection Detail and Layout drawings. Contractor shall also show all structural grids and support points on these drawings.
1.06
WARRANTY
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, "Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE
A.
All pipe shall be new, free from scale or rust, of the material and weight specified under the various services. Each length of pipe shall be properly marked at the mill for proper identification with name or symbol of manufacturer.
B.
All steel piping, except where otherwise rated, shall be standard or extra strong weight, in conformance with the ASTM A-53 Grade B seamless, for piping 2" and larger, as manufactured by National Tube Division, Republic Steel Corp., or approved equal. Piping shall be ASTM
A-53 Grade F continuous butt weld, for piping less than 2".
C.
High temperature hot water supply and return piping shall be ASTM A-106 Grade B.
D.
All brass piping shall be standard or extra heavy weight 85% red brass semi-annealed seamless-drawn, in conformance with the ASTM B-43, as manufactured by Anaconda, American
Brass Co., Chase Brass and Copper Co., or Revere Copper and Brass, Inc.
E.
All copper tubing shall be of weight as required for service specified, with conformance with
ASTM B-88 for Types "L" and "K" tubing, as manufactured by Chase, Anaconda, Revere, or approved equal. Tubing and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned with sand cloth and treated with an approved non-corrosive flux before solder is applied.
F.
All galvanized steel piping shall be standard or extra strong weight, as specified, in conformance with the ASTM A-53 Grade B. Pipe shall be hot-dripped zinc-coated with Prime Western smelter and not wiped.
23 20 00-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
G.
Generally, unless otherwise specified, joints in steel piping of sizes 2 inches and under shall be screwed, and all sized 2 2 inches and over shall be welded or flanged. Brass pipe shall be screwed 2 inches and smaller and flanged 2 2 inches and over. Copper tubing shall be silver-soldered or 95-5 solder as herein specified.
H.
All high temperature hot water piping shall be welded using welding fittings. No screwed piping will be allowed for high temperature hot water system. No copper or brass piping will be permitted in the high temperature hot water system.
I.
Screwed Piping
1.
All connections to apparatus with screwed piping shall be made with 250 pound brass seat unions.
2.
All screwed nipples shall be Schedule 80 nipples.
J.
Threaded joints in glycol filled systems shall be made by Radiator Specialty Co. Submit sample and obtain approval.
K.
Welding Piping
1.
All fittings for welded piping shall be as manufactured by Tube Turn, Grinnell, Bonney
Forge or equal as approved by the Architect. The fittings shall be of the same weight and material as the piping to which they are attached.
2.
For piping 2 2 " or 4" and larger, full size branch connection shall be made with manufactured welding tees, branch connections for less than full size, shall be made with welding tees or with Weldolet forged branch outlet fittings. Fishmouthing, shaped nipples, and stubbing not permitted.
L.
Welding outlet fittings shall be Weldolets as manufactured by Bonney Forge, Inc., or approved equal 2 or 3 and smaller branches shall be made with thredolets as made by Bonney Forge or approved equal.
M.
Weld ells shall have a center line radius not less than diameter of the pipes.
N.
All flanges shall be welding neck flanges ANSI B16.5 ASTM 181 Grade I. All systems, except where otherwise noted - 150 lbs. Class, forged steel.
O.
Instrumentation connections : " and smaller on all systems shall be provided by welding threaded
2000# forged steel half couplings to the pipe.
P.
All pipe to be welded shall be cut off clean and beveled. All welding shot shall be removed.
Q.
Composition of welding electrodes shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
R.
Pipe welding shall comply with the provisions of the latest revision of the applicable code, whether ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, ANSI Code for Pressure Piping B31, or such state or local requirements as may supersede codes mentioned above.
S.
Before any pipe welding is performed, submit a copy of the welding procedure specifications together with proof of its qualification as outlined and required by the most recent issue of the code having jurisdiction. Submittal shall comply with ANSI/ASME B31.1/B31.9.
23 20 00-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
T.
Before any operator shall perform any pipe welding, also submit the operator's qualification record in conformance with provisions of the code having jurisdiction, showing that the operator was tested and certified under the Procedure Specification as before mentioned. Submittal shall comply with ANSI/ASME B31.1/B31.9.
U.
Assume responsibility for the quality of welding done and repair or replace any work not in accordance with these specifications.
V.
In addition, all pipe welding procedures and procedures for qualification of pipe welding operators shall comply with the requirements of the American Welding Society.
W.
Cut weld test plugs at locations selected at random by the Architect. The test plugs shall be tested by the testing agency approved for this project. Failure of the test plugs to meet the standards of the specified codes and agencies shall result in the complete removal and replacement of the joint and retesting of the operator who performed the welding. The removal and replacement of the joints shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
X.
Pipe Schedule: Pipe for the various services shall be as follows:
Service
Cold Water
Cold Water
Cold Water (NYC)
Hot Water (Heating) and Reheat
Chilled Water & Dual Temperature
Water
Condenser Water
Refrigerant
Vent (water discharge) above ground
Brass
Copper
Copper
Steel
Steel
Steel
Material
Copper Tubing
Copper Tubing
Schedule
Standard
Type K
Type "TP"
40 or standard
40 or standard
40 or standard
ACR Type
3 " Type "L" (soft)
Y.
The Contractor shall have the option to use Type K copper for hot water and chilled water piping up to and including 2", and brazed Type L copper for glycol water piping up to and including 2”.
2.02
FITTINGS
A.
Fittings shall be specified under "Fitting Schedule" for various services.
B.
Welding fittings shall be of the same material and schedule as the pipe to which they are welded.
Welding elbows shall be long radius pattern unless clearance conditions necessitate the use of standard radius pattern. Welding fittings shall be as made by Tube-Turn.
C.
Fittings shall be of material conforming to the following schedule:
Steel Welding Fittings ASTM A-106
Forged Steel Fittings
Malleable Iron Fittings
ASTM A-234
ASTM A-197
Ductile Iron Fittings
Cast-Iron Fittings
Brass Fittings
Wrought Copper Fittings
Bronze Cast Fittings
ASTM A-395 & A-536
ASTM A-126
ASTM B-62
ASTM B-75 & B-152
ASTM B-584
23 20 00-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
Solder Fittings ASTM B-88
D.
All fittings used at expansion loops or bends shall be extra heavy.
FIT Project C1195
E.
Cast-iron, malleable-iron and bronze fittings shall be of Crane manufacturer or approved equal.
F.
Flanges shall be raised face, of the same weight as the fittings in each service category. All flanges shall be drilled to "US Standard" hex nuts and washers. Bolting shall conform to ASTM
193 Grade B-7, threads Class 7 fit. Nuts shall be semi-finished hexagonal, ANSI B18.2 ASTM
A194 Grade 2H.
1.
Flange Adapters for grooved end pipe shall be ASTM A-395 and A-536 ductile iron, with synthetic rubber gasket. (Grade to suit the intended service.) Flange Adapters shall be CL
150, Victaulic Style 741.
G.
Unions - Unions 2 inches and smaller shall be screwed. Unions 2 2 inches and larger shall be flanged. Screwed unions on steel pipe, unless otherwise specified, shall be of malleable iron with bronze ground seats suitable for 300 pounds W.S.P. Screwed unions on copper or brass pipe shall be brass, ground joint suitable for 300 pounds W.S.P. Flanged unions shall be malleable iron for steel pipe, and brass for copper or brass pipe, gasket type suitable for 150 pounds W.S.P. If grooved mechanical pipe couplings are used, additional unions are not required. Couplings shall serve as unions. Unions shall be as manufactured by Crane or approved equal.
H.
Brass pipe threads shall be cut with special brass treading dies, and the joints shall be made up with lubricant. Strap wrenches, or equivalent, shall be used in making up brass pipe. Wrenches which gouge or scar the pipe will not be used.
I.
Solder for each solder-type fitting shall be of 95% tin and 5% antimony or silver solder, as specified herein. Refrigerant piping joints shall be made with silver solder.
J.
Unless otherwise specified, all flanged joints shall be fitted with Manville or equal ring gaskets designed for the intended service.
K.
Gaskets used high temperature hot water system shall be Manville Style m 60 sheet.
L.
Fitting Schedule: Fittings for the various services shall be as follows:
Service
Overflow and Drain ALL
Size
Cold Water
Overflow and Drain
ALL
ALL
Material
Galv. M.I.
Wrought Copper
Bronze
Wrought Copper
Wrought Copper
150#
125#
125#
125#
125#
Weight
Cold Water
Hot Water (Heating)
Chilled Water and
ALL
2" & Below
2 2 " & Above
2" & Below
Bronze
Wrought Copper
CI
Steel
CI
125#
125#
125#
Sch. 40
125#
Type
Screwed
Solder
Brazed
Solder
Solder
Grooved
Brazed
Solder
Grooved
Screwed
Welding
Screwed
23 20 00-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
Service
Dual Temperature
Water
Condenser Water
Glycol (Heating)
Refrigerant
2 2
Size
" & Above
2" & Below
2 2 " & Above
ALL
ALL
Steel
DI
CI
Steel
DI
Material
Steel or Wrought
Copper
Wrought Copper
Sch. 40
125#
300#
FIT Project C1195
Weight
Sch. 40
125#
Sch. 40
Type
Welding
Grooved
Screwed
Welding
Grooved
Welding
Solder
15% Silver
Solder
Solder Vent (Water
Discharge)
ALL Wrought Copper 125#
2.03
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide necessary structural members, hangers and supports of approved design to keep piping in proper alignment and prevent transmission of injurious thrusts and vibrations. In all cases where hangers, brackets, etc., are supported from metal decking and/or concrete construction, care shall be taken not to weaken decking and/or concrete or penetrate waterproofing. All hangers and supports shall be capable of screw adjustment after piping is erected. Hangers supporting piping expanding into loops, bends and offsets shall be secured to the building structure in such a manner that horizontal adjustment perpendicular to the run of piping supported may be made to accommodate displacement due to expansion. All such hangers shall be finally adjusted, both in the vertical and horizontal direction, when the supported piping is hot, or chilled, as required.
Hangers in direct contact with copper or brass pipe shall be solid copper.
B.
Pipe hangers shall be the clevis and pipe roll types, except where otherwise noted.
PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE
Pipe
2" & smaller (steel)
2" & smaller
5" & above
Type of Hanger
Clevis Hanger
Adjustable Wrought Iron
(copper)
2 2 " to 4" (steel) Adjustable Steel Yoke Pipe Roll
2 2 " to 4" (copper) Adjustable Swivel Ring
Two Rod Roller Hanger
Grinnell
Fig. m
260
CT-65
181
CT-69
171
Make and Model
B-Line Fig. m
B3100
Carpenter &
Paterson Fig. m
100
B3104CT 100 CT
B3110
B3170CT
B3114
140
142
C.
Beam clamps - Hangers supported from floor steel shall be approved I beam clamps. I beam clamps for hangers shall be wrought steel. B-Line Fig. B3055 (C&P Fig. m 268) or equal.
D.
Where piping is run near the floor and not hung from the ceiling construction but is supported from the floor, such supports shall be of pipe standards with base flange and adjustable top yoke similar to B-Line Fig. B3091 (C&P Fig. 247) or equal.
E.
All vertical piping shall be anchored by means of heavy steel clamps securely bolted or welded to the piping, and with end extension bearing on the building.
23 20 00-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
F.
All vertical piping shall be guided at each floor by use of clamps fastened to building structure.
Provide 360
protective saddle at guides. Saddles shall be fastened to pipe or insulation.
G.
Vertical runs of pipe not over 15 feet long shall be supported by hangers placed not over one foot from the elbows on the connecting horizontal runs.
H.
Vertical runs of pipe over 15 feet long but not over 60 feet long and not over 6 inches in size, or not over 30 feet long and not over 12 inches in size, shall be supported on heavy steel clamps.
Clamps shall be bolted tightly around the pipes and shall reset securely on the building structure without blocking. Clamps shall be welded to the pipes or placed below couplings. Clamps shall be B-Line Fig. B3373 or equal.
I.
For all chilled water, dual temperature water, makeup water and insulated refrigerant piping, provide "Insulshield" as made by Insulcoustic Corp. or pipe covering protection shield B-Line
Fig. B3151 (C&P Fig. 265P) with steel shield min. 9 inches long, with vapor barrier jacket. For hot-water heating piping 2 inches and smaller, same as above. For hot-water heating piping 2 2 inches and larger, provide steel pipe covering protection saddles B-Line Fig. B3160 (C&P Fig.
353 series).
J.
Piping in trenches shall reset or hang from angle iron cross supports provided by the Contractor with two coatings of red primer and final coat for black asphaltum paint.
K.
Hanger rods shall be of the following diameters:
Pipe Size
1 3 inch & below
1 2 and 2 inch
2 2 inch
3 inch
4 inch
5 inch
6 inch
8 inch & above
Rod Diameter d inch d inch
2 inch e
: f
inch
inch
inch
Max. Spacing
6'-0"
10'-0" (copper 8'-0")
10'-0" (copper 8'-0")
12'-0"
12'-0"
12'-0"
L.
Hanger rods shall be attached to preset concrete inserts with steel reinforcing rod through the insert and both ends hooked over the reinforcing mesh. For pipes 4 inches and larger, rods shall extend through concrete slab above where they shall be attached to steel bearing plates 6" x 6" x
3 ".
M.
All trapeze pipe supports shall be constructed of angle iron or C-channel. Uni-strut type supports are acceptable only for medical gas piping. Insulated refrigerant piping may be supported using strut type supports as long as AP Armaflex insulation is used and the strut clamp is a Series 72 A Klo-Shure @ by Hydra-Zorb which is intentionally oversized to match the O.D. of the insulation and includes a plastic clamp collar insert. All angle iron supports located outdoors
(trapeze supports or vertical components) shall be of galvanized or stainless steel, including all related support rods and hardware.
N.
Piping shall not be hung from other piping, ducts, conduits or from equipment of other trades and no vertical expansion shields will be permitted. Hanger rods shall not pierce ducts.
23 20 00-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
O.
All water piping connected to rotating equipment within all mechanical spaces shall be isolated from the building structure by means of vibration hangers inserted in the hanger rods. The vibration hangers shall consist of a steel spring in combination with a double deflection neoprene element within a rectangular steel housing. Combined static deflection shall be 1.375" minimum. Hangers shall have capability of supporting the piping at a fixed elevation during installation and shall incorporate an adjusting device to transfer the load to the spring.
Deflection shall be indicated by means of scale. Vibration hangers shall be type PCDNHS made by Mason Industries. Provide flexible pipe connectors at all pump suction and discharge piping.
P.
Where additional steel is required for the support of hangers, furnish and install same subject to the approval of the Architect. Piping and ductwork shall not be supported from concrete slab construction at ceiling.
Q.
All piping running on walls shall be supported by means of hanger suspended from heavy angle iron wall brackets. No wall hooks will be permitted.
R.
Lateral bracing of horizontal pipe shall be provided where required to prevent side sway or vibration. The lateral bracing shall be of a type approved by the Architect and shall be installed where directed by the Architect.
S.
Assume the responsibility for the proper transfer of the loads of the piping systems to the structure. No additional cost to the Owner should be expected for any corrective work during construction.
T.
Rigid type grooved mechanical couplings shall be complete with reverse-angle bolt pads to meet support and hanging requirements corresponding to ANSI B31.1, B31.9, and NFPA 13.
2.04
ANCHORS
A.
All anchors shall be separate and independent of all hangers, guides, and supports. Anchors shall be of heavy blacksmith construction suitable in every way for the work approved by the
Architect. Anchors shall be welded to the pipe and fastened to the structure with bolts.
B.
Anchors shall be fabricated and assembled in such a form as to secure the piping in a fixed position. They shall permit the line to take up its expansion and contraction freely in opposite directions away from the anchored points; and shall be so arranged as to be structurally suitable for particular location, and line loading. Submit calculations and details for approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where the piping is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
23 20 00-8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.02
INSTALLATION
FIT Project C1195
A.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of piping with other components of systems.
B.
Provide and erect in a workmanlike manner, according to the best practices of the trade, all piping shown on the Drawings or required to complete the installation intended by these Specifications.
C.
The Drawings indicate schematically the size and location of piping. Piping shall be set up and down and offset to meet field conditions and to provide adequate maintenance room and headroom in the Mechanical Rooms.
D.
Study the General Construction Specifications and Plans, of the exact dimension of finished work and of the height of finished ceilings in all rooms where radiation, units, equipment or pipes are to be placed and arrange the work in accordance with the Schedule of Interior Finishes, as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
E.
All piping shall be run perpendicular and/or parallel to floors, interior walls, etc. Piping and valves shall be grouped neatly and shall be run so as to avoid reducing headroom or passage clearance. Provide min. 7'-6" headroom under passageway in mechanical equipment room. All valves, controls and accessories concealed in furred spaces and requiring access for operation and maintenance shall be arranged to assure the use of a minimum number of access doors.
F.
All pipe lines made with screwed fittings must be provided with sufficient number of flanges or unions to enable the removal of piping without breakage of fittings.
G.
All piping shall be erected as to insure a perfect and noiseless circulation throughout the system.
No bull head tees will be permitted.
H.
All valves and specialties shall be placed so as to permit easy operation and access.
I.
Provide proper provision for expansion and contraction in all portions of pipe work, to prevent undue strains on piping or apparatus connected therewith. Provide signed and sealed pipe expansion calculations by an independent, licensed NYS Professional Engineer to substantiate all such provisions for said expansion and contraction. These calculations shall be based on the piping shop drawings. Provide double swings at riser transfers and other offsets wherever possible, to take up expansion. Arrange riser branches to take up motion of riser.
J.
Approved bolted, gasketed, flanges (screwed or welded) shall be installed at all apparatus and appurtenances, and wherever else required to permit easy connection and disconnection.
Screwed unions shall be used on piping 2" or less.
K.
All piping connections to coils and equipment shall be made with offsets provided with screwed or welded bolted flanges arranged so that the equipment can be serviced or removed without dismantling the piping.
L.
If, after plant is in operation, any coils or other apparatus are stratified or air bound (by vacuum or pressure), they shall be repiped with new approved and necessary fittings, air vents, or vacuum breakers at no extra cost. If connections are concealed in furring, floors, or ceilings, the
Contractor shall bear all expenses of tearing up and refinishing construction and finish, leaving same in as good condition as before it was disturbed.
23 20 00-9
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
M.
Fittings shall be of the eccentric reducing type, where changes of size occur in horizontal piping to provide for proper drainage or venting. Steel pipe bends shall be made of the very best grade open hearth, low carbon steel, leaving a smooth uniform exterior and interior surface. Pipe bends shall be made with seamless steel pipe, having a minimum radius of not less than five (5) pipe diameters.
N.
Tubing shall be erected neatly in a workmanlike manner. Bends in soft copper tubing benders to prevent deformation of the tubing in the bends. Approved seat-to-pipe threaded adapters shall be provided for junctions with valves and other equipment having threaded connections.
O.
Vertical sections of main risers shall be constructed of pipe lengths welded together. No couplings shall be used.
P.
The ends of all pipe and nipples shall be thoroughly reamed to the full inside diameter of the pipe and all burrs formed in the cutting of the pipes shall be removed.
Q.
Piping shall be installed in accordance with the latest edition of the ASME Code for Pressure
Piping.
R.
All piping shall be concealed above furred ceilings in rooms where such ceilings are provided
(except where specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings, or in walls or partitions, except as otherwise indicated).
S.
Piping, fittings or valves of dissimilar materials shall be connected with dielectric connectors as made by Ebco Company or approved equal.
T.
Piping at all equipment and valves shall be supported to prevent strains or distortions in the connected equipment and valves. Piping shall be sufficiently supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without causing excessive stress or damage to the remaining piping, vales or equipment, without requiring additional supports after these items are removed.
U.
Pipe nipples - Any piece of pipe 3" in length and less shall be considered a nipple. All nipples with unthreaded portion 1 2 " and less shall be extra heavy. Only shoulder nipples shall be used.
No close nipples will be permitted.
V.
Screw threads shall be cut clean and true; screw joints made tight without caulking. No caulking will be permitted. A non-hardening lubricant shall be used. No bushings shall be used.
Reductions, otherwise causing objectionable water or air pockets, to be made with eccentric reducers or eccentric fittings.
W.
Pitch water piping upward one inch per 100 feet in direction of flow to ensure adequate flow without air binding, and to prevent noise and water hammer. Pitch drain piping c inch per foot in the direction of flow. Branch connections to mains are to be made in such a manner as to prevent air trapping and permit free passage of air. To meet job conditions, mains shall set up to maintain headroom, and clear other trades. Provide oversized float operated automatic air vent
(with valve). Avoid 90
. lift set-ups in supply lines by using 45 degree ells. Where 90
. lifts exceed 12" install automatic air vent in supply lines. All lifts in return lines shall be installed with automatic air vents. Pipe outlet of all automatic air vents to an open sight drain if the vent is concealed, or to within two feet of the floor within machine rooms. All water piping shall pitch back to low points for drainage. Low points shall be provided with capped : inch hose cocks.
23 20 00-10
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
X.
Provide drain valves at the heel of all interior main water risers. Provide capped drain valves at the heel of all perimeter water risers.
Y.
Miscellaneous drains, vents, reliefs, and overflows from tanks, equipment, piping, relief valves, pumps, etc., shall be run to the nearest open sight drain or roof drain. Provide capped drain valves whenever required for complete drainage of piping, including the system side of all pumps.
Z.
Provide domestic water connections from valved outlets to any equipment requiring same.
AA.
All drain piping from condensate drain pans shall be properly trapped in accordance with the static pressures involved. Provide cleanout at first change in direction or before the trap.
Condensate drain piping sizes shall be not less than 1 2 " except that fan coil unit drains may be
1”.
BB.
Vent piping from the high temperature hot water system shall comply with all requirements of high temperature hot water piping specified hereinbefore. This shall also apply for the high temperature water safety valve discharge piping.
CC.
Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of piping (partial or complete) test piping to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning piping, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace piping which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. Refer to
Section 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 20 00
23 20 00-11
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 21 23
PUMPS FOR HVAC
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary
General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The Work includes providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all pumps as shown on the
Drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturing firms regularly engaged in manufacture of this equipment with characteristics and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than ten (10) years.
B.
Provide product produced by the manufacturers, which are listed in Section 23 05 12 "Approved
Manufacturer's List".
C.
Provide equipment whose performance, under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work, and submit shop drawings.
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
1.06
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
IN-LINE PUMPS
A.
Furnish and install in-line pumps where shown on the plans and as specified.
23 21 23-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
The pumps shall be of the horizontal or vertical, specifically designed and guaranteed for quiet operation. Suitable for 125# working pressure.
C.
The pumps shall have a ground and polished steel shaft with a hardened integral thrust collar.
The pumps are to be equipped with a watertight seal to prevent leakage. The motor shall be non-overloading at any point on pump curve. Impellers shall be of bronze construction.
D.
The motor shall be of the open, drip-proof, sleeve-bearing, quiet-operating, rubber-mounted construction.
E.
Motor efficiencies must meet or exceed that specified in Section 01 31 46.
F.
All pumps in VFD application must have flexible couplings and inverter-duty motor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where pumps are to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that equipment comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Add concrete under structural members of pump base and grout around the base as required by manufacturer's written instruction.
C.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interfere installation of equipment with other components of systems.
D.
Install all pumps with a minimum of five (5) pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream of pump suction connections or provide a suction diffuser. If the suction diffuser contains an integral strainer, the strainer required on the suction piping to the pump may be omitted.
E.
For any pump which, through balancing, the Contractor is not capable of achieving the design flow and pressure, impeller trimming, a new impeller and/or a new motor shall be provided at no additional cost. If a new motor is provided of larger horsepower, then any required electrical work shall also be included at no additional cost. If necessary, larger motor starters, VFD = s or disconnects shall be provided along with any larger wire sizes or fuses.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of equipment and after motor has been energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirement. When possible,
23 21 23-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactory corrected. Refer to Section 15900 - Test and Balancing.
B.
All pump casings shall be hydrostatically tested at 1 2 times design working pressure. The pump manufacturer shall be responsible for his service department aligning in the field prior to start-up of all flexibly coupled units. Alignment shall be with dial indicator with accuracy of plus or minus .002 inches. The pump manufacturer must submit a written report certifying that the alignment work had been performed by his personnel and that the pumps are ready for operation.
END OF SECTION 23 21 23
23 21 23-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 31 13
SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary
General Conditions of the work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all Sheet Metal Ductwork as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabrication and installation shall be by a single firm specializing and experience in metal ductwork for not less than 10 years.
B.
Comply with SMACNA = s (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association)
2005 A HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible @ , Third Edition recommendations for fabrication, construction and details and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated.
C.
Comply with ASHRAE (American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers) recommendations, except as otherwise indicated.
D.
Compliance to SMACNA and ASHRAE is a minimum requirement. In case of disagreement between sheet metal work described in this Section and SMACNA or ASHRAE, the specification shall govern.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical work and submit shop drawings and coordinate drawings.
B.
Before submitting any sheet metal drawings, submit a complete set of shop standards for review and approval. Sheet metal shop drawings may be submitted only after approval of the shop standards.
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical work.
1.06
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical work.
23 31 13-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Contractor will guarantee all work for one year from the date of acceptance against all defect in material, equipment and workmanship. This guarantee shall include repair of damage to any part of the premises resulting from leaks or other defects in material, equipment or workmanship.
1.07
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Protect shop fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Protect ends of ductwork and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B.
Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTWORK
A.
Furnish and install the size, connections and run of ducts as indicated on the drawings.
B.
While the Drawings shall be adhered to as closely as possible, the Architect's right is reserved to vary the run and size of ducts during the progress of the work if required to meet structural conditions.
C.
Install all ductwork in strict adherence to the ceiling height schedule indicated on the Architect's
Drawings. Consult with the Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Contractors and, in conjunction with the above Contractors, establish the necessary space requirements for each trade.
D.
The sheet metal ductwork shall, whether indicated or not, rise and/or drop and/or change in shape to clear any and all conduits, lighting fixtures, piping and equipment to maintain the desired ceiling heights and to provide adequate maintenance room and headroom in mechanical equipment rooms.
E.
The ductwork shall be continuous, with airtight joints and seams presenting a smooth surface on the inside and neatly finished on the outside. Ducts shall be constructed with curves and bends so as to effect an easy flow of air. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the inside radius of all curves and bends shall be not less than width of ducts in plane of bend.
F.
All rectangular ductwork, unless otherwise noted, shall be built from galvanized sheet steel and thoroughly braced and stiffened.
1.
Provide 18" x 18" access doors for every 30'-0" run of supply and return air duct for cleaning purposes. For ducts whose height or width is less than 20", provide access doors which are 18" wide by a height calculated as 2" less than the height of the duct (thereby providing 1" of clearance between the bottom of the access door and the bottom of the duct, and similar for the top).
2.02
DUCT PENETRATION THRU FLOOR
A.
Provide 4" high and 4" wide concrete curb all around opening at duct penetration thru floors. Fill in space between duct and floor construction with mineral wool.
23 31 13-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.03
DRAIN PANS
FIT Project C1195
A.
Drain pans for cooling coils shall be aluminum or stainless steel with welded seams and joints and shall be rigidly braced with stiffening angles.
B.
Each coil section composing the coil bank of a built up unit shall have an individual drain pan extending 9" on both sides of the coil with a minimum 2" vertical lip downstream of the coil.
The top edge of the lip shall be turned backward. The pans shall be connected with piping tube to permit drainage to the bottom drain pan. Pans shall be pitched to the drain. As an alternate to aluminum, 14 gauge stainless steel, all welded, may be used.
C.
Provide insulation under drain pans for cooling coils, consisting of 2" thick rigid insulation.
2.04
DRIP PANS
A.
Provide aluminum drip pans and gutters under all equipment subject to leaks mounted above electrical equipment. Each drip pan shall be properly pitched and a drain outlet provided and piped to drain. See "Drip Pans" under Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
2.05
MOISTURE ELIMINATORS
A.
Provide moisture eliminators immediately downstream of all humidifiers and where shown on the drawings.
B.
Construct the eliminators to provide three changes of direction for the air stream. Provide projections at each change of direction to prevent carry-over of water droplets that impinge on each blade and to facilitate draining into drain pan. Provide intermediate bracing of the same material and gage as the eliminator blade to prevent vibration and distortion of the blades.
C.
Make eliminators equal to the entire bank of cooling coils and equal outside air duct size in height and width and 6"long overall in the direction of air flow. Drain eliminators into the cooling coil drain pan. Make the pan of adequate length to accommodate the drippings.
D.
Construct all fasteners and supports of the same material as the eliminator blades.
E.
Construct eliminators of 32 ounce copper for cooling coils.
2.06
MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK
A.
Where humidifier in the ductwork is called for that portion of ductwork shall be 18 gauge stainless steel 4'-0" upstream and downstream welded with flanged joints.
B.
All ductwork on downstream side of terminal humidifiers including humidifier section shall be for the entire run to the diffusers, stainless steel, sealed type 304 watertight with 3M EC-800 sealer or approved equal. Gauge of stainless steel duct shall be same as for steel duct. Terminal humidifiers are defined as humidifiers located in the branch ductwork of an air conditioning unit.
Aluminum may be used as an alternate to stainless steel.
23 31 13-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.07
INSTALLATION OF HVAC DEVICES
FIT Project C1195
A.
Installation of Duct Smoke Detectors: Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished by the Electrical
Contractor and shall be installed in the ductwork under this Section. Provide an access door to each smoke detector.
B.
Installation of Dampers: Refer to Drawings and temperature control specification for smoke dampers and other automatic dampers and install them in ductwork.
2.08
DUCT FABRICATION
A.
Ducts shall be neatly finished on the outside with all sharp edges removed.
B.
Inside surfaces shall be smooth with no projections into the air stream except where otherwise indicated.
C.
Longitudinal joints shall be Pittsburgh lock at corners or Acme lock on flat surfaces double seams hammered tight and shall be located above the horizontal axis of the duct. A snap lock seam shall not be permitted as a substitute for the Pittsburgh lock at corners of ducts.
D.
Transverse joints shall be made airtight with all laps in the directions of air flow.
E.
All fasteners and attachments shall be made of the same material as the ducts.
F.
Furnish test wells 12" on the center horizontally and vertically in the suction and discharge duct of each fan. Test wells shall consist of a 1" x : ", 125 lb., bronze, screwed hex bushing, secured to the duct with a bronze hex locknut on the inside of the duct. A : " x 2" long standard weight bronze, screwed nipple and cap shall be fitted to the housing on the outside of the duct. Test wells shall be No. 699 as made by Ventlok or approved equal.
G.
All turns in ductwork shall be accomplished using radius elbows rather than square elbows.
Square elbows will only be permitted in instances where the Contractor, through depiction on their sheet metal shop drawings, proves that only a square elbow may be installed due to such limited space availability. All radius elbows shall have a minimum centerline radius of 1 2 times the width of the duct.
H.
All square elbows shall have factory-designed and built single thick turning vanes. Shop fabricated vanes will not be approved. Where turning vanes are in conflict with the access doors to fire dampers, they shall be made movable so that fire dampers shall be accessible.
I.
Dissimilar metals shall be connected with flanged joints made up with fiber or neoprene gaskets to prevent contact between dissimilar metals. Flanges shall be fastened with bolts protected by ferrules and washers made of the same materials as the gaskets. Where an aluminum duct is to be connected to a galvanized steel duct, the end of the galvanized steel duct shall be coated with heavy black asphaltum paint before connecting it to the aluminum duct.
J.
Changes in shape and dimension shall conform to the following: Except where otherwise noted, for increases in cross-sectional area, the shape of the transformation shall not exceed 1" in 7".
Except where otherwise noted, for reductions in area, the slope shall not be less than 1" in 4" but
1" in 7" preferred.
23 31 13-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
K.
Wherever it may be necessary to make provisions for vertical hangers of the ceiling construction passing through ducts, provide streamlined shaped sleeves around such ceiling construction hangers as to fully protect the duct from being penetrated with holes for the passage of such hangers. Any such streamlined sleeves shall be made air tight at top and bottom of ducts. In no case shall there be more than two rods in any 9 sq. ft. area. No rods shall pierce ducts smaller than 12" in horizontal area.
L.
The construction for low pressure rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be made in accordance with recommendations of ASHRAE Guide, Latest Edition, or as per SMACNA Manual 2” pressure class.
1.
Flat areas of duct over 18 in. wide shall be stiffened by cross breaking of beading.
2.
All joints to have corner closures.
3.
All joints (longitudinal and transverse) shall be sealed with 3M EC-800 mastic or equal
UL181A approved mastic, to provide sealing equivalent to SMACNA Seal Class A.
2.09
DAMPERS
A.
At each main branch take-off and in such other locations where required to properly balance the system, provide volume dampers of the opposed blade, multi-louvered type, which shall be operated by indicating locable quadrants and set screws, for adjusting the system.
B.
Volume dampers shall be constructed as follows: Damper blades shall not be wider than 12", shall be complete with heavy angle iron frames, connecting and operating links, brass trunnions, and bronze bearings. Dampers, unless otherwise noted, shall be fabricated with not less than No.
16 gauge sheet steel. Blades shall overlap and shall be provided with continuous stops on all four sides of dampers to prevent leakage. Blades shall be galvanized. Blades of dampers shall be set into a flat steel frame with frame securely bolted to the duct. All dampers shall be fitted with a hexagonal brass spindle which shall extend through the exterior of duct and be fitted with an indicating self-locking regulator. Regulator shall be similar to Ventlok 641 or approved equal. All hardware shall be Ventlok or approved equal For insulated ductwork provide No.
644 self-locking regulator as made by Ventlok or approved equal.
C.
All automatic dampers shall be furnished as a part of the automatic temperature control system by the automatic temperature control manufacturer. Install dampers and provide safing in ductwork for automatic dampers smaller than duct size.
D.
All dampers shall be made accessible from building construction. Access doors in building structure shall be furnished or provided as herein before specified.
2.10
SMOKE DAMPERS
A.
Smoke dampers shall be classified and labeled in accordance with UL 555S, "Standard for
Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control System." Smoke dampers shall be of UL 555
S leakage class II, 4 cfm/ft 5 at 1" w.g.; 8 cfm/ft 5 at 4" w.g.
B.
Smoke dampers installed at smoke barriers shall be installed no more than 2 ft. from the barrier and between any branch takeoff or duct inlet and outlets and the smoke barrier.
C.
Smoke dampers shall be automatically return to closed position in the event of loss of electricity.
All wiring required to interconnect the dampers with fire detection, fire alarm and fire alarm supervisory control systems shall be provided under the Division 26 of the Specification. All
23 31 13-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 combination fire/smoke dampers and smoke dampers shall be provided with 120 VAC actuators.
Power wiring for all combination fire/smoke dampers and all smoke dampers shall be through the fire alarm system control relay and through a BAS relay and control module. The Electrical
Contractor shall provide all such wiring; the ATC Sub-Contractor shall provide a BAS relay which must be installed for each combination fire/smoke damper and each smoke damper. If the air handling system is shut down, all associated combination fire/smoke dampers and all smoke dampers shall close. The fire alarm relay shall, if necessary, override the BAS relay. Each damper shall be individually powered and controlled.
D.
Smoke dampers shall be constructed as described above for dampers.
E.
Damper actuators shall be as specified in Section 23 09 00.
F.
For fire/smoke dampers, provide two (2) damper end switches that are blade actuated to signal the fire alarm system when dampers are in the open and closed position. For smoke and fire/smoke dampers which can isolate a fan from its distribution ductwork or as otherwise required by the
Sequence of Operation, provide an additional end switch which shall be wired to the fan starter
(VFD) control wiring to prevent the fan from operating unless the damper is open.
G.
Apply a bead of sealant between damper and sleeve and between dampers for multiple damper assemblies, as defined below for combination smoke and fire dampers.
2.11
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Fire dampers and sleeve installation shall be in accordance with NFPA-90A recommendations and shall bear U.L. Label in compliance with U.L. 555.
B.
Clearly indicate fire damper location on shop drawings. Provide access doors in the ducts and supply access doors or panels at building construction at each damper of sufficient size and type to permit inspection and replacement of linkage. Assume responsibility to coordinate all locations of duct access doors with the other Contractors to conform with whatever architectural access openings may be necessary and supply access doors or panels in building construction.
Provide shop drawings indicating location of access panels or doors for Architect's approval.
C.
It is the intention of these plans and specifications to be complete. However, it is the responsibility of the Contractor, as being completely cognizant of local regulations, to determine where fire dampers are required and to advise the Architect prior to construction as to any discrepancies or questions in the plans or specifications.
D.
Fire dampers shall be enclosed in sleeve of fourteen gage metal. Sleeve shall be secured at both sides of fire partitions with 1 2 x 1 2 x 14 ga. mounting angles secured to sleeves only: retaining angles must lap structural opening 1" minimum and cover corners of opening. Provide duct breakaway connections, see detail on drawings. Breakaway connections shall be located within
6 inches of the fire wall on both sides of the fire wall.
E.
Dampers shall be steel plate, mounted to turn freely, in steel plate frame inserted in duct.
Dampers shall be proportioned and weighted to close at once, if released from link with spring catches to hold closed, until manually reset. Dampers and frames to have suitable standard fusible-links, normally holding them open, but releasing upon contact with fire. Damper blades shall be mounted on corrosion resisting bearings. Damper shall close by gravity, moving with the air stream to full closed position against one-eighth ( c ) inch angle stop. Steel spring catch
23 31 13-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 shall hold damper closed. Radius arm on shaft shall show position of damper. Submit details for approval.
Fire dampers shall be as made by Ruskin, Arlan Damper Corp. (631-589-7431) or approved equal, U.L. labeled.
In stainless steel and aluminum ductwork, provide stainless steel construction fire dampers.
F.
Damper shall be fully out of the air stream (type B) U.O.I.
In stainless steel and aluminum ductwork, provide stainless steel construction fire dampers.
2.12
ACCESS DOORS IN SHEET METAL WORK
A.
Wherever necessary in ductwork, casings or sheet metal partitions, provide suitable access doors and frames to permit inspections, operation and maintenance of all valves, coils, humidifiers, controls, smoke dampers, smoke detectors, fire dampers, filters, bearings, traps, or other apparatus concealed behind the sheet metal work. All such doors shall be of double construction of not less than No. 20 gauge sheet metal and shall have sponge rubber gaskets around their entire perimeter. Doors in insulated ducts of insulated casings shall have rigid insulation between the metal panels.
B.
All access doors in sheet metal ducts shall be hung on heavy flat hinges and shall be secured in the closed position by means of cast zinc clinching type latches. Where space conditions preclude hinges, use four heavy window type latches. Doors into ducts shall in general not be smaller than 24" x 24" except for access door to fire dampers which will depend on size of fire damper.
C.
In no case shall access to any items of equipment requiring inspection, adjustment, or servicing require the removal of nuts, bolts, screws, wing nuts, wedges, or any other screwed or loose device.
D.
Each sheet metal chamber or plenum shall have access doors for access to all parts of the system
(outside air intake, exhaust and return air). Doors shall be fitted with cast zinc door latches, two per door. Latches shall be operable from both sides of casing. Hinges shall be extra heavy, zinc plated hinges, minimum of two per door. The doors shall be felted or provided with rubber gaskets so as to make them airtight. The doors shall be made with inner and outer shells 2 inches apart so that they may be properly insulated and properly operated. Doors shall be a minimum size of 20" x 48".
E.
Hinges shall be Ventlok No. 150 or 260 with or without screw holes or approved equal. Latch for walk-in access doors shall be No. 260 as made by Ventlok Co. or approved equal. Latch for access door in ductwork shall be Ventlok No. 100 or approved equal.
F.
Where reheat coils are installed in ductwork, provide two (2) access doors; one on the upstream side of the coil and one on the downstream side of the coil, both within 2'-0" of the coil.
G.
Access doors at humidifier locations shall be provided on both sides of duct.
H.
Provide access doors of adequate size to allow easy access to the equipment that will require maintenance. Provide insulated or acoustically lined doors to prevent condensation where applicable.
23 31 13-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
I.
Manufacturer to provide an installed neoprene gasket around perimeter of access door for airtight seal.
J.
Systems 3 @ w.g. or less shall utilize a hinged, cam, or hinged & cam square-framed access door.
K.
Systems 4 @ w.g. and above shall utilize a sandwich-type access door. Construct doors in accordance with Figure 7-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, A HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal & Flexible @ Third Edition.
1.
Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries A Sandwich @ style door or approved equal.
L.
Grease exhaust duct doors shall be grease and air tight, UL 1978 listed, meet NFPA 96 standards and all mechanical codes. Grease duct access doors can be sandwich type or with a weld on frame, with/without hinge.
1.
Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries A Ultimate @ style door or approved equal.
M.
All grease duct access doors used must be accompanied by independent testing in conjunction with each manufacturer = s respective wrap system for high temperature applications.
2.13
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
A.
Furnish and install where shown on the drawings all metal diffusers, grilles and registers of the sizes and capacities indicated.
B.
Equipment manufacturer shall submit engineering data in a manner to facilitate convenient review of the following factors:
1.
Aspiration ability, including temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop of each unit, noise criteria ratings for each unit, sizes, free area and quality of construction.
C.
All air distribution equipment shall be as manufactured by Titus Corp., or approved, as scheduled on plans.
D.
All ceiling diffusers shall be furnished with a device or devices equalize the air flow and control the volume.
E.
Location of ceiling diffusers and registers shown on the drawings are approximate. Coordinate with the acoustic tile ceiling Sub-Contractor for exact locations of ceiling diffusers and registers.
They shall be in accordance with approved ceiling layout shop drawings.
F.
Return grilles shall match return registers Titus Corp. Type AEROBLADE 56RL or approved equal.
G.
All registers, grilles and diffusers shall be coated with baked gloss white (W-4) as supplied by
Titus Corp. unless otherwise indicated. All supply registers and grilles shall have a 3 " sponge rubber gasket around the grille frame.
H.
All grilles, registers and diffusers shall be provided without an integral shut-off damper, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
I.
Exceptions to foregoing types of grilles, registers and diffusers shall be as indicated on the plans.
23 31 13-8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
J.
Each air supply outlet shall have the required capacity and shall be guaranteed to give the required draft with draftless diffusion. Where manufacturer's recommendations require duct sizes differing from those on the drawings, the same shall be provided at no additional cost to the
Owner.
K.
All grilles, registers and diffusers must be tested under ADC standards and carry and ADC seal of approval.
2.14
SOUND REDUCTION
A.
Furnish and install all soundproofing material specified, indicated or necessary to that all systems will comply with requirement of quiet operation. In general, noise level in any part of building
(except in machinery rooms), due to air conditioning or ventilating equipment, ducts, and outlets, shall not exceed 40 decibels at 1200-2400 cycles per second, except as otherwise hereinafter specified.
B.
Furnish and install sound-absorptive lining in ductwork for locations and lengths as indicated and/or hereinafter specified. All soundproofing material, installation and arrangement, shall be as approved. Where ducts are acoustically lined, insulation shall be omitted for extent of acoustic lining for ducts located indoors only. Dimensions noted for lined ducts are inside clear dimensions. Duct sizes shall be increased for liner.
C.
Sound Absorbent Duct Lining for Low Pressure Ductwork - Furnish and install as herein specified and/or shown on the drawings (except where otherwise noted) 2" thick, meeting ASTM
C1071 Type I flexible with a NRC of .70 tested per ASTM C423 using a type "A" mounting, fibrous glass duct lining meeting the requirements of NFPA 90A with a FHC of 25/50, limited combustible and ASTM C411 at 250
F.
D.
Liner shall be adhered to all interior sides of duct with minimum 90% coverage of fire-retardant adhesive similar to Foster 85-60 or Childers CP-127 and with weld pins and washers or equivalent mechanical fastening starting 3" from edges and sides, 12" on center all sides.
Minimum one row per side for duct size of 12" of less. Mechanical fasteners shall cause quilting of surface. Acrylic coated surface shall be toward air stream. Before installing liner, seal all butting edges and final edges with heavy coat of adhesive to seal off air between lining and duct unless the material has factory applied edge coating. All exposed edges of lining shall be installed with sheet metal nosing 1 2 " wide, two gauges heavier than duct at fan discharge and at any section preceded by an unlined section. Installation shall be suitable for duct velocities up to
3,000 fpm. Low pressure duct lining shall be provided where specified and/or where shown and noted on the drawings.
E.
Sound Absorbent Duct Lining for Low Pressure Ductwork (Option for Non-Fibrous Glass Liner):
Furnish and install as herein specified and/or shown on the drawings (except where otherwise noted), 2" thick, closed cell liner, K-Flex LS sheet with PSA as manufactured by Nomaco, K-Flex or approved equal, meeting ASTM C-534, ASTM D-1056-00-2C1 and ASTM C-1534-02 and shall have a NYC MEA number. Lining shall meet the requirements of NFA 90A with a FHC of
25/50 and flammability UL 94-5V and ASTM E-84 foam core 25/50 at 1" and below, psa 0/10, R value 3.8 (1").
F.
Liner shall be applied to clean, dry ductwork by peeling the release liner away and applying uniform pressure to the sheet. Compression joints with adhesive applied should be used on all butt edges. Seal all final edges with a heavy coat of adhesive to seal off air between lining and
23 31 13-9
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 duct, unless the material has a factory applied edge coating. Follow manufacturer = s installation instructions. All exposed edges of lining shall be installed with sheet metal nosing 1 2 " wide, two gauges heavier than duct.
G.
Duct sizes indicated on drawings are clear inside dimensions. Increase sheet metal sizes as required to install acoustic lining.
H.
Do not install lining within 5'-0" (downstream and upstream) of humidifier in ductwork. This portion of ductwork shall be externally insulated.
I.
The following ductwork shall be acoustically lined whether or not shown on Drawings.
1.
Ductwork downstream of (mixing box) (terminal) units a minimum distance of 10 feet.
2.
All ductwork downstream of (mixing box) (terminal) units.
3.
Single wall built-up casing walls and ceiling except that lining shall be 2" thick 4 lb. density, and inner liner of perforated galvanized sheet metal (7/64" dia. holes on 3/16" staggered centers) shall be used for all systems.
4.
All conditioned air rectangular supply/return ductwork within mechanical equipment rooms, and not less than 20 ft. from fan towards occupied space for supply, exhaust and return fans.
5.
Return air fan and toilet exhaust plenum walls and ceiling, except that the lining shall be 2 inch thick 4 lb. density, and inner liner of perforated galvanized sheet metal (7/64" dia. holes on 3/16" staggered centers) shall be used.
J.
Sound Absorbent Duct Lining for Medium and High Pressure Ductwork.
1.
Furnish and install 1" thick meeting ASTM C1071 Type II (board) with a NRC of .80 tested according to ASTM 423 using a Type A A @ mounting, acoustical lining and meeting requirements of NFPA 90A with a FHC of 25/50, limited combustible and ASTM C411 at
250
F, as herein specified and/or as shown on the drawings.
2.
Liner shall be adhered to all interior sides of duct and plenums with minimum 90% coverage of fire-retardant adhesive similar to Benjamin Foster and with weld pins and washers or equivalent mechanical fastening on not more than 16" centers on all sides, top and bottom of duct. Acrylic coating surface shall be toward air stream. Before installing liner, caulk all butting edges and final edges with heavy coat of adhesive to seal off air between lining and duct unless material has factory applied edge coating. Coat cap of fasteners with brush coat of fire retardant insulation coating. Use metal corners to protect leading edges of liner insulation at fan discharge or after and any section preceded by an unlined section and at any section with an air velocity in excess of 4000 fpm. Apply light brush coat (150 sq. ft. per gallon) of fire retardant insulation coating over all interior insulation surfaces. Installation shall be suitable for duct velocities up to 5,000 fpm.
3.
Duct sizes indicated on drawings are clear inside dimensions. Increase sheet meal sizes as required to install acoustic lining.
2.15
ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE WITHIN EQUIPMENT SPACES
A.
Equipment room noise levels and noise transmission to adjacent buildings shall comply with all
Federal, State, and City Noise Ordinances.
B.
Motor Acoustical Performance:
1.
Motor drives for pumps and refrigerator machine when installed per plans and specifications shall operate with noise levels not to exceed 80 dbA.
23 31 13-10
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.
Noise levels shall be determined in accordance with IEEE Standard #85 test "procedure for
Air-Borne Noise Measurements on Rotating Electric Equipment".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where ductwork is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK
A.
Install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that ductwork complies with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation or ductwork with other components of systems.
C.
Duct sizes shown on the drawings at connection to fans or other equipment may vary in actual installation. Contractor shall provide transition pieces as required.
D.
Ducts, casings and hangers shall be installed straight and level and shall be free of vibration and noise when fans are operating.
E.
Ducts at ceilings shall be suspended from inserts in concrete slabs except where otherwise indicated. Inserts shall be Grinnell Fig. 279, 282, or 152 as required. Ducts at floor shall be supported by steel angles suitably anchored to floor construction. Each duct shall be independently supported and shall not be hung from or supported by another duct, pipe, conduit or equipment of any trade.
F.
Supports shall be placed at each joint and change in direction up to a maximum spacing of 8 feet on centers. Prevent buckling of ductwork.
G.
All fastenings to building structure shall be adequate to insure permanent stability of sheet metal work and shall be capable of resisting all applied forces.
H.
Vertical ducts in shafts or passing through floors shall be supported by steel angles or channels, welded, riveted, screwed or bolted to ducts and fastened to building structural members at each floor level. Provide safing to close all floor openings around ductwork - pack annular space with rockwool and 18 gauge sheet metal safing. Floor openings in plenums shall have 2 inch diameter steel bars.
I.
Rigid connections between ductwork and non-rotating equipment shall be made with flanged joints, sealed with fireproof material (Fiber or Neoprene gaskets).
J.
It is the intent to obtain low pressure ductwork construction with minimum leakage. The construction noted in Specifications can produce low or high leakage rates, depending upon the
23 31 13-11
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 workmanship, particularly with regard to the connection at the top of the ducts. Guarantee that total diffuser volume, measured by means of velometer, shall be at least 95% of actual fan supply
(measured by means of a duct traverse taken with a Pitot tube and water manometer). Seal the ductwork at all joints (longitudinal & transverse and duct wall penetrations) with suitable sealers
Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146 or 3M EC-800 and tape equivalent to SMACNA seal class A.
Use of "HARDCAST" or any other material is subject to Architect's approval.
K.
For leakage test for medium and high pressure ductwork refer to Section "Testing and
Balancing".
3.03
DUCT HANGERS
A.
Low pressure ducts up to 24" on a side or up to 20" diameter shall be suspended with 16 gauge, galvanized strap hangers, 1" wide.
B.
Low pressure ducts 25" to 40" on a side or 21" to 42" diameter shall be suspended with galvanized strap hangers 1" wide by c " thick.
C.
Strap hangers shall be bent 90
, extended down sides of ducts and turned under bottom of ducts a minimum of 2". Strap hangers shall be fastened at ceiling with nuts, bolts and lock washers and to sides and bottom of ducts with sheet metal screws.
D.
All medium and high pressure ductwork and low pressure. Ducts 43" and larger on a side or diameter shall be suspended with either angle type hangers or rod and trapeze supports. No screws shall penetrate medium and high pressure ductwork.
E.
For any ducts which require seismic bracing, provide trapeze and rod type hangers regardless of duct size.
F.
Trapeze type hangers shall have steel rods threaded at both ends and bottom bracing angles on ducts, with nuts and lock washers. Threaded rod diameter shall be as scheduled on the drawings based on the size of the duct supported.
G.
Angle type hangers shall be extensions of side bracing angles on ducts, bent 90
at ceiling and fastened with nuts, bolts and lock washers.
H.
The minimum spacing intervals for all duct supports shall be as scheduled on the drawings based on the size of the duct supported.
I.
Hangers for vertical ducts shall be as per SMACNA Duct Manual.
J.
Stainless steel ductwork shall be supported with rod or angle type hangers, so that there will be no penetration of the stainless steel ducts.
K.
Any steel used for support of ductwork located outdoors shall be constructed of galvanized or stainless steel.
23 31 13-12
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.04
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
FIT Project C1195
A.
Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances, which might cause corrosion, deterioration of metal or interfere with painting.
B.
At end of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at the time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering.
C.
Cleaning of new and existing supply ductwork: After completion of ductwork installation clean ductwork as follows.
1.
Use supply fan or install temporary fan to provide air to the system for four (4) hours.
2.
Remove oil cheese cloth.
END OF SECTION 23 31 13
23 31 13-13
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 40 00
AIR FILTERS
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and made ready for operation by the Owner, all air filters as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturing firms regularly engaged in manufacture of this material with characteristics and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Provide product produced by the manufacturers, which are listed in Section "Approved
Manufacturer's List".
C.
Provide equipment whose performance, under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.
D.
Equipment shall be shipped in its original package to prevent damage or entrance of foreign matter. All handling and shipping shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide protective coverings during construction.
E.
Standards:
1.
ASHRAE Standard 52.1
2.
Underwriters Laboratories: U.L. 900, U.L. 586
3.
NFPA Standard 90A
F.
Design Criteria
1.
Air flow not to exceed rated capacity
2.
Initial and final resistance not to exceed scheduled values
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to section “Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work” and submit shop drawings.
23 40 00-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
1.05
COORDINATION
FIT Project C1195
A.
Refer to section “Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work”.
1.06
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to section “Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Furnish and install the air filters shown on the Drawings. The filters shall be component sections of air handling units or shall be installed in ductwork as indicated on the drawings.
B.
The filter arrangements shall be as indicated in the schedule on the Drawings.
C.
Furnish and install filters as shown on drawings. Filters for factory fabricated AHU’s shall meet all specification requirements.
D.
Filters shall be as manufactured by Flanders Precisionaire, National Air Filter, or approved equal as approved by Architect.
E.
Filters shall be as indicated in the schedules on the drawings.
F.
Fans and systems shall not be operated until protective filters meeting a minimum of MERV 8 have been installed. All systems are to have a minimum of MERV 8 filters installed during all operating phases of construction.
G.
At the time of acceptance by the owner, the contractor shall install new filtering media for all air handling systems.
H.
Before balancing and prior to acceptance by the owner, each MERV 8 filter shall be replaced with new media to consist of prefilters and final filters as scheduled and specified.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Filters:
1.
Flanders Precisionaire
2.
National Air Filter
3.
As equal as approved by the Architect.
B.
Accessories
1.
Framing Modules - Holding Frames by filter manufacturer.
2.
Side Access Housings by filter manufacturer.
3.
Air Filter Gages - Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
2.03
FILTER CARTRIDGES
A.
Pleated Media Filters (ASHRAE Dust Spot Efficiency of 35% and a MERV 8 rating 2”Filter media shall be high efficiency synthetic media.
23 40 00-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.
Media support shall be continuously laminated to an expanded metal grid on the air leaving side.
3.
Pleat design shall be a radial wedge.
4.
Media frame shall be constructed from two pieces of die cut high wet strength carrier board. The frame shall be designed with diagonal and horizontal support members bonded to the media on the air entering and leaving sides.
5.
Filters shall be U.L. 900 Class 2 listed.
6.
Basis of design: Flanders Precisionaire Prepleat 40 HC
B.
Medium and High Efficiency Rigid Filters. Separator Type U.L. 900 Class 1. Efficiency levels of 95%. (MERV 15) (12”) Filter Construction a.
Filters shall be the totally rigid type with a wet laid microfine fiberglass filter. The media shall be folded into close spaced pleats supported by hemmed edge corrugated aluminum separators.
2.
Enclosing Frame a.
The enclosing frame shall be manufactured of 24 gauge galvanized steel and furnished with horizontal and diagonal support members to stabilize and protect the media pack.
3.
Basis of design: Flanders Precisionaire Precisioncell
2.04
SIDE ACCESS HOUSINGS, FACTORY ASSEMBLED
A.
Housings for 2 in., 4 in. or 12 in. Filters (Minimum Inline Depth)
1.
Housing shall be factory manufactured of 16 gauge galvanized steel and reinforced with
"Z" channel bracing to eliminate twisting or racking.
2.
16 gauge access doors shall be gasketed along the periphery to maintain a proper seal.
3.
Filter track shall be extruded aluminum and furnished with a polypropylene fin seal gasket.
4.
Basis of design: Filtration Air
B.
Housing for ASHRAE-Rated Extended Area Filters (Two Stage)
1.
Housing shall be manufactured of 16 gauge galvanized steel and reinforced with "Z" channel bracing. A standing flange on the air entering and air leaving side shall be furnished to facilitate installation.
2.
Access doors shall be provided with continuous gasketing on the perimeter and positive locking latches with easy grip knobs. Both prefilter and final filter tracks shall be extruded aluminum with polypropylene fin seal gasket to create a positive seal of the filter to the track.
3.
Factory installed gasketing shall be provided on the vertical sides of cartridges to prevent leakage between cartridges and between cartridges and doors. Filter cartridges shall be capable of removal and loading through either access door.
4.
The leakage rate of the housing shall be less than 0.5% of air-flow at 6.0 in. w.g. internal static pressure.
5.
Basis of design: Flanders Precisionaire Sureseal Housing
2.05
GAS AND VAPOR PHASE CONTROL HOUSINGS, ADSORBERS AND MEDIA
A.
Carbon Filter Housings (Side Access High Capacity for Indoor Air Quality)
1.
Housings shall be manufactured of 16 gauge galvanized steel and reinforced to eliminate racking of the housing once the carbon trays have been installed.
23 40 00-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.
Access doors shall be furnished on both sides of the housing. Doors shall be gasketed to seal the trays and be furnished with positive seal latches and easy-grip knobs.
3.
Trays shall be non-corrosive high impact polystyrene with internal separators and shall be capable of being reloaded in the field.
4.
Prefilter tracks and carbon tray tracks shall be extruded aluminum with replaceable polypropylene fin seal gaskets to prevent air bypass.
5.
Basis of design: Filtration Air
B.
Disposable Carbon Adsorbers (12” depth)
1.
Adsorber Construction a.
Adsorbers shall be the total-detention type constructed of multiple carbon-filled panels arranged in a V configuration. Panels shall be 1 in. thick moisture-resistant corrugated kraft honeycomb sealed to top and bottom end plates with non-volatile adhesive. b.
Panels shall be completely filled with 4 x 8 US mesh size activated carbon held in place by nylon screens. c.
Top and bottom end plates shall be injection-molded high strength ABS plastic with integral headers. d.
The cell shall be assembled with aerodynamically-designed vertical front struts and vertical steel rod supports on the downstream side. e.
Each adsorber shall be sealed in a polyethylene bag before being placed in its shipping carton.
2.
Adsorber Performance a.
Activated carbon media shall be virgin coconut shell base, minimum 60 % CTC activity by the ASTM D-3467 test method, minimum apparent density of 0.49 g/mL, minimum hardness of 97 by the ASTM D-3802 method and a minimum surface area of 1100m2/g by the N2 BET method. b.
The TS201-242412 model shall contain no less than 26 lb. of activated carbon. At
2000 cfm it shall have an airway resistance no greater than 0.50 in. w.g. and a residence time no less than 0.030 seconds.
3.
Basis of design: Flanders Precisionaire Superflow VC
2.06
AIR FILTER GAGES
A.
Dial type, diaphragm-actuated with external zero adjustment and nominal 4 in. diameter dial.
B.
Provide with two (2) static pressure tips, 2-way valves, tubing and mounting plate (and adjustable signal flag if specified as an option).
C.
Range shall be as recommended by filter manufacturer.
D.
Basis of design: Dwyer 2000 Series Magnehelic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where this equipment is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
23 40 00-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install filters and hosings where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that equipment comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of equipment with other components of systems.
C.
Filter Bank Construction
1.
Filter banks of individual holding frames shall be installed leak tight and structurally sound to eliminate air bypass.
2.
Filter banks four filters high or higher shall be provided with proper steel stiffeners between each vertical row of filters. Caulk frames before installing. After installation caulk any gaps appearing at the leading edge of the holding frames.
3.
Framing modules require sealant and blanking off between modules and around the periphery.
D.
Filter gages shall be installed across each filter bank, mounted where directed. One gage may serve immediately adjacent pre-filter/final filter banks.
E.
Temporary Prefilters for Construction
1.
Protect all 40% or higher efficient filters upstream of air handling units during construction with temporary Panel filters meeting a minimum efficiency of MERV 8.
Filters to be polyester media 2 in. disposable panel filters, U.L. 900 Class 2 listed.
Flanders type 325.
2.
Remove after air balancing and prior to acceptance.
3.
Provide a spare set of these temporary pre-filters or media and install them during construction if required in accordance with Section 3.03B.
3.03
SPARE FILTERS
A.
Furnish one new complete spare set of cartridges for each filter bank listed below on completion and acceptance of the work:
1.
Medium and high efficiency rigid filters.
B.
Install spare set in A. above only if and when directed. If not installed, deliver to owner in sealed cartons.
C.
Replace all panel filters which are not temporary pre-filters with a new set at job completion and furnish owner with an additional set in sealed cartons.
D.
Furnish owner with one set of spare trays loaded with carbon, if carbon housings or adsorbers are specified on this project.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Filter cartridges shall be capable of being loaded and unloaded easily through access doors in the housings or access sections.
23 40 00-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.05
START-UP PROCEDURE
FIT Project C1195
A.
No fan shall be operated unless temporary particulate filters as specified are installed.
B.
When the pressure drop of the temporary media reaches 1.0 in. w.g. during construction, replace it with the spare set. If not used, deliver the spare set to the owner at job completion.
3.06
SCHEDULE
A.
See air filter schedule on drawings for filter model numbers, CFM and sizing data.
END OF SECTION 23 40 00
23 40 00-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 65 00
COOLING TOWERS
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinated with and complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The Work includes providing all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all cooling towers as shown on the Drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturing firms regularly engaged in manufacture of this equipment with characteristics and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than ten (10) years.
B.
Provide products produced by the manufacturers which are listed in Section 23 05 12 "Approved
Manufacturers List".
C.
Provide equipment whose performance under specified conditions is certified by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
1.06
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Furnish and install one cell, forced draft, vertical discharge, packaged, closed circuit type, non-combustible cooling tower. Total horsepower requirements shall not exceed 5.5 HP.
Tower furnished shall be similar and equal to BAC.
23 65 00-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
The tower shall be guaranteed to cool 40 gpm, from 97 degrees F. to 85 degrees F., at 78 degrees
F. wet bulb temperature.
C.
Casing and Louvers: Casing shall be galvanized steel with lapped joints; louvers shall be integral with fill. Louvers are to be sight-tight to horizontal view.
D.
Framework: All framework shall be 3 " thick galvanized steel.
E.
Hardware and Finish: All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be galvanized steel.
F.
Motors: Tower shall be equipped with one at 5 HP motor, 3 phase, 60 cycle, 208 volt. (Single)
(Two) winding with a service factor of 1.15 of the protected type enclosure. If fans are cycled for capacity control, temperature limits shall be set to prevent motor cycling of no more than 6 times per hour.
G.
Collection Basin: Cold water basins shall be bolted design, minimum 16 gauge, galvanized steel bottom with 16 gauge galvanized steel sides, with depressed center section and complete with cleanout and 3” diameter galvanized steel side outlet suction connection including galvanized trash screen, galvanized anti-cavitation device, and bronze mechanically-operated automatic make-up water valve. Connecting flume shall be galvanized steel including all hardware.
H.
Fill and Eliminators: Fill, eliminator and louver shall be lightweight, non-combustible, polyvinyl chloride and of non-corrosive inert construction. Fill, eliminator and louvers shall be guaranteed against corrosion for the life of the cooling tower. Fill shall be hung from top to tower by galvanized steel pipe and fill shall be raised 1 2 " above cold water basin floor to offer adequate cleaning ability to remove silt, dirt and other foreign debris. Drift eliminators shall be three pass, non-corrosive, non-combustible integral with fill and louvers. Maximum allowable drift loss shall be .005 of 1% of the water circulated.
I.
Access and Safety: Access panels shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel and be provided on both end walls for access to the eliminator and plenum area by a sliding access door. A heavy duty galvanized steel wire grille-type fan guard shall be provided over each fan cylinder. Provide an aluminum ladder from a point 1'-0" above the (roof/grade) to the top of the handrail. 1 3 " diameter galvanized steel pipe handrails shall be provided around the top of the cooling deck to ensure the safety of operating personnel. Tower safety features shall meet OSHA requirements.
J.
Weights and Dimensions: Total installed size of the cooling tower shall not exceed 7’ L x 4’ W x 9’ H to top handrail from the base of the tower. Total operating weight when circulating the maximum recommended water flow shall not exceed 3,660 lbs.
K.
Finish: All steel including all hardware shall be galvanized steel 2 2 oz. per square foot.
L.
All cooling tower(s) are to comply with all O.S.H.A. regulations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where his equipment is to be installed, determine space conditions and notify Architect, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely
23 65 00-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment where shown in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that equipment complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of equipment with other components and systems.
C.
Check alignment and, where necessary (and possible), realign shafts of motors and equipment within tolerances recommended by manufacturer.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of equipment and after motor has been energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. Refer to Section 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 65 00
23 65 00-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 73 01
AIR HANDLING UNITS
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary
General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and made ready for operation by the Owner, all air handling units as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturing firms regularly engaged in manufacture of this material with characteristics and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Provide product produced by the manufacturers, which are listed in Section 23 05 12 "Approved
Manufacturer's List".
C.
Provide equipment whose performance, under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
1.06
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
AIR HANDLING UNITS
A.
General
23 73 01-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.
Supply custom packaged, self-contained unit that is complete as per the following specification, deliver all capacities and schedules and conform to design indicated on plans. Alternate layouts or dimensional changes will not be accepted.
2.
Unit shall be complete with electric panel, VFD’s, controls; and individual factory compressor and water cooled condenser sections. Air stream shall include plenums, pre-filters, filter glycol heating coil, DX cooling coil, supply fan array, and discharge plenum. Unit shall be entirely factory wired with complete electric DDC controls requiring only hookup of power, tie-in of field mounted automatic temperature control. Unit shall be factory tested and a report filed with the Engineer as to all operating characteristics. Unit shall have a UL or ETL test laboratory label.
3.
All piping (from dry cooler to condensers and reheat coil) insulation, and piping accessories shall be installed by the HVAC contractor.
4.
Equipment shall be as manufactured by Governair Corporation or Engineer approved equal of Mammoth Custom Division, or Seasons-4. Manufacturer shall have similar units operating for minimum of 20 years.
5.
The unit manufacturer shall have a certified test lab that conforms to AMCA 210 airflow and 300 sound power level standards. All units shall be tested by a certified engineer with a copy of the test reports submitted to the Design Engineer for review and acceptance prior to shipping
6.
All final compressor, condenser and DX coil connections shall be by factory authorized technicians.
B.
Casing Construction
1.
Unit shall be constructed with all major components supported directly from a 6” – 11# structural tubular steel base with maximum deflection of 1” on 240” unsupported span.
Stiffeners of tubular steel shall be supplied as required to maintain casing design loading deflection criteria of 1/240 at 30#/sq. ft. loading, and at a 4" negative and 6" positive static pressure. Air leakage shall not exceed 1% at twice design static pressure. Unit shall ship factory bolted for disassembly by the HVAC Contractor (for ingress by elevator) and reassembled as supervised by factory technicians.
2.
The entire unit casing shall be double wall insulated construction – sandwich insulated panels. The casing floor shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel with an underfloor of 20 gauge galvanized steel. The floor shall be of the overlap pan design with screwed down seams and shall be designed to provide an overhand around the full perimeter of the unit base frame. The casing walls and roof shall have 16 gauge galvanized steel outer panels with 20 gauge galvanized solid steel inner panels. Exterior panels shall have an integrated thermal break from all support posts and interior panels.
3.
The walls, doors, and roof shall have a 2" acoustical variable density insulation with a minimum R factor of 8.3, and floor shall have 4" 2 lb. insulation. All panels shall interlock and bolt to the frame. Frame shall be tubular steel and form a grid with floor and roof frame. Corner frame shall be tubular steel. Panels shall be 30" wide maximum.
All internal safing shall be galvanized steel with all joints and seams internally caulked with non-toxic silicone sealant.
4.
All internal components shall be mounted on tubular steel frames which shall be supported from the unit floor. No internal component shall be supported on or by any external cabinet member other than the base frame or floor. All fasteners on the exterior of the unit shall be stainless steel with a neoprene washer backing. All access doors shall be full height and clear 18” wide and doors shall be provided with stainless steel hinges and 2-way compression take-up hand-locking latches with handle. Al minimum of two (2) latches per door shall be provided. All access doors shall be solid sandwich construction.
Access doors shall have extruded frames with integrated thermal break with gasket.
23 73 01-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Doors shall open against unit static pressure. Each section shall have a vapor-proof fluorescent light with a switch at the door.
5.
All ferrous parts shall have a full 0.90 ounces per foot of commercial grade galvanizing or have equivalent corrosion resistance when in an unpainted condition. Galvanizing shall be done before construction – all component parts of frame – internal and external – shall be galvanized. Painting and surface preparation shall be done prior to assembly. Interior and exterior surfaces shall have five (5) steps of rust-inhibitive epoxy primer and salt air resistant epoxy finish (2500 hour rated).
6.
Unit shall be mounted on support pad or RIS isolators supplied by the GC.
7.
Final assembly, refrigeration piping and charging by manufacturer’s technician.
C.
Compressors
1.
Scroll Compressor: The compressor shall utilize an orbiting scroll with axial and radial compliance for compression. The compressor shall be a high efficiency, suction gas cooled, single speed, hermetic type, with three teflon bearings and a cast iron motor frame.
The compressor shall be mounted outside of the air stream in an insulated compartment on rubber-in-shear isolators. The compressor shall have an oil level sight glass, oil level adjustment fitting, high and low pressure taps, discharge and suction service valves. The compressor shall have a discharge check valve with an internal solenoid valve to silently prevent reverse rotation. The compressor shall have a quick acting discharge temperature probe, four motor winding temp sensors with a solid state module for compressor overload protection. Other safety devices shall include a crankcase heater, high pressure and low pressure freeze protection. Each compressor shall have a separate refrigeration circuit.
2.
Mechanical Expansion Valve Control: All expansion valves shall be provided with a superheat control. The controller shall provide stable operation of the expansion valve by monitoring temperature and superheat of the circuit being controlled.
3.
Electronic Hot Gas Bypass: Low load and intermediate stage capacity reduction shall be supplied by means of hot gas by-pass on all compressors. A minimum suction temperature will be maintained by means of by-passing hot gas into the evaporators distributor. The hot gas bypass system shall be designed to provide smooth and stable modulation of evaporator capacity. Discharge mufflers shall be supplied on each compressor to reduce noise, vibrations and pulsation in the hot gas line. Each compressor circuit shall be supplied with a UL listed receiver to insure no condenser gas bypass and complete draining of the condenser.
D.
Glycol-Cooled Condenser
1.
Furnish as shown on the attached drawings, a brazed plate heat exchanger. With respect to the plates used in the manufacturer of the brazed plate heat exchanger, the manufacturer shall not sub-contract the pressing of the plates or purchase pressed plates from an external supplier. Rather, the manufacturer shall press their own plates and plate patterns.
2.
The brazed plate heat exchanger shall consist of pressed Type 316L stainless steel plates as necessary to provide the required heat transfer area to meet the specified operating conditions.
3.
Brazed plate heat exchangers which are specified for refrigeration applications should be constructed in such a way to prevent any external moisture from being trapped between plate surfaces and possibly freezing.
4.
In the case of copper brazed heat exchangers, all copper brazing material shall be 99.9% pure copper.
5.
Any and all refrigerant distribution devices which are offered as a means of controlling refrigerant maldistribution, shall be integrated into either the stamping of the plates or the construction of the connection assembly.
23 73 01-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
6.
The construction of the brazed plate heat exchanger shall allow the two heat transfer fluids
(i.e., refrigerants and secondary fluids) to flow in a countercurrent direction.
7.
Copper brazed heat exchangers shall have a minimum design pressure of vacuum and a maximum design pressure of 436 PSI.
8.
Copper brazed heat exchanger shall have a minimum design temperature of -256° and a maximum design temperature of 435°F.
9.
All brazed plate heat exchangers shall be 100% tested. The testing procedure shall consist of an overpressure test and a helium mass spectrometer test. The overpressure test shall be equivalent to 1.5 times maximum design pressure. The helium mass spectrometer test shall verify a leak rate of less than or equal to 2.8 grams of R-410A refrigerant per year.
10.
Brazed plate heat exchangers shall be both UL and cUL listed.
11.
Each circuit shall contain charging ports, liquid line filter dryer, sight glass, solenoid valves, TXUs, gauge ports for vetting of oil, electric hot gas bypass, insulate all suction lines.
E.
Filters
1.
Furnish medium efficiency 2” deep pleated media pre-filter within an integral frame in the filter section. Filters shall be 30% NBS efficient. (Supply one spare set of filters.)
Filters shall have a MERV 8 rating.
2.
Final filters, charcoal type, located in a side serviceable housing shall be high efficiency type mounted within an integral filter rack. The filter housing shall be incorporated within the unit to house 90% - 95% NBS filter media. Filters shall be the 12” deep cartridge type; each within its own holding frame. Filters shall have a MERV 14 rating.
Filters Aerostar Carbon FP type – HEGA rated.
3.
There shall be a photohelic filter gauge for each filter bank, readable and adjustable from the unit exterior and with contacts for tie-in to remote panel alarm.
F.
Supply Air Fan Array Assembly (Consisting of Two (2) Fans)
1.
The fan assemblies for the supply air streams shall consist of multiple direct drive fans powered and controlled via a single variable frequency drive (VFD). For quality of fans and performance see the schedule on the drawings. a.
The fan assembly shall consist of multiple, direct driven, arrangement (2) plenum fans spaced in the air way tunnel cross section to provide a uniform air flow and velocity profile across the entire air way tunnel cross section and components contained therein. The fan array assembly shall be constructed per AMCA requirements for Class III duty specified. All fans shall be selected to deliver design air flow at the specified operating total static pressure (TSP) at the specified motor speed and as scheduled on the drawings. The fan array assembly shall be selected to operate at a system total static pressure that does not exceed 90% of the specified fan’s peak static pressure producing capability at the specified fan speed.
The supply air fan array assembly shall be furnished with a Coplanar silencer for sound absorption. The Coplanar silencers (sound attenuators) shall reduce the bare fan discharge sound power levels by a minimum of 15 db, re 10-12 watts with center frequencies of 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000 and 8000 Hz when compared to the same air conditioning unit without the silencers. Each fan in the supply air fan array assembly shall be furnished with an inlet airflow straightener to reduce the bare fan inlet and discharge sound power levels as noted above. b.
All motors shall be IEEE inverter duty, premium efficiency TEFC T-frame motors selected at the specified operating voltage, rpm, and efficiency as specified in the schedule on the drawings. Each motor shall be provided with an Aegis bearing
23 73 01-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 protection ring to prevent electrical discharge machining (EDM) damage to the motor bearings. Bearings shall have an L-10-80,000 hour rating. c.
Motors shall be NEMA design B; T-frame mounted on an adjustable steel base. All motors shall be tested to IEEE Standard 112 test method B and rated per NEMA
MG1, Part 31 "Inverter Fed Motors". All motors shall be specifically designed to meet or exceed all (EPACT) requirements for energy efficiency and include class
“F” insulation. Motors shall be as manufactured by Baldor, Toshiba, Reliance, GE or US Motors. d.
Each fan/motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced to meet AMCA Standard
204-96, Category BV-5, Grade 1.0 with peak to peak deflection equal to or less than
0.08 mil at the design operating speed for the fan/motor cartridge. e.
Each fan motor shall be individually wired to the factory furnished and installed
NEMA 3 control panel containing variable frequency drive(s). Wire sizing shall be determined, and installed, in accordance with applicable National Electric Code
(NEC) standards. f.
Redundant variable frequency drives for the supply fan array assemblies shall be furnished. In a failure mode, the redundant (back-up) VFD shall allow both the design airflow (CFM).and the static pressure to be maintained. Each variable frequency drive shall be sized for the total connected horsepower (HP) of each set of fans in the fan array assembly. g.
Each fan/motor "cell" shall be furnished with an individual automatic back-draft damper similar to a Ruskin BD6. This will allow for either fan to operate at 50% increased speed to deliver a minimum of 75% of design CFM.
2.
Furnish a complete factory installed electrical system required to operate the supply fan array assembly systems including all equipment, material, electrical enclosure and electrical components. a.
Fan array assembly electrical drawings shall be in accordance with the NEC. b.
All motors in the fan array assemblies shall be furnished with individual motor protection for thermal overload protection. All motor circuit protectors shall be located in starting device enclosure. The motor circuit protector must be located and mounted at a minimal distance from the motors in the fan array assembly.
Furnish remote indication by means of aux contacts wired in series from each motor.
3.
Furnish unit with fan array assembly redundant variable frequency drive control. As required by system design, furnish one variable frequency drive for normal operation and a second variable frequency drive for redundant backup operation. Furnish and install control wiring and control circuitry to transfer from main VFD to redundant VFD when the main drive has faulted. The variable frequency drives shall be sized accordingly to start and hold all motors in the fan array assembly. Furnish and install service disconnect switch with fuses or circuit breakers.
4.
Furnish vibration isolation for the entire array. a.
Fan assemblies shall be furnished with rubber-in-shear isolators in at least four appropriate points. Isolators shall be bolted securely to the fan assembly.
Deflection shall be designed for one (1) inch deflection. b.
Thrust restraints shall be furnished on all fans which will travel horizontally more than ¼” when in operation. Isolators shall be sized and adjusted so that the assembly floats when operating at design conditions.
G.
Cooling Coils (DX)
1.
The evaporator coils shall be constructed of not less than ½” round seamless copper tubing with continuous aluminum plate fins. Tubes shall be .020” thick and bends shall be long radius type. Cooling coils shall be selected to comply with the operating conditions
23 73 01-5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 included within. Cooling coil face area velocity shall not exceed 450 FPM, and the coils shall not exceed eight (8) fins per inch. All cooling coils shall have integrated circuits to allow for full air contact on any active circuit.
2.
Fins shall be collared having the tubing hydrostatically expanded within to form a good thermal bond. The refrigerant feeding of the coils shall be such as to promote counterflow heat transfer. Thermal expansion valves with vertical flow distributor and external equalizer shall be installed in the DX coil for each refrigerant circuit. Coil shall be in vertical position. Headers and tubes shall be copper. Coil shall have an integral structural frame of 16 gauge series 304 stainless steel.
3.
A drain pan of 16 gauge series 304 stainless steel, recessed three (3) inches into the floor shall be provided under the cooling coil. Drain pan shall extend at least six (6) inches past each end of the cooling coil and extend 24” downstream of the cooling coil. Drain pan shall slope to the exterior wall with pitched bottom side.
H.
Hot and Chilled Glycol Coil
1.
All hydronic coils shall be tested to 350 psig compressed air under clear water. Coils shall be designed to operate at 250 psig internal pressure and up to 300°F. Internal tubes shall be round seamless 5/8”, 0.028” wall copper tubes which have been de-oxidized by the addition of phosphorous. Coil casings shall be constructed of a minimum of 16 gauge continuous stainless steel. Coil casing reinforcements shall be required for fin lengths over 42”. Coils fins shall be plate type, die-formed ripple edge corrugated 0.008 for 5/8” tubes aluminum with guide channels to create turbulent wiping behind the tubes with collars drawn and belled. Internal copper tubes shall be staggered in direction of air flow.
The copper circuiting tubes shall be mechanically expanded to the fins. The fin spacing shall be 8 fins per inch.
I.
Motors and Starters
1.
Electric motors of premium efficient rugged duty ODP type to meet the latest state and utility standards to be of sizes as required for operating equipment. All motors shall be belt driven with adjustable bases and set screws to maintain proper belt tension. Motors shall have roller or ball bearing mounted shafts. Motors mounted in the vertical position shall have drip covers. Motors shall have a nameplate rating a minimum of 15% greater than the limit load rating of the fan and drive for non-overloading fans. Motors for all other equipment shall have a nameplate rating equal to 120% of the total brake horsepower of the equipment design conditions. All motors have a 1.15 service factor which shall not be considered when sizing motors. Insulation of windings shall be class "f" and allow for use with variable frequency speed controllers.
2.
Acceptable manufacturers of electric motors are US Motors, Baldor, Reliance Hi
Efficiency, Century-E-Plus. Pre-wired equipment starters are to be supplied. They shall be of an industrial grade type with ambient compensated overloads.
J.
Unit Electrical Panel
1.
An integral electrical panel with non-fused disconnect switch shall be provided. Panel shall be factory pre-wired containing and controlling the following components:
2.
Compressors, condenser, supply air fan starters, time delay relays, control circuit fuses, and terminal strip. All of the heating, cooling, and ventilating controls shall be interlocked with the conditioner fan motor starter in order that they cannot operate if the fan motor starter is de-energized. The unit is to be single service wired, NEMA coded with fuseblocks with fusetrons installed ahead of all starters. All three (3) motor legs are to be wired for individual phase protection. There shall be a three-phase failure relay installed ahead of 120 volt controls.
23 73 01-6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
3.
The unit electrical system shall include a 120 volt and 24 volt transformer for the control circuit. All controls, relays and crankcase heaters- as well as holding coils for all starters- shall be 120 volt or less. The main fan starter shall have two (2) auxiliary contacts for purposes of control usage. All low voltage controls shall be segregated from power wiring.
4.
The control panel shall also include all necessary terminal blocks to facilitate field control wiring connections. There shall be a lockout to insure that heating, humidification, and cooling cannot operate simultaneously. There shall be a unit ground and duplex outlet with light.
5.
All internal panel wire shall be type "THHN". All power wiring shall be rated for 600 volts and housed in a sealtight conduit. All control wiring within the unit shall be located in an enclosed channel running through the floor of the unit. All wiring connections shall be of individual lug hookup. Multiple wires to one lug will not be accepted. All controls shall be
"Underwriters Laboratories Approved". All wiring shall be done within "NEC" and "UL" requirements.
K.
Variable Frequency Drives
1.
This specification is to cover a complete adjustable frequency motor drive consisting of a pulse width modulating inverter. The drive shall be manufactured by "Asea Brown Boveri- designated series ACH 550" with manual by-pass or approved equal.
2.
The variable frequency drives (VFD's) shall be solid state, with a pulse width modulated
(PWM) output wave form. WI, six-step, and current source drives are not acceptable. The
VFD shall be in a NEMA-1 enclosure, completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall employ a full wave ratifier to prevent input line notching; DC bus choke; DC bus capacitors, and insulated gate biopolar transistors (IGBT's) as the output switching device. SCR's, GTO's, and Darlington transistors are not acceptable. The drive efficiency shall be 97% better at full speed and full load. Fundamental power factor shall be 0.98 at all speeds and loads.
3.
All printed circuit boards shall be completely tested and burned-in before being assembled into the completed VFD. The VFD shall be subjected to a preliminary functional test, eight hour burn-in, and computerized final test. The burn-in shall be at 104 degrees (40 degrees
C) at full- rated load.
4.
All VFD’s shall have the following features: a.
Magnetic (manual selection) bypass switch to allow starting and operation of the motor when the drive is down for service. b.
The same customer interface- including digital display, keypad, and customer connections. c.
In addition to the keypad, a pre-wired 3-position hand-off- auto switch and manual speed potentiometer.
L.
Temperature Controls
M.
Warranties and Start-Up
1.
Manufacturer's standard warranty on all components of one (1) year to be used within 18 months from shipment of unit.
2.
Compressors shall have extended four (4) year warranty added to the standard one (1) year warranty.
3.
Variable frequency drives shall have a two (2) year parts and labor warranty.
4.
Change out of in warranty parts along with maintenance and service shall be by the owner's personnel or HVAC contractor.
5.
Startup and owner instruction shall be by certified factory personnel for a period of five (5) days during normal working business hours.
23 73 01-7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
6.
All accessory sections and access doors on discharge side of fan shall be designed to handle up to 9 inches of static pressure without deformation or leaking.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where this equipment is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that equipment comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of equipment with other components of systems.
C.
Check alignment and, where necessary (and possible), realign shafts of motors and equipment within tolerances recommended by manufacturer.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of equipment, energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirement. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. Refer to Section 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 73 01
23 73 01-8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 82 16
COILS
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary
General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and made ready for operation by the Owner, all coils as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturing firms regularly engaged in manufacture of this material with characteristics and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Provide product produced by the manufacturers, which are listed in Section 23 05 12 "Approved
Manufacturer's List".
C.
Provide equipment whose performance, under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
1.06
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
WATER COILS
A.
All water coils shall be of the continuous flat plate fin type for minimum resistance to air flow.
Fins shall be fabricated with drawn collars and shall be bonded to the tubes by a hydraulic
23 82 16-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 expansion process. Openings in unit casing for coil connections to be sealed against leakage.
Coil casings shall be not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel.
B.
Water coils shall be of the continuous tube type and circuited so as to be completely drainable by gravity through the supply header. Headers and tubes are to be fabricated of a seamless .024 inch thick wall copper tubing. Fins are to be .009 inch thick aluminum. Supply and return headers shall be complete enclosed within the unit casing or external where called for on the drawing, and shall be equipped with steel nipples of extra length equipped with drain and vent plugs outside unit casing. Coils shall have capacities as called for and shall have the minimum number of rows as shown on the schedule.
C.
Cooling coils shall have ARI Certification.
2.02
DIRECT EXPANSION COOLING COILS
A.
Tubes - Round, seamless copper grooves, arranged in parallel pattern with respect to airflow.
B.
Fins - Plat-Tube, Sigma-Flo II configured, copper fins producing identical capacities. Fins continuous across entire coil width and die-formed in multiple stages for accurate tube fit, fin bonding and spacing. Fins mechanically bonded to tubes for lasting reliability.
C.
Casing - Continuous coated galvanized steel, 16 gauge formed end supports and top and bottom channels. d " holes on 3" centers in channels for mounting or fastening coils together. One 16 gauge continuous coated, galvanized steel center tube support on ordering lengths over 42".
Two or more supports on lengths over 96".
D.
Test and Working Pressure - Proof tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 300 psig air pressure under water, cleaned, dehydrated and sealed with dry nitrogen charge. Suitable for working pressures up to 250 psig.
E.
U-Bends - Round, seamless copper tubes, e " O.D., machine die-formed on each end to provide accurate fit for silver brazed joints.
F.
Distributor - Venture type refrigerant distributors or low pressure drop design, arranged for down feed. Male sweet connections. Maximum of twelve circuits per single distributor. Split evaporator.
G.
Air Bypass and Water Carryover Arrestor - Foam sealing strip located between casing channels and fins along top and bottom.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where this equipment is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
23 82 16-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.02
INSTALLATION
FIT Project C1195
A.
Install coils where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that coils comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of coils with other components of systems.
C.
Check alignment and, where necessary (and possible), realign shafts of motors and coils within tolerances recommended by manufacturer.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of coils, test coils to demonstrate compliance with requirement.
When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. Refer to Section 23 05 93 - Testing and
Balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 82 16
23 82 16-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 23 84 13
HUMIDIFIERS
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is coordinate with and complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary
General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and made ready for operation by the Owner, all humidifiers as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of this material with characteristics and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Provide product produced by the manufacturers, which are listed in Section 23 05 12 "Approved
Manufacturer's List".
C.
Provide equipment whose performance, under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
1.06
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ELECTRODE STEAM HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM
A.
Electrode steam generating system using regular type potable water supply.
B.
Packaged unit, wall mounted, requiring steam distributor for mounting into duct.
23 84 13-1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Atmospheric pressure steam generation and mineral separation contained within an electrode steam cylinder. Resistive element technology and boiler steam (pressure steam) technology not acceptable. The disposable electrode steam cylinder shall have:
1.
Published life expectancy.
2.
Published replacement pricing.
3.
Cylinder seams must be spin welded to ensure long-term water tightness and leak resistance.
4.
Integral electronics to ensure safe operation.
5.
High water sensor circuitry to prevent over filling.
6.
Efficient operation over a wide range of water conditions.
7.
Simple maintenance without disassembly or removal of humidifier. No specialized tools required.
8.
Full output and maximum energy efficiency through entire cylinder life.
9.
Drain through bottom' to ensure highest mineral concentration is effectively removed.
Simple skimmers are not acceptable.
10.
Large perforated strainer at drain outlet to prevent blockage of drain valve or drain lines.
11.
Tool-less primary electrical connection for use with factory installed, spring loaded, gold plated connectors.
12.
Safety characteristics ensuring no current flow with absence of water, independent of safety controls.
D.
Unit to be complete with:
1.
'Total controller' microprocessor to control all humidifier functions.
2.
Advanced water management utilizing the patented proportional plus integral autoadaptive control system for optimal energy efficiency, water usage and cylinder life.
3.
Microprocessor controlled fill valve and drain valve allowing automatic water management.
4.
Internal drain water tempering to ensure maximum 140°F drain water.
5.
Integral fill cup with minimum 1-inch air gap to prevent back siphoning.
6.
Full cylinder indication and pre-notice of automatic shutdown at end of cylinder life.
7.
Fixed steam line connection for quick cylinder replacement.
8.
Automatic pulse feature to clean any obstruction from the drain solenoid valve when needed.
9.
Automatic off-season shut-down [after 3 days of "no call"] will completely drain the cylinder[s] and automatically restart on call for humidity.
10.
Accepts a signal from modulating humidistat.
11.
Single or dual channel signal acceptance.
12.
Isolated plumbing and electrical compartment with cabinet made of 18-gauge powder coat paint finish and 20 gauge plumbing electrical door. Modular plumbing and electrical fully assembled and pre-wired [no field assembly required].
13.
Removable door (no special tools required) to allow user full front access of plumbing and electrical sections.
14.
Plumbing door interlock safety switch to allow power interruption when installing or servicing the humidifier.
15.
C-UL US listed.
2.02
HUMIDIFIER CONTROLS
A.
Total controller microprocessor with the following features or functions:
1.
Full function user interface with touch type keypad and backlit alphanumeric graphic display with trend log.
23 84 13-2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.
Real time clock indicating date and time with battery back up.
3.
Built-in controller with adjustable setpoint, proportional range, and integral for use with humidity transducers.
4.
Acceptance of industry standard [analogue continuous control demand signal [0-5 vdc]
[1-5 vdc] [0-10 vdc] [0-20 ma] [4-20 ma]] [relative humidity transducers].
5.
Keypad programming to configure, monitor and control humidifier parameters on graphic backlit display a.
Relative humidity (RH) setpoint and actual conditions in space from humidity transducer. b.
Relative humidity (RH) high limit setpoint and actual from humidity transducer. c.
System demand in lbs/hr (kg/hr). d.
On screen service history with date stamp. e.
On screen fault history with troubleshooting list and date stamped. f.
On screen attention indication. g.
Security loop status open/close. h.
Control mode [single or dual modulation]. i.
Control type [RH proportional + integral]. j.
Manual capacity output adjustment range of 20-100%. k.
Humidifier model, capacity, software version. l.
Cylinder model # and capacity rating. m.
Rapid modulation capability reduces response time upon start-up. n.
Short cycling detection and correction diagnostics. o.
Scroll through start-up and troubleshooting checklist on graphic display. p.
Self-diagnostics during start-up to system test to prevent unsafe operation of the unit. q.
User adjustable drain/flush frequency.
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A.
Single tube[s] steam dispersion with condensate drain. Basis of Design: Nortec Model ASD
1.
Allows for direct introduction of steam into a duct system. Distributor tube is made of stainless steel and can be installed in a horizontal, upflow or downflow duct applications.
2.
All single tube[s] distributors have an integral condensate return, allows for condensate produced at the distributor to be drained through a 3/8" drain leg either back to the humidifier or to a convenient floor drain.
B.
Air proving switch, on/off, duct mounted, pressure differential switch, adjustable set point from
0.07 IWC to 12.0 IWC, good for positive, negative or differential pressure applications, stops humidifier if duct air pressure is not sensed. Turns humidifier off if air handler fails.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where this equipment is to be installed and determine space conditions and notify architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
23 84 13-3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.02
INSTALLATION
FIT Project C1195
A.
Install equipment where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that equipment comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of equipment with other components of systems.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of equipment, energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirement. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. Refer to Section 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 84 13
23 84 13-4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 26 05 12
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical
Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract requirements to the best available standards at the scale required.
D.
Power riser diagrams, as well as schematic diagrams, generally indicate connections to be used for various systems and equipment. Systems conduit and wiring shall be as required for the actual systems installed on this Project. Provide all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on the plans.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The Specifications and the accompanying drawings are intended to secure the provisions of all material, labor, equipment, and services necessary to install complete, tested, and ready for operation the Electrical Systems in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. All systems shall be complete with all necessary appurtenances and minor auxiliaries, including pull boxes, offsets to clear interferences, and supports which are not shown but are needed to make each system complete in every respect. All work described in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or vice versa, shall be furnished in complete working order. If mention has been omitted of any item of work or material, necessary for completion of the system, then such items must be and are hereby included.
1.
Panelboards - lighting, power and distribution.
2.
Fuses and/or circuit breakers.
3.
Installation and wiring of individual controllers. Erecting starter racks where required.
4.
Safety and disconnect switches, unless furnished with starters or on equipment. Weatherproof devices for outdoor equipment.
5.
Motor power wiring.
6.
Raceways and installation components.
7.
Wire and Cable.
8.
Electrical work in connection with equipment specified and furnished under other Sections of the Specifications, or furnished by the Owner under separate contracts or direct purchase.
9.
Grounding system in conformance with applicable codes.
10.
Wiring devices.
11.
Furnishing of access doors.
12.
Furnishing and setting of all sleeves through the floors, roof and wall, where required including waterproofing and fireproof sealing and cap flashing.
13.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the fire resistance rating of any rated wall, ceiling or floor for which his work partially or fully penetrates. Work which could potentially
26 05 12 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 penetrate or breach a rated wall, ceiling or floor include, but are not limited to flush-mounted recessed panel boards, conduit and pipe, ducts, equipment, supports or reinforcements. For any such situation, the Contractor shall provide the necessary fire stopping material, insulation or system in order to maintain the fire rating of the wall, ceiling or floor. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the building construction drawings, including those of the architectural and structural trades, in order to determine the fire resistance ratings for the walls, floors and ceilings for which their work will partially or fully penetrate.
14.
Hardware, such as inserts, bolts, etc., associated with concrete pads.
15.
Cutting and core drilling associated with electrical work.
16.
Prime painting, where required for electrical equipment and installation.
17.
Removal of existing electrical work in accordance with removals drawings or as directed and required. Restoration of electrical service in affected adjoining areas which are to continue to function.
18.
Provision for temporary light and power.
19.
Paying all fees as required by governing agency and performing all testing as required by governing agency and adjusting and furnishing all certificates of approval, and those of
Underwriters.
20.
Modification to alarm and signaling systems, including the following: a.
Modification to Fire alarm, smoke and heat detection, sprinkler alarm systems. b.
Furnishing, installing and connecting of all alarm initiating and signaling devices, except as noted hereinafter:
1) Installation of duct smoke detectors. c.
All fan shutdown wiring and furnishing, installing and connecting relay cabinets required for fan shutdown. d.
Telephone empty conduit system, including terminal cabinets and plywood backboards.
1.03
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
The following items of materials and labor will be furnished under other Sections of the
Specifications and shall be excluded from the work to be furnished by this Contractor:
1.
Furnishing and setting of motors, adjusting thermal elements and replacing thermal overloads if necessary. Supplying of individual starters and control devices, unless specifically indicated otherwise. This Contractor shall ascertain that combination starters are obtained and installed where so identified on the Electrical Drawings.
2.
Installation of electric valves, float switches and pressure and pneumatic- electric switches, stats and related control devices.
3.
Installation of duct type smoke detectors.
4.
Base flashing for conduits passing through roof.
5.
Setting of access doors in walls and ceilings.
6.
Rough and finish patching.
7.
Finish painting of exposed conduits, boxes, hangers, apparatus, etc.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS
A.
The complete installation shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements and standards of
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA), New York City Electrical Code (NYCEC), National Electrical Code (NEC), Institute of
Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), American National Standard Institute (ANSI),
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), National Electrical Safety Code, Insulated
26 05 12 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM),
Factory Insurance Association (FIA), National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) "Standard of Installation", Local Inspection Agency, Local Power Company, Local Telephone Company, along with state and local municipal codes and all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction.
Any items or requirements noted in the Specifications or on Drawings, which conflict with these shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. All work necessary to comply with these requirements shall be performed by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner.
B.
Where reference is made to the National Electrical Code only, without mention of the New York
City Electrical Code, the requirements of the latter, where they differ from the former, shall take precedence, where applicable.
C.
All electrical equipment, materials and appliances shall have the listing of the Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear labels attesting to UL listing, and types approved by Municipal
Departments having jurisdiction.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.
B.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or that of another contractor.
C.
Submit shop drawings complete in every detail for items as described in the Contract Documents, or as may be required by the Engineer.
D.
Submit shop drawings as indicated in subsequent Sections of this Specification.
1.06
EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS ON PREMISES
A.
Before submitting his bid, this Contractor shall visit the site of the work and shall thoroughly familiarize himself with the observable existing conditions affecting the work. No additional compensation will be granted on account of extra work made necessary by the Contractor's failure to investigate such existing conditions. Verify all grades, elevations, dimensions and clearances at the site.
B.
Examine all work prepared by others to receive the work of this Section and report any discrepancies and/or defects affecting installation to the General Contractor for correction. Commencement of work will be construed as complete acceptance of preparatory work by others.
C.
Existing conditions, equipment, material, and sizes are shown for reference only. Verify existing conditions and bring any discrepancies to Engineer's attention in writing prior to submission.
1.07
REMOVAL AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING WORK
A.
Disconnect, remove and/or relocate electrical material, equipment, devices, components, and other work noted and required by demolition or alterations in existing construction.
B.
Provide new material and equipment required for relocated equipment.
26 05 12 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Remove conductors from existing raceways to be rewired. Clean raceways as required prior to rewiring.
D.
Tape both ends of abandoned conductors, and cap outlets and abandoned raceways.
E.
Cut and cap abandoned floor raceways flush with concrete floor or behind walls and ceilings.
F.
Dispose of removed raceways and wiring.
G.
Dispose of removed electrical equipment as directed.
H.
All electrical work in adjoining areas which is indicated on the Drawings to continue to function but is affected by demolition work shall be reconnected and restored to present function as part of the electrical system of the Buildings.
I.
Connect new work to existing work in a neat and acceptable manner, with minimum interference to existing facilities.
J.
Maintain continuous operation of existing facilities affected by the work.
K.
Alarm and emergency systems are to be interrupted only with the written consent of the Owner.
L.
Temporary shutdowns when required, to be made only with written consent of Owner at times not to interfere with normal operations.
M.
All raceways which become exposed beyond finished surfaces because of the alteration work shall be removed and rerouted behind finished surfaces.
N.
Wiring that is to be removed as a result of demolition work, but is required to continue to function, shall be interrupted at convenient locations, rerouted (new wiring and conduits) and reconnected for continuation of their original function. New wiring extensions shall match existing ones in all respects, conductor ampacity, conduit size, etc.
1.08
COORDINATION OF WORK WITH OTHER TRADES
A.
The work of this Section shall be coordinated with the work of all other Contracts, the Utility
Company and the Telephone Company, and shall be so arranged that there will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts of each respective work wherein it may be interrelated with that of this Contract so that generally all construction work can proceed in its natural sequence without unnecessary delay. All communications of a coordinating nature to the
Engineer shall be via the Construction Manager or General Contractor.
B.
Examine all Architectural, Structural, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Drawings relating to this Project, and verify all governing conditions at the site and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required and its relation to other work in the building. No consideration will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials to be furnished for work to be done.
C.
Scaled and figured dimensions with respect to the items are approximate only; sizes of equipment have been taken from typical equipment items of the class indicated. Before proceeding with work, the Contractor shall carefully check all dimensions and sizes and shall assume full responsibility for
26 05 12 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 the fitting-in of equipment and materials to the building and to meet architectural and structural conditions.
D.
Coordinate work with other disciplines. Confer with other contractors whose work might affect this installation; and arrange all parts of this work and equipment in proper relation to the work and equipment of others, with the building construction and with architectural finish so that this work will harmonize in service, appearance, and function.
E.
Exposed piping shall be installed to provide the maximum amount of headroom but in no case shall piping be installed less than seven feet (8'-0") above the finished floor. Piping installed in areas where hung ceilings or other furred spaces are indicated shall be installed concealed.
F.
The Contractor is referred to the Architectural Drawings for locations and types of hung ceilings and furred spaces.
1.09
INSPECTION AND TESTS
A.
At the time of the final inspection and tests, all connections at the panels and all splices, etc., must have been completed. All fuses must be in place and the circuits continuous from service switches to all receptacles, outlets, motors, etc. Each entire wiring system must test free from short circuits and grounds. When wiring systems are "megger" tested, the insulation resistance between conductors and between conductors and grounds, based on maximum load, shall not be less than that required by National Electrical Code and local authorities having jurisdiction. A written record of all test data shall be supplied to the Engineer (five copies). The tests shall cover but not be limited to the following:
1.
Modifications to the electrical service and distribution system.
2.
Modifications to the Fire alarm, smoke detection and sprinkler alarm systems.
3.
Power installations and motor controls.
4.
Light installations and circuit switching.
5.
Any part of the work called for in the Specifications, or Drawings and as designated by the
Engineer or Engineers.
B.
Provide all necessary testing equipment, instruments, and skilled personnel for the tests. If in the opinion of the Engineer, the results of such tests show that the work has not complied with the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings, the Contractor shall make all additions or changes necessary to put the system in proper working condition and shall pay for all the expenses and for all subsequent tests which are necessary to determine whether the work is satisfactory. Any additional work or subsequent tests shall be carried out at the convenience of the Owner, prior to final payment.
1.10
PERMITS, CERTIFICATES AND FEES
A.
Obtain and deliver a final Certificate of Approval from the applicable inspection authority having jurisdiction. Make delivery to the Engineer for transmittal to the Owner upon completion of the work and before final payment. Pay all charges made by the inspection authority and include their cost in the bid.
B.
This work shall include the procurement of and payment for all permits, certificates and fees for the performance of the electrical work in compliance with codes, applicable laws and municipal regulations including those from local utilities for services.
26 05 12 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.11
PROTECTION, MAINTENANCE AND PRODUCT HANDLING OF ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT
A.
Electrical equipment shall be delivered and stored at the site, properly packed and crated until finally installed. Store materials in spaces as designated by the General Contractor. Investigate each space through which equipment must be moved. If necessary, equipment shall be shipped from manufacturer in crated sections of size suitable for moving through restricted spaces.
B.
Uninstalled and installed equipment and materials shall be adequately protected against loss or stealing; damage caused by water, paint, fire, plaster, moisture, acids, fumes, dust or other environmental conditions; or physical damage, during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown conditions. This Contractor shall replace any damage or stolen material without extra cost to the
Owner.
C.
Provide effective protection for all material and equipment against damage that may be caused by environmental conditions. Do no work when conditions of temperature in area or moisture on materials or substrates are not in accordance with material manufacturer's recommended conditions for installation.
D.
This Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of all equipment and systems installed, until final acceptance by the Engineer and the Owner. The Operation of the equipment by the Owner does not constitute an acceptance of the work. Work will be accepted only after the Contractor has adjusted his equipment, demonstrated that it fulfills the requirements of the Drawings and
Specifications, and has furnished all required certificates.
E.
This Contractor shall guarantee in writing to the Owner that all work installed by him shall be free of defects in workmanship and materials and that all apparatus will develop the capacities and characteristics as indicated, and that, if during a period of one year from date of final approval of work by the Engineer, any defects in workmanship, materials or performance appear, he will remedy them without any cost to the Owner. Guarantee requirements shall consist of the aforestated and other requirements, as established under applicable Contract Documents.
F.
Provide effective protection against damage for all material and equipment during shipment, and storage at the Project Site. Cover all stored equipment to exclude dust and moisture. Place stored conduit on dunnage with appropriate weather cover and caps on exposed ends.
G.
After cabinets and boxes are installed, cover openings to prevent entrance of water and foreign materials. Close conduit openings with temporary metal or plastic caps, including those terminated in cabinets.
H.
Protect all rough and finished floors and other finished surfaces from damage which may be caused by construction materials and methods. Protect floors with tarpaulins, chip pans and oil-proof floor covering. Protect finished surfaces from welding and cutting splatters with baffles and asbestos splatter blankets. Protect finished surfaces from paint droppings, adhesive and other marring agents with drop cloths. Protect other surfaces with appropriate protective measures.
I.
Have materials delivered to site. Unload and store materials in designated location, and protect from damage. Deliver materials to their point of installation.
26 05 12 - 6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
J.
Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with manufacturer's name and product identification clearly marked thereon.
1.12
ACCESSIBILITY AND MEASUREMENTS
A.
All work shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
Minor deviations from the plans may be made to accomplish this, subject to the approval or the
Engineers.
B.
Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the
Building, and shall be responsible for the correctness of same as related to the work under this
Contract.
1.13
TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A.
Electric services for temporary light and power shall be obtained from the nearest existing panelboard and extended as required. Consult the Owner prior to making any connections to existing services.
B.
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain the temporary lighting and power system for all Contractors. The use of electricity shall be kept to a minimum.
C.
The Owner or Owner's Representative will pay for all energy required by the temporary lighting and power system.
D.
Provide all wiring, supports, lamp sockets, receptacle sockets and any other materials, supplies or equipment necessary for temporary light and power system.
E.
Ground fault protection required by OSHA for temporary receptacle circuits shall be accomplished by providing branch circuit panels containing ground fault protection branch circuit breakers.
F.
Provide a grounding conductor connection to each receptacle grounding terminal. Minimum size branch circuit and grounding conductors shall be No. 12 AWG.
G.
Provide sufficient supplementary temporary lighting to permit proper execution of the work.
H.
Keep the temporary lighting and power system operational commencing fifteen (15) minutes before the established starting time of that trade which starts work earliest in the morning and ending fifteen
(15) minutes after the established quitting time of that trade which stops work latest in the evening.
This applies to all weekdays, Monday through Friday inclusive, which are established as regular working days for any trade engaged in the work, and shall continue until Final Acceptance of the work or until these services are ordered terminated by the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
1.14
NAMEPLATES
A.
Furnish a nameplate for each separately installed feeder switch and circuit breaker, each individual panel, disconnect switch, starter push-button station and equipment enclosure.
B.
Unless otherwise noted, nameplates shall be black laminate with white letters of uniform size consisting of reasonably large caps, easily visible.
26 05 12 - 7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Inscriptions shall consist of name and number of equipment as shown on the Drawings and as approved by the Engineer.
1.15
NAMES AND TRADE NAMES
A.
Where trade and manufacturers' names are specified or indicated on the Drawings, they are intended to indicate the standard of material or articles required. This shall not remove the responsibility of the Contractor from verifying the equipment's compliance with all rules and regulations governing the use of such equipment. No purchase of any equipment shall be done without written authorization, if such equipment will not abide with all rules and regulations, covering its intended use.
1.16
MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
All material shall be new and of the best quality and shall have the Underwriters Laboratories label attached. The label shall be of the type for the intended application. The work throughout shall be executed in the best and most thorough manner under the direction of, and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer who will interpret the meaning of the Drawings and Specifications. The Engineer shall have the power to reject any work and materials which, in his opinion, is not in full accordance therewith.
B.
If, after installation, operation of the equipment proves to be unsatisfactory to the Owner by reason of defects, errors or omissions, the Owner reserves the right to operate equipment until it can be removed from service for correction by Contractor. Contractor shall pay for damages to work of other trades caused by this defective equipment and its replacement.
1.17
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER
CONTRACT FOR ELECTRICAL WORK)
A.
Two months prior to the completion of all work and the final inspection of the installation by the
Owner, five copies of a complete Instruction Manual, bound in booklet form and suitably indexed, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. All written material contained in the Manual shall be typewritten or printed.
B.
The Manual shall contain the following items:
1.
Table of Contents
2.
Introduction - Explanation of manual and its use.
3.
Description of system or equipment. a.
Complete schematic drawings of all systems. b.
Functional and sequential description of all systems.
4.
Systems Operation a.
Operation procedures. b.
All posted instruction charts.
5.
Maintenance a.
Systems trouble-shooting charts b.
Procedures for checking out functions. c.
Recommended list of spare parts.
6.
Listing of Manufacturers
7.
Manufacturer's Data (where multiple model, type and size listings are included, clearly and conspicuously indicate those that are pertinent to this installation.
26 05 12 - 8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 a.
Description - literature, drawings, illustrations, certified performance charts, technical data, etc. b.
Operation c.
Maintenance - including complete trouble-shooting charts d.
Parts list e.
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of recommended repair and service companies. f.
Guarantee data.
END OF SECTION 26 05 12
26 05 12 - 9
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 26 05 19
WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS)
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and
Electrical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The requirements of this Section apply to wire and cable work specified elsewhere in these
Specifications.
B.
The work includes providing wire and cable complete with all accessories in accordance with
Drawings and Specifications and as required for a complete system. Wiring size referenced in this Section shall be AWG, except as noted. For special wiring for individual systems refer to respective Sections of these Specifications.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
"Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of wire and cable of specified types and ratings, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Refer to PART 2 of this Section for "APPROVED MANUFACTURERS".
B.
Provide wire and cable which has been listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, and comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards.
C.
Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70) and local electrical codes which apply for construction and installation of wire and cable. Where discrepancies arise between codes, the most restrictive code shall apply.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work, and submit shop drawings.
1.05
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
26 05 19 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wire and Cable under 600 Volts
B.
For Wire and Cable:
1.
South Wire Cable
2.
Essex
3.
Service Wire
4.
Alcan
5.
ATC Cable Systems, Inc.
C.
For Wire and Cable Termination and Connections:
1.
Thomas and Betts Corp.
2.
Burndy Corp.
3.
Elastimold
4.
G&W Electric Co.
FIT Project C1195
2.02
600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Conductors:
B.
All conductors shall be copper.
C.
No. 10 and smaller conductors shall be ASTM Standard, solid, copper. No. 8 and larger conductors shall be ASTM standard, stranded copper.
D.
Communications and signal wiring shall conform to the recommendations of the system manufacturers and shall be as specified in respective Sections of these Specifications.
E.
Insulation:
F.
Rubber and thermoplastic insulation shall comply with ASTM and IPCEA standards.
G.
Minimum insulation shall be UL rated for 90 o
C. Types THWN, USE, RH, RHW.
H.
Insulation rated 90 o
C may be used in lieu of the above. Types FEP, MI, PFA, THHN, XHHW.
I.
Conductor ampacity rating shall be based on 75 o
C insulation.
J.
Types and application:
1.
DHN or XTHW shall be used for interior branch circuit and feeder wiring.
2.
THWN and THHN may be provided for rewiring in existing conduit.
3.
Conductors with insulation rated 90 o
C shall be provided in high ambient temperature areas and for branch circuit wiring connecting the fluorescent fixtures.
4.
Type SFF-2 conductors shall be provided in wiring channels at continuous fluorescent fixtures and in ambient temperatures over 90 o
C.
K.
Wire Sizes
26 05 19 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
L.
For General Use:
1.
No. 12 minimum copper wire shall be used for lighting and power.
2.
No. 10 minimum copper wire shall be used for 15 Ampere circuits, at 120 Volts, over 90 ft. in length, and for 20 Ampere circuit, at 120 Volts, over 60 ft. in length.
M.
For Control and Alarm Wiring, unless otherwise noted:
1.
No. 14 minimum copper wire.
2.
No. 12 minimum copper wire for 120 Volt circuits over 60 ft. in length.
N.
For Other Voltages and Phases and for Longer Circuit Lengths:
1.
Size wire as required to maintain NEC (NYCEC) permissible voltage drop.
O.
Raceways:
1.
Increase raceway sizes for larger wire sizes in conformance with NEC requirements.
P.
Color Coding
Q.
Phase wires shall be color-coded as follows:
1.
120/208 Volt system:
Black -
Red -
Blue -
A phase
B phase
C phase
R.
Neutral conductors shall be white for 120/208 Volts.
S.
Equipment ground wire shall have a green outer covering throughout.
T.
Where color-coded cable is not available, certify in writing and request permission for overlap color taping conductors (minimum length 6 in.) in accessible locations.
U.
Conductors for control circuits and signal systems shall also be consistently color coded to avoid confusion and permit easy identification of conductors. The IPCEA color code shall be used wherever possible. No two wires in the same raceway shall be the same color, unless provided with flameproof linen identification tags on each end.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Install wire and cable in accordance with the NYCEC, The National Electrical Contractors
Association's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions.
B.
600 Volt Wire and Cable:
C.
Wire and cable shall not be drawn into conduit and raceways until all conduit work is complete, joints made up tightly and the entire run secured in place.
D.
The inside of conduits and raceways shall be dry and clean before conductors are pulled.
26 05 19 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
E.
Care shall be exercised in pulling to avoid damage to the wire or cable. Lubricants shall be used for pulling wire or cable if the character of the pull might otherwise damage the conductors, insulation or jacket. No thermoplastic wires shall be pulled at temperatures lower than 0 o
C.
F.
Cables shall be supported at the upper end of all risers and at intermediate points as required by the NEC. Supports shall be O.Z. Type "R", insulation wedges or Kellens grips, or approved equal.
G.
Seal conduit with a non hardening compound approved for the purpose, where cable or wire enter building from underground.
H.
Cable spacers shall be installed where required. Spacers shall consists of galvanized or cadmium plates, steel or malleable iron threaded conduit and fittings and insets of non-metallic insulating material with openings adequate to accommodate cables being spaces. Cable spaces shall be O.Z. Mfg. Co., Inc. Type E or Type EL, with grounding lug, or approved equal.
I.
Not more than 3 lighting or convenience receptacle circuits shall be installed in one (1) conduit, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
J.
Provide individual raceways for two pole ungrounded circuits.
K.
In certain systems, equipment furnished by an approved manufacturer may require a different number and arrangement of conductors from those indicated on the Drawings. In such cases, the Contractor for the work under this Division shall comply with such requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.
L.
In the event the Contractor for the work under this Division or Section chooses to furnish and install a system or item of equipment of different arrangement from that shown or specified, he shall furnish and install any additional wiring and conduit required by the system at no additional cost to the Owner.
M.
In wireways and large pull boxes, lace and tie off conductors in groups of 3 phases and neutral
(if used) to limit conductor unbalanced loading. Conductor group shall be as installed in conduit.
N.
Tag all feeders and risers in all pull boxes and in all gutter spaces through which they pass.
Tags shall be engraved white core nameplates identifying feeders as shown on the Drawings or the circuit protective device from which they originate.
O.
Leave all wires with sufficient slack at terminals ends for convenient connections and fixtures and for convenient servicing. Stow loose ends neatly in outlet box.
P.
Terminations, Splices and Connections:
Q.
Splices and taps shall be made in accessible boxes, panelboard fittings, gutters, terminal panels, etc. only. Materials shall be compatible with the conductors, insulations and protective jackets on the cables and wires.
R.
All copper conductors No. 8 & larger shall be terminated, spliced, and tapped with color-keyed compression connectors, as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co., Series 54000, Ideal
26 05 19 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Industries Series 87000, or approved equal. The manufacturers recommended tooling shall be used. Mechanical type connectors shall not be used.
S.
All copper conductors No. 10 AWG & smaller shall be terminated and spliced with Ideal
Industries wing-nut wire connectors, or approved equal compression connectors. The flameretardant, thermoplastic insulated type shall be used to isolate the terminal from other metal parts and equipment.
T.
Splices and joints shall be insulated with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature. Insulation shall be not less than that of the conductors being joined.
U.
Plastic electrical insulating tape shall be flame retardant, cold and weather resistant.
V.
Cable Tying:
W.
All circuit and control wiring in cabinets, panels, pullboxes, wireways, and junction boxes shall be tied and held with nylon Ty-Rap cable ties as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co., or approved equal.
X.
Wire identification ties fastened to conductors at the point of attachment to terminal blocks and equipment components shall be nylon, self-locking Ty-Raps as manufactured by Thomas &
Betts Co., and Ideal Industries Series Ty-51M, 53M, or approved equal.
Y.
Tags:
Z.
Cables shall be tagged in all wireways, pull boxes, wireways and wiring gutters of panels.
Where two or more circuits run to or through a control device, outlet box or junction box, each circuit shall be tagged as a guide in making connections.
AA.
Tags for feeders shall indicate feeder number, size, phase, voltage, origin and termination.
Feeder tags shall identify all phases individually.
BB.
Tags for control and alarm wiring shall indicate type of control or alarm, size of wire and origin and termination.
CC.
Tags shall be Thomas Betts Co., Ideal Industries, wire-marker dispenser type, self laminated wire markers.
DD.
Lubrication:
EE.
Wire lubricating compound shall be suitable for the wire insulation and conduit with which it is used, and shall not harden or become adhesive. Lubricating compound shall be Ideal Industries
Yellow 77 Type, or approved equal. Lubricating compound shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems.
FF.
Inspection:
GG.
Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which wire and cable are to be installed, and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
26 05 19 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
HH.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
II.
Installation:
JJ.
Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
B.
Inspect for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with single line diagram.
C.
Cable connections shall be tightened using a calibrated torque wrench.
D.
Electrical Test:
E.
Megger conductors phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for continuity and insulation tests before connection to utilization devices for the following:
1.
100 percent of feeders
2.
10 percent of branch circuits
3.
100 percent of 3-phase motor branch circuits.
F.
Verify phase rotation for all 3-phase motor circuits.
G.
Perform tests prior to connecting equipment and in presence of authorized representatives.
H.
Exercise suitable and adequate safety measures prior to, during, and after the high potential tests, including placing warning signals and preventing people and equipment from being exposed to the test voltages.
I.
Submit certified written report of test results to Architect.
J.
Correct installation of or replace cable testing below manufacturer's standards.
K.
Subsequent to wire hook-ups, energize circuit and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
26 05 19 - 6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 26 05 24
POWER, CONTROL AND ALARM WIRING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical
Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all power wiring from service equipment to distribution and utilization equipment, and control and alarm wiring for equipment and systems within the building, except as noted, in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Power, control, and alarm wiring systems (NFPA 70) for construction and installation.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work, and submit shop drawings.
1.05
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
RACEWAYS
A.
Raceways and installation components shall be as specified in Section Raceway and Installation
Components.
2.02
CONDUCTORS
A.
Conductors shall be as specified in Section Wire and Cable.
26 05 24 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.03
DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
FIT Project C1195
A.
Disconnect switches and manual motor starters shall be as specified in another Section of the
Specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine locations where power, control and alarm wiring is to be installed and notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practice to ensure that equipment complies with requirements and serves intended purpose.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to coordinate installation of wiring with other components of system.
C.
Installation shall comply with the requirements of NEC and applicable portions of NECA's
"Standard of Installations".
D.
Install distribution system for light and power.
1.
Furnish and install all necessary conduit and wire, fittings, apparatus, etc., from the service locations to each and every outlet as herein detailed, or shown on the Drawings. The entire system shall be left ready for operation.
2.
The interior distribution system, in general, shall consist of 3-Phase, 4-Wire mains at 120/208
Volts, for mains and feeders of each distribution system respectively. The load on all feeders shall be balanced as nearly as possible on the three phases.
3.
Pull and Splice Boxes a.
Pull and splice boxes shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized steel, or aluminum, reinforced, where required, and with removable covers fastened with brass machine screws. Where size of box is not indicated, it shall be of sufficient size to pull, rack and splice the conductors to be contained therein. Box dimensions shall conform to requirements of NEC (as approved for use in N.Y.C.) b.
Pull and/or splice boxes shall be accessible and located where indicated on the
Drawings or required to facilitate pulling of conductors or in raceway runs that have more than four (4) 90-degree turns. c.
Boxes shall have a prime coat of zinc chromate paint and a finish coat of gray enamel.
Surfaces to be field painted shall be finished in flat gray.
4.
Distribution of Feeders and Branch Circuits a.
Branch circuits shall be concentrated at the panelboards indicated and the circuits must be so connected that the load on each side of the system will balance within ten percent with all lamps operating.
26 05 24 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 b.
The sizes of all cables and wires and the minimum size of conduit in which they shall be pulled shall in all cases conform to NEC as a minimum requirement. c.
The general arrangement of feeders and mains is shown on the Light and Power Riser
Diagrams and associated panel Schedules on the Drawings. d.
The Contractor, in providing this installation, shall balance all loads as evenly as possible on all phases at each panel, if necessary, he shall reconnect branch circuits as required to provide equal phase balance. As-built drawings and panel schedules shall reflect circuiting as actually connected to each panel.
5.
Cable Support Boxes a.
Cable support boxes shall be installed at locations and of dimensions as required by the
NEC. These boxes shall be built of steel, or aluminum, with removable cover secured by brass machine screws and shall be stiffened with heavy angle irons. Cable supports shall be OZ type "S". Boxes must in all ways be satisfactory to the Architect and subject to his approval. Provide ground lug in box, secured by welding or brazing.
Submit shop drawings for approval.
6.
Painting a.
Panel boxes, support boxes and pull boxes not hot dip galvanized shall be given two shop coats of gray enamel both inside and out. Similarly, concealed iron work shall be given two coats of asphaltum paint. All finish painting of exposed work will be done under another Section of the Specifications.
E.
For Motor Power Wiring
1.
Run all power feeds and connections from power panels to all motor starters or control panel locations. Where shown on Drawings connect the motor starting devices for motors, supplying and installing all necessary connections between starters and control devices and motors, in conduit, and leave motors ready to start. The power supply leads to the motors from the starters or control panels shall be of the same size and number of the other leads required for the proper operation of each motor.
2.
Examine motors for presence of moisture prior to installation. Install, properly align and check rotation of motors that are not part of a completely assembled unit. Lubricate all motors according to the manufacturer's instructions prior to being placed into service.
3.
Check motor nameplates for full-load current rating and allowable temperature rise to determine overload heater elements. Install correct heater element in the corresponding starter.
4.
Furnish motor safety disconnect switches for all motors, except where such switches are specified to be furnished under other Sections, or are included in the equipment control panel.
Install all motor safety disconnect switches furnished under this Section or Section 15000 of the Specification. Provide (6) wires from starters to two speed, three-phase motors. Switches shall be as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. Install manually-operated devices, such as push-buttons and manual starters to permit convenient operation and be readily accessible.
5.
Under no circumstances install rigid conduit terminated in or fastened to motor frame or base, and connecting conduits shall not be used to support starters or control enclosures. Install flexible conduit, Anaconda "Sealtite", at all motor connections to prevent transmission of noise or vibration. Length and radius of flexible conduit shall be sufficient to permit bending of feeder cables without damaging the conductor or its insulation. Allow sufficient slack for movement of the motor over the entire slide rail length.
6.
The starters will be furnished to the site under Section 15000 and shall be received and erected under this Section. Where indicated on plan, starters shall be individually or group mounted, plumb and level, on free-standing angle iron frames, supplied under this Section.
26 05 24 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Frame shall be set as close to the motors as possible. Where indicated mounted on walls or columns, this Contractor shall install flat or angle iron supports for the starters.
7.
Provide manual motor starters for all fractional horsepower motors as shown on the Drawings, or otherwise required.
8.
Electrical contractor shall provide motor suppliers with the minimum size of motor terminal blocks required for the wiring of the motors.
F.
For Control and Alarm Wiring
1.
Make connections to the following as specified hereinafter, and indicated on the Drawings. a.
Connection of 120V supply to motorized dampers furnished under other Sections of the Specifications. b.
Shutdown wiring for HVAC systems as shown on Drawings. c.
Heating and air conditioning temperature control and data gathering panels with alarms, pilots, etc., will be furnished and installed under Section 15000 of the
Specifications. 120 Volt supply to control panels shall be furnished under this Section of the Specifications.
2.
All control conductors shall be copper, minimum #14 AWG type THN, 600 volt insulated, installed in conduit. All conductors shall be tagged with brass or aluminum tags, permanently attached, giving the system designation and terminal number, or other such designation as approved.
3.
Control wiring shall be based on schematic control diagrams shown on Drawings and/or on the description of control requirements in other Division of these Specifications describing the
Mechanical Work, or on control diagrams submitted by Equipment Manufacturers.
4.
Actual wiring between equipment and devices shall be done from point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the terminal connections on each piece of equipment. Obtain the individual equipment wiring diagrams from the Contractor who supplies the mechanical systems and equipment to be wired, and prepare neat point-to-point diagrams showing the actual wire and conduit and interconnections between the various equipment and control devices. After installation, correct these diagrams to show the "As-Installed" conditions for the Record.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of power, control and alarm wiring, and after associated systems have been energized, test power, control and alarm wiring to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Field correct or replace defective wiring, and retest.
END OF SECTION 26 05 24
26 05 24 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical
Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all grounding in accordance with
Drawings and Specifications and as required for a complete system.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
"Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the type of equipment required for the application, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
Refer to Approved Manufacturers in this Section.
B.
Provide equipment whose performance under specified conditions is certified by the manufacturer and comply with applicable publications of NFPA and UL.
C.
Grounding shall comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) for construction and installation.
D.
For patient care area electrical power systems, grounding shall conform to Article 517 of the NEC.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings. Shop drawings shall include manufacturer's catalog cuts of ground wire.
1.05
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GROUNDING
A.
Ground clamps shall be bronze, solderless type with bronze screws suitable for receiving required or specified conductors.
26 05 26 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Grounding conductors shall be UL and NEC approved types, copper, with insulation color identified green, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings, or specified.
C.
Ground bushings shall be hot-dipped galvanized fitting with a molded phenolic fitting and shall have a tin-plated copper lay-in-lug 150
C insulation on phenolic fitting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine locations where grounding is to be installed and notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.
B.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
The complete electrical installation shall be permanently and effectively grounded ahead (street side) of the cold water meter in accordance with all code requirements, whether or not such connections are specifically shown or specified. Measured resistance to ground shall be 5 ohms, maximum.
B.
Parts of the electrical installation to be grounded shall include, but not be limited to, the following: underground distribution, outdoor substation service equipment, electric service system neutral, raceway system for normal and emergency light and power distribution systems, switchgear housings, cabinets, housings and neutrals of transformers, motor frames, housings of ALL communications, alarm, and control panels and associated devices and conduits, lighting fixtures, lightning protection system, busway enclosures, motor control centers, individual starters, convenience power receptacles, wall lighting switches, and other non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. The interconnecting of the service ground, system neutral, and equipment ground conductors shall be made within the service equipment assembly.
C.
All copper bars for grounding shall be medium hard drawn. After installation, the copper bar shall be painted with one coat of an approved lacquer.
D.
Ground conductors shall be of sizes and material in accordance with the requirements of the National
Electrical Code. Cable for grounding connections shall be bare in accordance with the latest revisions of ASTM Designations B3 and B8. All open bare grounding cable shall be secured in place with cast one hole malleable clamps and clamp backs, and 3 inch bolts.
E.
Ground wires shall be continuous without splices. There shall be no soldered joints in any ground connection. Connectors, clamps, etc. shall be solderless type.
F.
Unless otherwise shown or required, conduit shall provide grounding for motors and electrical equipment.
G.
Ground interrupted metallic raceways with ground conductors connected to metallic raceway at each end.
H.
Bond all conductive piping systems in the buildings to the electrical system ground. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the water pipe or service equipment ground bay.
26 05 26 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
FIT Project C1195
A.
Upon completion of grounding system, test system for continuity and resistance to demonstrate compliance with requirements and submit certification to Architect that material and installation has been properly installed.
B.
Inspect all connections prior to concealing same.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
26 05 26 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.
C.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
1.05
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Steel slotted support systems.
2.
Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1.
Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2.
Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
26 05 29 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
3.
Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
4.
Equipment supports.
1.06
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Welding certificates.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.08
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.
Allied Tube & Conduit. b.
Cooper B-Line, Inc. c.
ERICO International Corporation. d.
GS Metals Corp. e.
Thomas & Betts Corporation. f.
Unistrut; Atkore International. g.
Wesanco, Inc.
2.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-
4.
3.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.
4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-
4.
5.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
26 05 29 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
D.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Hilti, Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
2.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti, Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.
5.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.02
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
26 05 29 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted [or other ]support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.
D.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-
1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.02
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and
RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
6.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts, spring-tension clamps.
7.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
E.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
26 05 29 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.03
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
FIT Project C1195
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.04
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).
B.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099000 "Painting and Finishing" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
26 05 29 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.
C.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
1.05
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Steel slotted support systems.
2.
Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1.
Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2.
Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
26 05 29 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
3.
Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
4.
Equipment supports.
1.06
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Welding certificates.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.08
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.
Allied Tube & Conduit. b.
Cooper B-Line, Inc. c.
ERICO International Corporation. d.
GS Metals Corp. e.
Thomas & Betts Corporation. f.
Unistrut; Atkore International. g.
Wesanco, Inc.
2.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-
4.
3.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.
4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-
4.
5.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
26 05 29 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
D.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Hilti, Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
2.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti, Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.
5.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.02
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.
26 05 29 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FIT Project C1195
3.01
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted [or other ]support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.
D.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-
1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.02
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and
RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
6.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts, spring-tension clamps.
7.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
26 05 29 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
8.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
E.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.03
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.04
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).
B.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099000 "Painting and Finishing" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
26 05 29 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAYS AND INSTALLATION COMPONENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical
Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The requirements of this section apply to raceway work required for the protection of electrical conductors. Raceways are required for all wiring unless otherwise specified.
B.
The work includes the furnishing and installation of completely coordinated, effectively grounded raceway systems complete with boxes, fittings, flexible connections to vibrating equipment and other accessories, as required. Conduit or tubing sizes referred to in the Specifications and on the
Drawings are nominal trade sizes.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers - Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of raceways and accessories of the types required and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
Refer to PART 2 of this section for "Approved Manufacturers".
B.
Raceways and installation components shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with applicable sections of National Electrical Manufacturers Association standards.
C.
All outdoor installations shall be weatherproof.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
B.
Submit a list of proposed manufacturers for all raceways and components.
1.05
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
26 05 33 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
Raceways
1.
Metallic: a.
Wheatland Tube Co. b.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. c.
Triangle PWC, Inc.
2.
Wireways: a.
Panduit Corp. b.
Square "D" Company c.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
B.
Raceway Fittings
1.
O.Z. Electrical Mfg. Co., Inc.
2.
Appleton Electric Co.
3.
Crouse-Hinds Co.
4.
Thomas and Betts Co.
C.
Boxes - Steel
1.
O.Z./Gedney
2.
Appleton
3.
Raco Inc.
4.
Russell & Stoll Co.
5.
Steel City Electric Co.
D.
Boxes - Cast Iron
1.
O.Z./Gedney
2.
Appleton
3.
Crouse-Hinds Co.
FIT Project C1195
2.02
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A.
Raceways:
1.
All conduit shall be : inch minimum.
2.
Rigid steel conduit: Shall be full weight steel pipe, hot dipped galvanized inside and outside, threaded.
3.
Intermediate metal conduit: Shall be intermediate steel pipe, hot dipped galvanized, threaded.
4.
Electric metallic tubing (EMT) shall be steel thin wall pipe, galvanized, threadless.
5.
Flexible steel conduit (Greenfield): Shall be continuous single strip, galvanized.
6.
Liquid-tight, flexible steel conduit: Shall be zinc coated and consist of flexible galvanized steel tubing over which is extruded a liquid-tight jacket of polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
7.
Wiring troughs: Refer to Section 26 27 26, 2.2 B.
8.
Surface metal raceways: Shall consist of base and snap-on type cover sections, of nominal material thickness .040" minimum. Shall be steel, baked enamel finish, and shall be provided with all the required fittings. Sizes as noted on the Drawings.
B.
Conduit Fittings:
26 05 33 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.
Thread compounds shall be UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through conduit.
2.
Metallic conduit fittings shall be corrosion resistant.
3.
Bushings shall be of the metallic insulated type.
4.
For weatherproof and dustight installations provide liquid-tight fittings with sealing rings and insulated throat.
5.
Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings: a.
Fittings shall be standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows. b.
Sealing fittings shall be of the threaded cast iron type. Sealing fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. In concealed work, each fitting shall be installed in a flush steel box with blank coverplate having the same finish as that of other electrical plates in the room.
6.
Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a.
Couplings and connectors shall be steel body-malleable iron nut, "concrete tight".
They shall be compression type, afford raintight integrity, and provide positive ground.
Connectors shall have insulated throats.
7.
Flexible steel conduit (Greenfield) fittings: a.
Shall be pressure clamp type with insulated throat and UL approved for ground continuity.
8.
Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings: a.
Shall be of a type incorporating a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.
Shall be UL approved for ground continuity.
2.03
INSTALLATION COMPONENTS
A.
Sleeves:
1.
Provide and assume responsibility for locating and maintaining in proper position all sleeves required for the work. See Section 01 31 46 - General Requirements for Mechanical and
Electrical Work for sleeves specification.
2.
For raceways through sleeves, provide seals of compression neoprene or O.Z. Type WSC compound on both sides.
3.
For cables in raceways through sleeves, provide seals similar to O.Z. Type WSC compound or
Type C series terminators.
4.
Through floors, exterior masonry walls and roof sleeves shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. For other areas, sleeves shall be 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel.
B.
Fire sealants:
1.
Openings through floors and walls in which cables, conduits, or pipe pass shall be sealed by
U.L. classified smoke and fire stop fittings, and have an hourly rating equal to the fire rating of the floor or wall. Fittings shall be similar to O.Z. Gedney Type "CFS" or CAFS".
2.
Penetrations through fire-rated floors in which wiring for floor service outlets in routed shall be sealed by U.L. classified smoke and fire-stop fittings, and shall have an hourly rating equal to the floor rating. Fittings shall be similar to O.Z. Gedney Type "PTFS".
2.04
SUPPORTS
A.
Conduit Supports:
1.
All parts and hardware shall be zinc-coated or have equivalent corrosion protection.
26 05 33 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.
Individual conduit hangers, shall be designed for the purpose, have pre-assembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving hanger rod.
3.
Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers shall be not less than 1 2 " by 1 2 ", 12 gauge steel, cold formed, lipped channels. Hanger rods shall be not less than d " diameter steel.
4.
Solid masonry and concrete anchors shall be a type approved for the purpose.
B.
Fasteners:
1.
Furnish all fasteners and hardware compatible with the materials and methods required for attachment of supporting devices. a.
Slotted-Type Concrete Inserts: Galvanized pressured steel plate complying with
ASTM A 283; box-typed welded construction with slot designed to receive steel nut and with knockout cover; hot-dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM A 386. b.
Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields complying with Federal Specification
FF-S-325, as follows:
1) Furnish lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts 3 " and smaller;
2) head-out embedded nut type, single unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class 1.
Furnish lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts larger than 3 " in size; head-out embedded nut type, multiple unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class
2.
3)
4)
Furnish bolt anchor expansion shields for lag bolts, zinc alloy, long-shield anchors class, Group II, Type 1, Class 1.
Furnish bolt anchor expansion shields for bolts, closed-end bottom bearing class, Group II, Type 2, Class I. c.
Toggle Bolts:
1) Tumble-wing type, complying with Federal Specification FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. d.
Nuts, Bolts, Screws, Washers:
1) General: Furnish zinc-coated fasteners, with galvanized complying with
ASTM A 153 for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Furnish fasteners for the type, grade and class required for the particular installation.
2)
3)
Standard Nuts and Bolts: Regular hexagon head type, complying with
ASTM A 307, Grade A.
Lag Bolts: Square head type, complying with Federal Specification
FF-B-561.
4)
5)
Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, complying with Federal
Specification FF-S-92.
Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, complying with Federal Specification
FF-W-92.
6)
7)
Plain Washers: Round, general assembly grade carbon steel, complying with
Federal Specification FF-W-92.
Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, complying with Federal
Specification FF-W-84.
C.
"C" Beam Clamps:
1.
For 1" Conduit Maximum: Caddy Fastener Div./Erico Products Inc. BC-8P and BC-8PSM
Series, HIT Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc. CH Series.
2.
For 3" Conduit Maximum: Gedney Electric Co. IS-500 Series bean clamp with H50WB
Series hangers; Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div. 500 Series hanger; Appleton Electric Co. BH-500
Series beam clamp with H50W/B Series hanger.
26 05 33 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
3.
For 4" Conduit Maximum: Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div. E-231 beam clamp and E-234 anchor clip and C-149 Series lay-in hanger; Unistrut Corp. P2676 beam clamp and P-1659 Series anchor clip with J1-205 Series lay-in hanger.
4.
For Threaded Rods (100 lbs. load max.): Caddy Fastner Div./ Erico Products Inc. Cat. No.
BC-4A; HIT Spring Steel Fasteners Inc. master clamp MC.
5.
For Threaded Rods (200 lbs. load max.): Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland Ross Corp. 500
Series; Gedney Electric Co. IS-500 Series; Appleton Electric Co. BH-500 Series.
6.
For Threaded Rods (300 lbs. load max.): Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland Ross Corp.
E-231 beam clamp and E-234 anchor clip; Unistrut Corp. P2676 beam clamp and P-1659A
Series anchor clip.
D.
Pipe Straps:
1.
Two hole steel conduit straps with Galv-Krom finish, Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland Ross
Corp. C-144 or C-280 Series.
E.
Pipe Clamps:
1.
One hole malleable iron type clamps, Gedney Electric Co., 14-50 Series; Kindorf Elec. Prod.
Div./ Midland Ross Corp. HS-400 Series.
F.
Deck Clamps:
1.
Caddy Fasteners Div./Erico Products Inc. DH-4-T1 Series. HIT Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc.
RD Series.
G.
Fixture Stud and Strap:
1.
Steel Electrical Products Div. FE-431; Gedney Electric Co. SL-134.
H.
Channel Support System and Accessories:
1.
Furnish 12 gauge galvanized steel channel and accessories as manufactured by: a.
Kindorf Elec. Prod. Div./Midland Ross Corp.; B-9000 (1 2 " x 1 2 "), B-901 (1 2 " x
1 f "), B-902 (1 2 " x 3"). b.
Unistrut Corp.; P-3000 (1 d " x 1 e "), P-5500 (1 e " x 27/16"), P-5500 (1 e " x 3 3 "). c.
B-Line Division - The Brinkley Co.; B-22 (1 e " x 1 e "), B-12 (1 e " x 27/16"), B-11
(1 e " x 3 3 "). d.
Versabar Corp.; VA-1 (1 e " x 1 e "), VA-3 (1 e " x 2 2 ").
I.
Support Fittings for Industrial Fluorescent Fixtures on Exposed Conduit System:
1.
Ball Hanger: Crouse-Hinds Co. ALC, Appleton Electric Co. ALL Series.
2.
Flexible Fixture Hanger: Crouse-Hinds Co. UNJ115, Appleton Electric Co. UNJ-50 or
UNJ-75, Oz Gedney ECHF-50 or ECHF-75.
3.
Flexible (Hook Type) Fixture Hanger: Crouse-Hinds Co. UNH-1, Appleton Electric Co.
FHHF.
4.
Eyelet: Steel City Electrical Products Div. H-263, Unistrut Corp. M2250.
5.
Eyelet with Stud: Steel City Electrical Products Div. H262, Unistrut M2250.
6.
Conduit Hook: Crouse-Hinds Co. UNH-13, Appleton Electric Co. FHSN.
2.05
BOXES
A.
Outlet boxes:
1.
Outlet boxes for concealed work shall be galvanized steel, 4 in. square or octagonal, or as required by construction, devices or wiring, and shall conform to UL's "Standard for Outlet
26 05 33 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Boxes and Fittings." Outlet boxes shall be provided with a galvanized steel cover or extension ring depth as required. As a minimum, boxes shall be of the following depths and as described for specific applications hereinafter:
Above ceiling 1 2 " deep
In ceiling or slab
In wall for fixture
3" deep.
2 : " deep.
1 2 " deep. In wall for receptacles and switches with raised covers and fixtures studs where required. Through-the-wall type are not permitted
Receiving 1 3 " conduit 2 2 " deep min.
2.
Ceiling fixture outlet boxes, except as noted, shall be 4" octagonal and 1 e " deep and with d " fixture stud. Where cast in slab, boxes shall be open back concrete type.
3.
Wall bracket outlets shall be 4" square and 1 e " deep with cover having 2 f " round openings and except for lampholders shall be furnished with fixture stud.
4.
All outlet boxes for concealed convenience receptacles or local switches shall be 4" square and 1 e " deep with regular deep switch extension cover, except where installed on columns they shall be of sufficient depth so that conduits may be installed into these boxes in back of fireproofing. Outlet boxes for gang receptacles and switches shall suit space conditions.
5.
Outlet boxes for exposed work shall be galvanized cast iron or aluminum with threaded hubs.
Except as otherwise required by construction, devices or wiring, the outlet boxes shall be 4 in. round x 2 in. deep for mounting on ceilings and 4 in. square x 2 in. deep for mounting on walls.
6.
Boxes shall be of the cast type for switches and receptacles when installed on the exterior of the project. Such boxes shall be aluminum or malleable iron of the threaded hub type, with covers without projecting edges or corners and with openings suitable for the devices to be contained therein. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or anodized and shall be gasketed.
7.
Outlet boxes located outdoors and damp locations shall be weatherproof.
8.
Outlet boxes without fixture or device, shall have blank cover.
9.
Offset back-to-back outlets, shall have minimum 6 in. separation between them.
10.
Extension rings shall be provided as required to suit various conditions.
11.
Grounding screw and cable wiring connector shall be provided as required by wiring method.
12.
Boxes for use with surface mounted raceways shall be of the same construction and manufacture as the raceway.
13.
Except where special outlets are required, wall outlets for signaling systems shall be 4" square with single gang raised cover and bushed plate.
14.
Junction outlets shall be the same as bracket outlets but without stud, furnished with covers to suit each condition and as directed. Where number of conductors exceed capacity of standard box, provide special size box.
B.
Junction and Pull Boxes:
1.
Junction and pull boxes shall be made of galvanized sheet steel and with screw-on covers, except as noted, and will include insulated supports for cables.
2.
Provide junction and/or pull boxes as noted or as required. all junction and pull boxes shall be accessible.
3.
Junction and pull boxes located outdoors and in damp locations shall be galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs and gaskets.
26 05 33 - 6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FIT Project C1195
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine locations where raceways and installation components are to be installed, determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Raceways:
1.
Install raceways in accordance with applicable requirements of NEC and National Electrical
Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices.
2.
The routing and location of conduit runs are generally not dimensional on the drawings but shall be determined in the field to suit the locations of equipment, to conform to structural features and to avoid interferences. Where exposed conduits are dimensional on drawings, they shall be installed to a tolerance of 2 ". Coordinate with equipment configuration and exact location prior to connection.
3.
Support by means of ceiling trapeze, strap hangers, or wall brackets, structural steel angles or channels. Secure raceways to supports with pipe straps or U-bolts. Spacing of support shall be as per NEC. Provide U-bolts at each floor level for riser raceways and connect to acceptable supports.
4.
Mount supports to structure with toggle bolts on hollow masonry, expansion shields or inserts on concrete and brick, machine screws on metal, wood screws on wood.
5.
Allow a 6 in. minimum separation between raceways and steam and hot water pipes. Provide approved thermal insulation for electric lines where this separation cannot be maintained.
6.
Keep raceways clear of motor foundations and from underside of boilers. Also, install raceway so that they will not obstruct headroom, doorways, or walkways.
7.
For outlets located in hung ceilings, run raceways in hung ceilings and connect to main ceiling support channels.
8.
Run raceways concealed, except as noted. Exposed raceways shall be run parallel with or at right angles to walls. In walls, run raceways vertically only.
9.
Mechanically join all metal raceways, enclosures and junction boxes to form a continuous electrical conductor. Connect all electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets so as to provide effective electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly. Maintain grounding continuity of interrupted metallic raceways with ground conductor, sized in accordance with the NEC.
10.
Provide long radius bends for empty raceway system where required to satisfy the system cabling requirements.
11.
Install complete conduit runs before pulling in wire or cable. Install raceways so that required conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain to raceway or cable. Where raceway size is not indicated, follow applicable code.
12.
Do not cross pipe shafts or ventilation duct openings. Route raceway to avoid present or future openings in floor, wall or ceiling construction, when so indicated on the drawings.
13.
Keep end of raceways plugged or capped during construction.
14.
For empty raceways over 10 ft. long, provide fish or pull wire. Pull wire shall consist of nylon or polypropylene cord.
15.
Damaged or deformed raceway shall be removed and replaced.
26 05 33 - 7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
16.
Branch circuit conduits shall not be supported by lighting fixtures, piping, or air conditioning ducts.
17.
Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities to avoid damaging them.
18.
Permitted Uses: a.
Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):
1) RGS shall be used, in wet or damp locations, for exposed runs on the exterior of the building, in mechanical equipment spaces, hazardous locations, for fire alarm, smoke detection, sprinkler alarm systems, where subject to physical damage, and as noted. b.
Intermediate metal conduit (IMC):
1) IMC may be used in place of RGS in dry locations only. c.
Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT):
1) EMT shall be used for branch circuit wiring only, installed in dry locations
2)
(hung ceilings, hollow block walls and furred spaces).
EMT shall be used for feeders and subfeeders installed in dry locations, such as hung ceilings, riser shafts, where rising through electric closets and furred spaces.
3) EMT shall be used for low voltage system wiring, (communications, signaling, alarm, remote controls, etc.) installed in dry locations (hung ceilings,
4) hollow block walls, riser shafts, and furred spaces).
EMT shall be used for Fire Alarm Systems d.
Flexible steel conduit:
1) Flexible steel conduit "Greenfield", shall be used for the following applications: for short connections where rigid conduit or tubing is impracticable, from outlet box to recessed lighting fixture with minimum length
2) of 4 ft. and a maximum length of 6 ft., and for final connections to vibrating equipment other than motors and transformers in dry locations only.
For final connections to motor terminal boxes, transformers and other vibrating equipment, the flexible steel conduit shall have polyvinyl sheathing
"Sealtite" and a ground conductor. The minimum length of the flexible conduit shall be 18 in. with slack. Connect the ground conductor to the enclosure or raceway at each end.
19.
Provide expansion-deflection fittings with bonding jumper at expansion joints and on length of runs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
20.
For Wet, Damp, or Moist Locations: a.
Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapors, where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as refrigerated spaces, air conditioned spaces, or similar areas.
B.
Sleeves:
1.
Sleeves shall be provided in accordance with the following guidelines: a.
Set required sleeves and inserts in place during progress of construction to avoid cutting of completed work. b.
Provide sleeves for raceway passing through floors and foundations. Determine exact location of sleeves in field to avoid interference with structural members or equipment of other trades.
C.
Fire-Stops:
26 05 33 - 8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.
Where wiring, conduits, cable trays, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, or floors, install an approved fire-stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases. Firestop material (Heat activated putty and a high temperature fiber material) shall be packed tight and shall completely fill clearances between raceways and openings. It shall be applied concurrently with the installation of the wiring.
The fire stop fittings shall have a U.L. classified hourly rating equal to the fire rating of the floor or wall.
2.
Floor, exterior wall, and roof seals shall also be made watertight. Mineral wood, oakum, grout or duct seal stuffed into or around penetrations shall not be used.
D.
Outlet Boxes:
1.
Set boxes square and true with the building finish. Boxes shall be secured to the building structure by adjustable strap irons.
2.
In locating outlets, allow for overhead pipes, ducts, and variations in arrangement, thickness in finish, window trim and other architectural construction details. Correct any inaccuracy resulting from failure to do so without any additional expense to the Owner.
3.
Close all unused openings in outlet boxes with knockout closers manufactured for this purpose. Provide blank plates on outlet boxes in which no device is installed or device installed does not provide a suitable cover.
4.
Securely fasten exposed outlet boxes by attaching to permanent inserts or lead anchors with machine screws. Adequately support all boxes during construction to prevent movement.
E.
Panelboard, Junction and Pull Boxes:
1.
Panelboard, junction and pull boxes shall be located clear of other trades equipment, accessible, supported from the building structure, and independent of the conduits.
2.
Conceal junction and pull boxes in finished spaces.
3.
Coordinate size of motor terminal boxes with motor branch circuit conduit and wiring.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
26 05 33 - 9
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 26 05 44
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
2.
Sleeve-seal systems.
3.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
4.
Grout.
5.
Silicone sealants.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 078413 "Firestopping/Smoke Seals" for penetration firestopping installed in fireresistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.
1.03
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
2.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SLEEVES
A.
Wall Sleeves:
1.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.
2.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
26 05 44 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1.
Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
2.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
FIT Project C1195 a.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). b.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
2.02
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b.
CALPICO, Inc. c.
Metraflex Company (The). d.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e.
Proco Products, Inc.
2.
Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
4.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.03
GROUT
A.
Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated walls or floors.
B.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit
Floors and Walls:
1.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
26 05 44 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 a.
Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." b.
Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.
2.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
3.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
4.
Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
5.
Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
D.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1.
Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
2.
Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
E.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.02
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.
B.
Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.03
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 26 05 44
26 05 44 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Identification for raceways.
2.
Identification of power and control cables.
3.
Identification for conductors.
4.
Warning labels and signs.
5.
Instruction signs.
6.
Equipment identification labels.
7.
Miscellaneous identification products.
1.03
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C.
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
1.05
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
26 05 53 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1.
Black letters on an orange field.
2.
Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C.
Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
2.02
ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.
B.
Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1.
Black letters on an orange field.
2.
Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.03
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.
B.
Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Write-on, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemicalresistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
2.04
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
26 05 53 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
C.
Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.
D.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
2.
Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.
2.05
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.
2.06
INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1.
Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
B.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
2.07
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A.
Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
2.08
CABLE TIES
A.
General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7
MPa).
3.
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
4.
Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
26 05 53 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.09
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
FIT Project C1195
A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E.
Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.
F.
System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at
50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.
G.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1.
Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
2.
In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
H.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.
3.02
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. Install labels at [10-foot (3-m)] [30-foot (10-m)] maximum intervals.
B.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1.
Emergency Power.
2.
Power.
26 05 53 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
3.
UPS.
FIT Project C1195
C.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction boxes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a.
Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b.
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue. c.
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
D.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.
E.
Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.
F.
Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor designation.
G.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.
H.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.
1.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
I.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Selfadhesive warning labels.
1.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a.
Power transfer switches. b.
Controls with external control power connections.
26 05 53 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
K.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
L.
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.
M.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions: a.
Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. b.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d.
Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
2.
Equipment to Be Labeled: a.
Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d.
Emergency system boxes and enclosures. e.
Enclosed switches. f.
Enclosed circuit breakers. g.
Enclosed controllers. h.
Variable-speed controllers. i.
Push-button stations. j.
Power transfer equipment. k.
Contactors. l.
Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. m.
Battery racks. n.
Power-generating units. o.
Monitoring and control equipment. p.
UPS equipment.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
26 05 53 - 6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Distribution panelboards.
2.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
3.
Electronic-grade panelboards.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.04
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5.
Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
7.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
1.05
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B.
Field Quality-Control Reports:
1.
Test procedures used.
26 24 16 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.
Test results that comply with requirements.
3.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.
C.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.
1.06
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
2.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.
1.07
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
2.
Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:
Two spares for each panelboard.
3.
Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
4.
Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
1.08
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
26 24 16 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
1.09
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
FIT Project C1195
A.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.10
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
1.
Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a.
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding [minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C)] [23 deg F (minus 5 deg C)] to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
B.
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1.
Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2.
Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
C.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written permission.
3.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.11
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.
1.12
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
26 24 16 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
FIT Project C1195
2.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A.
Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.
1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. c.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive
Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
2.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
3.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.
4.
Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
5.
Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
6.
Finishes: a.
Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b.
Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c.
Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components.
7.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.
B.
Incoming Mains Location: Top.
C.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.
D.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
3.
Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
E.
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
F.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
G.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.
26 24 16 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
H.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.02
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2.03
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings of Easton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
2.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C.
Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1.
For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D.
Mains: Fused switch.
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Bolt-on circuit breakers.
F.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.
2.04
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings by Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
2.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C.
Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
E.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
26 24 16 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
F.
Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
2.05
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
4.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b.
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d.
Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. e.
Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position. f.
Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
C.
Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
1.
Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 262813
"Fuses."
2.
Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.
3.
Auxiliary Contacts: [One] [Two] normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with switch handle operation.
2.06
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B.
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.
26 24 16 - 6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FIT Project C1195
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
C.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems."
D.
Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
F.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1.
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
G.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
H.
Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
I.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.
J.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.03
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads[ after balancing panelboard loads]; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
26 24 16 - 7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D.
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
D.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
E.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c.
Instruments and Equipment:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
F.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.05
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
26 24 16 - 8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
FIT Project C1195
C.
Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1.
Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2.
Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3.
After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.
4.
Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
3.06
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
26 24 16 - 9
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES AND INSTALLATION COMPONENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical Work.
B.
Section 01 34 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.
1.
Generally, the location of devices and outlet boxes in finished rooms or spaces shall be where indicated.
2.
Unless otherwise noted, the following dimensions from finish floor to center of outlet shall be established. a.
Receptacle outlets in mechanical spaces 3'-6" b.
Wall switch outlet 3'-6" c.
Motor controllers d.
Safety and disconnect switches e.
Panelboards (lighting and power)
5'-0"
5'-0"
6'-6" above finished floor to top
D.
In centering outlets allow for overhead pipes, ducts, etc., and for variation in thickness of fireproofing and plastering. Allowances shall also be made for window trims, paneling, counters, casework, etc. Any inaccuracies resulting from failure to comply with the above must be corrected without additional expense to the Owner.
E.
Receptacles listed in this Section of the Specification shall be of the type indicated, or approved equal to the Manufacturers listed. Where furnished under this Section of the Specification, provide matching plugs for each receptacle.
F.
Where indicated, switch and receptacle shall be combined.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and made ready for operation by the Owner, all wiring devices in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
"Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices and installation components, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Provide wiring devices and installation components produced by a manufacturer listed as an
Approved Manufacturer in this Section.
C.
Provide equipment whose performance, under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer.
26 27 26 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
1.04
SUBMITTALS
FIT Project C1195
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings. Shop drawings shall include manual motor starters, multi-outlet systems, wireways, floor boxes, receptacles and local wall switches.
1.05
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wiring Devices
1.
Leviton
2.
Harvey Hubbell Incorporated
3.
Bryant Electric Co.
B.
Miscellaneous Installation Components
1.
Refer to Respective Articles.
2.02
WIRING DEVICES
A.
Local Wall Switches:
1.
Switches shall be heavy duty, toggle, quiet type, fully enclosed in composition cases, with grounding screw.
2.
Switches shall be rated 20 amp, 120/277 volt, AC.
3.
Switches shall be as indicated below, or approved equal: a.
Single Pole: Hubbell No. HBL 1221 Leviton 1221-2
4.
Key switches of equivalent rating and grade to above switches shall be provided where indicated on Drawings.
5.
Where it is not possible to set the switch box flush with the wall, furnish raised edge plates.
6.
Where more than one switch is being installed, provide multiple gang switch plates for number of switches as indicated.
7.
Gang switch plates for five or more switches (or receptacles) shall be engraved with titles as directed by Architect.
B.
Receptacles:
1.
Receptacles shall be the grounding type, (except as otherwise noted) composition base, meeting NEMA standards, publication WD-1-1971.
2.
Where it is not possible to set the outlet box flush into the wall, furnish raised edge plates.
Convenience receptacle shall be mounted with ground pole down.
3.
Receptacles shall be as indicated below or approved equal: a.
Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 Volts, 2-Pole, 3-Wire, U ground slot type.
1) 20 Amp. Hubbell No. 5362 Leviton 5362A (20 Amp circuits). b.
Single Receptacles: 20 Amp, 125 Volts, 2-Pole, 3-Wire, twist-lock type, Hubbell No.
2310, Leviton 23101.
26 27 26 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 c.
Outdoor Receptacles: 20 Amps, 125 Volts, 2-Pole, 3-Wire, U ground slot type, duplex convenience receptacle, with weatherproof cover, Leviton 4926. d.
Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles, 20 Amp.: Hubbell No. GO-5362.
C.
Pilot lights shall be General Electric #4217, Bryant #427 or approved equal receptacle, with bull's eye set in same plate as switch.
D.
Switch, Receptacle, and Signaling Outlet Plates:
1.
Plates shall be stainless steel, chrome finish Type 302, .035" thick, or beveled metal stainless steel Type 302, or smooth thermoplastic of (ivory) (white) (brown) color finish, or smooth metal .040" thick brass, or beveled metal .040" thick brushed brass.
2.
Surface mounted wiring devices and blank outlet plates shall be cadmium plated. Interior outlet plates shall be pressed steel. Outlets exposed to weather or corrosive conditions shall be of the cast-metal type.
3.
Plates for weatherproof receptacles shall consist of cast-aluminum gasketed plate with spring-loaded lift covers providing access to the outlet. Lift cover to correspond to number of outlets to be gasketed. Plates for weatherproof switches shall consist of a cast plate with flexible bubble for activating a push type switch. Plates shall be for corrosion-resistant devices, as manufactured by Hubbell, Inc., or approved equal.
2.03
INSTALLATION COMPONENTS
A.
Wiring Troughs:
1.
Wiring troughs shall be 4" x 4" or 6" x 6", brake-formed of code gauge (No. 16 gauge minimum) steel, furnished in standard 10-foot sections with knockouts, as required. Wiring troughs shall be of the screw-on cover type and shall have a high grade enamel finish baked on a chemically-cleaned and zinc-phosphatized surface providing maximum resistance to corrosion. Wiring troughs for use in radiology rooms shall be of type and configuration shown on Drawings.
2.
Wiring troughs shall be furnished with all the required components, such as square junction boxes, 90-degree elbows, T-shaped pull boxes, crossover pull boxes, box-connecting couplings, fittings and screw-on cover plates. Lengths of individual sections shall be provided in accordance with installation requirements.
B.
Manual Motor Starters:
1.
Manual motor starters shall be horsepower rated, and voltage rated for the motor load.
2.
The operating mechanism shall be a snap switch with one pole per phase.
3.
Overload protection shall be provided with one thermal overload relay with replaceable tripping element for each pole, manually reset from the operating handle. The heater for each tripping element shall be coordinated with the nameplate rating of the motor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where wiring devices and installation components are to be installed, determine space conditions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
26 27 26 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring devices and installation components where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices and installation components.
C.
Installation shall comply with the requirements of NEC and NECA, "Standard of Installation".
D.
Install devices only after wiring is completed.
E.
Install receptacles and switches only in electrical outlet boxes which are clean, free from debris, excess building materials, etc.
F.
At time of completion, replace items which have been damaged, including those burned and scorched by faulty plugs.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of wiring devices and installation components, and after connection to power source, test wiring devices and installation components to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
B.
Test wiring devices and installation components to ensure electrical continuity of grounding connections.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
26 27 26 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 26 28 13
600 VOLT FUSES
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical
Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, the fuses as shown in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
"Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fuses whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Provide fuses produced by a manufacturer listed as an Approved Manufacturer in this Section.
C.
Provide equipment whose performance under specified conditions is certified by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings.
1.05
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46, Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work. Shop drawings shall include cuts and time current curves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
600 Volt Fuses
1.
Bussmann
2.
Cefco
3.
Shawmut
26 28 13 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.02
600 VOLT FUSES
FIT Project C1195
A.
All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is to be energized. All fuses shall have a 200,000 ampere RMS symmetrical interrupting rating unless specified otherwise. Fuse symbols in parentheses are those of Bussmann.
B.
Fuses: 601 to 6000 Amperes shall be UL Class L (KRP-C), with time-delay characteristics of 10 seconds or more, at 500% of current rating.
C.
Fuses: Up to 600 Amperes shall be UL Class "J",(JKS fast acting), for non-inductive loads and UL
Class "J" (LPJ time delay) for inductive loads.
D.
Spare Fuses:
1.
A complete set of spare fuses shall be purchased at the same time the initial fuses are purchased. Spare fuses shall consist of a standard carton for 0 to 60 amperes rating. For above 60 amperes rating provide 10% of each type and rating, or a set of three, whichever is greater.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine location where fuses are to be installed and notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fuses where shown or required, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.
B.
Installation shall comply with the requirements of NEC and applicable portions of NECA's
"Standard of Installation".
C.
Contractor shall install Class R fuse rejection kits on all heavy duty safety switches not already fitted for Class R fuses.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of fuses, test and inspect system to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Final tests and inspections shall be made prior to energization of the equipment. This shall include a thorough cleaning, tightening and review of all electrical connections and inspection of all grounding conductors.
END OF SECTION 26 28 13
26 28 13 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 26 28 16
SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the Work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and Electrical
Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes the providing of all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all safety and disconnect switches
(fused and unfused) in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
"Manufacturers" - Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the type of equipment required for the application, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Safety and disconnect switches shall comply with applicable standards of NEMA and shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Switches shall be approved for service where required, (and approved for use in New York City in accordance with NYCEC).
C.
Comply with NEC (NFPA 70) with New York City amendments for construction and installation of safety and disconnect switches.
D.
Provide safety and disconnect switches produced by a manufacturer listed as an Approved
Manufacturer in this Section.
E.
Provide equipment whose performance under specified conditions is certified by the Manufacturer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work and submit shop drawings. Shop drawings shall include switch dimensions, ratings and NEMA enclosure types.
1.05
GUARANTEE
A.
Refer to Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work.
26 28 16 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
Safety and Disconnect Switches
1.
Square D
2.
Westinghouse
3.
General Electric
2.02
SWITCH INTERIOR
FIT Project C1195
A.
All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open. Switches shall have removable arc suppressors, where necessary to permit easy access to line-side lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for aluminum and/or copper cables and front removable. All current carrying parts shall be plated. 30A thru 100A switches shall have provisions for field installed fuse pullers. Switches shall include solid neutral where required.
2.03
SWITCH MECHANISM
A.
Switches shall have a quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism which shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Switches shall have a defeatable dual cover interlock to prevent inadvertent opening of the switch door in the ON position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open. Handle position shall indicate if switch is ON or OFF. Handle shall have provision for padlock.
2.04
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 enclosure except as otherwise noted or required with multiple knockouts on all sides and back, hinged door, and cover interlock which prevents door from opening when switch is in ON position. Enclosure shall have provisions for positive padlocking in ON and
OFF positions.
B.
For exterior installations, the enclosures shall be NEMA 3R.
C.
All enclosures shall be the NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental conditions of the area.
2.05
RATINGS
A.
Switches shall be rated for voltage, poles, amperes, and horsepower, as required or shown on
Drawings. All switches shall be rated for maximum available fault current as required and/or as noted.
2.06
FUSES
A.
Fused safety and disconnect switches shall be provided with fuses of class, type, and rating as required or shown on Drawings.
26 28 16 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FIT Project C1195
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall examine locations where safety and disconnect switches are to be installed and notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.
B.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install safety and disconnect switches as required by all applicable codes and as shown on Drawings.
Install safety and disconnect switches in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC, recognized industry practices, and applicable portions of NECA's
"Standard of Installation".
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of safety and disconnect switches with other equipment in the area.
C.
Coordinate safety and disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work as necessary for proper interface.
D.
Install disconnect switches within sight of motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Provide nameplate on switch, indicating equipment served.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of safety and disconnect switches, test and inspect system to ensure compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
B.
Close all switches to check for proper energization of all loads.
END OF SECTION 26 28 16
26 28 16 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2.
Emergency lighting units.
3.
Exit signs.
4.
Lighting fixture supports.
5.
Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
BF: Ballast factor.
B.
CCT: Correlated color temperature.
C.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
D.
HID: High-intensity discharge.
E.
LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
F.
Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
G.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
1.04
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1.
Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2.
Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
3.
Ballast, including BF.
4.
Energy-efficiency data.
5.
Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
6.
Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with
IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture
26 51 00 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a.
Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer. b.
Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National
Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting
Products.
B.
Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each
Sample shall include the following:
1.
Lamps and ballasts, installed.
2.
Pendant support system.
D.
Installation instructions.
1.05
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
Lighting fixtures.
2.
Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.
3.
Other items in finished ceiling including the following: a.
Speakers. b.
Sprinklers. c.
Smoke and fire detectors. d.
Occupancy sensors.
4.
Perimeter moldings.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
E.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.06
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
26 51 00 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.
Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1.07
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
2.
Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3.
Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
4.
Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
1.08
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing
& Calculation Guides.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
1.09
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.10
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.
26 51 00 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
A.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
B.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
C.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
D.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
E.
Diffusers and Globes:
1.
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a.
Lens Thickness: At least [0.125 inch (3.175 mm)] <Insert dimension> minimum unless otherwise indicated. b.
UV stabilized.
2.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.
Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1.
Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a.
"USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b.
Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. c.
Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for
HID luminaires. d.
Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e.
ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f.
CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
G.
Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.
2.03
EXIT SIGNS
A.
General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Internally Lighted Signs:
1.
Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life.
2.
Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
26 51 00 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
3.
Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c.
Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d.
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. e.
LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f.
Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. g.
Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
2.04
LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
C.
Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
D.
Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
E.
Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
F.
Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Lighting fixtures:
1.
Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Install lamps in each luminaire.
B.
Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary.
When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.
26 51 00 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1.
Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.
2.
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
D.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.02
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
B.
Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101.
C.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
3.04
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by
Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least
100 hours at full voltage.
3.05
ADJUSTING
A.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
Some of this work may be required after dark.
1.
Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
26 51 00 - 6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 28 05 13
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
Cable and Hardware specifications provided for reference only. Coordinate with FIT for exact cable manufacturer and type.
B.
Section Includes:
1.
UTP cabling.
2.
62.5/125-micrometer, multimode optical fiber cabling.
3.
Coaxial cabling.
4.
Low-voltage control cabling.
5.
Control-circuit conductors.
6.
Fire alarm wire and cable.
7.
Identification products.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C.
IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
D.
Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
E.
Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).
F.
RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
1.04
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a.
Nominal OD. b.
Minimum bending radius. c.
Maximum pulling tension.
28 05 13 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
1.05
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
FIT Project C1195
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
B.
Source quality-control reports.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
1.
Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical fiber flashlight or optical loss test set.
2.
Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.
3.
Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
1.08
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1.
Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
28 05 13 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
2.02
BACKBOARDS
FIT Project C1195
A.
Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm).
Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."
2.03
UTP CABLE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
ADC.
2.
AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation.
3.
Belden Inc.
4.
Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.
5.
CommScope, Inc.
6.
Draka Cableteq USA.
7.
Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.
8.
Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc.
9.
Superior Essex Inc.
10.
SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.
11.
3M; Communication Markets Division.
B.
Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.
1.
Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.
2.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.
3.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.
4.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a.
Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b.
Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c.
Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666. d.
Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX. e.
Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG. f.
Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g.
Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.
2.04
UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
ADC.
2.
American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.
3.
AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation.
4.
Belden Inc.
5.
Dynacom Inc.
6.
Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring.
7.
Leviton Commercial Networks Division.
8.
Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.
9.
Panduit Corp.
10.
Siemon.
28 05 13 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.
C.
Connecting Blocks: 110-style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
2.05
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation.
2.
Belden Inc.
3.
Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.
4.
CommScope, Inc.
5.
Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems.
6.
CSI Technologies Inc.
7.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
8.
Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc.
9.
Superior Essex Inc.
10.
SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.
11.
3M; Communication Markets Division.
B.
Description: Multimode, 62.5/125-micrometer, 24-fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable.
1.
Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.
2.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications.
3.
Comply with TIA-492AAAA-A for detailed specifications.
4.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: a.
General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG. b.
Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.
5.
Maximum Attenuation: Coordinate with Owner.
6.
Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
C.
Jacket:
1.
Jacket Color: Orange for 62.5/125-micrometer cable.
2.
Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C.
3.
Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches (1000 mm).
2.06
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
ADC.
2.
American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.
3.
Belden Inc.
4.
Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.
5.
Corning Incorporated; Corning Cable Systems.
6.
CSI Technologies Inc.
28 05 13 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
7.
Dynacom Inc.
8.
Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring.
9.
Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.
10.
Siemon.
11.
FIT Project C1195
B.
Cable Connecting Hardware: Meet the Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards
(FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with
TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
1.
Quick-connect, simplex and duplex connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB.
2.
Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.
2.07
COAXIAL CABLE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Alpha Wire Company.
2.
Belden Inc.
3.
Coleman Cable, Inc.
4.
CommScope, Inc.
5.
Draka Cableteq USA.
B.
General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.
C.
RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.
1.
No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor.
2.
Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.
3.
Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum braid.
4.
Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.
5.
Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus
85 deg C.
D.
RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATVR.
1.
No. 20 AWG, solid, silver-plated, copper-covered steel conductor.
2.
Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.
3.
Triple shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 95 percent aluminum braid; covered by aluminum foil with grounding strip.
4.
Color-coded PVC jacket.
E.
RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.
1.
No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.
2.
Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid.
3.
Jacketed with black PVC or PE.
4.
Suitable for indoor installations.
F.
RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.
1.
No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.
28 05 13 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.
Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 40 percent aluminum braid.
3.
PVC jacket.
G.
RG59/U (Plenum Rated): NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1.
No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; foam fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.
2.
Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 65 percent aluminum braid.
3.
Copolymer jacket.
H.
NFPA and UL Compliance: Coaxial cables shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655, and with NFPA 70 "Radio and
Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles.
Types are as follows:
1.
CATV Cable: Type CATV.
2.
CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262.
3.
CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR, complying with UL 1666.
4.
CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX.
2.08
COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions; AIM Electronics Brand.
2.
Leviton Commercial Networks Division.
3.
Siemon.
B.
Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.
2.09
LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A.
Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1.
One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) and No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors.
2.
PVC insulation.
3.
Unshielded.
4.
PVC jacket.
5.
Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
B.
Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1.
One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) and No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors.
2.
PVC insulation.
3.
Unshielded.
4.
PVC jacket.
5.
Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
2.10
CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.
28 05 13 - 6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.
C.
Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with
UL 83.
2.11
FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Comtran Corporation.
2.
Draka Cableteq USA.
3.
Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.
4.
Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp.
5.
West Penn Wire.
B.
General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70,
Article 760.
C.
Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG.
1.
Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
D.
Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.
1.
Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.
2.
Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
3.
Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors,
Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
2.12
IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Brady Worldwide, Inc.
2.
HellermannTyton North America.
3.
Kroy LLC.
4.
Panduit Corp.
B.
Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
C.
Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.13
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
28 05 13 - 7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
C.
Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
D.
Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
E.
Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.
F.
Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of supports for cables.
3.02
WIRING METHOD
A.
Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways.
1.
Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch (21 mm). Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.
B.
Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.
C.
Wiring within Enclosures:
1.
Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.
2.
Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
3.
Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
4.
Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.
5.
Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks.
6.
Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams.
7.
Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
3.03
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
C.
General Requirements for Cabling:
28 05 13 - 8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2.
Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3.
Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.
4.
Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches
(760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
5.
Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling
Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
6.
Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
7.
Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.
8.
Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.
D.
UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.
1.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2.
Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
E.
Optical Fiber Cable Installation:
1.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
2.
Cable shall be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.
F.
Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:
1.
Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture.
2.
Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches
(915 mm).
G.
Open-Cable Installation:
1.
Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2.
Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
H.
Separation from EMI Sources:
1.
Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.
2.
Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b.
Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).
28 05 13 - 9
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 c.
Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).
3.
Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). b.
Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). c.
Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).
4.
Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b.
Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). c.
Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
5.
Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and
Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).
6.
Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).
3.04
FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.
B.
Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 260533 "Raceways and
Boxes for Electrical Systems."
1.
Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
2.
Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.
C.
Wiring Method:
1.
Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.
2.
Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and
CI, is not permitted.
3.
Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.
D.
Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
E.
Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Colorcode audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different
28 05 13 - 10
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
3.05
POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A.
120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1.
Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG.
2.
Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.
3.
Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.
3.06
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with site specific requirements for connecting, terminating, and identifying fire alarm wires and cables.
3.07
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Firestops and Smoke Seals."
B.
Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A.
C.
Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.08
GROUNDING
A.
For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding,
Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B.
For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.09
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
3.10
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
28 05 13 - 11
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
2.
Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
3.
Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection. a.
Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-
B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in
"Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
4.
Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a.
Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-
B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. b.
Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction according to TIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.
2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-
568-B.1.
5.
Coaxial Cable Tests: Comply with requirements in Section 274133 "Master Antenna
Television System."
D.
Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.
E.
End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 28 05 13
28 05 13 - 12
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
SECTION 28 31 13
FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
This Section is to coordinate with and be complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions of the work, wherever applicable to Mechanical and
Electrical Work.
B.
Section 01 31 46 - Special Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work shall apply.
C.
Section 26 05 12 - General Provisions for Electrical Work shall apply.
D.
Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract requirements to best available standards at the scale required.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This project is an expansion of an existing Acme Fire Alarm system with supplementary
Edwards/EST Model EST3 system expansion components. All new systems equipment and subpanels shall connect to the existing fire alarm RS485 network (a data connection). All new points shall also report to the existing FireWorks PC graphics computer. As part of this project, all programming of the existing system and/or graphics workstations shall be included as part of this contract.
B.
Prior to installation of the new system the contractor is to study and record all pertinent information regarding the operation of the existing fans and location and state of existing fire smoke dampers during normal and alarm conditions, in order to preserve and maintain such operation under the new Fire Alarm system.
C.
For building specific information contractors shall contact the base building fire alarm vendor listed as follows:
1.
High Rise Fire and Security
144 21st Street
Brooklyn, NY 11232
(718) 369-3434
Contact: Moises Ruiz - mruiz@highrisefire.com
D.
The system shall be intelligent device addressable, analog detecting, low voltage and modular, with digital communication techniques, in full compliance with all applicable codes and standards. Generic terms such as “sub system”, “the system”, “a system”, “the fire alarm system”, etc. shall be deemed to apply to the complete intelligent analog addressable fire alarm system, unless specifically noted elsewhere.
E.
The features and capacities described in this specification are a requirement for this project and shall be furnished by the successful Contractor. The system as described shall be installed, programmed, tested, and delivered to the Owner in fully operational condition. The system shall include all required hardware, software, raceways and interconnecting wiring to
28 31 13 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 accomplish the requirements of this specification and the contract drawings, whether or not specifically itemized herein. The system shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
Connection to existing building system and provision of related remote data gathering panels.
2.
Addressable analog area smoke detectors.
3.
Addressable analog duct smoke detectors.
4.
Audible notification appliances - horns.
5.
Visual notification appliances - strobes.
6.
Air handling systems shutdown control.
7.
Sprinkler supervisory switches and tamper switch supervision.
8.
Battery standby.
9.
ALL NYC Fire Alarm peripherals (listed as such but as required by the FDNY to meet the 2008 NYC code), placards, riser diagram, necessary switches, LED’s, manual central office trip, Fuse Cutout, FDNY approved locks, with enclosed Purge switches shall be included in the system price. Data gathering panels shall be connected to a power riser with a fused disconnect. A common ground shall be included in the power riser.
F.
Non-addressable alarm initiating, supervisory and status monitored devices shall be integrated into the fire alarm system, as applicable, via the addressable interface module:
1.
Sprinkler water flow alarm (alarm initiating)
2.
Sprinkler standpipe water flow (alarm initiating)
3.
Sprinkler valve tamper switch (supervisory)
G.
Audible / visual signaling devices and communicating devices to be controlled by the FACP and/or RSP transponder panels:
1.
Hornes
2.
Strobe Lights
3.
Combination Horn-Strobe
H.
Devices to be controlled by the FACP and/or RSP’s panel programmable relays, duct smoke detector programmable relays, remote system programmable addressable relays and/or intelligent addressable interface module relays:
1.
Connections to the appropriate Central Monitoring Point or as directed by the Owner for manual station alarm, sprinkler alarm, smoke alarm, interfaced suppression system alarm, supervisory and system trouble conditions.
2.
Air handling fan systems alarm shut down operations.
3.
Fire/smoke dampers operations.
4.
Elevator controls for elevator recall.
1.03
RELATED DOCUMENTS / WORK AND EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.
Prior to the commencement of work, the Contractor shall obtain all permits necessary for installation of the work. All permit costs and inspections fees shall be included as part of the required work.
2.
Local requirements shall be adhered to with regard to submitting specifications, wiring diagrams, shop drawings and plans. Responsibility for furnishing the quantities of copies on cloth and/or paper, as directed by such requirements, shall be included as part of the work of this Section.
3.
Prior to commencement and after completion of work, the Contractor shall notify all authorities having jurisdiction.
28 31 13 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
4.
The Contractor shall submit a letter of approval of the installation, from the local code authority, before requesting final acceptance of the system.
B.
RELATED WORK
1.
The Contractor shall coordinate work in this Section with all related trades. Work and/or equipment provided in other Sections and related to the fire alarm system shall include, but not be limited to:
2.
Duct smoke sensors to be installed, wired and connected to the fire alarm system by the
Contractor.
3.
Air handling system and smoke damper control circuits and fan status contacts are existing. They shall be wired and connected to the fire alarm system by the Contractor.
4.
Sprinkler water flow alarm and valve tamper switches are new. They shall be wired and connected to the fire alarm system by the Contractor.
5.
interfacing with any and all other fire alarm system related devices.
1.04
REFERENCES - APPLICABLE LISTINGS, CODES, STANDARDS, DOCUMENTS
A.
STANDARDS AND CODES
1.
All equipment shall be installed and complied with the current adopted provisions of the following codes and standards.
2.
All equipment shall be U.L. listed for its intended use, as a minimum, the following standards shall apply: a.
U.L. 228 - Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. b.
U.L. 268 and 268A - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. -
Detectors Duct Application. c.
U.L. 346 - Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. d.
U.L. 464 - Audible Signaling Appliances. e.
U.L. 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. f.
U.L. 1480 - Speakers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. g.
U.L. 1481 - Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. h.
U.L. 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired.
3.
National Fire Protection Association Standards. a.
NFPA No. 13 - 2002 Edition - Sprinkler Alarm and Supervision. b.
New York City Electrical Code. c.
NFPA No. 72 - 2002 Edition - National Fire Alarm Code. d.
NFPA No. 72, 4-5 Remote Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems (If Required) e.
NFPA No. 72, 4-7 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems. f.
NFPA No. 72, 3-12 Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications. g.
NFPA No. 101 - 2000 Edition - Life Safety Code
4.
All raceways and wiring shall be installed in compliance with NFPA Standard 70 (New
York City Electrical Code - Article 760). Codes shall be implicitly followed, in particular with regard to material type and quality, circuitry extensions from and connections to outlet and junction boxes, panel boards and similar appurtenances.
5.
The fire alarm system and its installation shall comply with all applicable requirements of
The Americans With Disabilities Act.
6.
The fire alarm system and its installation shall comply with all other local codes and authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to, owners engineering design guidelines.
28 31 13 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
1.05
DEFINITIONS
FIT Project C1195
A.
Initiating Device: A system component that originates transmission of a change of state condition, such as a smoke detector, manual fire alarm box, supervisory switch, etc.
B.
Initiating Device Circuit : A circuit to which automatic or manual initiating devices are connected where the signal received does not identify the individual device operated. Typically known as a “Zone” for conventionally wired systems or circuits.
C.
Notification Appliance: A fire alarm system component such as a bell, horn, strobe, printer, etc., that provides an audible or visual output or both.
D.
Notification Appliance Circuit : A circuit or path directly connected to a notification appliance.
E.
Signaling Line Circuit : A circuit or path between any combination of circuit interfaces, control units, or transmitters over which multiple system input or output signals or both are carried. (When used with addressable analog initiating devices, these SLC circuits are also known as “Addressable Loops”)
F.
Note: Both Signaling Line Circuits and Initiating Line Circuits operate initiating devices, however, they provide different communication capabilities. Code requirements differ greatly for performance and capacities. Refer to NFPA 72, Tables 3-5.1 & 3-6.1.
1.06
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The system shall operate as an integrated multiplexed protected premises fire alarm monitoring and control system.
1.
Changes in the status of monitored points shall be detected by the microprocessor based
Data Gathering Panel utilizing distributed processing, peer-to-peer networking with remote system panel’s located throughout the facility if required.
2.
Sensor "dirty" and "excessively dirty" trouble conditions shall report automatically.
3.
Devices shall be listed by U.L. for sensitivity testing by means of the portable programmer/tester or by readout from the control panel. Each addressable device address shall be set electronically, devices requiring dip switch settings, rotary switch settings, staples or jumper settings are not acceptable.
4.
As a minimum, DGP’s shall consist of an enclosure, power supply, digital communications circuitry, mother boards, batteries and hardware, modules, audio hardware, and circuitry described for inclusion in the fire alarm control panel as required to function as specified. System control panels shall function in stand alone fail safe mode upon loss of the FACP processing, communications or communications wiring.
5.
Smoke detectors shall alarm at their programmed sensitivity settings and shall not revert to a common default setting when their operating system segment is in the default mode.
6.
System individually identifies each addressable initiating device and other addressable monitor functions using multiplexing interfacing techniques.
7.
System is capable of individually operating each alarm indicating appliance, and other control functions, using multiplexing techniques.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
It is the intent of these Specifications to provide a complete fire alarm system that complies in all respects with the requirements of all applicable codes and standards. Equipment, materials,
28 31 13 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 software, installation practices, etc. that do not meet these requirements or do not meet the performance standards herein specified shall not be acceptable.
B.
Fire alarm system equipment furnished under this Specification shall be UL listed, under the appropriate category, as a product of a single manufacture. .
C.
The equipment furnished under this Specification shall be that of the specified manufacturer.
Before commencing work the Contractor shall submit data showing that the contractor has successfully installed fire alarm systems of the same scope, type and design as specified. The
Contractor shall also include the names and locations of at least three installations where such systems have performed satisfactorily for the preceding 18 months.
1.
The Contractor shall submit three copies of all required Licenses and Bonds as required in the State or Province having jurisdiction.
2.
The installing Contractor shall employ on staff a minimum of one NICET level 2 technician or a professional Engineer, registered in the State of the installation.
3.
The installing Contractor shall be qualified by Underwriter's Laboratories certifying the complete system meets UL upon completion of the installation. Ongoing maintenance and testing shall be provided to the Owner under a maintenance contract to maintain the certification.
4.
Installation contractors unable to comply with the provisions of 1.06 shall present proof of engaging the services of a subcontractor qualified to furnish the required services.
D.
Provide the services of a representative or technician from the manufacturer of the system. The representative or technician is to be certified and experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system provided. The representative shall be licensed in the State, if required by law. The fire alarm Contractor shall supervise installation, software programming, software documentation, adjustments, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system.
The fire alarm Contractor shall also be required to provide operational instruction to the
Owner's personnel. Instruction shall include system operation, maintenance, programming and arm/disarm procedures.
E.
Acceptance of substitutions: Substitutions will not be permitted.
F.
Should conflicts arise between project drawings and/or these Specifications, regarding design, quantities of devices or circuits, the higher quantity or cost shall be considered as correct, unless directed by the Engineer to provide other appropriate measures.
G.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit acceptable equipment for review by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall bear all liability for damages arising from his failure to submit equipment that meets these Specifications, including, but not limited to, any penalties for failure to meet construction deadline.
H.
Final determination of compliance with these Specifications shall rest with the Engineers, who, at their discretion, may require proof of performance at the cost of the Contractor. Required proof may include, but shall not be limited to, expense paid visits by representatives of the
Owner and Engineer to sites where identical equipment is installed and providing beneficial use.
1.08
SUBMITTALS
A.
Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall provide a complete and comprehensive submittal for review by the Engineer. These are to describe the proposed system and its equipment.
28 31 13 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
Failure to provide a complete submittal shall be grounds for summary rejection of any incomplete submittal documentation. Contractor’s who provide Resubmittal’s, due to prior rejection, shall be subject to a review fee, should the Engineer elect to do so. The complete submittal shall include, but not be limited to, all of the following material:
1.
Power Calculations a.
Battery capacity calculations. Battery size shall be a minimum of 125% of the calculated requirement. b.
Supervisory power requirements for all equipment. c.
Alarm power requirements for all equipment. d.
Power supply rating justification showing power requirements for each of the system power supplies. Power supplies shall be sized to furnish the total connected load in a worst case condition plus 25% spare capacity. e.
Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs demonstrating a worst case condition.
2.
Complete manufacturer's catalog data including supervisory power usage, alarm power usage, physical dimensions, finish and mounting requirements.
3.
Complete drawings covering the following shall be submitted by the Contractor for the proposed system. Floor plans in a CAD compatible format showing all equipment and raceways, marked for size, conductor count with type and size, showing the percentage of allowable National Electric Code fill used.
4.
A complete proposed system database including a description of all logic strings, control by event programming and point identification labels on a CD and in a formatted printed form, as required for offsite editing, shall be submitted for evaluation by the Owner. a.
The program shall include all required interactive control functions between the local network systems and the methods for implementing these actions.
5.
Provide the address, telephone number, and contact person(s) of the manufacturer's local service facility for normal and off hour warranty issues.
6.
If the fire alarm system and its equipment is supplied by a manufacturer's distributor, as part of the submittal documentation, the manufacturer shall provide, on its corporate letterhead, a "letter of support". Said "letter of support" shall state that, when in the opinion of the Engineer, the distributor's efforts require backup and/or assistance, the manufacturer shall provide, at no cost to the Owner, all required technical support and manpower, in a timely manner, during the installation period and for a one (1) year guarantee period starting on the date of final acceptance by the Owner and the Authority
Having Jurisdiction. If said "letter of support" is not submitted, the manufacturer's equipment will be deemed unacceptable and shall be grounds for summary rejection.
7.
Provide a fire alarm system function matrix. Matrix shall illustrate alarm output events in association with initiating devices input events. Matrix shall represent a summary of the installed system alarm, supervisory and trouble functions. Include any and all departures, exceptions, variances or substitutions from these Specifications and/or drawings at the time of bid. Failure to provide this requirement shall be cause for summary rejection of submittal documents where additional departures are discovered. (See Appendix-A “this document” for minimum matrix requirements and NFPA Appendix A-7-5.2.2(i) 1996).
8.
For each system control panel and/or transponder panel, provide panel ampere loading during both normal and alarm mode’s, with time calculations to substantiate compliance with battery backup power requirements (battery Ampere-Hour capacity), described elsewhere in these Specifications.
9.
For each system control panel and/or transponder panel, provide written schedule of active and spare addresses provided on each addressable circuit to substantiate compliance with circuit usage/spare requirements, described elsewhere in these specifications.
28 31 13 - 6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
10.
For each system control panel and system transponder notification appliance circuit provide a written schedule of spare capability in amperes and/or wattage available for future possible use.
11.
Provide manufacture’s printed product data, catalog pages and descriptions of any special installation requirements and/or procedures. Drawings depicting any special physical installation requirements shall show physical plans, elevations, all dimensions, conduit entry, minimum access clearances and any other details required.
12.
Provide a signed letter and notarized statement on the manufacture’s letterhead, stating that each analog addressable data communications circuit shall support one hundred
(100%) of the circuits and addressable devices in alarm or operated at the same time, during both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions.
13.
Provide shop drawings as follows: a.
Coversheet with project name, address and drawing index. b.
General notes drawing with peripheral device backbox size information, part numbers, device mounting height information, and the names, addresses, point of contact, and telephone numbers of all contract project team members. c.
Device riser diagram that individually depicts all control panels, annunciators, addressable devices, and notification appliances. Shall include a specific, proposed point descriptor above each addressable device. Shall include a specific, discrete point address that shall correspond to addresses depicted on the device layout floor plans. Drawing shall provide wire specifications, and wire tags shown on all conductors depicted on the riser diagram. All circuits shall have designations that shall correspond with those require on the control panel and floor plan drawings.
End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted. d.
Control panel termination drawing(s). Shall depict internal component placement and all internal and field termination points. Drawing shall provide a detail indicating where conduit penetrations shall be made, so as to avoid conflicts with internally mounted batteries. For each additional data gathering panel, a separate control panel drawing shall be provided, which clearly indicated the designation, service and location of the control enclosure. End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted. e.
See section 3.4 DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING for other documents relating to this section. f.
Device typical wiring diagram drawing(s) shall be provided which depict all system components, and their respective field wiring termination points. Wire type, gauge, and jacket shall also be indicated. When an addressable module is used in multiple configurations for monitoring or controlling various types of equipment, different device typical diagrams shall be provided. End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted. g.
Device layout floor plans shall be created for every area served by the fire alarm system. CAD Files (AutoCAD – latest edition) shall be requested from the consulting engineer for the fire alarm system equipment vendor in the preparation of the floor plans. Floor plans shall indicate accurate locations for all control and peripheral devices. Vendor drawings shall be NO LESS THAN 1/8 INCH SCALE.
All addressable devices shall be depicted with a discrete address that corresponds with that indicated on the Riser Diagram. All notification appliances shall also be provided with a circuit address that corresponds to that depicted on the Riser
Diagram. If individual floors need to be segmented to accommodate the 1/8” scale requirements, KEY PLANS and BREAK-LINES shall be provided on the plans in an orderly and professional manner. End-of-line resistors (and values) shall be depicted.
28 31 13 - 7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 h.
Contained in the title block of each drawing shall be symbol legends with device counts, wire tag legends, circuit schedules for all addressable and notification appliance circuits, the project name/address, and a drawing description which corresponds to that indicated in the drawing index on the coversheet drawing. A section of each drawing title block shall be reserved for revision numbers and notes. The initial submission shall be Revision 0, with Revision A, B, or C as project modifications require.
14.
Battery calculations shall be provided on a per power supply/charger basis based on 24 hours of supervision and 45 minutes of alarm. These calculations shall clearly indicate the quantity of devices, the device part numbers, the supervisory current draw, the alarm current draw, totals for all categories, and the calculated battery requirements. Battery calculations shall also reflect all control panel component, remote annunciator, and auxiliary relay current draws. Failure to provide these calculations shall be grounds for the complete rejection of the submittal package.
15.
Table of contents, product data sheets, sequences of operation, battery calculations, installation instructions, licenses, NICET certifications and B-Size (blackline) reduced shop drawings shall be provided by the fire alarm vendor as part of a single, spiral bound submittal book. The submittal book shall have laminated covers indicating the project address, project number, system type, and contractor. The book shall consist of labeled dividers, and shall not exceed 9 ½” in width, and 11 ½” in height. No less than three (3) sets of submittal booklets shall be provided to the consulting engineer for review and comment. Additional copies may be required at no additional cost to the project.
16.
Scale drawing sets shall be submitted along with the submittal booklets. These drawings may be either D-Size or E-Size Blueline drawings and of a sufficient resolution to be completely read. Sets shall be bound and folded so as to not take up more than 100 square inches of space. No less than three (3) sets of scale drawing sets shall be provided to the consulting engineer for review and comment. Additional copies may be required at no additional cost to the project.
17.
The fire alarm Contractor shall provide copies of certification for service technicians formal training by the system manufacture. As a minimum, certification documents shall indicate training dates, systems qualified, name of individual certified and current status.
1.09
SYSTEM OPERATION
A.
Description
1.
As indicated on plans.
B.
Fire Smoke Damper Control Sequence of Operations
1.
Under normal operation, fire smoke dampers shall be held open.
2.
Under a fire alarm condition, fire alarm system control relays shall close dampers.
3.
When the fire alarm condition is cleared and the fire alarm system fan reset is activated, the fire alarm control relays at the fire smoke dampers shall close.
C.
Reset of all alarm initiating device circuits, alarm notification circuits, and equipment control relays shall be accomplished from the existing Fire Control Panel. In no case shall the above alarm reset procedure cause the resetting of equipment control relays (for fans, dampers, etc.).
Such devices shall require separate reset from the Fire Control Panel.
D.
It shall be possible to disconnect any floor, or any device or combination of devices on any floor, from the system to allow for maintenance, repairs, or the addition of system devices and
28 31 13 - 8
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 wiring without disabling any other floor. Such disconnection shall cause a visual "disabled" annunciation at the DGP and Fire Alarm Panel identifying the floor and/or devices.
E.
System operation shall be such as to provide automatic and/or manual shutdown of fans larger than 2,000 CFM, and of dampers and other equipment in response to alarm initiation, as well as central status reporting.
F.
System Configuration
1.
Each manual station, smoke or heat detector, sprinkler/standpipe alarm or supervisory actuating device, and alarm or supervisory initiating device shall constitute a separate zone for reporting to the Fire Alarm Panel. For display at the Fire Alarm Panel (FACP), each reporting zone (i.e., device) shall be individually identified, except that multiple smoke detectors (or multiple heat detectors) located within a single space may be identified by a common display. It shall be possible to separately identify and display the address of the individual detector(s) in alarm within any such space by means of an appropriate command at the FACP keyboard or keypad.
2.
Reporting of all required alarms and supervisory signals to the Fire Alarm Panel (FACP) from initiating devices of the non-addressable type, including (but not limited to) sprinkler and standpipe waterflow and supervisory devices, manual fire alarm stations, sub-system (e.g., halon, pre-action sprinkler, etc.) alarm and supervisory contacts, and the like shall be accomplished in conjunction with addressable monitoring modules of the initiating device type (i.e., AMM/ID). AMM/ID's shall be of a type intended for connection of NFPA 72, Style 6 "branch" signalling line circuits (SLC) as described hereinbefore and shall be connected to the appropriate SLC on the floor on which they are located. Except where incorporated as part of manual fire alarm stations (or in the outlet boxes on which they are mounted), AMM/ID's shall be mounted adjacent to the associated initiating devices in outlying addressable monitor module boxes and shall be complete with engraved red nameplate. Each AMM/ID shall be interconnected to its associated initiating device by means of an initiating device circuit (IDC) as described hereinbefore. Provide an end-of-line resistor at each initiating device so as to permit supervision of the interconnecting circuitry. Terminals shall be incorporated in each addressable module box for the accommodation of all entering conductors.
3.
Control (automatic and/or manual) and status reporting (monitoring) of equipment via the fire protective alarm system as specified hereinafter shall be accomplished by means of addressable control modules (ACM's) and addressable monitoring modules of the status reporting type (AMM/S's) located within 3'-0" of the controlled equipment in outlying addressable monitor boxes similar to those specified above for the AMM/ID's.
Addressable modules (ACM's and AMM/S's) shall be provided in accordance with the following: a.
ACM's and AMM/S's shall be of a type intended for connection to NFPA 72, Style
6 "branch signalling circuits (SLC's) as described hereinbefore, and shall be connected to the appropriate SLC serving the floor on which they are located. b.
Each ACM shall provide (2) SPDT contacts suitable for use at voltages up to 250
VAC and capable of interrupting 10 amperes inductive, and shall derive its operating and supervisory current at 24VDC from the SLC. If necessary, these contact ratings shall be accommodated by means of auxiliary control relays mounted within or adjacent to the same addressable monitor boxes as the ACM's, and deriving their operating power from the associated ACM's, or directly from the associated ECC via separate supervised power supply conductors. c.
Each AMM/S shall function so as to provide a readily identifiable status indication at the FACP in response to a 120 or 208 VAC signal from the associated controlled
28 31 13 - 9
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 equipment. Incorporate an auxiliary status (monitoring) relay for each AMM/S to convert a 120 or 208 VAC AC signal to a "dry" contact if the AMM/S requires a
"dry" contact for proper status signal initiation. Auxiliary status relays, if required, shall be mounted in the same outlying addressable module boxes as their associated AMM/S's. d.
At locations where multiple equipment controllers are installed, the addressable modules (and any associated auxiliary relays) may be grouped in common addressable module boxes.
4.
Priority of Signals: a.
Accomplish automatic response functions by the first zone initiated. Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first zone are not altered by subsequent alarms. The highest priority is an alarm signal. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even though the lower-priority condition occurred first.
Annunciate all alarm signals regardless of priority or order received. b.
Noninterfering: Zone, power, wire, and supervise the system so a signal on one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or devices are restored to normal. Systems that require batteries or battery backup for the programming function are unacceptable. c.
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) Response: The manual or automatic operation of an alarm-initiating or supervisory-operating device causes the FACP to transmit an appropriate signal including the following:
1) General alarm.
2)
3)
Smoke or heat detector alarm.
Valve tamper supervisory.
4)
5)
Elevator recall.
Elevator shutdown.
6)
7)
System trouble.
Fan shutdown. d.
Transmission to Remote Central Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote central station in Engineer’s office to Building “D”
MER. e.
Silencing at the FACP: Switches provide capability for acknowledgment of alarm, supervisory, trouble, and other specified signals at the FACP; and capability to silence the local audible signal and light a light-emitting diode (LED). Subsequent zone alarms cause the audible signal to sound again until silenced by switch operation. Restoring alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions to normal extinguishes the associated LED and causes the audible signal to sound again until restoration is acknowledged by switch operation.
5.
Smoke detectors indicated in mechanical equipment rooms shall be of the combination photocell plus fixed temperature/rate-of-rise type.
6.
Smoke detection devices shall have integrally mounted pilot lamps giving a "triggered" indication.
7.
Smoke detection devices which are mounted in ducts shall be supplied with remote
"triggered" indication pilot wired in parallel, in an approved manner, with the similar pilots included integrally with detection units. The pilots for duct detectors shall each be flush or surface mounted within 15 feet circuiting distance of its associated detector.
Mounting and location to be as indicated on Plans.
G.
System Supervisory Functions
28 31 13 - 10
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
1.
Maintain existing functions at FACP for all new equipment installed.
H.
System Trouble Functions
1.
Maintain existing functions at FACP for all new equipment installed.
I.
HVAC supply-exhaust units, fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with a hand off-on-auto switch module with LED indicators. LED indication shall be red for “off”, green for “on” and amber for monitoring circuit integrity. In addition, visual indication shall be provided for positive feedback confirmation of field devices. LED status annunciation shall be real time and actual, derived from a monitored auxiliary contact on the fan contactor, sail switch or atmospheric pressure switch installed downstream from the fan.
PART 2 - SYSTEM OPERATION
2.01
BASIC SYSTEM EQUIPMENT, CIRCUITING, ADDRESSING AND OPERATING
CAPABILITIES
A.
The catalog numbers used are those of Edwards EST by UTC Fire and Security. No equals.
B.
All products used shall be of a single manufacturer. Submission of notification appliances, auxiliary relays, or documentation from other than a single manufacturer shall not be acceptable and will be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment.
C.
The Fire Alarm System supplied under this specification shall be of a microprocessor-based
Peer to Peer Token Ring network type system. All Control Panel Assemblies and connected
Field Appliances shall be both designed and manufactured by the same company, and shall be tested and cross-listed as compatible to ensure that a fully functioning system is designed and installed. In order to insure maximum system survivability, a DGP will be provided as indicated. The DGP shall be designed with the highest level of survivability in mind.
D.
Circuiting Guidelines
1.
Each Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) shall be circuited so device loading is not to exceed
80% of loop capacity in order to leave for space for future devices. The loop shall have
Class B operation. Each DGP shall include an SLC loop on a per floor basis. T-Tapping a selected loop to cover an alternate floor shall not be accepted.
2.
NAC Circuits shall have Class B operation. Each of the following types of alarm notification appliances shall be circuited as shown on the drawings but shall be typically as follows: a.
Audible Signals: Provide sufficient spare capacity to assure that the addition of five (5) audible devices can be supported without the need for addition control components (power supplies, signal circuit modules, amplifiers, batteries, etc.) b.
Visual Signals Provide sufficient spare capacity to assure that the addition of three
(3) visual devices can be supported without the need for addition control components (power supplies, signal circuit modules, batteries, etc.)
3.
Where it is necessary to interface conventional initiating devices provide intelligent input modules to supervise Class B zone wiring.
4.
Each of the following types of devices or equipment shall be provided with supervised circuits as shown on the drawings but shall be typically as follows: a.
Sprinkler Valve Supervisory Switches: Provide one (1) supervisory module circuit for each sprinkler valve supervisory switch.
28 31 13 - 11
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 b.
When waterflow and tamper switches exist at the same location, provide one (1) dual input addressable module. When odd numbers of devices exist at a single location, provide additional single input addressable modules.
5.
Each of the following types of remote equipment associated with the fire alarm system shall be provided with a form ‘C’ control relay contact as shown on the drawings, but shall be typically as follows: a.
HVAC Fan Systems: Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for each
HVAC fan system. b.
HVAC Supply Fans: Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for each
HVAC supply fan. c.
HVAC Return Fans: Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for each
HVAC return fan.
6.
Provide a dedicated 24VDC circuit to feed all auxiliary relays required for inductive loads. Circuits shall be supervised via an end-of-line relay and addressable input module.
Auxiliary relays shall not derive their power from the starter or load being controlled.
7.
Each control or data gathering panel shall have a dedicated minimum 20Amp-120VAC feed. An appropriate fuse cut out shall be included, wired as indicated in the Electrical
Code for the City of NY.
8.
In no case shall any fire alarm circuit be sized beyond 80% of circuit capacity.
E.
System power supplies, including necessary transformers rectifiers, regulators, filters and surge protection required for system operation, with the capacity to power the system in a worst case condition with all devices in alarm and all local indicating appliances active without exceeding the listed ratings. All system devices shall display normal and alarm conditions consistently whether operating from normal power or reserve (standby) power.
1.
Sounding Devices: a.
Sounding devices shall be of sufficient number so that an alarm shall be clearly audible to all occupants of the building and/or fire area, as required by these
Specifications. b.
Audible alarm signals shall produce a sound level at least 15 dBA above the average ambient sound level or 5 dBA above the maximum sound level having a duration of a least 60 seconds (whichever is greater) measured 5 feet above the floor in each occupiable area. The average ambient sound level is the root mean square. A-weighed sound pressure measured over a 24-hour period.
2.
Audible notification appliances shall be powered by dedicated notification circuits.
Visual notification appliances shall be powered by dedicated notification circuits.
Audible appliances and visual appliances shall not be powered by the same notification circuit. Combination audible/visual devices may be used, but shall be wired as per this
Specification.
3.
Visual signals shall be installed as shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of the U.L.1971 standard and NFPA 72. Where multiple visual signals are visible from any location, circuitry shall be incorporated for the synchronization of flash rate. a.
UL 1971 Listed for Emergency Devices for the Hearing Impaired in all public mode installations. b.
Strobes shall meet UL 1971 and produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum over the Listed input voltage (20VDC - 31VDC) range. c.
All visual signals shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or equivalent with solid state circuitry. d.
The strobe intensity shall have a minimum of 4 field selectable strobe settings for
15,30,75 or 110 candela (wall mount). The switch for setting the candela shall be
28 31 13 - 12
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 mounted in the rear of the unit, to prevent tampering. Use Wheelock Model RSS-
24 MCW-FR. e.
The strobes shall be available for semi-flush or surface mounting and in combination with audible signals at locations shown on drawings.
4.
Horns and Horn Strobes. a.
The horns shall be UL Listed under Standard 1480 for Fire Protective Service: horn appliances equipped with strobes shall additionally be listed under UL
Standard 1971, Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired. b.
The strobe portion of the appliance shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the voltage range of 16 to 33VDC for 24 VDC models. They shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube in a rugged Lexan lens. The strobe shall draw low current with zero inrush. The strobe intensity shall have a minimum of four (4) field selectable settings: 15,30,75 or 110 candela. The switch for selecting the intensity shall be mounted in the rear, to prevent tampering by unauthorized persons. c.
Horns and Horn strobes shall be installed to meet NFPA 72 (1999) and ADA requirements.
5.
HVAC supply-exhaust units, fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with a hand offon-auto switch module with LED indicators. LED indication shall be red for “off”, green for “on” and amber for monitoring circuit integrity. In addition, visual indication shall be provided for positive feedback confirmation of field devices. LED status annunciation shall be real time and actual, derived from a monitored auxiliary contact on the fan contactor, sail switch or atmospheric pressure switch installed downstream from the fan.
6.
Devices shall be listed by U.L. for sensitivity testing by means of the portable programmer/tester or by readout from the DGP or FACP panel. Device address and sensitivity assignments shall be predetermined electronically, devices requiring dip switch settings, rotary switch settings, staples or jumper settings are not acceptable.
7.
Smoke detectors shall alarm at their programmed sensitivity settings and shall not revert to a common default setting when their operating system segment is in the default mode.
8.
Software and Firmware Control: a.
All software and firmware provided with a fire alarm system shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control unit. b.
A record of installed software and firmware version numbers shall be maintained at the location of the fire alarm control unit. c.
All software and firmware shall be protected from unauthorized changes through the use of "access levels."
2.02
UL LISTED AND APPROVED EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Alarm Panel/DGP, Fire Alarm Control Panel Requirements: The fire alarm control panel or panels and all system devices (speaker-strobes, strobes, pull stations, smoke and heat detectors, etc. shall be Edwards Systems Technology (EST) type EST3 series. All under one label “ UL listed and approved ” for the use of fire alarm systems in this area of the United
States of America. The operating controls shall be located behind locked door with viewing window. All control modules shall be labeled, and all zone locations shall be identified.
B.
System Controllers: The main controller 3-CPU shall be supervised, site programmable, and of modular design supporting up to 125 detectors and 125 remote modules per addressable
Signaling line Circuit (SLC). The CPU shall support up to 10 SLC's per panel for a total system capacity of 2500 Intelligent Addressable points. The system shall be designed with peer-to-
28 31 13 - 13
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 peer networking capability for enhanced survivability, with support for up to 64 nodes, each with up to 2500 points and an overall capacity of 160,000 points. The cabinets shall be steel.
C.
The system shall store all basic system functionality and job specific data in non-volatile memory. All site specific and operating data shall survive a complete power failure intact.
Passwords shall protect any changes to system operations.
D.
The Main Controller Module shall control and monitor all local or remote peripherals. It shall support a large 960 character LCD, power supply, remote LCD and zone display annunciators, printers, and support communication interface standard protocol (CSI) devices such as color computer annunciators and color graphic displays. Remote LCD annunciators shall also display each and every point in the system and be sized with the same number of characters as in the main FACP display.
E.
The panel shall have an interface module for remote site monitoring. The control panel shall include built-in (part of the fire alarm control panel) Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter
(DACT)) module to transmit smoke, supervisory, waterflow, trouble, CO Alarm (if included), pump running, and pump trouble events to a Central Monitoring Station (CMS) company. The
DACT shall support dual telephones lines, Contact I.D. communications, and configured for dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) or pulse modes. It shall be possible to delay AC power failure reports, auto test call, and be site programmable. The DACT shall be capable of transmitting every individual condition to the central station via Contact I.D. format. Selection of Contact I.D. format SHALL be of the discretion of the engineer and building owner but shall be an available option. Contractors who choose a separate dialer must meet all of the above options and are responsible for all necessary added connections such as power (with FCO/FDS), conduit, wire, addressable interface modules etc.
F.
The system shall have built-in automatic system programming to automatically address and map all system devices attached to the main controller. A minimum default single stage alarm system operation shall be supported with alarm silence, event silence, drill, lamp test, and reset common controls.
G.
Advanced Windows-based System Definition Utility with Program Version Reporting to document any and all changes made during system start-up or system commissioning shall be used to maintain site specific programming. Time and Date Stamps of all modifications made to the program must be included to allow full retention of all previous program version data. It shall support programming of any input point to any output point. The system shall support the use of Bar Code readers to assist custom programming functions. It shall allow authorized customization of fundamental system operations using initiating events to start actions, timers, sequences and logical algorithms. The system program shall meet the requirements of this project, current codes and standards, and satisfy the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
H.
The system shall support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the following operational attributes; integral multiple differential sensors, automatic device mapping, electronic addressing, environmental compensation, pre-alarm, dirty detector identification, automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment, normal/alarm LEDs, relay bases, sounder bases and isolator bases.
I.
The system shall use full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop devices for placement, correct location , and operation. It shall allow swapping of “same type” devices without the need of addressing and impose the “location” parameters on replacement device. It
28 31 13 - 14
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 shall initiate and maintain a trouble if a device is added to a loop and clear the trouble when the new device is mapped and defined into the system.
J.
Each controller shall contain a RS232 printer/programming port for programming locally via an
IBM PC. When operational, each controller shall support a printer through the RS232 port and be capable of message routing.
K.
Single stage operation shall be provided.
L.
The system shall have a UL Listed Detector Sensitivity test feature, which will be a function of the smoke detectors and performed automatically every 4 hours.
M.
The system shall support 100% of all remote devices in alarm and provide support for a 100% compliment of detector isolator bases.
N.
All panel modules shall be supervised for placement and return trouble if damaged or removed.
O.
The system shall have a CPU watchdog circuit to initiate trouble should the CPU fail.
P.
Audible notification appliances shall be affected by signal silence features. Visual signal appliance shall not be affected by signal silence features.
Q.
Power Supplies: The power supply shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring to automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The automatic battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection. The power supply shall provide internal power and 24 Vdc at 7.0A continuous for notification appliance circuits. The power supply shall be capable of providing 7A to output circuits for a maximum period of 100 ms. All outputs shall be power limited. The battery shall be sized to support the system for 24 hours of supervisory and trouble signal current plus general alarm for 45 minutes.
R.
Auxiliary power supplies shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring to automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The automatic battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection. The power supply shall provide internal power and 24 Vdc at 7.0A continuous for notification appliance circuits. The power supply shall be capable of providing 7A to output circuits for a maximum period of 100 ms. All outputs shall be power limited. The battery shall be sized to support the system for 24 hours of supervisory and trouble signal current plus general alarm for 45 minutes.
2.03
COMPONENTS
A.
Intelligent Devices — General: Each remote device shall have a microprocessor with nonvolatile memory to support its functionality and serviceability. Each device shall store as required for its functionality the following data: device serial number, device address, device type, personality code, date of manufacture, hours in use, time and date of last alarm, amount of environmental compensation left/used, last maintenance date, job/project number, current detector sensitivity values, diagnostic information (trouble codes) and algorithms required to process sensor data and perform communications with the loop controller. Each device shall be capable of electronic addressing, either automatically or application programmed assigned, to support physical/electrical mapping and supervision by location.
Setting a device’s address by physical means shall not be necessary.
28 31 13 - 15
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Intelligent Detectors — General: The System Intelligent Detectors shall be capable of full digital communications using both broadcast and polling protocol. Each detector shall be capable of performing independent fire detection algorithms. The fire detection algorithm shall measure sensor signal dimensions, time patterns and combine different fire parameters to increase reliability and distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted deceptive nuisance alarms. Signal patterns that are not typical of fires shall be eliminated by digital filters.
Devices not capable of combining different fire parameters or employing digital filters shall not be acceptable. Each detector shall have an integral microprocessor capable of making alarm decisions based on fire parameter information stored in the detector head. Distributed intelligence shall improve response time by decreasing the data flow between detector and analog loop controller. Detectors not capable of making independent alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. Maximum total analog loop response time for detectors changing state shall be
0.5 seconds. Each detector shall have a separate means of displaying communication and alarm status. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the analog loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The detector shall be capable of identifying up to 32 diagnostic codes. This information shall be available for system maintenance. The diagnostic code shall be stored at the detector. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting prealarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient “Environmental Thresholds” approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall continually monitor the environmental impact of temperature, humidity, other contaminates as well as detector aging. The process shall employ digital compensation to adapt the detector to both 24-hour long term and 4-hour short-term environmental changes. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 80% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value. Differential sensing algorithms shall maintain a constant differential between selected detector sensitivity and the “learned” base line sensitivity. The base line sensitivity information shall be updated and permanently stored at the detector approximately once every hour. The intelligent analog detectors shall be suitable for mounting on any
Signature Series detector mounting base.
C.
Photoelectric Smoke Detector, SIGA2-PS: Provide intelligent photoelectric smoke detectors
SIGA2-PS. The analog photoelectric detector shall utilize a light scattering type photoelectric smoke sensor to sense changes in air samples from its surroundings. The integral microprocessor shall dynamically examine values from the sensor and initiate an alarm based on the analysis of data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. The detector shall continually monitor any changes in sensitivity due to the environmental affects of dirt, smoke, temperature, aging and humidity. The information shall be stored in the integral processor and transferred to the analog loop controller for retrieval using a laptop PC or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The photo detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 30 ft (9.1m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. The photoelectric smoke detector shall be suitable for direct insertion into air ducts up to 3 ft (0.91m) high and 3 ft (0.91m) wide with air velocities up to 5,000 ft/min. (0-
25.39 m/sec) without requiring specific duct detector housings or supply tubes. The percent smoke obscuration per foot alarm set point shall be field selectable to any of five sensitivity settings ranging from 1.0% to 3.5%. The photo detector shall be suitable for operation in the following environment: Temperature: 32 o
F to 120 o
F (0 o
C to 49 o
C), Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing, Elevation: no limit.
28 31 13 - 16
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
D.
Standard Detector Mounting Bases, SIGA-SB / SIGA-SB4: Provide standard detector mounting bases SIGA-SB suitable for mounting on North American 1-gang, 3½” or 4” octagon box and 4” square box. The base shall, contain no electronics, support all Signature Series detector types and have the following minimum requirements: Removal of the respective detector shall not affect communications with other detectors, Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the base, bases that must be removed to gain access to the terminals shall not be acceptable. The base shall be capable of supporting one (1) Signature Series SIGA-
LED Remote Alarm LED Indicator. Provide remote LED alarm indicators where shown on the plans.
E.
Audible Detector Mounting Base, SIGA-AB4GT. Where shown on the project plans include detector audible/sounder base model SIGA-AB4GT. The sounder base shall be capable of two tones, Temporal 3 for a fire condition and Temporal 4 for a Carbon monoxide condition. The tones shall be fully programmable and also synchronize the sound with other sounder bases.
The system shall be UL2017 listed for dual signaling for this purpose.
F.
Duct Detector Housing, SIGA-SD: Provide model SIGA-SD Low profile intelligent addressable DUCT smoke detector as indicated on the project plans. Provide for variations in duct air velocity between 100 and 4,000 feet per minute and include a wide sensitivity range of
.79 to 2.46%/ft. Obscuration. Include one Form-C shut down relay rated 2.0 amps @ 30 Vdc and also include slave high contact relays if required. Provide an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. The addressable DUCT housing shall be suitable for extreme environments, including a temperature range of –20 to 158 degrees F (-29 to 70 degrees Celsius) and offer a harsh environment gasket option. Provide
Remote Alarm LED Indicators SIGA-LED and/or remote test station model SD-TRK as indicated on the project plans.
G.
Intelligent Modules — General: It shall be possible to address each Intelligent Signature Series module without the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable. The personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable at site to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop Controller. Modules requiring EPROM, PROM, ROM changes or DIP switch and/or jumper changes shall not be acceptable. The modules shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults. The module shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:
Temperature: 32 o
F to 120 o
F (0 o
C to 49 o
C), Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing.
H.
Single Input Module, SIGA-CT1 (Waterflow Detectors, Tamper Switches etc.): Provide intelligent single input modules SIGA-CT1. The Single Input Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B input circuit capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 1gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers. The single input module shall support the following circuit types: Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual
Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.), Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches),
Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.), Normally-Open
Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches).
28 31 13 - 17
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
I.
Dual Input Module, SIGA-CT2: Provide intelligent dual input modules SIGA-CT2. The Dual
Input Module shall provide two (2) supervised Class B input circuits each capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers. The dual input module shall support the following circuit types: Normally-
Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.), Normally-Open Alarm Delayed
Latching (Waterflow Switches), Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans,
Dampers, Doors, etc.), Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches).
J.
Single Input Signal Module, SIGA-CC1: Provide intelligent single input signal modules SIGA-
CC1. The Single Input (Single Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide one (1) supervised
Class B output circuit capable of a minimum of 2 personalities, each with a distinct operation.
When selected as a telephone power selector, the module shall be capable of generating its own
“ring tone”. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep
2-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes. The single input signal module shall support the following operations:
Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A).
K.
Control Relay Module, SIGA-CR: Provide intelligent control relay modules SIGA-CR. The
Control Relay Module shall provide one form “R” dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. The control relay module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½”
(64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½” deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers.
L.
Notification Appliances – General: All appliances shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective
Service. All strobe appliances or combination appliances with strobes shall be UL 1971 and
ULC S526 Listed. All appliances shall be of the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control
Panel (NO EXCEPTIONS) specified to insure absolute compatibility between the appliances and the control panels, and to insure that the application of the appliances are done in accordance with the single manufacturers’ instructions. Any appliances that do not meet the above requirements, and are submitted for use must show written proof of their compatibility for the purpose intended. Such proof shall be in the form of documentation from THE
CONTROL PANEL MANUFACTURER clearly stating that the control equipment (as submitted) is 100% compatible with the submitted Notification Appliances.
M.
Strobes, G1RF-VM Series: Provide EST Series G1RF-VM series low profile wall mounted strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash outputs. Strobe output shall be field selectable as indicated on the drawings in one of the following intensity levels; 15cd, 30cd, 75cd or 110cd. Low profile strobes shall mount in a
North American 1-gang box or surface mounted on a matching back box provided by the manufacturer, as directed in the field
N.
Multi-Voltage Control Relays, MR-200 Series: Provide remote control relays connected to supervised ancillary circuits for control of fans, dampers, door releases, etc. Relay contact ratings shall be DPDT and rated for 10 amperes at 115 Vac. A single relay may be energized from a voltage source of 24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 115 Vac, or 230 Vac. A red LED shall indicate the relay is energized. A metal enclosure shall be provided.
O.
Fire alarm equipment shall be powered through an approved Fuse Disconnect Switch (FDS) connected ahead of the main service switch. The FDS shall be heavy duty (200,000 rms short
28 31 13 - 18
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 circuit amps) safety switch, painted red, include a ground and Neutral kit with grounding screw
(to bond neutral), include a padlock with Y1 cylinder keyed to a NYC/FDNY 2642 key (use
ABUS re-keyable 83-45 or equivalent lock). All wiring shall be #10 minimum THHN or equivalent run in ¾ inch EMT/RGS and in accordance with NYC requirements. The ground to the FDS shall be made using a NYC accepted method (see NYC electrical code), and the ground wire to the FDS shall be #8 minimum (larger if necessary to meet feed size). The equipment ground leaving from the FDS connecting to the fire alarm equipment shall include a
#10 green ground. The FDS panel shall bear an engraved white-core phenolic or bakelite identification nameplate stating in minimum one-quarter inch (1/4”) high white letters on a red background “FIRE ALARM FUSED DISCONNECT”.
P.
Where additional circuits are required by the fire alarm system, a Fused Cutout, properly sized shall be included, wired after the FDS. The size of the fuses shall be sized appropriately but be twenty (20) amperes minimum. The fused cut-out panel shall bear an engraved white-core phenolic or bakelite identification nameplate stating in minimum one-quarter inch (1/4”) high white letters on a red background “FIRE ALARM FUSED CUT-OUT”. The neutral shall not be bonded in the Fused cutout”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install system according to NFPA standards referenced in Parts 1 and 2 of this Section.
B.
Fire Alarm Power Supply Disconnect: Paint red and label "FIRE ALARM." Provide with lockable handle or cover.
3.02
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Manual Pull Stations: Mount semi-flush in recessed back boxes with operating handles 48 inches (1220 mm) above the finished floor or lower as indicated.
B.
Waterflow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised.
C.
Smoke Detectors: Install ceiling-mounted detectors not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from a side wall to the near edge. Install detectors located on the wall at least 4 inches (100 mm), but not more than 12 inches (300 mm), below the ceiling. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of the joists. On smooth ceilings, install detectors not over 30 feet (9 m) apart in any direction. Install detectors no closer than 60 inches (1520 mm) from air registers.
D.
Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 90 inches (2280 mm) above the finished floor nor less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flushmounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille or as indicated. Combine audible and visual alarms at the same location into a single unit.
E.
Visual Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and not more than 80 inches (2030 mm) above the finished floor and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.
28 31 13 - 19
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
F.
Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
G.
DGP: Surface mount with top of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.
H.
Addressable Modules: For individual dampers - in control boxes at each damper; for other controlled and/or monitored equipment - in dedicated control box within 3'-0" of the equipment.
3.03
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring Method: For exposed runs install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 26 05 33
"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
B.
No raceways are required for fire alarm cables installation in hollow partitions and hung ceilings.
C.
Wiring within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
D.
Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in 3unction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
E.
Color Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits.
Use different colors for visual alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
F.
Risers: Install at least 2 vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signal from other floors or zones.
G.
Minimum temperature rating of the cables shall be 150 Deg. Celsius.
3.04
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.05
GROUNDING
A.
Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B.
Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding.
28 31 13 - 20
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Install grounding equipment conductor and terminate it at water main. Refer to Section 26 05
26 for detailed requirements.
D.
Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.
3.06
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.
B.
Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.
C.
Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests.
D.
Final Test Notice: Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing.
E.
Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72.
Minimum required tests are as follows:
1.
Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2.
Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
3.
With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on the record drawings.
4.
Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual.
5.
Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. one connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of the initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used.
6.
Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
7.
Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level.
8.
Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.
28 31 13 - 21
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
F.
Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards.
G.
Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log upon the satisfactory completion of tests.
H.
Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed.
3.07
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.08
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.
1.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and preventive maintenance. Provide a minimum of 8 hours' training.
2.
Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual as a training aid.
3.
Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
3.09
ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 3 requested adjustment visits to the site for this purpose.
END OF SECTION 28 31 13
28 31 13 - 22
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT
SECTION 28 31 46
ASPIRATING SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM(S)
FIT Project C1195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General and Supplementary
General Condition and Division 1 - General Requirements shall apply to the work of this section.
B.
At the time of bid, all exceptions taken to these Specifications, all variances from these
Specification and all substitutions of operating capabilities or equipment called for in these
Specification shall be listed in writing and forwarded to the Engineer. Any such exception, variances or substitutions that were not listed at the time of bid and are identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment.
C.
The entire system shall be installed with aesthetics in mind. All control panels and remote annunciators installed in public spaces shall be semi-flush mounted with no exposed conduit or cable trays.
D.
All Sampling tubing shall be neatly installed with proper support hangers.
1.02
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work covered by this Section of the Specification shall include all labor, equipment, materials and services to furnish and install a complete Air Aspiration System. It shall be complete with all necessary hardware, software and memory specifically tailored for this installation. It shall be possible to permanently modify the software on site by using a plug-in programmer. The system shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
Air Aspiration Detector(s).
2.
Connection to Main Fire Alarm Control Panel.
3.
Piping Network(s).
1.03
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The design, equipment, installation, testing and maintenance of the Aspirating Smoke Detection
System shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements set forth in the latest edition of the following publications, codes and standards:
1.
International Fire Code and International Building Code
2.
International Mechanical Code
3.
NFPA 70: National Electrical Code
4.
NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code
5.
NFPA 75: Protection of electrical computer and data processing equipment
6.
NFPA 76: Standard for the protection of telecommunications facilities
7.
NFPA 92A: Recommended Practice for Smoke Control Systems
8.
Factory Mutual Insurance (FM) Approval Guide
9.
UL 268: Standard for Smoke Detectors for Open Areas
10.
UL 268A: Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Application
11.
Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction
28 31 46 - 1
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
The standards listed, as well as other applicable codes and standards shall be used as
“minimum” requirements. Also to be considered are the requirements of the “Authority Having
Jurisdiction” and good engineering practices.
1.04
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Secure permits and approvals prior to installation.
B.
Prior to commencement and after completion of work notify Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
C.
Submit letter of approval for installation before requesting acceptance of system.
1.05
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 28 31 13 – Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide list of all types of equipment and components provided. This shall be incorporated as part of a Table of Contents, which will also indicate the manufacturer’s part number, the description of the part, and the part number of the manufacturer’s product datasheet on which the information can be found.
B.
Provide description of operation of the system (Sequence of Operation), similar to that provided in Part 2 of this Section of the Specifications, to include any and all exceptions, variances or substitutions listed at the time of bid. Any such exceptions, variances or substitutions that were not listed at the time of bid and are identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment. The sequence of operation shall be project specific, and shall provide individual sequences for every type of alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition that may occur as part of normal or off-normal system use.
C.
Provide manufacturer’s printed product data, catalog cuts and description of any special installation procedures. Poorly photocopied and/or illegible product data sheets shall not be acceptable and shall be rejected. All product datasheets shall be highlighted or stamped with arrows to indicate the specific components being submitted for approval.
D.
Provide manufacturer’s installation instruction manual for specified system.
E.
Provide samples of various items when requested.
F.
Provide copy of State License to perform such work.
G.
Provide copies of NICET Level II Fire Alarm certifications for the two (2) technicians assigned to this project.
H.
Provide shop drawings as follows:
1.
Coversheet with project name, address and drawing index.
2.
General notes drawing with peripheral device backbox size information, part numbers, device mounting height information, and the names, addresses, point of contact, and telephone numbers of all contract project team members.
3.
Device riser diagram.
4.
Piping network calculations. Include transport time, tubing hole sizes, and lengths.
28 31 46 - 2
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
5.
See section 3.4 DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING for other documents relating to this section.
6.
Device layout floor plans shall be created for every area served by the Air Aspiration
System(s). CAD Files (AutoCAD – latest edition) shall be provided by the consulting engineer for the fire alarm system equipment vendor in the preparation of the floor plans.
Floor plans shall indicate accurate locations for all controls and Sampling pipe networks.
Drawings shall be NO LESS THAN 1/8 INCH SCALE.
I.
Battery calculations shall be provided on a per power supply/charger basis based on 24 hours of supervision and 15 minutes of alarm.
J.
Table of contents, product data sheets, sequences of operation, battery calculations, installation instructions, licenses, NICET certifications and B-Size (blackline) reduced shop drawings shall be provided by the fire alarm vendor as part of a single, spiral bound submittal book. The submittal book shall have laminated covers indicating the project address, SED number, system type, and contractor. The book shall consist of labeled dividers, and shall not exceed 9 ½” in width, and 11 ½” in height. No less than three (3) sets of submittal booklets shall be provided to the consulting engineer for review and comment. Additional copies may be required at no additional cost to the project.
K.
Scale drawing sets shall be submitted along with the submittal booklets. These drawings may be either D-Size or E-Size Blueline drawings and of a sufficient resolution to be completely read.
Sets shall be bound and folded so as to not take up more than 100 square inches of space. No less than three (3) sets of scale drawing sets shall be provided to the consulting engineer for review and comment. Additional copies may be required at no additional cost to the project.
1.07
WARRANTY
A.
All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year from the date of acceptance or approval by AHJ. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
The catalog numbers used are those of Edwards Air Intelligence “ or equal ”, and constitute the type and quality of equipment to be furnished.
2.02
UL LISTED AND APPROVED EQUIPMENT
A.
AIR-Intelligence Aspirating Smoke Detection System(s) shall be installed in areas designated on construction drawings and shall provide very early “active” detection of smoke and products of combustion present in both still and high airflow environments.
B.
The system shall consist of a distributed air sampling pipe network connected to the inlet manifold of a central detection unit housing precision flow sensor(s), high efficiency aspirator, particle filtration system, precision high sensitivity laser chamber, processing card, and termination points for system networking and interface to other systems.
28 31 46 - 3
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
C.
Detection shall be based on laser light scattering mass detection and particle evaluation principles.
D.
The air sampling pipe network design shall be supported by calculations from the manufacturer’s computer-based design modeling tool, such as PipeCAD™, for validating performance criteria such as aspirating flow, suction balance, transport times and sampling hole sensitivity.
E.
The system(s) shall have a detection sensitivity measurement range of 0.00046% to 7.62% obscuration per foot with a particle sensitivity range of 0.003µ to 10µ.
F.
The detector(s) shall provide programmability of four smoke density alarm thresholds within the system(s) sensitivity measurement range. Setting of time delays for each of the four alarm thresholds shall also be programmable. Relay outputs shall be provided for remote indication of alarm conditions.
G.
Resistance to unwanted alarms while still achieving maximum sensitivity is of paramount importance. The system shall incorporate advanced statistically based signal processing techniques proven to reduce unwanted alarms. The system(s) shall utilize a system of perpetually updating Perceptive Artificial Intelligence to ensure a consistent level of protection by continually varying its operating parameters to match environmental changes within the protected area. Aspirating smoke detection systems using a method of fixed sensitivity, where settings are manually or automatically set then remain fixed until manually altered, are not acceptable.
H.
The detector shall incorporate a dual technology system for the automatic discrimination of signals from non-fire related sources such as dust. The system shall automatically compensate for changes in environmental conditions and the negative effect of filter contamination.
I.
The detector shall supervise filter contamination, detection chamber operation, microprocessor malfunction, network condition, and airflow in sampling pipes outside normal limits.
Configurable relay output shall be provided for remote indication of fault conditions.
J.
The system shall provide for automatic detector chamber sensitivity adjustments to compensate for the negative effect of filter contamination/ageing. The system shall also be capable of monitoring filter usage, and allow programming of maintenance interval reminders.
K.
An airflow sensor shall be provided in each pipe inlet for supervising an increase or decrease in flow rate through the air sampling pipe network. The system(s) shall be capable of having programmable fault thresholds, per pipe inlet, to accommodate normal fluctuation present in the protected area.
L.
System programming shall be by an integral or remotely located programmer/network controller, or by PC via RS232. Both RS232 and RS485 shall be integral to each detector. No additional equipment shall be required for direct interface of an individual detector to a PC.
M.
All system devices shall be capable of communicating with each other via an RS485 network.
The digital communication port of each device shall comply with EIA RS485 Protocol. The
RS485 network shall be able to support up to 127 detectors of any type per loop. Remote displays, programmers, and network relay modules residing on the network shall not take up an available network address. There shall be no additional hardware required for making a device
28 31 46 - 4
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 network compatible. Remote displays, programmers, and network relay modules residing on the network shall not take up an available network address.
N.
The RS485 network shall be capable of being configured in a fault tolerant loop for both short circuit and open circuit. Any communication faults shall be reported unambiguously and shall be clearly attributable to an individual device or wire link in the fault messages.
O.
PC based configuration tools shall be available to configure and manage the entire network of devices.
P.
Detector(s) shall be approved, listed, and labeled in accordance with UL 268 and UL 268A.
Q.
Detector(s) shall be capable of being efficiently installed, tested, and maintained in accordance with NFPA 72, 90A, and 92A.
R.
When applied in duct applications, the detectors shall provide early detection of smoke and products of combustion present in air moving through HVAC duct supply, return, or both.
S.
Prevent recirculation or spread of smoke in areas by air handling system’s fans and blowers.
T.
Complete HVAC-related systems may be shut down in event of smoke detection.
U.
Other related building automation and life safety systems shall be activated as required in event of smoke detection.
V.
Aspirating Smoke Detector: The Aspirating Smoke Detector installed at locations shown in the bid documents shall be the AIR-Intelligence ASD-640. The detector shall have the following features:
1.
The ASD-640 shall be optimized for applications up to 20,000 sq. feet area.
2.
The ASD-640 shall support four pipe inlets.
3.
The ASD-640 shall be suitable for up to 100 sample ports.
4.
The ASD-640 shall be capable of supporting at least 640 feet of sampling pipe with 100 sampling ports and up to 820 feet with 80 sampling ports.
5.
The ASD-640 shall feature built-in RS232 and RS485 ports.
6.
The ASD-640 shall feature ClassiFire
™
Perceptive Artificial Intelligence.
7.
The ASD-640 shall feature Dual Technology LDD 3D
3™
Laser Dust Discrimination and elimination system making the product suitable for a wide range of environments, including extremely dusty or dirty environments
8.
The ASD-640 shall provide four alarm levels and sensitivity range extending from high to low sensitivity (0.00046 to 7.62% obscuration / foot), that is field selectable depending upon the application environment.
9.
The ASD-640 shall be provided an integral Command module to enable global network capability and & advanced system communications.
10.
The ASD-640 shall be provided an integral graphic LED network display and network programmer with large matrix LCD screen.
11.
Up to 127 ASD detectors shall be networkable to the Command Module.
12.
The ASD-640 shall be provided a rugged sheet steel enclosure.
13.
Irrespective of the method used, programming shall support the following features at a minimum: a.
Programming of individual AIR-Intelligence detectors. b.
Initiating ClassiFire “Perceptive Artificial Intelligence” viewing window. c.
Viewing of the status of AIR-Intelligence detectors.
28 31 46 - 5
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 d.
Facilities for referencing. e.
Testing of relays assigned to a specific zone to aid commissioning. f.
Adjustment of any adjustable parameter. g.
Event log viewing/printing.
W.
Sampling Pipe:
1.
Sampling pipe network design shall be validated using PipeCAD™ aspirating system modeling program.
2.
A variety of pipe material can be used provided it meets manufacturer’s guidelines, local building code requirements and application environmental considerations such as temperature and/or chemical exposure.
3.
Remote sampling ports, where required, are constructed using flexible FPE rated tubing connecting the remote sampling port assembly to the main sampling pipe network.
Follow manufacturer’s guidelines when using remote sampling ports.
X.
Power Supply:
1.
The system shall be powered from a UL864 listed regulated power supply of nominal
24V DC. Provide Edwards BPS series or equal.
2.
The power supply unit shall be suitable for 120 VAC input.
3.
The power supply shall be provided with battery backup that transfers automatically from
AC to battery in the event main AC power is interrupted
4.
The battery backup shall be calculated to be based on 24 hours standby duty followed by
15 minutes in an alarm condition.
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A.
Remote Display Unit(s).
1.
Those Aspirating Smoke Detectors installed at locations marked in the bid documents shall be provided Remote Display Units (RDU) for remote annunciation of the status of the detector. RDUs shall have the following features: a.
RDUs shall be suitable for being installed anywhere along the RS485 network and associated with any detector on the network. b.
RDUs shall be provided a 20 segment bar-graph display. c.
RDUs shall be provided four independent high intensity alarm indicators:
Auxiliary, Pre-Alarm, Fire 1 and Fire 2, corresponding to the four alarm settings of the detector. d.
RDUs shall be provided a Common fault indicator. e.
RDUs shall be provided an OK indicator. f.
RDUs where specified shall be provided a remote relay board. g.
RDUs shall be suitable for either 19” card frame mounting or shall be housed in single wall mounted enclosure.
B.
Command Module Network Controller.
1.
The network of detectors shall be provided with a stand-alone Command Module for single point control and centralized programming. The Command Module shall be provided the following features: a.
The Command Module shall be housed in a rugged metal enclosure b.
The Command Module shall be suitable to network up to 127 ASD detectors. c.
The Command Module shall be equipped with a bargraph LED display and large matrix LCD programmer
28 31 46 - 6
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195 d.
The Command Module shall provide connection to SenseNET
™
, computer based system management alarm/graphics package. e.
The Command Module shall be equipped with RS485, RS232, and BACnet communication protocols f.
The Command Module shall be equipped with on-board relays so as to act as a single point of interface to other systems
C.
SenseNET Management Software
1.
The network of detectors shall be provided AIR-Intelligence SenseNET Management
Software package for graphical network management. SenseNET shall have the following features: a.
SenseNET shall be a PC Windows based graphic system providing an intuitive user interface with advanced communications and diagnostic tools enabling management of up to 16 network loops, each of up to 127 AIR-Intelligence detectors. b.
The package shall include but not be limited to RS485 to RS232 High Level
Interface, link cables and SenseNET PC software.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install aspirating smoke detectors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and NFPA 72.
The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner, in accordance with approved manufacturer’s wiring diagram. The contractor shall furnish all conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, pipe tubing, connectors and similar devices necessary for the complete installation.
B.
Install aspirating smoke detectors, power supplies and all associated accessories at locations indicated on the Drawings.
C.
Determine locations to install aspirating smoke detectors, power supplies and all associated accessories. Confirm selected location with Architect/Engineer.
D.
The sampling pipe network shall be installed and identified in accordance with NFPA 72, local building code requirements and the manufacturer’s guidelines.
E.
Sampling pipe shall be marked “Smoke Detector Sampling Tube - Do Not Disturb”. All sampling holes shall be identified with an adhesive label.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Visual Inspection:
1.
Visually check all pipes to ensure that all joints, fittings, bends, sampling points, etc., comply with this Specification and the manufacturer’s guidelines.
2.
Inspect wiring interconnection to ensure each component is correctly wired in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
3.
Check system configuration settings to ensure all features are programmed in accordance with this Specification.
28 31 46 - 7
FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
MUSEUM STORAGE PROJECT FIT Project C1195
B.
Operational Testing: Perform operational testing of aspirating smoke detectors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to determine correct operation of system.
1.
Normal (standby) state.
2.
Trouble (supervisory) state.
3.
Alarm state.
C.
Functional Testing: Perform functional testing of aspirating smoke detectors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions after operational testing is completed to determine correct alarm operation of detectors.
1.
The installed system shall be proven capable of satisfactorily responding to an appropriate system performance test. Appropriate performance tests may be selected from those detailed in the following documents. a.
NFPA 72
2.
In areas where smoke/performance verification is inadvisable due to contamination, the system shall be able to simulate an alarm condition to the host fire Alarm System.
D.
Using the manufacturer’s standard form, prepare and submit a completed commissioning report.
3.03
TESTS
A.
The fire alarm system vendor shall test the system in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and NFPA 72 as amended by the Building Code. The vendor shall provide completed reports to the Consulting Engineer for review and approval prior to final acceptance.
B.
Each individual system operation on a tube by tube basis shall be tested for its complete operation. The procedure for testing the entire system shall be set forth with the consent of the code enforcement official, the Engineer and the manufacturer.
3.04
DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING
A.
The contractor shall compile and provide to the owners three (3) complete manual on the completed system to include SITE SPECIFIC operating and maintenance instruction, catalog cuts of all equipment and components, as-built wiring diagrams and a manufacturer’s suggested spare parts list.
B.
In addition to the above manuals, the Electrical Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer’s trained representative for two (2) separate calendar days for a period of four (4) hours per day to instruct the owners’ designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the entire system.
END OF SECTION 28 31 46
28 31 46 - 8
